WMS User Guide WMS_User_Guide
User Manual: WMS_User_Guide user guide pdf - FTP File Search (14/20)
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 670 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- Contents
- Preface
- 1 Warehouse Management System Overview
- Part I Warehouse Management System Tasks
- 2 Accessing Multiple Nodes
- 3 Performing Inbound Tasks
- 3.1 Creating a Purchase Order
- 3.2 Creating an Advance Ship Notice
- 3.3 Searching for Inbound Order Shipments
- 3.4 Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications
- 3.5 Creating a Load
- 3.6 Printing Documents or Labels
- 3.7 Receiving Inventory
- 3.8 Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps
- 3.9 Closing a Receipt
- 3.10 Adjusting Receipts
- 3.11 Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment
- 4 Managing Inventory
- 4.1 Searching for Inventory
- 4.2 Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail
- 4.3 Managing Count
- 4.4 Putting an Item or Item Category on Count
- 4.5 Managing Count Requests
- 4.6 Invoking Count Service
- 4.7 Managing Count Tasks
- 4.8 Putting Tasks on Hold
- 4.9 Reporting Count Task Completion
- 4.10 Creating Move Requests
- 4.11 Adjusting Inventory
- 4.12 Changing Inventory Attributes
- 4.13 Cleaning Out Accounting Bin
- 4.14 Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels
- 5 Performing Value-Added Services
- 6 Performing Outbound Tasks
- 6.1 Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks
- 6.2 Outbound Execution
- 6.2.1 Pick Planning
- 6.2.2 Picking
- 6.2.3 Packing and Unpacking Containers
- 6.2.3.1 Navigating to the Pack Details Screen
- 6.2.3.2 Packing System-Suggested Containers
- 6.2.3.3 Packing User-Defined Containers
- 6.2.3.4 Packing a Container with Unknown Contents
- 6.2.3.5 Packing Single Item Shipments
- 6.2.3.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
- 6.2.3.7 Adding Items into a Container
- 6.2.3.8 Removing Items from a Container
- 6.2.3.9 Adding Inner Packs for an Item
- 6.2.3.10 Removing Inner Packs for an Item
- 6.2.3.11 Packing Containers for a Shipment
- 6.2.3.12 Unpacking Containers for a Shipment
- 6.3 Managing Manifests
- 6.4 Recording Container’s Weight
- 6.5 Scheduling Dock Appointments
- 6.6 Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
- 7 Managing Tasks
- Part II Warehouse Management System Screen Reference
- 8 Inbound Shipment Console Screens
- 8.1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
- 8.2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
- 8.3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
- 8.4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
- 8.5 Inbound Order Shipment List
- 8.6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
- 8.7 Modify Address
- 8.8 Charges
- 8.9 Shipment Line Details
- 8.10 Loads
- 8.11 Ship Node Detail
- 8.12 Organization Details
- 8.13 Organization Primary Contact Address Details
- 8.14 Organization Corporate Address Details
- 8.15 Containers
- 8.16 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions
- 8.17 Shipment Status Audits
- 8.18 Shipment Audits
- 8.19 Shipment Dates
- 8.20 Shipment Alerts
- 8.21 Additional Attributes
- 8.22 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy
- 8.23 Manage Receiving Discrepancies
- 8.24 Receipts
- 8.25 Receipt Summary
- 8.26 Receipt Details
- 8.27 Receipt Line Details
- 8.28 Receipt Instructions
- 8.29 Receipt Status Audits
- 8.30 Receipt Container
- 8.31 Activity Demand
- 8.32 Record Container Details
- 8.33 Start Receipt
- 8.34 Receive
- 8.35 Print
- 8.36 Create Picklist
- 8.37 Create Alerts
- 8.38 Receive (Report or Record Receipt)
- 8.39 Add Delivery Plan
- 8.40 Inbound Order Container Search By All Attributes
- 8.41 Inbound Order Container List
- 8.42 Container Details
- 8.43 Container Serial Details
- 8.44 Container Status Audits
- 8.45 Pack or Unpack
- 8.46 Delete Container
- 8.47 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
- 8.48 Dock Schedule Details
- 8.49 Dock Appointment
- 8.50 Dock Group Details
- 8.51 View Holds
- 8.52 Add Holds
- 8.53 View History
- 9 Receipt Console Screens
- 9.1 Receipt Search By Receipt
- 9.2 Receipt Search By Item
- 9.3 Receipt Search By Container
- 9.4 Receipt List
- 9.5 Return Order Receipt Summary
- 9.6 Receipt Line Details
- 9.7 Order Receipt Container
- 9.8 Receipt Line Details (Container)
- 9.9 Receipt Instructions
- 9.10 Receipt Status Audits
- 9.11 Receipt Details
- 9.12 Receive
- 10 Create Inbound Shipment Screens
- 11 Receive Console Screens
- 12 Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens
- 13 Inspect Return Receipts Screens
- 14 Create Move Request Screens
- 15 Create Count Request Screens
- 16 Count Console Screens
- 16.1 Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes
- 16.2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria
- 16.3 Count Request Search By Location Range
- 16.4 Count Request List
- 16.5 Count Request Details
- 16.6 Count Result List
- 16.7 Acceptance Variance Reason
- 16.8 Create Count Request
- 16.9 Cancellation Reason
- 16.10 Record Count Result Details
- 16.11 Count Result Search By Variance
- 16.12 Count Result Details
- 16.13 Invoke Count Service
- 17 Create Physical Count Screens
- 18 Physical Count Console Screens
- 19 Move Request Console Screens
- 19.1 Move Request Search By Item
- 19.2 Move Request Search By Location
- 19.3 Move Request Search By Date
- 19.4 Move Request Search By References
- 19.5 Move Request Search By Tag Attributes
- 19.6 Move Request List
- 19.7 Move Request Details
- 19.8 Move Request Alerts
- 19.9 Status Audit Details
- 19.10 Cancellation Reason
- 19.11 Move Request Line Details
- 19.12 Move Request Line Activity Demand
- 19.13 Activity Demand
- 20 Location Inventory Console Screens
- 20.1 Location Inventory Search By Item
- 20.2 Location Inventory Search By Container
- 20.3 Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes
- 20.4 Location Inventory Search By Segment
- 20.5 Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
- 20.6 Location Inventory
- 20.7 Location Inventory Details
- 20.8 Location Inventory Serial Details
- 20.9 Location Details
- 20.10 Location SKU Dedications
- 20.11 Item Details
- 20.12 Location Inventory Tag Details
- 20.13 Change Location Inventory Attributes (Criteria)
- 20.14 Change Location Inventory Attributes
- 20.15 Node Level Inventory
- 20.16 Container Details
- 20.17 Container Serial Details
- 20.18 Create Count Request
- 20.19 Create Move Request
- 20.20 Break License Plate Number
- 21 Adjust Location Inventory Screens
- 22 Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens
- 23 Transfer Inventory Ownership
- 24 Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens
- 25 Receipt Adjustment Screens
- 26 Create Work Order Screens
- 27 Work Order Console Screens
- 27.1 Work Order Search By Item
- 27.2 Work Order Search By Container
- 27.3 Work Order Search By Date
- 27.4 Work Order Search By Activity
- 27.5 Work Order Search By Components
- 27.6 Work Order List
- 27.7 Work Order Details
- 27.8 Work Order Status Audits
- 27.9 Work Order Activity Demand
- 27.10 Work Order Holds
- 27.11 Add Holds
- 27.12 View History
- 27.13 Cancellation Reason
- 27.14 Work Order Details for Provided Service Items
- 27.15 Appointment Details
- 28 Value-Added Services Station Screens
- 29 Outbound Shipment Console Screens
- 29.1 Outbound Shipment Search By Status
- 29.2 Outbound Shipment Search By Date
- 29.3 Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier
- 29.4 Outbound Shipment Search By Item
- 29.5 Outbound Shipment Search By Wave
- 29.6 Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling
- 29.7 Shipment List
- 29.8 Shipment Details
- 29.9 Special Services List
- 29.10 Modify Shipment
- 29.11 Address Details
- 29.12 Charges
- 29.13 Shipment Loads
- 29.14 Shipment Containers
- 29.15 Shipment Instructions
- 29.16 Shipment Status Audits
- 29.17 Shipment Dates
- 29.18 Alerts
- 29.19 Additional Attributes
- 29.20 Shipment Activity Demand
- 29.21 Shipment Audits
- 29.22 Logical Kits
- 29.23 Pack Containers
- 29.24 Packing a Container
- 29.25 Print
- 29.26 Cancel Selected Shipments
- 29.27 Split Shipment
- 29.28 Split Shipment Lines
- 29.29 Create Alerts
- 29.30 Ship Node Detail
- 29.31 Organization Details
- 29.32 Select Delivery Plan
- 29.33 Shipment Line Details
- 29.34 Add Release
- 29.35 Create Wave
- 29.36 Containers
- 29.37 Container Search By All Attributes
- 29.38 Container Search By Status
- 29.39 Container List
- 29.40 Container Details
- 29.41 Serial Details
- 29.42 Container Status Audits
- 29.43 Container Activity List
- 29.44 Pack or Unpack
- 29.45 Delete Selected Containers
- 29.46 Modify Containerization
- 29.47 Resolve Short Picked Containers
- 29.48 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
- 29.49 Dock Schedule Details
- 29.50 Dock Appointment
- 29.51 Dock Group Details
- 29.52 View Holds
- 29.53 Add Holds
- 29.54 View History
- 30 Create Outbound Shipment Screens
- 31 Wave Console Screens
- 32 Create Wave Screens
- 33 Pack Station Screens
- 34 Manifest Console Screens
- 35 Create Load Screens
- 36 Load Console Screens
- 37 Add To Manifest Screens
- 38 Remove From Manifest Screens
- 39 Weigh Station Screens
- 40 Location Inventory Audit Console Screens
- 40.1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item
- 40.2 Location Inventory Audit Search By Container
- 40.3 Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References
- 40.4 Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes
- 40.5 Performing a Location Inventory Audit Search By Count Reference
- 40.6 Location Inventory Audit List
- 40.7 Location Inventory Audit Details
- 40.8 Location Inventory Audit Details
- 41 Task Console Screens
- 41.1 Task Search By Task Type
- 41.2 Task Summary
- 41.3 Task Summary By Zone
- 41.4 Open Task Summary
- 41.5 User List
- 41.6 Task Search By Zone
- 41.7 Task Search By Inventory
- 41.8 Task Search By Reference
- 41.9 Task Search By Exception
- 41.10 Task Search By Date
- 41.11 Task Search By At Risk Tasks
- 41.12 Task List
- 41.13 Task Detail
- 41.14 Complete Task
- 41.15 Modification Reason
- 41.16 Summary Task Detail
- 41.17 Task Status Details
- 41.18 Task Status Audits
- 41.19 Assign to User
- 41.20 User Search By All Attributes
- 41.21 User List (selection)
- 41.22 Reprioritize
- 41.23 Hold Reason
- 41.24 Cancel Task Reason
- 41.25 User Detail
- 41.26 Batch Search By All Attributes
- 41.27 Batch List
- 41.28 Batch Detail
- 41.29 Complete Batch
- 41.30 Print Batch
- 42 Confirm Batch Screens
- 43 Record Count Screens
- 44 Log Productivity Screens
- 45 Productivity Console Screens
- 46 Derive Labor Standards Screens
- 47 User Time Sheet Screens
- 48 Resource Planning Screens
- A Sterling WMS Prints
- B Understanding the Execution Console Framework
- Index
![](asset-1.png)
Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User
Guide
Release 8.5
October 2009
![](asset-2.png)
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 1999 - 2009
Sterling Commerce, Inc.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
STERLING COMMERCE SOFTWARE
***TRADE SECRET NOTICE***
THE STERLING COMMERCE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED BY THIS DOCUMENTATION ("STERLING COMMERCE
SOFTWARE") IS THE CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET PROPERTY OF STERLING COMMERCE, INC., ITS
AFFILIATED COMPANIES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS, AND IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF A
LICENSE AGREEMENT. NO DUPLICATION OR DISCLOSURE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS.
This documentation, the Sterling Commerce Software it describes, and the information and know-how
they contain constitute the proprietary, confidential and valuable trade secret information of Sterling
Commerce, Inc., its affiliated companies or its or their licensors, and may not be used for any
unauthorized purpose, or disclosed to others without the prior written permission of the applicable
Sterling Commerce entity. This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software that it describes
have been provided pursuant to a license agreement that contains prohibitions against and/or
restrictions on their copying, modification and use. Duplication, in whole or in part, if and when
permitted, shall bear this notice and the Sterling Commerce, Inc. copyright notice. Commerce, Inc.
copyright notice.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software it
describes are "commercial items" as defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101. As and when provided to any agency or
instrumentality of the U.S. Government or to a U.S. Government prime contractor or a subcontractor at
any tier ("Government Licensee"), the terms and conditions of the customary Sterling Commerce
commercial license agreement are imposed on Government Licensees per 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or §
227.7202 through § 227.7202-4, as applicable, or through 48 C.F.R. § 52.244-6.
This Trade Secret Notice, including the terms of use herein is governed by the laws of the State of Ohio,
USA, without regard to its conflict of laws provisions. If you are accessing the Sterling Commerce
Software under an executed agreement, then nothing in these terms and conditions supersedes or
modifies the executed agreement.
Sterling Commerce, Inc.
4600 Lakehurst Court
Dublin, Ohio 43016-2000
Copyright © 1999 - 2009
Third-Party Software
Portions of the Sterling Commerce Software may include products, or may be distributed on the same
storage media with products, ("Third Party Software") offered by third parties ("Third Party Licensors").
Sterling Commerce Software may include Third Party Software covered by the following copyrights:
Copyright © 2006-2008 Andres Almiray. Copyright © 1999-2005 The Apache Software Foundation.
Copyright (c) 2008 Azer Koçulu http://azer.kodfabrik.com. Copyright © Einar Lielmanis,
einars@gmail.com. Copyright (c) 2006 John Reilly (www.inconspicuous.org) and Copyright (c) 2002
Douglas Crockford (www.crockford.com). Copyright (c) 2009 John Resig, http://jquery.com/. Copyright
© 2006-2008 Json-lib. Copyright © 2001 LOOX Software, Inc. Copyright © 2003-2008 Luck Consulting
Pty. Ltd. Copyright 2002-2004 © MetaStuff, Ltd. Copyright © 2009 Michael Mathews
micmath@gmail.com. Copyright © 1999-2005 Northwoods Software Corporation. Copyright (C)
Microsoft Corp. 1981-1998. Purple Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004-2008 QOS.ch. Copyright © 2005
Sabre Airline Solutions. Copyright © 2004 SoftComplex, Inc. Copyright © 2000-2007 Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Copyright © 2001 VisualSoft Technologies Limited. Copyright © 2001 Zero G
Software, Inc. All rights reserved by all listed parties.
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed on the same storage media as certain Third Party
Software covered by the following copyrights: Copyright © 1999-2006 The Apache Software Foundation.
Copyright (c) 2001-2003 Ant-Contrib project. Copyright © 1998-2007 Bela Ban. Copyright © 2005
Eclipse Foundation. Copyright © 2002-2006 Julian Hyde and others. Copyright © 1997 ICE Engineering,
Inc./Timothy Gerard Endres. Copyright 2000, 2006 IBM Corporation and others. Copyright © 1987-2006
ILOG, Inc. Copyright © 2000-2006 Infragistics. Copyright © 2002-2005 JBoss, Inc. Copyright
LuMriX.net GmbH, Switzerland. Copyright © 1998-2009 Mozilla.org. Copyright © 2003-2009 Mozdev
Group, Inc. Copyright © 1999-2002 JBoss.org. Copyright Raghu K, 2003. Copyright © 2004 David
Schweinsberg. Copyright © 2005-2006 Darren L. Spurgeon. Copyright © S.E. Morris (FISH) 2003-04.
Copyright © 2006 VisualSoft Technologies. Copyright © 2002-2009 Zipwise Software. All rights reserved
by all listed parties.
Certain components of the Sterling Commerce Software are distributed on the same storage media as
Third Party Software which are not listed above. Additional information for such Third Party Software
components of the Sterling Commerce Software is located at:
installdir/mesa/studio/plugins/SCI_Studio_License.txt.
Third Party Software which is included, or are distributed on the same storage media with, the Sterling
Commerce Software where use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States government or a
government contractor or subcontractor, are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Title 48 CFR
2.101, 12.212, 52.227-19, 227.7201 through 227.7202-4, DFAR 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and (2), DFAR
252.227-7015(b)(6/95), DFAR 227.7202-3(a), FAR 52.227-14(g)(2)(6/87), and FAR 52.227-19(c)(2)
and (6/87) as applicable.
Additional information regarding certain Third Party Software is located at installdir/SCI_License.txt.
Some Third Party Licensors also provide license information and/or source code for their software via
their respective links set forth below:
http://danadler.com/jacob/
http://www.dom4j.org
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org).
This product includes software developed by the Ant-Contrib project
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/ant-contrib). This product includes software developed by the JDOM
Project (http://www.jdom.org/). This product includes code licensed from RSA Data Security (via Sun
Microsystems, Inc.). Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun Logo, Java, JDK, the Java Coffee Cup logo,
JavaBeans , JDBC, JMX and all JMX based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Sun Microsystems, Inc. All other trademarks and logos are trademarks of their respective owners.
THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the following
software products (or components thereof) and java source code files: Xalan version 2.5.2,
Cookie.java, Header.java, HeaderElement.java, HttpException.java, HttpState.java, NameValuePair.java,
CronTimeTrigger.java, DefaultTimeScheduler.java, PeriodicTimeTrigger.java, Target.java,
TimeScheduledEntry.java, TimeScheduler.java, TimeTrigger.java, Trigger.java, BinaryHeap.java,
PriorityQueue.java, SynchronizedPriorityQueue.java, GetOpt.java, GetOptsException.java,
IllegalArgumentException.java, MissingOptArgException.java (collectively, "Apache 1.1 Software").
Apache 1.1 Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the following license:
License Version 1.1
Copyright 1999-2003 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgement: "This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org)." Alternatively, this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself, if and
whenever such third-party acknowledgements normally appear.
4. The names "Commons", "Jakarta", "The Jakarta Project", "HttpClient", "log4j", "Xerces "Xalan",
"Avalon", "Apache Avalon", "Avalon Cornerstone", "Avalon Framework", "Apache" and "Apache Software
Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. For written permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their
name, without the prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMIPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTIBILITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache
Software Foundation. The GetOpt.java, GetOptsException.java, IlligalArgumentException.java and
MissingOptArgException.java software was originally based on software copyright (c) 2001, Sun
Microsystems., http://www.sun.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please
see <http://www.apache.org/>.
The preceding license only applies to the Apache 1.1 Software and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software or to any other Third-Party Software.
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the following
software products (or components thereof): Ant, Antinstaller, Apache File Upload Package, Apache
Commons Beans, Apache Commons BetWixt, Apache Commons Collection, Apache Commons Digester,
Apache Commons IO, Apache Commons Lang., Apache Commons Logging, Apache Commons Net,
Apache Jakarta Commons Pool, Apache Jakarta ORO, Lucene, Xerces version 2.7, Apache Log4J,
Apache SOAP, Apache Struts and Apache Xalan 2.7.0, (collectively, "Apache 2.0 Software"). Apache
2.0 Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A
copy of License Version 2.0 is found in the following directory files for the individual pieces of the Apache
2.0 Software: installdir/jar/commons_upload/1_0/ CommonsFileUpload_License.txt,
installdir/jar/jetspeed/1_4/RegExp_License.txt,
installdir/ant/Ant_License.txt
<install>/jar/antInstaller/0_8/antinstaller_License.txt,
<install>/jar/commons_beanutils/1_7_0/commons-beanutils.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/commons_betwixt/0_8/commons-betwixt-0.8.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/commons_collections/3_2/LICENSE.txt,
<install>/jar/commons_digester/1_8/commons-digester-1.8.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/commons_io/1_4/LICENSE.txt,
<install>/jar/commons_lang/2_1/Commons_Lang_License.txt,
<install>/jar/commons_logging/1_0_4/commons-logging-1.0.4.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/commons_net/1_4_1/commons-net-1.4.1.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/smcfs/8.5/lucene-core-2.4.0.jar (/META-INF/LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/struts/2_0_11/struts2-core-2.0.11.jar (./LICENSE.txt),
<install>/jar/mesa/gisdav/WEB-INF/lib/Slide_License.txt,
<install>/mesa/studio/plugins/xerces_2.7_license.txt,
<install>/jar/commons_pool/1_2/Commons_License.txt,
<install>/jar/jakarta_oro/2_0_8/JakartaOro_License.txt,
<install>/jar/log4j/1_2_15/LOG4J_License.txt,
<install>/jar/xalan/2_7/Xalan_License.txt,
<install>/jar/soap/2_3_1/Apache_SOAP_License.txt
Unless otherwise stated in a specific directory, the Apache 2.0 Software was not modified. Neither the
Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any, to Apache 2.0 Software, nor other Third Party Code is
a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to
the Apache 2.0 Software which is the subject of the specific directory file and does not apply to the
Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party Software. License Version 2.0 includes the
following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."
NOTICE file corresponding to the section 4 d of the Apache License, Version 2.0, in this case for the
Apache Ant distribution. Apache Ant Copyright 1999-2008 The Apache Software Foundation. This
product includes software developed by The Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
This product includes also software developed by :
- the W3C consortium (http://www.w3c.org) ,
- the SAX project (http://www.saxproject.org)
The <sync> task is based on code Copyright (c) 2002, Landmark Graphics Corp that has been kindly
donated to the Apache Software Foundation.
Portions of this software were originally based on the following:
- software copyright (c) 1999, IBM Corporation., http://www.ibm.com.
- software copyright (c) 1999, Sun Microsystems., http://www.sun.com.
- voluntary contributions made by Paul Eng on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation that were
originally developed at iClick, Inc., software copyright (c) 1999.
NOTICE file corresponding to the section 4 d of the Apache License, Version 2.0, in this case for the
Apache Lucene distribution. Apache Lucene Copyright 2006 The Apache Software Foundation. This
product includes software developed by The Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
The snowball stemmers in contrib/snowball/src/java/net/sf/snowball were developed by Martin Porter
and Richard Boulton. The full snowball package is available from http://snowball.tartarus.org/
Ant-Contrib Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Anti-Contrib
software (Copyright (c) 2001-2003 Ant-Contrib project. All rights reserved.) (the "Ant-Contrib
Software"). The Ant-Contrib Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the
following license:
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
Copyright (c) 2001-2003 Ant-Contrib project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software developed by the Ant-Contrib project
(http://sourceforge.net/projects/ant-contrib)."
Alternately, this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgements normally appear.
4. The name Ant-Contrib must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
ant-contrib-developers@lists.sourceforge.net.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Ant-Contrib" nor may "Ant-Contrib" appear in
their names without prior written permission of the Ant-Contrib project.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ANT-CONTRIB PROJECT OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The preceding license only applies to the
Ant-Contrib Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third-Party
Software.
The preceding license only applies to the Ant-Contrib Software and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software or to any other Third Party Software.
DOM4J Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Dom4h
Software which is free software distributed under the terms of the following license:
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain copyright statements and notices. Redistributions must also
contain a copy of this document.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name "DOM4J" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software
without prior written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. For written permission, please contact
dom4j-info@metastuff.com.
4. Products derived from this Software may not be called "DOM4J" nor may "DOM4J" appear in their
names without prior written permission of MetaStuff, Ltd. DOM4J is a registered trademark of MetaStuff,
Ltd.
5. Due credit should be given to the DOM4J Project - http://www.dom4j.org
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY METASTUFF, LTD. AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL METASTUFF, LTD. OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2001-2004 (C) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
The preceding license only applies to the Dom4j Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce
Software, or any other Third-Party Software.
THE ECLIPSE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the following
software:
com.ibm.icu.nl1_3.4.4.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ant.core.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ant.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.compare.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.boot.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.commands.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.contenttype.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.expressions.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filebuffers.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filesystem.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.jobs.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.resources.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.compatibility.auth.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.compatibility.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.core.variables.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.debug.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.debug.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.common.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.preferences.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.registry.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.help.appserver.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.help.base.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.help.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.help.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.jdt.apt.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.apt.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.core.manipulation.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.debug.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.doc.isv.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.doc.user.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.junit4.runtime.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.launching.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.jdt.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jdt.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jface.databinding.nl1_1.0.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.jface.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.jface.text.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ltk.core.refactoring.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ltk.ui.refactoring.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.osgi.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.osgi.services.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.osgi.util.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.pde.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.doc.user.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.junit.runtime.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.pde.runtime.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.pde.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.platform.doc.isv.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.platform.doc.user.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.rcp.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.search.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.swt.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.team.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.ssh.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.ssh2.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.team.cvs.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.team.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.text.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ui.browser.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.cheatsheets.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.console.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.editors.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.externaltools.nl1_3.1.100.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.forms.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ui.ide.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.intro.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar, org.eclipse.ui.navigator.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.navigator.resources.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.presentations.r21.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.views.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.views.properties.tabbed.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench.texteditor.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.configurator.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.core.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.scheduler.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
org.eclipse.update.ui.nl1_3.2.0.v200606220026.jar,
com.ibm.icu_3.4.4.1.jar,
org.eclipse.core.commands_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.core.contenttype_3.2.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.core.expressions_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filesystem.linux.x86_1.0.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.core.filesystem_1.0.0.v20060603.jar, org.eclipse.core.jobs_3.2.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime.compatibility.auth_3.2.0.v20060601.jar,
org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar, org.eclipse.equinox.common_3.2.0.v20060603.jar,
org.eclipse.equinox.preferences_3.2.0.v20060601.jar, org.eclipse.equinox.registry_3.2.0.v20060601.jar,
org.eclipse.help_3.2.0.v20060602.jar, org.eclipse.jface.text_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.jface_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar, org.eclipse.osgi_3.2.0.v20060601.jar,
org.eclipse.swt.gtk.linux.x86_3.2.0.v3232m.jar, org.eclipse.swt_3.2.0.v3232o.jar,
org.eclipse.text_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench.texteditor_3.2.0.v20060605-1400.jar,
org.eclipse.ui.workbench_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar, org.eclipse.ui_3.2.0.I20060605-1400.jar,
runtime_registry_compatibility.jar, eclipse.exe, eclipse.ini, and startup.jar
(collectively, "Eclipse Software").
All Eclipse Software is distributed under the terms and conditions of the Eclipse Foundation Software
User Agreement (EFSUA) and/or terms and conditions of the Eclipse Public License Version 1.0 (EPL) or
other license agreements, notices or terms and conditions referenced for the individual pieces of the
Eclipse Software, including without limitation "Abouts", "Feature Licenses", and "Feature Update
Licenses" as defined in the EFSUA .
A copy of the Eclipse Foundation Software User Agreement is found at
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/notice.html,
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/plugins/notice.html,
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux_x86/eclipse/notice.html, and
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux_x86/eclipse/plugins/notice.html.
A copy of the EPL is found at
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.htm,
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/epl-v10.htm,
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux.x86/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.html, and
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux.x86/eclipse/epl-v10.html.
The reference to the license agreements, notices or terms and conditions governing each individual piece
of the Eclipse Software is found in the directory files for the individual pieces of the Eclipse Software as
described in the file identified as installdir/SCI_License.txt.
These licenses only apply to the Eclipse Software and do not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software,
or any other Third Party Software.
The Language Pack (NL Pack) piece of the Eclipse Software, is distributed in object code form. Source
code is available at
http://archive.eclipse.org/eclipse/downloads/drops/L-3.2_Language_Packs-200607121700/index.php.
In the event the source code is no longer available from the website referenced above, contact Sterling
Commerce at 978-513-6000 and ask for the Release Manager. A copy of this license is located at
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/windows/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.htm and
<install_dir>/SI/repository/rcp/rcpdependencies/gtk.linux.x86/eclipse/plugins/epl-v10.html.
The org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar piece of the Eclipse Software was modified slightly in
order to remove classes containing encryption items. The org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar
was modified to remove the Cipher, CipherInputStream and CipherOutputStream classes and rebuild the
org.eclipse.core.runtime_3.2.0.v20060603.jar.
Ehcache Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the ehache
v.1.5 software (Copyright © 2003-2008 Luck Consulting Pty. Ltd.) ("Ehache Software"). Ehcache
Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy
of License Version 2.0 is found in <install>/jar/smcfs/8.5/ehcache-1.5.0.jar (./LICENSE.txt).
The Ehcache Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any,
to the Ehcache Software, nor other Third Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the Ehcache Software which is the subject of the
specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party
Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."
EZMorph Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the EZMorph
v. 1.0.4 software (Copyright © 2006-2008 Andres Almiray) ("EZMorph Software"). EZMorph Software is
free software which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy of License
Version 2.0 is found in <install>/jar/ezmorph/1_0_4/ezmorph-1.0.4.jar (./LICENSE.txt).
The EZMorph Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any,
to the EZMorph Software, nor other Third Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the EZMorph Software which is the subject of
the specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third
Party Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."
Firebug Lite Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Firebug Lite
Software which is free software distributed under the terms of the following license:
Copyright (c) 2008 Azer Koçulu http://azer.kodfabrik.com. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use of this software in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Azer Koçulu. nor the names of any other contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission of Parakey Inc.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
ICE SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed on the same storage media as the ICE Software
(Copyright © 1997 ICE Engineering, Inc./Timothy Gerard Endres.) ("ICE Software"). The ICE Software is
independent from and not linked or compiled with the Sterling Commerce Software. The ICE Software is
a free software product which can be distributed and/or modified under the terms of the GNU General
Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License or any later
version.
A copy of the GNU General Public License is provided at installdir/jar/jniregistry/1_2/ICE_License.txt.
This license only applies to the ICE Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software, or
any other Third Party Software.
The ICE Software was modified slightly in order to fix a problem discovered by Sterling Commerce
involving the RegistryKey class in the RegistryKey.java in the JNIRegistry.jar. The class was modified to
comment out the finalize () method and rebuild of the JNIRegistry.jar file.
Source code for the bug fix completed by Sterling Commerce on January 8, 2003 is located at:
installdir/jar/jniregistry/1_2/RegistryKey.java. Source code for all other components of the ICE Software
is located at http://www.trustice.com/java/jnireg/index.shtml.
The ICE Software is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
JBOSS SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed on the same storage media as the JBoss Software
(Copyright © 1999-2002 JBoss.org) ("JBoss Software"). The JBoss Software is independent from and
not linked or compiled with the Sterling Commerce Software. The JBoss Software is a free software
product which can be distributed and/or modified under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License or any later
version.
A copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License is provided at:
<install_dir>\jar\jboss\4_2_0\LICENSE.html
This license only applies to the JBoss Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software,
or any other Third Party Software.
The JBoss Software is not distributed by Sterling Commerce in its entirety. Rather, the distribution is
limited to the following jar files: el-api.jar, jasper-compiler-5.5.15.jar, jasper-el.jar, jasper.jar,
jboss-common-client.jar, jboss-j2ee.jar, jboss-jmx.jar, jboss-jsr77-client.jar, jbossmq-client.jar,
![](asset-b.png)
jnpserver.jar, jsp-api.jar, servlet-api.jar, tomcat-juli.jar.
The JBoss Software was modified slightly in order to allow the ClientSocketFactory to return a socket
connected to a particular host in order to control the host interfaces, regardless of whether the
ClientSocket Factory specified was custom or note. Changes were made to org.jnp..server.Main. Details
concerning this change can be found at
http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=detail&aid=1008902&group_id=22866&atid=376687.
Source code for the modifications completed by Sterling Commerce on August 13, 2004 is located at:
http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=detail&aid=1008902&group_id=22866&atid=376687. Source code
for all other components of the JBoss Software is located at http://www.jboss.org.
JGO SOFTWARE
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with, or on the same storage media, as certain
redistributable portions of the JGo Software provided by Northwoods Software Corporation under a
commercial license agreement (the "JGo Software"). The JGo Software is provided subject to the
disclaimers set forth above and the following notice:
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
The JGo Software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (C)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (C)(1)
and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Contractor / manufacturer of the JGo Software is Northwoods Software Corporation, 142 Main St.,
Nashua, NH 03060.
JSLib Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the JSLib software
product (Copyright (c) 2003-2009 Mozdev Group, Inc.) ("JSLib Software"). The JSLib Software is
distributed under the terms of the MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1. A copy of this license is
located at <install>\repository\eardata\platform_uifwk_ide\war\designer\MPL-1.1.txt. The JSLib
Software code is distributed in source form and is located at http://jslib.mozdev.org/installation.html.
Neither the Sterling Commerce Software nor any other Third-Party Code is a Modification or Contribution
subject to the Mozilla Public License. Pursuant to the terms of the Mozilla Public License, the following
notice applies only to the JSLib Software (and not to the Sterling Commerce Software or any other
Third-Party Software):
"The contents of the file located at http://www.mozdev.org/source/browse/jslib/ are subject to the
Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html.
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the License.
The Original Code is Mozdev Group, Inc. code. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Mozdev
Group, Inc. Portions created by_Mozdev Group, Inc. are Copyright © 2003 Mozdev Group, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. Original Author: Pete Collins <pete@mozdev.org>one Contributor(s):_____none
listed________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the ____ license (the "[___]
License"), in which case the provisions of [___] License are applicable instead of those above. If you
wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [___] License and not allow
others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions
above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not
delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the
[___] License."
The preceding license only applies to the JSLib Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce
Software, or any other Third-Party Software.
![](asset-c.png)
Json Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the Json 2.2.2
software (Copyright © 2006-2008 Json-lib) ("Json Software"). Json Software is free software which is
distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy of License Version 2.0 is found in
<install>/jar/jsonlib/2_2_2/json-lib-2.2.2-jdk13.jar.
This product includes software developed by Douglas Crockford (http://www.crockford.com).
The Json Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any, to
the Json Software, nor other Third Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the Json Software which is the subject of the
specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party
Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."
Purple Technology
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Purple
Technology Software (Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Purple Technology, Inc.) ("Purple Technology Software"),
which is subject to the following license:
Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Purple Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
PLAIN LANGUAGE LICENSE: Do whatever you like with this code, free of charge, just give credit where
credit is due. If you improve it, please send your improvements to alex@purpletech.com. Check
http://www.purpletech.com/code/ for the latest version and news.
LEGAL LANGUAGE LICENSE: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The names of the authors and the names "Purple Technology," "Purple Server" and "Purple Chat" must
not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact server@purpletech.com.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AND PURPLE TECHNOLOGY "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR PURPLE TECHNOLOGY BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The preceding license only applies to the Purple Technology Software and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software, or any other Third Party Software.
Rico Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the Rico.js
software (Copyright © 2005 Sabre Airline Solutions) ("Rico Software"). Rico Software is free software
![](asset-d.png)
which is distributed under the terms of the Apache License Version 2.0. A copy of License Version 2.0 is
found in <install>/repository/eardata/platform/war/ajax/scripts/Rico_License.txt.
The Rico Software was not modified. Neither the Sterling Commerce Software, modifications, if any, to
the Rico Software, nor other Third-Party Code is a Derivative Work or a Contribution as defined in
License Version 2.0. License Version 2.0 applies only to the Rico Software which is the subject of the
specific directory file and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third-Party
Software. License Version 2.0 includes the following provision:
"Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS
OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume
any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License."
Rhino Software
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media as the Rhino js.jar
(Copyright (c) 1998-2009 Mozilla.org.) ("Rhino Software"). A majority of the source code for the Rhino
Software is dual licensed under the terms of the MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1. or the GPL v.
2.0. Additionally, some files (at a minimum the contents of
toolsrc/org/Mozilla/javascript/toolsdebugger/treetable) are available under another license as set forth in
the directory file for the Rhino Software.
Sterling Commerce's use and distribution of the Rhino Software is under the Mozilla Public License. A
copy of this license is located at <install>/3rdParty/rico license.doc. The Rhino Software code is
distributed in source form and is located at http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozilla/source/js/rhino/src/. Neither
the Sterling Commerce Software nor any other Third-Party Code is a Modification or Contribution subject
to the Mozilla Public License. Pursuant to the terms of the Mozilla Public License, the following notice
applies only to the Rhino Software (and not to the Sterling Commerce Software or any other Third-Party
Software):
"The contents of the file located at <install>/jar/rhino/1_7R1/js.jar are subject to the Mozilla Public
License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You
may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/.
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the License.
The Original Code is Rhino code, released May 6, 1999. The Initial Developer is Netscape
Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright © 1997-1999. All
Rights Reserved. Contributor(s):_____none listed.
The preceding license only applies to the Rico Software and does not apply to the Sterling Commerce
Software, or any other Third-Party Software.
Sun Microsystems
The Sterling Commerce Software is distributed with or on the same storage media
as the following software products (or components thereof): Sun JMX, and Sun JavaMail (collectively,
"Sun Software"). Sun Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the licenses
issued by Sun which are included in the directory files located at:
SUN COMM JAR - <install>/Applications/Foundation/lib
SUN ACTIVATION JAR - <install>/ Applications/Foundation/lib
SUN JavaMail - <install>/jar/javamail/1_4/LICENSE.txt
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the
Web-app_2_3.dtd software (Copyright © 2007 Sun Microsystems, Inc.) ("Web-App Software").
Web-App Software is free software which is distributed under the terms of the Common Development
![](asset-e.png)
and Distribution License ("CDDL"). A copy of the CDDL is found in
http://kenai.com/projects/javamail/sources/mercurial/show.
The source code for the Web-App Software may be found at:
<install>/3rdParty/sun/javamail-1.3.2/docs/JavaMail-1.2.pdf
Such licenses only apply to the Sun product which is the subject of such directory and does not apply to
the Sterling Commerce Software or to any other Third Party Software.
The Sterling Commerce Software is also distributed with or on the same storage media as the Sun
Microsystems, Inc. Java (TM) look and feel Graphics Repository ("Sun Graphics Artwork"), subject to the
following terms and conditions:
Copyright 2000 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Sun grants you ("Licensee") a non-exclusive, royalty free, license to use, and redistribute this software
graphics artwork, as individual graphics or as a collection, as part of software code or programs that you
develop, provided that i) this copyright notice and license accompany the software graphics artwork; and
ii) you do not utilize the software graphics artwork in a manner which is disparaging to Sun. Unless
enforcement is prohibited by applicable law, you may not modify the graphics, and must use them true
to color and unmodified in every way.
This software graphics artwork is provided "AS IS," without a warranty of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY
EXCLUDED. SUN AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY
LICENSEE AS A RESULT OF USING, MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE GRAPHICS
ARTWORK.
IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE, PROFIT OR DATA, OR
FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER
CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY
TO USE SOFTWARE GRAPHICS ARTWORK, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
If any of the above provisions are held to be in violation of applicable law, void, or unenforceable in any
jurisdiction, then such provisions are waived to the extent necessary for this Disclaimer to be otherwise
enforceable in such jurisdiction.
The preceding license only applies to the Sun Graphics Artwork and does not apply to the Sterling
Commerce Software, or any other Third Party Software.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software which it describes are licensed either "AS IS"
or with a limited warranty, as set forth in the Sterling Commerce license agreement. Other than any
limited warranties provided, NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED AND NONE SHALL BE IMPLIED,
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE OR FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. The applicable Sterling Commerce entity reserves the right to revise this publication from time
to time and to make changes in the content hereof without the obligation to notify any person or entity
of such revisions or changes.
The Third Party Software is provided "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. FURTHER, IF YOU
ARE LOCATED OR ACCESSING THIS SOFTWARE IN THE UNITED STATES, ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY REGARDING TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED.
Without limiting the foregoing, the ICE Software and JBoss Software are distributed WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
![](asset-f.png)
xv
Contents
Preface
Intended Audience ...................................................................................xxxiii
Structure ................................................................................................xxxiii
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation Documentation ........................................xxxix
Conventions................................................................................................xli
1 Warehouse Management System Overview
Part I Warehouse Management System Tasks
2 Accessing Multiple Nodes
3 Performing Inbound Tasks
3.1 Creating a Purchase Order..................................................................12
3.1.1 Adding Items to a Draft Purchase Order ..........................................12
3.1.2 Confirming a Draft Purchase Order .................................................12
3.2 Creating an Advance Ship Notice.........................................................13
3.2.1 Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides.....................................13
3.3 Searching for Inbound Order Shipments...............................................14
3.4 Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications.................................14
3.5 Creating a Load ................................................................................15
3.6 Printing Documents or Labels..............................................................15
3.7 Receiving Inventory...........................................................................16
3.7.1 Receiving Inventory using High Speed Data Entry Screens.................16
![](asset-10.png)
xvi User Guide
3.7.1.1 Navigating to the Receive Details Screen................................... 16
3.7.1.2 Receiving Expected Containers................................................. 17
3.7.1.3 Building Cases or Pallets.......................................................... 17
3.7.1.4 Receiving Blind Receipts.......................................................... 18
3.7.1.5 Over-Receiving ...................................................................... 18
3.7.1.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes.................................... 19
3.7.2 Receiving Inventory Using Paper and Recording on System Later....... 20
3.7.2.1 Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen ........... 20
3.7.2.2 Starting a Receipt................................................................... 21
3.7.2.3 Recording Paper-Based Receipts............................................... 21
3.7.2.4 Receiving Expected Containers................................................. 21
3.7.2.5 Building Cases or Pallets.......................................................... 22
3.7.2.6 Over-Receiving ...................................................................... 23
3.7.2.7 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes.................................... 23
3.8 Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps .................................................. 23
3.8.1 Inspecting a Receipt .................................................................... 24
3.8.2 Inspecting Receipt Lines............................................................... 24
3.9 Closing a Receipt.............................................................................. 25
3.10 Adjusting Receipts............................................................................ 25
3.11 Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment......... 26
4 Managing Inventory
4.1 Searching for Inventory .................................................................... 30
4.2 Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail......................................................... 30
4.3 Managing Count............................................................................... 31
4.4 Putting an Item or Item Category on Count ......................................... 31
4.5 Managing Count Requests ................................................................. 32
4.6 Invoking Count Service ..................................................................... 32
4.7 Managing Count Tasks...................................................................... 33
4.8 Putting Tasks on Hold ....................................................................... 33
4.9 Reporting Count Task Completion....................................................... 34
4.10 Creating Move Requests.................................................................... 35
4.10.1 For Moving Inventory to a Specified Location .................................. 35
4.10.2 For Moving Inventory that Exists in a Location................................. 35
4.11 Adjusting Inventory.......................................................................... 36
![](asset-11.png)
xvii
4.11.1 For a New Product........................................................................36
4.11.2 For an Existing Product .................................................................36
4.12 Changing Inventory Attributes ............................................................37
4.12.1 Find Specific Inventory..................................................................37
4.12.2 Change Attributes Across Locations ................................................38
4.13 Cleaning Out Accounting Bin...............................................................38
4.14 Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels.......................................................39
5 Performing Value-Added Services
5.1 Creating a Work Order.......................................................................42
5.2 Searching for Work Orders .................................................................42
5.2.1 Viewing Work Order Details ...........................................................43
5.2.2 Viewing Work Order Tasks.............................................................43
5.2.3 Viewing Move Requests.................................................................43
5.2.4 Confirming Work Orders................................................................44
5.2.5 Cancelling Work Orders.................................................................44
5.3 Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order...................................44
5.3.1 Capturing the Extended Attributes of Multiple Serial-Tracked and
Serialized Kits in a VAS Station .......................................................45
6 Performing Outbound Tasks
6.1 Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks ...................................................49
6.1.1 Creating an Outbound Shipment.....................................................50
6.1.1.1 Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides................................50
6.1.2 Searching for Outbound Shipments.................................................51
6.1.3 Modifying an Outbound Shipment...................................................51
6.1.4 Adding Holds to an Outbound Shipment ..........................................52
6.2 Outbound Execution ..........................................................................52
6.2.1 Pick Planning...............................................................................52
6.2.1.1 Creating a Wave .....................................................................53
6.2.1.2 Auditing a Wave......................................................................53
6.2.1.3 Accepting a Wave....................................................................54
6.2.1.4 Releasing a Wave....................................................................54
6.2.1.5 Cancelling a Wave...................................................................54
6.2.2 Picking........................................................................................55
![](asset-12.png)
xviii User Guide
6.2.3 Packing and Unpacking Containers................................................. 55
6.2.3.1 Navigating to the Pack Details Screen ....................................... 57
6.2.3.2 Packing System-Suggested Containers...................................... 57
6.2.3.3 Packing User-Defined Containers.............................................. 58
6.2.3.4 Packing a Container with Unknown Contents.............................. 61
6.2.3.5 Packing Single Item Shipments ................................................ 62
6.2.3.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes.................................... 64
6.2.3.6.1 Capturing an Item’s Serial Numbers..................................... 64
6.2.3.6.2 Capturing an Item’s Tag Attributes ...................................... 66
6.2.3.6.3 Capturing an Item’s Expiration Date..................................... 67
6.2.3.6.4 Capturing Item Details from an Inventory LPN....................... 67
6.2.3.7 Adding Items into a Container.................................................. 68
6.2.3.8 Removing Items from a Container ............................................ 70
6.2.3.9 Adding Inner Packs for an Item................................................ 71
6.2.3.10 Removing Inner Packs for an Item............................................ 71
6.2.3.11 Packing Containers for a Shipment............................................ 71
6.2.3.12 Unpacking Containers for a Shipment........................................ 72
6.3 Managing Manifests.......................................................................... 73
6.3.1 Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen........................................ 73
6.3.2 Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container......... 73
6.3.3 Adding Containers to a Manifest .................................................... 74
6.3.3.1 Capturing the Item’s Serial Number.......................................... 81
6.3.4 Viewing the Container’s Contents .................................................. 82
6.3.5 Removing Containers from a Manifest ............................................ 82
6.3.6 Closing a Manifest ....................................................................... 83
6.3.7 Recording the Weight of Containers ............................................... 83
6.4 Recording Container’s Weight ............................................................ 83
6.4.1 Navigating to the Weigh Station Screen.......................................... 84
6.4.2 Recording the Container’s Weight .................................................. 84
6.4.3 Capturing the Item’s Serial Number............................................... 84
6.4.4 Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container......... 85
6.4.5 Creating a Load........................................................................... 85
6.4.6 Searching for Loads..................................................................... 86
6.4.7 Adding Holds to a Load ................................................................ 86
6.4.8 Adding Shipments to a Load ......................................................... 86
![](asset-13.png)
xix
6.5 Scheduling Dock Appointments ...........................................................87
6.5.1 Searching for a Dock Appointment..................................................88
6.5.2 Viewing Dock Schedule Details.......................................................88
6.5.3 Taking a New Dock Appointment....................................................89
6.5.4 Modifying a Dock Appointment.......................................................89
6.5.5 Canceling a Dock Appointment.......................................................90
6.5.6 Managing Docks...........................................................................90
6.5.7 Removing a Dock Group Constraint.................................................91
6.6 Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks ...............................................91
6.6.1 Defining Standard Capacity ...........................................................92
6.6.2 Viewing Capacity Details ...............................................................92
6.6.2.1 Transferring Resources Temporarily...........................................93
6.6.2.2 Assigning Shifts ......................................................................93
6.6.3 Viewing Demand Details................................................................93
6.6.3.1 Performing a Demand Search....................................................94
6.6.3.2 Moving Shipments...................................................................94
6.6.4 Confirming a Plan.........................................................................95
7 Managing Tasks
7.1 Searching for Tasks...........................................................................97
7.1.1 Viewing Task Details.....................................................................98
7.1.2 Assigning Tasks to a User..............................................................98
7.1.3 Reprioritizing Tasks ......................................................................98
7.1.4 Putting Tasks on Hold...................................................................99
7.1.5 Releasing a Task..........................................................................99
7.1.6 Canceling a Task..........................................................................99
7.2 Confirming a Batch..........................................................................100
7.3 Recording Count .............................................................................100
7.4 Manually Logging Productivity...........................................................101
7.5 Searching for Productivity Logs .........................................................101
7.5.1 Viewing Productivity Log Records .................................................102
7.5.2 Deleting a Productivity Log..........................................................102
7.6 Deriving Labor Standards.................................................................102
7.6.1 Activities Search by Date Range...................................................103
7.6.2 Viewing Productivity Summary.....................................................103
![](asset-14.png)
xx User Guide
7.6.3 Derive Labor Standards...............................................................103
7.7 Viewing User Time Sheet..................................................................103
Part II Warehouse Management System Screen Reference
8 Inbound Shipment Console Screens
8.1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status.........................................107
8.2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date ...........................................108
8.3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier ........................................109
8.4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item ...........................................110
8.5 Inbound Order Shipment List............................................................111
8.6 Inbound Order Shipment Details .......................................................113
8.7 Modify Address ...............................................................................118
8.8 Charges.........................................................................................119
8.9 Shipment Line Details......................................................................120
8.10 Loads ............................................................................................122
8.11 Ship Node Detail .............................................................................123
8.12 Organization Details .......................................................................124
8.13 Organization Primary Contact Address Details .....................................125
8.14 Organization Corporate Address Details..............................................127
8.15 Containers......................................................................................128
8.16 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions ................................................129
8.17 Shipment Status Audits....................................................................131
8.18 Shipment Audits..............................................................................132
8.19 Shipment Dates ..............................................................................134
8.20 Shipment Alerts ..............................................................................135
8.21 Additional Attributes........................................................................137
8.22 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy ..........................................................138
8.23 Manage Receiving Discrepancies........................................................140
8.24 Receipts.........................................................................................141
8.25 Receipt Summary............................................................................141
8.26 Receipt Details................................................................................144
8.27 Receipt Line Details .........................................................................146
8.28 Receipt Instructions.........................................................................147
8.29 Receipt Status Audits.......................................................................147
![](asset-15.png)
xxi
8.30 Receipt Container............................................................................147
8.31 Activity Demand .............................................................................148
8.32 Record Container Details..................................................................149
8.33 Start Receipt ..................................................................................151
8.34 Receive..........................................................................................152
8.35 Print..............................................................................................152
8.36 Create Picklist.................................................................................153
8.37 Create Alerts ..................................................................................153
8.38 Receive (Report or Record Receipt) ...................................................153
8.39 Add Delivery Plan............................................................................156
8.40 Inbound Order Container Search By All Attributes................................156
8.41 Inbound Order Container List............................................................157
8.42 Container Details ............................................................................158
8.43 Container Serial Details....................................................................161
8.44 Container Status Audits ...................................................................162
8.45 Pack or Unpack...............................................................................162
8.46 Delete Container.............................................................................163
8.47 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes.........................................163
8.48 Dock Schedule Details .....................................................................164
8.49 Dock Appointment...........................................................................165
8.50 Dock Group Details..........................................................................167
8.51 View Holds.....................................................................................169
8.52 Add Holds ......................................................................................170
8.53 View History...................................................................................170
9 Receipt Console Screens
9.1 Receipt Search By Receipt................................................................173
9.2 Receipt Search By Item....................................................................174
9.3 Receipt Search By Container.............................................................175
9.4 Receipt List ....................................................................................176
9.5 Return Order Receipt Summary.........................................................177
9.6 Receipt Line Details.........................................................................181
9.7 Order Receipt Container...................................................................182
9.8 Receipt Line Details (Container) ........................................................183
9.9 Receipt Instructions.........................................................................184
![](asset-16.png)
xxii User Guide
9.10 Receipt Status Audits.......................................................................186
9.11 Receipt Details................................................................................187
9.12 Receive..........................................................................................190
10 Create Inbound Shipment Screens
10.1 Shipment Entry...............................................................................193
10.2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides .......................................................194
11 Receive Console Screens
11.1 Receive Details ...............................................................................197
11.2 Serial Entry ....................................................................................200
11.3 Tag Entry.......................................................................................202
11.4 Expiration Date Entry.......................................................................202
12 Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens
13 Inspect Return Receipts Screens
13.1 Inspect Receipt...............................................................................205
13.2 Inspect Return Receipt Details ..........................................................206
14 Create Move Request Screens
14.1 Create Move Request.......................................................................209
15 Create Count Request Screens
15.1 Create Count Request......................................................................215
15.2 Create Count Request for Location Range...........................................218
16 Count Console Screens
16.1 Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes .............................221
16.2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria.............................................222
16.3 Count Request Search By Location Range...........................................224
16.4 Count Request List ..........................................................................224
![](asset-17.png)
xxiii
16.5 Count Request Details......................................................................225
16.6 Count Result List.............................................................................227
16.7 Acceptance Variance Reason.............................................................232
16.8 Create Count Request......................................................................232
16.9 Cancellation Reason ........................................................................233
16.10 Record Count Result Details..............................................................234
16.11 Count Result Search By Variance.......................................................237
16.12 Count Result Details........................................................................239
16.13 Invoke Count Service.......................................................................241
17 Create Physical Count Screens
17.1 Create Physical Count Plan ...............................................................244
18 Physical Count Console Screens
18.1 Physical Count Plan Search...............................................................245
18.2 Physical Count Plan List....................................................................246
18.3 Physical Count Plan Details...............................................................246
19 Move Request Console Screens
19.1 Move Request Search By Item ..........................................................251
19.2 Move Request Search By Location .....................................................252
19.3 Move Request Search By Date ..........................................................254
19.4 Move Request Search By References..................................................255
19.5 Move Request Search By Tag Attributes .............................................256
19.6 Move Request List...........................................................................257
19.7 Move Request Details ......................................................................258
19.8 Move Request Alerts........................................................................262
19.9 Status Audit Details.........................................................................263
19.10 Cancellation Reason ........................................................................264
19.11 Move Request Line Details................................................................264
19.12 Move Request Line Activity Demand...................................................266
19.13 Activity Demand .............................................................................267
![](asset-18.png)
xxiv User Guide
20 Location Inventory Console Screens
20.1 Location Inventory Search By Item....................................................271
20.2 Location Inventory Search By Container .............................................273
20.3 Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes ..............................274
20.4 Location Inventory Search By Segment ..............................................275
20.5 Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes.......................................276
20.6 Location Inventory ..........................................................................278
20.7 Location Inventory Details................................................................280
20.8 Location Inventory Serial Details .......................................................282
20.9 Location Details ..............................................................................283
20.10 Location SKU Dedications.................................................................286
20.11 Item Details ...................................................................................287
20.12 Location Inventory Tag Details..........................................................290
20.13 Change Location Inventory Attributes (Criteria)...................................291
20.14 Change Location Inventory Attributes ................................................291
20.15 Node Level Inventory ......................................................................293
20.16 Container Details.............................................................................295
20.17 Container Serial Details....................................................................297
20.18 Create Count Request......................................................................298
20.19 Create Move Request.......................................................................299
20.20 Break License Plate Number..............................................................300
21 Adjust Location Inventory Screens
21.1 Adjust Location Inventory Criteria......................................................303
21.2 Adjust Location Inventory Details ......................................................304
21.3 Adjustment Cost Details...................................................................307
22 Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens
22.1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details Criteria .........................................309
22.2 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details.....................................................309
22.2.1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details................................................310
22.2.2 Location Inventory Details...........................................................310
22.2.3 Accounting Bin Adjustment Reasons..............................................311
![](asset-19.png)
xxv
23 Transfer Inventory Ownership
23.1 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes ............................................313
24 Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens
24.1 Print Stock Keeping Unit Search By Item............................................317
24.2 Item List........................................................................................318
24.3 Print..............................................................................................319
25 Receipt Adjustment Screens
25.1 Receipt Adjustment.........................................................................321
25.2 Adjust Receipt ................................................................................322
25.3 Modification Reason.........................................................................324
26 Create Work Order Screens
26.1 Create Work Order ..........................................................................325
26.2 Additional Item Details.....................................................................327
26.3 Work Order Details..........................................................................328
27 Work Order Console Screens
27.1 Work Order Search By Item..............................................................333
27.2 Work Order Search By Container.......................................................334
27.3 Work Order Search By Date..............................................................335
27.4 Work Order Search By Activity..........................................................337
27.5 Work Order Search By Components...................................................337
27.6 Work Order List ..............................................................................338
27.7 Work Order Details..........................................................................340
27.8 Work Order Status Audits.................................................................344
27.9 Work Order Activity Demand ............................................................345
27.10 Work Order Holds............................................................................346
27.11 Add Holds ......................................................................................347
27.12 View History...................................................................................347
27.13 Cancellation Reason ........................................................................348
27.14 Work Order Details for Provided Service Items....................................348
![](asset-1a.png)
xxvi User Guide
27.15 Appointment Details ........................................................................349
28 Value-Added Services Station Screens
28.1 VAS Station....................................................................................351
28.2 Serial Entry ....................................................................................354
28.3 Expiration Date Entry.......................................................................357
29 Outbound Shipment Console Screens
29.1 Outbound Shipment Search By Status................................................359
29.2 Outbound Shipment Search By Date ..................................................361
29.3 Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier ...............................................362
29.4 Outbound Shipment Search By Item ..................................................363
29.5 Outbound Shipment Search By Wave.................................................364
29.6 Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling .............................................365
29.7 Shipment List .................................................................................367
29.8 Shipment Details.............................................................................368
29.9 Special Services List ........................................................................375
29.10 Modify Shipment.............................................................................375
29.11 Address Details...............................................................................376
29.12 Charges.........................................................................................377
29.13 Shipment Loads ..............................................................................378
29.14 Shipment Containers .......................................................................379
29.15 Shipment Instructions......................................................................380
29.16 Shipment Status Audits....................................................................381
29.17 Shipment Dates ..............................................................................383
29.18 Alerts ............................................................................................384
29.19 Additional Attributes........................................................................386
29.20 Shipment Activity Demand ...............................................................387
29.21 Shipment Audits..............................................................................389
29.22 Logical Kits.....................................................................................390
29.23 Pack Containers ..............................................................................392
29.24 Packing a Container.........................................................................396
29.25 Print..............................................................................................396
29.26 Cancel Selected Shipments...............................................................396
![](asset-1b.png)
xxvii
29.27 Split Shipment................................................................................397
29.28 Split Shipment Lines........................................................................399
29.29 Create Alerts ..................................................................................399
29.30 Ship Node Detail.............................................................................399
29.31 Organization Details ........................................................................400
29.32 Select Delivery Plan.........................................................................401
29.33 Shipment Line Details......................................................................401
29.34 Add Release ...................................................................................403
29.35 Create Wave ..................................................................................403
29.36 Containers .....................................................................................404
29.37 Container Search By All Attributes.....................................................404
29.38 Container Search By Status..............................................................405
29.39 Container List.................................................................................406
29.40 Container Details ............................................................................407
29.41 Serial Details..................................................................................412
29.42 Container Status Audits ...................................................................412
29.43 Container Activity List......................................................................414
29.44 Pack or Unpack...............................................................................415
29.45 Delete Selected Containers...............................................................415
29.46 Modify Containerization ...................................................................415
29.47 Resolve Short Picked Containers .......................................................418
29.48 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes.........................................419
29.49 Dock Schedule Details .....................................................................420
29.50 Dock Appointment...........................................................................421
29.51 Dock Group Details..........................................................................423
29.52 View Holds.....................................................................................424
29.53 Add Holds ......................................................................................426
29.54 View History...................................................................................426
30 Create Outbound Shipment Screens
30.1 Shipment Entry...............................................................................427
30.2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides ......................................................428
31 Wave Console Screens
31.1 Wave Search..................................................................................429
![](asset-1c.png)
xxviii User Guide
31.2 Wave List.......................................................................................430
31.3 Release Wave.................................................................................431
31.4 Cancel Wave...................................................................................432
31.5 Wave Summary ..............................................................................432
31.6 Shipment Profile Summary ...............................................................434
31.7 Shipment Summary.........................................................................434
31.8 Batch Summary ..............................................................................435
31.9 Work Order Summary......................................................................435
31.10 Item Task Summary........................................................................436
31.11 Shipping Containers Summary ..........................................................436
31.12 Prioritize Wave................................................................................437
31.13 Print Wave .....................................................................................437
31.14 Alert List........................................................................................438
31.15 Wave Audit.....................................................................................439
32 Create Wave Screens
32.1 Create Wave...................................................................................443
33 Pack Station Screens
33.1 Pack Details....................................................................................445
33.2 Container Contents..........................................................................451
33.3 Select SKU .....................................................................................453
33.4 Serial Entry ....................................................................................454
34 Manifest Console Screens
34.1 Manifest Search By All Attributes.......................................................455
34.2 Manifest List...................................................................................456
34.3 Manifest Details ..............................................................................457
34.4 Summary By Carrier Service.............................................................459
34.5 Print..............................................................................................460
34.6 Open Manifest.................................................................................460
34.7 Close Manifest ................................................................................461
![](asset-1d.png)
xxix
35 Create Load Screens
35.1 Create Load....................................................................................463
36 Load Console Screens
37 Add To Manifest Screens
37.1 Add To Manifest..............................................................................469
37.2 Container Contents..........................................................................472
38 Remove From Manifest Screens
38.1 Remove From Manifest ....................................................................473
38.2 Container Contents..........................................................................476
39 Weigh Station Screens
39.1 Weigh Station.................................................................................480
39.2 Serial Entry....................................................................................482
39.3 Container Contents..........................................................................483
40 Location Inventory Audit Console Screens
40.1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item............................................485
40.2 Location Inventory Audit Search By Container.....................................486
40.3 Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References..................487
40.4 Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes ......................488
40.5 Performing a Location Inventory Audit Search By Count Reference.........490
40.6 Location Inventory Audit List ............................................................490
40.7 Location Inventory Audit Details........................................................492
40.8 Location Inventory Audit Details........................................................495
41 Task Console Screens
41.1 Task Search By Task Type................................................................497
41.2 Task Summary ...............................................................................498
41.3 Task Summary By Zone...................................................................501
41.4 Open Task Summary .......................................................................501
![](asset-1e.png)
xxx User Guide
41.5 User List ........................................................................................502
41.6 Task Search By Zone.......................................................................502
41.7 Task Search By Inventory.................................................................503
41.8 Task Search By Reference ................................................................505
41.9 Task Search By Exception.................................................................506
41.10 Task Search By Date........................................................................507
41.11 Task Search By At Risk Tasks............................................................508
41.12 Task List ........................................................................................509
41.13 Task Detail.....................................................................................511
41.14 Complete Task................................................................................513
41.15 Modification Reason.........................................................................516
41.16 Summary Task Detail.......................................................................516
41.17 Task Status Details..........................................................................518
41.18 Task Status Audits...........................................................................519
41.19 Assign to User ................................................................................519
41.20 User Search By All Attributes ............................................................520
41.21 User List (selection).........................................................................520
41.22 Reprioritize.....................................................................................521
41.23 Hold Reason ...................................................................................521
41.24 Cancel Task Reason.........................................................................521
41.25 User Detail.....................................................................................521
41.26 Batch Search By All Attributes...........................................................523
41.27 Batch List.......................................................................................524
41.28 Batch Detail....................................................................................525
41.29 Complete Batch ..............................................................................526
41.30 Print Batch .....................................................................................528
42 Confirm Batch Screens
42.1 Confirm Batch.................................................................................529
42.2 Complete Batch ..............................................................................530
42.3 Modification Reason.........................................................................532
43 Record Count Screens
43.1 Recording Count Results...................................................................533
![](asset-1f.png)
xxxi
44 Log Productivity Screens
44.1 Log Productivity..............................................................................535
45 Productivity Console Screens
45.1 Productivity Search By Productivity Type............................................537
45.2 Productivity List..............................................................................538
45.3 Productivity Details..........................................................................539
46 Derive Labor Standards Screens
46.1 Activities Search By Date Range........................................................543
46.2 Productivity Type List ......................................................................544
46.3 Productivity Summary......................................................................545
46.4 Derive Labor Standards....................................................................547
47 User Time Sheet Screens
47.1 User Time Sheet Search By User.......................................................549
47.2 Time Sheet ....................................................................................550
48 Resource Planning Screens
48.1 Defining Standard Capacity ..............................................................553
48.1.1 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details............................554
48.1.1.1 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details ..................................556
48.1.1.2 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period...................................556
48.2 Planning Resources .........................................................................557
48.2.1 Resource Planning Capacity Search...............................................557
48.2.2 Resource Planning Screen ...........................................................558
48.2.3 Capacity Details.........................................................................560
48.2.3.1 Transfer Resources Screen .....................................................562
48.2.3.2 Assign Shifts Screen..............................................................563
48.2.4 Demand Details .........................................................................563
48.2.4.1 Demand Search Panel............................................................564
48.2.4.2 Move...................................................................................566
48.2.5 Planning Summary .....................................................................566
![](asset-20.png)
xxxii User Guide
A Sterling WMS Prints
A.1 Packing Slip....................................................................................570
A.2 UCC-128 Container Shipping Label ....................................................573
A.2.1 Container Label Single SKU..........................................................574
A.2.2 Container Label Multi SKU ...........................................................576
A.3 Task List ........................................................................................579
A.3.1 Item Pick Task List (Simple) ........................................................579
A.3.2 Cart Manifest Task List (Requires Sorting of Inventory During Pick)...581
A.4 Bill Of Lading..................................................................................583
A.4.1 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment ..................................................584
A.4.2 VICS Bill Of Lading for Load.........................................................590
A.4.3 Hazmat Bill Of Lading..................................................................596
A.5 LTL Manifest Label...........................................................................599
A.5.1 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials...............................601
A.6 FedEx Carrier Label .........................................................................603
A.6.1 FedEx Shipping Label..................................................................604
A.6.2 FedEx Return Shipping Label........................................................606
A.7 Reprint Carrier Label........................................................................608
A.8 Count Sheet ...................................................................................608
A.9 Wave Release.................................................................................610
A.10 Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels.....................................................611
B Understanding the Execution Console Framework
B.1 Tab Ordering ..................................................................................614
B.2 Automatic Pop-Ups for Additional Data Capture ...................................614
B.3 Hot Keys........................................................................................614
B.4 Field Level Validations......................................................................614
B.5 Populating Fields.............................................................................614
B.6 Barcode Handling Capabilities ...........................................................615
Index
![](asset-21.png)
xxxiii
Preface
Intended Audience
This manual is intended to provide assistance to users who are using the
Sterling Warehouse Management System Application Consoles.
Structure
This manual provides a brief overview of the Sterling Warehouse
Management System components. It then presents user information in
two primary parts. Part I consists of chapters that provide instructions for
completing various tasks. Part II consists of chapters that provide screen
and field descriptions for each of the screens in the Sterling Warehouse
Management System user interface. These parts are followed by
appendices that provide reference information for specific components.
The following sections are presented in this manual:
Chapter 1, "Warehouse Management System Overview"
This chapter provides a brief overview of the Sterling Warehouse
Management System (WMS) components and explains how to utilize high
speed data entry oriented transactions.
Part I, "Warehouse Management System Tasks" includes the following
task-oriented chapters:
Chapter 2, "Accessing Multiple Nodes"
This chapter explain how a user can access multiple nodes based on
team configurations.
![](asset-22.png)
xxxiv User Guide
Chapter 3, "Performing Inbound Tasks"
This chapter explains the various inbound tasks, and how they can be
performed.
Chapter 4, "Managing Inventory"
This chapter explains how to track, monitor, and maintain inventory in a
warehouse.
Chapter 5, "Performing Value-Added Services"
This chapter explains about performing value added services.
Chapter 6, "Performing Outbound Tasks"
This chapter explains the various outbound tasks, and how they can be
performed.
Chapter 7, "Managing Tasks"
This chapter explains how to manage paper-based tasks.
Chapter 8, "Inbound Shipment Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Inbound Shipment Console user interface.
Chapter 9, "Receipt Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Receipt Console user interface.
Chapter 10, "Create Inbound Shipment Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Inbound Shipment user interface.
Chapter 11, "Receive Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Receive Console user interface.
Chapter 12, "Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Inspect Inbound Receipt user interface.
![](asset-23.png)
xxxv
Chapter 13, "Inspect Return Receipts Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Inspect Return Receipt user interface.
Chapter 14, "Create Move Request Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Move Request user interface.
Chapter 15, "Create Count Request Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Count Request user interface.
Chapter 16, "Count Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Count Console user interface.
Chapter 17, "Create Physical Count Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for creating the
physical count plan.
Chapter 18, "Physical Count Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens of the Physical Count Console.
Chapter 19, "Move Request Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Move Request Console user interface.
Chapter 20, "Location Inventory Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Location Inventory Console user interface.
Chapter 21, "Adjust Location Inventory Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Adjust Location Inventory user interface.
![](asset-24.png)
xxxvi User Guide
Chapter 23, "Transfer Inventory Ownership"
This chapter explains how inventory ownership gets transferred for an
item at a particular location with the help of the Transfer Inventory
Ownership screen.
Chapter 22, "Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens"
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Accounting Bin
Adjustment screens.
Chapter 24, "Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Print SKU Labels user interface.
Chapter 25, "Receipt Adjustment Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Receipt Adjustment user interface.
Chapter 26, "Create Work Order Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Work Order user interface.
Chapter 27, "Work Order Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Work Order Console user interface.
Chapter 28, "Value-Added Services Station Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the VAS Station user interface.
Chapter 29, "Outbound Shipment Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Outbound Shipment Console user interface.
Chapter 30, "Create Outbound Shipment Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Outbound Shipment user interface.
![](asset-25.png)
xxxvii
Chapter 31, "Wave Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Wave Console user interface.
Chapter 32, "Create Wave Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Wave user interface.
Chapter 33, "Pack Station Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Pack Station user interface.
Chapter 34, "Manifest Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Manifest Console user interface.
Chapter 35, "Create Load Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Create Load user interface.
Chapter 36, "Load Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Load Console user interface.
Chapter 37, "Add To Manifest Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Add To Manifest user interface.
Chapter 38, "Remove From Manifest Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Remove From Manifest user interface.
Chapter 39, "Weigh Station Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Weigh Station user interface.
![](asset-26.png)
xxxviii User Guide
Chapter 40, "Location Inventory Audit Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Location Inventory Audit Console user
interface.
Chapter 41, "Task Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Task Console user interface.
Chapter 42, "Confirm Batch Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Confirm Batch user interface.
Chapter 43, "Record Count Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Record Count user interface.
Chapter 44, "Log Productivity Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Log Productivity user interface.
Chapter 45, "Productivity Console Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Productivity Console user interface.
Chapter 46, "Derive Labor Standards Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the Labour Standards user interface.
Chapter 47, "User Time Sheet Screens"
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for each of the
screens that comprise the User Time Sheet user interface.
Chapter 48, "Resource Planning Screens"
This chapter aids the warehouse by providing the ability to plan for
expected workload and determine the number of resources that is
required to complete all activities.
![](asset-27.png)
xxxix
Appendix A, "Sterling WMS Prints"
This appendix describes the various documents that are printed daily in a
warehouse.
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework"
This appendix describes how to capture data on the screen by entering
the data using the keyboard and pressing the Tab key, or by scanning
the barcode using a wedge scanner.
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
Documentation
For more information about the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
components, see the following manuals:
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Release Notes
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Installation Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Upgrade Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Configuration Deployment Tool
Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Performance Management Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: High Availability Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: System Management Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Localization Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customization Basics Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing APIs Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing Console JSP Interface
for End User Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing the RCP Interface
Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing User Interfaces for
Mobile Devices Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing Web UI Framework
Guide
![](asset-28.png)
xl User Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Customizing Swing Interface
Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Extending the Condition Builder
Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Extending the Database Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Extending Transactions Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Using Sterling RCP Extensibility
Tool Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Integration Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Product Concepts Guide
QSterling Warehouse ManagementTM System: Concepts Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide
QSterling Distributed Order ManagementTM: Configuration Guide
QSterling Supply Collaboration: Configuration Guide
QSterling Global Inventory VisibilityTM: Configuration Guide
QCatalog ManagementTM: Configuration Guide
QSterling Logistics Management: Configuration Guide
QSterling Reverse LogisticsTM: Configuration Guide
QSterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User Guide
QSterling Distributed Order Management: User Guide
QSterling Supply Collaboration: User Guide
QSterling Global Inventory Visibility: User Guide
QSterling Logistics Management: User Guide
QSterling Reverse Logistics: User Guide
QSterling Warehouse Management System: User Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Mobile Application User Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Business Intelligence Guide
![](asset-29.png)
xli
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Javadocs
QSterling Selling and Fulfillment SuiteTM: Glossary
QParcel Carrier: Adapter Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Multitenant Enterprise Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Password Policy Management
Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Properties Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Catalog Management Concepts
Guide
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation: Pricing Concepts Guide
QBusiness Center: Item Administration Guide
QBusiness Center: Pricing Administration Guide
QBusiness Center: Customization Guide
QBusiness Center: Localization Guide
Conventions
The following conventions may be used in this manual:
Convention Meaning
. . . Ellipsis represents information that has been
omitted.
< > Angle brackets indicate user-supplied input.
mono-spaced text Mono-spaced text indicates a file name, directory
path, attribute name, or an inline code example or
command.
/ or \ Slashes and backslashes are file separators for
Windows, UNIX, and Linux operating systems. The
file separator for the Windows operating system is
"\" and the file separator for UNIX and Linux
systems is "/". The UNIX convention is used unless
otherwise mentioned.
<INSTALL_DIR> User-supplied location of the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation installation directory. This is only
applicable for Release 8.0 or later.
![](asset-2a.png)
xlii User Guide
<INSTALL_DIR_OLD> User-supplied location of the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation installation directory (for Release 8.0 or
later).
Note: This is applicable only for users upgrading
from Release 8.0 or later.
<YANTRA_HOME> User-supplied location of the Sterling Supply Chain
Applications installation directory. This is only
applicable for Releases 7.7, 7.9, and 7.11.
<YANTRA_HOME_OLD> User-supplied location of the Sterling Supply Chain
Applications installation directory (for Releases 7.7,
7.9, or 7.11).
Note: This is applicable only for users upgrading
from Releases 7.7, 7.9, or 7.11.
<YFS_HOME> For Releases 7.3, 7.5, and 7.5 SP1, this is the
user-supplied location of the Sterling Supply Chain
Applications installation directory.
For Releases 7.7, 7.9, and 7.11, this is the
user-supplied location of the <YANTRA_
HOME>/Runtime directory.
For Release 8.0 or above, the <YANTRA_
HOME>/Runtime directory is no longer used and this
is the same location as <INSTALL_DIR>.
<YFS_HOME_OLD> This is the <YANTRA_HOME>/Runtime directory for
Releases 7.7, 7.9, or 7.11.
Note: This is only applicable for users upgrading
from Releases 7.7, 7.9, or 7.11.
<ANALYTICS_HOME> User-supplied location of the Sterling Analytics
installation directory.
Note: This convention is used only in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Business
Intelligence Guide.
<COGNOS_HOME> User-supplied location of the IBM Cognos 8
Business Intelligence installation directory.
Note: This convention is used only in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Business
Intelligence Guide.
Convention Meaning
![](asset-2b.png)
xliii
<MQ_JAVA_INSTALL_
PATH> User-supplied location of the IBM WebSphere®
MQ Java components installation directory.
Note: This convention is used only in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: System
Manangement and Administration Guide.
<DB> Refers to Oracle®, IBM DB2®, or Microsoft SQL
Server® depending on the database server.
<DB_TYPE> Depending on the database used, considers the
value oracle, db2, or sqlserver.
Convention Meaning
![](asset-2c.png)
xliv User Guide
Note: The Selling and Fulfillment Foundation documentation set uses the
following conventions in the context of the product name:
QYantra is used for Release 7.7 and earlier.
QSterling Supply Chain Applications is used for Releases 7.9 and 7.11.
QSterling Multi-Channel Fulfillment Solution is used for Releases 8.0
and 8.2.
QSelling and Fulfillment Foundation is used for Release 8.5.
![](asset-2d.png)
Warehouse Management System Overview 1
1
Warehouse Management System Overview
The Sterling Warehouse Management System enables you to manage
inventory and processes in your warehouse. The Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Concepts Guide provides an overview of various
processes in a warehouse for diverse enterprises.
This manual explains how to use the Sterling WMS consoles that contains
the following components:
QExecution Console Framework - enables you to capture data on
the screen by entering the data using the keyboard and pressing the
Tab key, or by scanning the barcode using a wedge scanner. The
various features of the execution console framework are explained in
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".
QInbound Shipment Console - enables you to view information
about inbound order shipments and shipment containers. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 8, "Inbound Shipment
Console Screens".
QReceipt Console - enables you to view receipt details. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 9, "Receipt Console
Screens".
QCreate Inbound Shipment - enables you to manually create
inbound shipments from fax, e-mail messages, or telephone
conversations, as well as for trailers that arrive with no prior notice.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 10, "Create
Inbound Shipment Screens".
QReceive Inventory - enables you to receive an expected container,
build cases or pallets, receive blind receipts, and receive over-receipt
quantity. This console is designed to support scanning of information
![](asset-2e.png)
2 User Guide
utilizing available barcodes. The screen level information is explained
in Chapter 11, "Receive Console Screens".
QReceipt Adjustments - enables you to adjust errors in the receipt
quantity caused during receiving. The screen level information is
explained in Chapter 25, "Receipt Adjustment Screens".
QInspect Inbound Receipts - enables you to inspect inbound
receipts. The procedure for inspecting an inbound receipt is similar to
inspecting a return receipt. See, Chapter 12, "Inspect Inbound
Receipts Screens".
QInspect Return Receipts - enables you to record inspection details
and provides visibility to item level inspection details for a receipt.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 13, "Inspect
Return Receipts Screens".
QLocation Inventory - enables you to manage inventory in a
warehouse and provides comprehensive visibility to inventory at both
enterprise and node levels. The screen level information is explained
in Chapter 20, "Location Inventory Console Screens".
QCreate Count Request - enables you to create count requests. A
count process in a warehouse allows you to verify the system’s
inventory against the actual inventory that is available in a specific
location. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 15,
"Create Count Request Screens".
QCount Console - provides comprehensive visibility to the count
request status and the count results that are recorded. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 16, "Count Console
Screens".
QCreate Move Request - enables you to create ad hoc move
requests. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 14,
"Create Move Request Screens".
QMove Request Console - enables you to manage all processes for a
move request, including the abilities to view and modify move
requests. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 19,
"Move Request Console Screens".
QAdjust Location Inventory - enables you to adjust inventory in the
system for a location to reflect the physical inventory. The screen
![](asset-2f.png)
Warehouse Management System Overview 3
level information is explained in Chapter 21, "Adjust Location
Inventory Screens".
QPrint SKU Labels - enables you to print the SKU labels. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 24, "Print Stock Keeping Unit
Labels Screens".
QCreate Work Order - enables you to create work orders. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 26, "Create Work Order
Screens".
QWork Order Console - provides work order visibility at both
enterprise and node levels. The screen level information is explained
in Chapter 27, "Work Order Console Screens".
QVAS Station - enables you to scan an outbound container number or
a work order number to identify the work order. This component also
provides the ability to confirm the work order at an activity level. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 28, "Value-Added
Services Station Screens".
QOutbound Shipment Console - enables you to modify the outbound
shipment instruction. This component also provides visibility to
discrepancies found in the outbound shipments. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 29, "Outbound Shipment Console
Screens".
QCreate Outbound Shipment - enables you to manually create
outbound shipments from fax, e-mail messages, or telephone
conversations, as well as for trailers that arrive with no prior notice.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 30, "Create
Outbound Shipment Screens".
QWave Console - enables you to match all shipments with the
appropriate shipment groups and create waves for those groups. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 31, "Wave Console
Screens".
QCreate Wave - enables you to manually create waves. The screen
level information is explained in Chapter 32, "Create Wave Screens".
QPack Station - enables you to pack containers for system defined
and user defined containerization processes. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 33, "Pack Station Screens".
![](asset-30.png)
4 User Guide
QManifest Console - enables you to view manifest details. You can
also open a new manifest, close a manifest, and print a manifest. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 34, "Manifest Console
Screens".
QAdd To Manifest - enables you to add containers to a manifest. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 37, "Add To Manifest
Screens".
QRemove From Manifest - enables you to remove containers from a
trailer or manifest before closing the manifest. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 38, "Remove From Manifest
Screens".
QWeigh Station - enables you to record a container’s weight that
belongs to a TL, LTL, or parcel shipment. The screen level information
is explained in Chapter 39, "Weigh Station Screens".
QLocation Inventory Audit Console - enables you to view an item’s
or a container’s inventory audit details. The screen level information
is explained in Chapter 40, "Location Inventory Audit Console
Screens".
QTask Console - enables you to optimize warehouse throughput and
maximize worker efficiency. You can:
–assign tasks
–reprioritize tasks
–modify task location and quantity
–complete a task
–cancel certain types of tasks
–view summary level information across all tasks for a node.
The screen level information is explained in Chapter 41, "Task
Console Screens".
QConfirm Batch - enables you to confirm a batch or confirm a batch
with exceptions, if applicable. The screen level information is
explained in Chapter 42, "Confirm Batch Screens".
QRecord Count - enables you to record count task results to indicate
the completion of the count task that was assigned. The screen level
information is explained in Chapter 43, "Record Count Screens".
![](asset-31.png)
Warehouse Management System Overview 5
QLog Productivity - enables you to record additional productivity
information. The screen level information is explained in Chapter 44,
"Log Productivity Screens".
QProductivity Console - provides visibility to activities performed at
a process level. Allows you to modify the productivity details. The
screen level information is explained in Chapter 45, "Productivity
Console Screens".
QPrints - provides documents that are printed daily in a warehouse, as
and when requested, or when initiated by the occurrence of specific
events. The documents that can be printed are explained in
Appendix A, "Sterling WMS Prints".
![](asset-32.png)
6 User Guide
![](asset-33.png)
7
Part I
Warehouse Management System Tasks
The chapters in this section provide instructions to complete the following
tasks that can be performed using the Sterling Warehouse Management
System:
QAccessing Multiple Nodes
QPerforming Inbound Tasks
QManaging Inventory
QPerforming Value-Added Services
QPerforming Outbound Tasks
QManaging Tasks
![](asset-34.png)
8 User Guide
![](asset-35.png)
Accessing Multiple Nodes 9
2
Accessing Multiple Nodes
A warehouse user can work in the context of one node. However, the
user may have to switch between warehouses and access multiple nodes.
The Sterling Warehouse Management System enables the user to access
multiple nodes and perform various warehouse operations. After the user
switches to a different node, all the transactional data displayed and
recorded will be in the context of the node the user is working on.
Permission to access multiple nodes is based on the teams assigned to
the users in the Applications Manager. For more information about
defining teams, refer to the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Perform the following steps to switch between multiple nodes:
1. Log in to the Application Console. From the navigation bar, select
Configuration > Select Node.
2. The Select Node window is displayed. Select the node from the Select
Node drop-down list or lookup icon. Depending on the configuration,
one of the following is displayed for Select Node:
QSelect Node drop-down list - This list displays all the nodes you
have access to, based on the team configured for you. Select the
appropriate node from the list.
QSelect Node lookup icon - Click to display the Node lookup
screen, and click Search. The nodes that are accessible to you are
displayed in the Node List dialog box. Click adjacent to the
node you want to access. The selected node will be displayed in
the Select Node window.
3. Click OK. For all subsequent warehouse operations, the node you
have selected will be used as the default node.
![](asset-36.png)
10 User Guide
In order to access a different node, repeat Step 1 through Step 3. If you
do not want to select any node, either select the blank option in the
Select Node drop-down list or delete the current node displayed in the
Select Node field.
Notes:
QIf you log in to the Application Console without
selecting a node, and attempt to view any of the
Details screens such as Create Move Request, Create
Count Request, and so on, in which it is mandatory to
enter a value in the Node field, the Select Node dialog
box is displayed. After you select a node from the
Select Node drop-down list in this dialog box, the
relevant screen is displayed.
QYou must select a node before performing the pack
operations and manifest operations.
QIf you log in to the Application Console without
selecting a node, and attempt to view any of the
Search screen such as the Location Inventory Console,
in the Search Console screen, the Node drop-down list
automatically displays all the nodes that you have
permission to access. If you select a node from this
drop-down list, the resultant values for the new node
will be reflected only for that particular search. It will
not change the default node of the user.
![](asset-37.png)
Performing Inbound Tasks 11
3
Performing Inbound Tasks
The Inbound Shipment Console provides information on inbound
shipments and containers. This console provides sellers, node users, and
carriers with information necessary to coordinate and ensure on-time
delivery of shipments.
You can either include a purchase order release into an existing inbound
shipment or create an inbound shipment for a set of orders.
An inbound shipment as an entity can be used in a delivery plan by
attaching it to a load. For more information about configuring delivery
plans and loads, see the Sterling Logistics Management: Configuration
Guide.
This chapter explains the various inbound tasks, and how they can be
performed. It covers the following use cases:
QCreating a Purchase Order
QCreating an Advance Ship Notice
QSearching for Inbound Order Shipments
QViewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications
QCreating a Load
QPrinting Documents or Labels
QReceiving Inventory
QInspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps
QClosing a Receipt
QAdjusting Receipts
QManaging Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment
![](asset-38.png)
12 User Guide
Creating a Purchase Order
3.1 Creating a Purchase Order
1. From the navigation bar, choose Supply > Create Inbound Order. The
Inbound Order Entry screen displays. For more information about the
Inbound Order Entry screen, see the Sterling Supply Collaboration:
User Guide.
2. In Document Type, select Purchase Order.
3. In Enterprise, select the enterprise that handle the inbound order
4. In Buyer, enter the buyer placing the inbound order.
5. In Seller, enter the seller that the inbound order is being placed from.
6. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
7. Click Create Order. The Inbound Order Detail screen displays. For
more information about the Inbound Order Detail screen, see the
Sterling Supply Collaboration: User Guide.
3.1.1 Adding Items to a Draft Purchase Order
Changes can be made to a Purchase Order at any time while it is in Draft
status. A Draft Purchase Order does not enter the Created status until it
is confirmed.
To add items to a Draft Purchase Order, in the Inbound Order Detail
screen:
1. Enter details in the Order Lines panel.
2. Click Save. You can now confirm the order.
3.1.2 Confirming a Draft Purchase Order
To confirm a Purchase Order:
1. Search for, or create, an open Purchase Order in the Draft status.
2. From the Inbound Order action bar, click Confirm. The Inbound Order
now displays in Created status.
![](asset-39.png)
Creating an Advance Ship Notice
Performing Inbound Tasks 13
3.2 Creating an Advance Ship Notice
Shipments (ASNs) are transmitted to warehouses through EDI
downloads, fax, or e-mail, and also when a trailer arrives with no prior
notice.
The shipment entry console lets you manually create shipments from fax,
e-mail or telephone conversations. ASNs can also be created for those
trailers that arrive with no prior notice.
To create an inbound shipment:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Inbound > Create Inbound
Shipment. The Shipment Entry screen displays.
2. In Document Type, select the document type associated with the
shipment you are creating. Valid values are 'Purchase Order' or
'Transfer Order'.
3. In Ship Node, enter the shipping node associated with the shipment.
This represents the seller's ship node.
4. In Buyer, enter the buyer associated with the shipment you want to
create, if applicable.
5. In Seller, enter the seller associated with the shipment you want to
create.
6. In Order #, enter the purchase order number associated with the
shipment.
7. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
8. Click Create Shipment to create the Advance Ship Notice.
3.2.1 Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides
To set the supervisory overrides, in the Shipment Entry screen:
1. From the action bar, click Supervisory Overrides. The Shipment
Supervisory Overrides screen displays.
2. Select the check boxes of the applicable overrides.
Note: The Bill To address and order lines must be entered
before a draft order can be confirmed.
![](asset-3a.png)
14 User Guide
Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment Modifications
3. Click OK.
3.3 Searching for Inbound Order Shipments
The following Inbound Shipment Search screens let you search for
shipments to receive based on different criteria:
QInbound Order Shipment Search By Status screen
QInbound Order Shipment Search By Date screen
QInbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier screen
QInbound Order Shipment Search By Item screen
To navigate to the search screens:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Inbound > Inbound Shipment
Console. Initially, the Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
screen displays. Select the applicable search view from the Views
drop-down list.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Inbound Order
Shipment List screen.
3.4 Viewing the Audit Trail for Shipment
Modifications
In addition to shipment status audits, you can view the audit trail for
modifications made to an inbound shipment, shipment lines, or both.
This section provides instructions for viewing shipment modifications,
such as modifying a carrier or service, ship-to address, adding or
removing a shipment from a load, or adding or deleting shipment
instructions.
To view a shipment audit trail:
1. From the navigation bar, click Inbound > Inbound Shipment Console.
The Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status screen displays.
2. Enter the applicable search parameters, and click Search. The
Shipment List screen displays.
![](asset-3b.png)
Printing Documents or Labels
Performing Inbound Tasks 15
3. Select the shipment number for which you want to view details.
4. From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.
5. From the Shipment action bar, click . The Shipment Audits screen
displays, which provides complete visibility to modifications made to
an inbound shipment, shipment lines, or both.
3.5 Creating a Load
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation enables you to create a load
containing one or more complete shipments. The load must have a set
origin and destination, but it can have multiple intermediate stops.
Shipments can be added to a load at its origin or at any intermediate
stop. The shipments contained in the load can be delivered to any stop
between the origin and destination and can belong to multiple
Enterprises. Partial shipments cannot be included in a load.
To create a load:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Inbound > Create Load. The Create
Load screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Save. The Load Details screen displays. For more information
about the Load Details screen, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.
3.6 Printing Documents or Labels
To print a document or label:
1. Search for the applicable shipments or containers. For more
information about searching for inbound order shipments, see
Searching for Inbound Order Shipments.
2. From the inbound shipment list or inbound container list, select the
check boxes of the applicable shipment or container.
3. Do any of the following:
QFrom the action bar, click Print. The Print screen displays.
![](asset-3c.png)
16 User Guide
Receiving Inventory
QFrom the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order
Shipment Details or Container Details screen displays. From the
action bar, click Print. The Print screen displays.
3.7 Receiving Inventory
The Sterling WMS lets you control the receipt process in a warehouse. It
supports the least automated warehouse through paper-based processes.
It also supports the most automated warehouses that use MHEs for
receipts. A warehouse can configure its own receiving preferences to
characterize the flow of inventory from the receiving dock to other
departments and zones of a warehouse.
A receipt in the Sterling WMS is made against a purchase order or
shipment. The Sterling WMS tracks cases or pallets with contents at a
shipment level, if available. It also supports blind receipts. A warehouse
may use any or all of these methods to receive its inventory. The Sterling
WMS places constraints for each of these methods.
3.7.1 Receiving Inventory using High Speed Data Entry
Screens This section explains how to receive inventory in the Sterling WMS using
the Receive HSDE.
The following use-cases are explained in detail:
QNavigating to the Receive Details Screen
QReceiving Expected Containers
QBuilding Cases or Pallets
QReceiving Blind Receipts
QOver-Receiving
QCapturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
3.7.1.1 Navigating to the Receive Details Screen
To access the Receive Details screen, from the navigation bar of the
Warehouse Management System module, click Inbound > Receive. The
Receive Details screen displays.
![](asset-3d.png)
Receiving Inventory
Performing Inbound Tasks 17
3.7.1.2 Receiving Expected Containers
To receive expected containers:
1. Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".
2. In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.
3. In Pallet ID/Case ID, enter the pallet SCM or case SCM.
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Do any of the following:
QClick Close Pallet or press Alt+P.
QClick Close Case or press Alt+C.
3.7.1.3 Building Cases or Pallets
To build cases or pallets out of loose SKUs that are available in the
shipment:
1. Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".
2. In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.
3. In Pallet ID/Case ID, enter the new pallet SCM or case SCM.
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Do any of the following:
QClick Close Pallet or press Alt+P.
QClick Close Case or press Alt+C.
Note: If the Do Not Verify Case Contents option is disabled,
and in the Applications Manager, under Receiving Prefer-
ences, if the "Force Case Content entry" option is selected,
verification of the contents packaged into the case is forced.
For more information, see the Sterling Warehouse Manage-
ment System: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-3e.png)
18 User Guide
Receiving Inventory
3.7.1.4 Receiving Blind Receipts
When you receive loose items in a warehouse for a shipment which has
no order and shipment line, you are receiving a blind receipt.
To receive a blind receipt:
1. Create an inbound shipment with no shipment lines. For more
information about creating an inbound shipment, see Section 3.2,
"Creating an Advance Ship Notice".
2. Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".
3. In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Do any of the following:
QClick Close Pallet or press Alt+P.
QClick Close Case or press Alt+C.
3.7.1.5 Over-Receiving
The process of receiving excess quantity is based on the shipment
attributes. For a list of defined over-receipt quantity attributes, see
Table 3–1.
To over-receive:
1. Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".
2. In Shipment #, enter or scan the shipment number.
3. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
4. Do any of the following:
QClick Close Pallet or press Alt+P.
QClick Close Case or press Alt+C.
![](asset-3f.png)
Receiving Inventory
Performing Inbound Tasks 19
3.7.1.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
Table 3–1 Over-Receipt Quantity Attributes
Order
Exists on
the
System If Manual
Shipment
Does
Shipment
have
Lines
Is
Suppress
Overage
Check set Over-Receipt Quantity
Y Y Y Y Receive any quantity for
the existing shipment
lines.
YNYY
NNYY
Y Y Y N Receive up to receiving
preference overage limit
against the order line.
YYNN
YNYN
YNNN
N Y Y N Receive up to receiving
preference overage limit
against the shipment
line.
N N Y N Receive up to receiving
preference overage limit
against the shipment
line.
Y Y N Y Receive any quantity for
the existing order lines.
N Y N Y Receive any item, any
quantity.
Note: You can capture the tag and serial attributes only if
the node that is receiving inventory is configured to
capture tags and has serial tracking enabled, when
receiving inventory, or when performing all operations
within the node. For more information about capturing the
tag and serial attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
![](asset-40.png)
20 User Guide
Receiving Inventory
To capture the extended attributes for an item:
1. Open the Receive Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Receive Details screen, see Section 3.7.1.1,
"Navigating to the Receive Details Screen".
2. In the Item ID field, scan an item. If the item is serial-tracked,
tag-tracked, or time sensitive, then capture the item’s extended
attributes.
For more information about capturing the extended attributes, see
Section 6.5, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
3.7.2 Receiving Inventory Using Paper and Recording on
System Later
This section explains how to receive inventory in the Sterling WMS using
paper, and record the receipt on the system later.
The following use-cases are explained in detail:
QNavigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen
QStarting a Receipt
QRecording Paper-Based Receipts
QReceiving Expected Containers
QBuilding Cases or Pallets
QOver-Receiving
QCapturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
3.7.2.1 Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen
To navigate to the Inbound Order Shipment Details screen:
1. Search for the required inbound order shipments. For more
information about identifying the inbound order shipment, see
Section 3.3, "Searching for Inbound Order Shipments".
2. From the shipment list, select the check boxes of the applicable
shipments.
3. From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.
![](asset-41.png)
Receiving Inventory
Performing Inbound Tasks 21
3.7.2.2 Starting a Receipt
To start a receipt:
1. Navigate to the Inbound Order Shipment Details screen for the
applicable shipments. For more information about navigating to the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen, see Section 3.7.2.1,
"Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen".
2. From the action bar, click Start Receipt. The Starting a Receipt screen
displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields.
4. Click Save.
3.7.2.3 Recording Paper-Based Receipts
To record paper-based receipt details:
1. Navigate to the Inbound Order Shipment Details screen for the
applicable shipments. For more information about navigating to the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen, see Section 3.7.2.1,
"Navigating to the Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen".
2. From the action bar, click Report/Record receipt. The Receive screen
displays.
QIf receipts are not available, the Starting a Receipt screen displays.
For more information about starting a receipt, see
Section 3.7.2.2, "Starting a Receipt".
QIf multiple receipts are available, the Receive screen displays.
Select the check boxes of the applicable receipts you want to
receive and click Proceed. The Receive screen displays.
3. In the Lines to Receive table, enter the quantity you want to receive
against each shipment line.
4. Click Save.
3.7.2.4 Receiving Expected Containers
To receive expected containers:
1. Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".
![](asset-42.png)
22 User Guide
Receiving Inventory
2. To receive expected pallets, in the Lines To Receive area, click Pallet
ID and enter the pallet SCM.
To receive expected cases, in the Lines To Receive area, click Case ID
and enter the case SCM.
3. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
4. If receiving a pallet, check Pallet Completely Received to close
the pallet.
If receiving a case, check Case Completely Received to close the
case.
3.7.2.5 Building Cases or Pallets
To build cases or pallets out of loose SKUs that are available in the
shipment:
1. Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".
2. If receiving an expected pallet, in Pallet ID, enter the new pallet SCM.
If receiving an expected case, in Case ID, enter the new case SCM.
3. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
4. If building a pallet, check Pallet Completely Received to close the
pallet.
If building a case, check Case Completely Received to close the
case.
Note: If the Do Not Verify Case Contents box is checked,
and in the Applications Manager, under Receiving Prefer-
ences, if the Force Case Content entry box is checked, verifi-
cation of the contents packaged into the case is not
necessary. For more information, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide. Also, you need not
enter other information to receive the container, after scan-
ning the case or pallet.
![](asset-43.png)
Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps
Performing Inbound Tasks 23
3.7.2.6 Over-Receiving
The process of receiving excess quantity is based on the shipment
attributes. For a list of defined over-receipt quantity attributes, see
Table 3–1.
To over-receive:
1. Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".
2. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
3. If receiving a pallet, check Pallet Completely Received to close
the pallet.
If receiving a case, check Case Completely Received to close the
case.
3.7.2.7 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
To capture the extended attributes for an item:
1. Open the Receive screen. For more information about navigating to
the Receive screen, see Section 3.7.2.3, "Recording Paper-Based
Receipts".
2. In the Lines To Receive area > Shipment Line list search for the
appropriate Item ID. If the item is serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or time
sensitive, then enter the item’s extended attributes.
3.8 Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps
Once inventory is received, it is inspected. Inspecting receipts involves:
QRecording inspection details
QViewing next disposition suggestions based on the current disposition
status
QEntering appropriate inspection comments while inspecting an item
QViewing item inspection details for a receipt
QSearching for receipts by disposition code
QInspecting receipts from receipt summary screen
![](asset-44.png)
24 User Guide
Inspecting Receipts in Multiple Steps
3.8.1 Inspecting a Receipt
To inspect a receipt:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inbound> Inspect Receipt to inspect
inbound receipts and Returns > Inspect Receipt to inspect return
receipts. The Inspect Receipt screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Proceed. The Inspect Return Receipt Details screen displays.
3.8.2 Inspecting Receipt Lines
You can view the receipt item details and receipt lines that are already
inspected and also enter the inspection details for receipts that are not
inspected.
To inspect a receipt line:
1. In the Inspect Receipt screen, click Proceed. The Inspect Return
Receipt Details screen displays.
2. In New Disposition, select the disposition code from the list.
3. In Disposition Qty, enter the disposition quantity.
4. Click Save.
5. Click Close.
Note: The screens mentioned in these section appear
while inspecting return receipts. However, since the steps
required for inspecting receipts are the same for both
Inbound Orders and Returns, the fields in the screen are
the same.
![](asset-45.png)
Adjusting Receipts
Performing Inbound Tasks 25
3.9 Closing a Receipt
To close an inbound order’s shipment receipt:
1. Search for the applicable shipments. For more information about
searching for inbound order shipments, see Searching for Inbound
Order Shipments.
2. From the list, select the check boxes of the applicable shipments.
3. From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.
4. From the Shipment action bar, click . The Receipts window
displays.
5. From the list, select the check boxes of the applicable receipts.
6. Click Close Receipt.
3.10 Adjusting Receipts
To make adjustments to shipment receipts:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inbound > UnReceive. The Receipt
Adjustment screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Proceed. The Adjust Receipt screen displays, which enables you
to validate the criteria you entered in the Receipt Adjustment screen
against the receipt number, for filtering the results.
Note:
QTo inspect an item, receive the item with non-final
disposition code. For more information about creating
disposition codes, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
QYou can inspect receipts that are closed.
![](asset-46.png)
26 User Guide
Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment
4. In the Adjust Receipt screen, click Adjust. The Modification Reason
screen displays, which enables you to enter appropriate reasons for
adjusting the received quantity.
5. In the Modification Reason screen, click OK.
3.11 Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an
Inbound Order’s Shipment
You can manage discrepancies found while receiving inbound shipments.
To manage the receiving discrepancies of an inbound shipment:
1. Search for the applicable shipments. For more information about
searching for inbound order shipments, see Searching for Inbound
Order Shipments.
2. From the shipment list, select the check boxes of the applicable
inbound shipments.
3. From the action bar, click View Details. The Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen displays.
4. From the action bar, click . The Shipment Receipt Discrepancy
screen displays.
5. Click Manage Receiving Discrepancies. The Manage Receiving
Discrepancies screen displays.
6. If the Discrepancy Reason and Reason Quantity fields are greyed out,
click Reopen Reason Entry to enable you to make changes as
needed.
7. Adjust Discrepancy Reason and Reason Quantity so that the sum of
the Discrepancy Reasons and Reason Quantities add up to the
Discrepancy Quantity.
8. When you have finished the adjustments, click Save.
9. Click Reason Entry Complete. If your adjustments add up correctly,
then the fields are grayed out. If the adjustments do not add up
Note: The unreceive option can also be used to unreceive
a complete case or pallet and loose SKUs.
![](asset-47.png)
Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment
Performing Inbound Tasks 27
correctly but you need to close the window, you can finish working
with the receiving discrepancies later.
You can mark the reason entry as complete only after entering the
discrepancy reason for the entire discrepancy quantity.
10. Click Close.
Note: Use the recordReceivingDiscrepancy API to record
discrepancies while receiving an inbound shipment. For
more information about the recordReceivingDiscrepancy
API, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Javadocs.
![](asset-48.png)
28 User Guide
Managing Discrepancies in Receiving an Inbound Order’s Shipment
![](asset-49.png)
Managing Inventory 29
4
Managing Inventory
Operations in a warehouse are broken into different processes such as
receiving, picking, packing, VAS, and returns. It is critical to capture and
track inventory at granular levels for these processes. Visibility is
required at a granular level to provide comprehensive management of
inventory in a warehouse. Various reports are generated to track
inventory movement across an enterprise.
The Sterling WMS provides comprehensive functionality to track, monitor,
and maintain inventory in a warehouse. Inventory visibility is provided
through the Location Inventory Details screen to provide granular
information, such as:
QComprehensive visibility of inventory at both enterprise and node
level.
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
serial number or lot number at a warehouse location.
QThe ability to alter inventory at a location.
QThe ability to modify granular inventory attributes at a location.
QVisibility of audits of inventory changes at the location level.
This chapter explains in detail the following use cases:
QSearching for Inventory
QManaging Count
QAdjusting Inventory
QChanging Inventory Attributes
QCleaning Out Accounting Bin
![](asset-4a.png)
30 User Guide
Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail
QCreating Move Requests
QViewing an Inventory Audit Trail
QPrinting Stock Keeping Unit Labels
4.1 Searching for Inventory
Using the inventory search screens, you can perform:
QLocation Inventory Search By Item
QLocation Inventory Search By Container
QLocation Inventory Search By Additional Attributes
QLocation Inventory Search By Segment
QLocation Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
To navigate to the search screens:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Location Inventory
Console. Initially, the Location Inventory Search By Item screen
displays. Select the applicable search view from the Views drop-down
list.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Location Inventory
screen.
4.2 Viewing an Inventory Audit Trail
A comprehensive inventory audit trail is provided to view item or
container audit details that occur in a warehouse. Audits are written for
each transaction along with the appropriate reference values and item
attributes for tracking purposes. To view inventory audits:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Location Inventory
Console.
2. From the Entities menu, select Location Inventory Audit. The Location
Inventory Audit Search By Item screen displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields and click Search. The
Location Inventory Audit List screen displays.
![](asset-4b.png)
Putting an Item or Item Category on Count
Managing Inventory 31
4. From the Location Inventory Audit List, Item Information or Location
Inventory Audit List, Container Information panel, select the
checkboxes of the items or containers whose audit trail you want to
view.
5. Click View Details. The Location Inventory Audit Details screen
displays.
4.3 Managing Count
Products or product categories may be counted on a regular or on an ad
hoc basis to validate the accuracy of the product inventory.
The following use cases are explained in detail here:
QPutting an Item or Item Category on Count
QManaging Count Requests
QInvoking Count Service
QManaging Count Tasks
QPutting Tasks on Hold
QReporting Count Task Completion
4.4 Putting an Item or Item Category on Count
To put an Item or Item Category on Count from the Create Count
Request screen:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Inventory > Create Count Request.
The Create Count Request screen displays.
2. Enter the information in the applicable fields.
3. Choose the item or item category that you want to put on count:
QTo put an item on count: Choose By Item, and enter relevant
item information.
Note: An item or item classification may be put on count
only if an enterprise has been specified.
![](asset-4c.png)
32 User Guide
Invoking Count Service
QTo put an item classification on count: Choose By Item
Classification, and enter relevant item classification
information.
4. Choose Create Count Request. The new count request displays in the
Count Request Details screen.
4.5 Managing Count Requests
To manage the existing count requests from the Count Request List
screen:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Inventory > Count Console.
2. Navigate to the Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes
screen OR the Count Request Search By Count Criteria screen.
3. Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The
Count Request List screen displays.
4. Select the relevant Count Requests and choose the appropriate
action:
QChoose View Details to view the details of the selected Count
Requests. The Count Request Details screen displays. From this
screen, you can Accept Variance in the inventory.
QChoose Cancel to cancel the selected Count Requests. The
Cancellation Reason screen displays to capture the reason for
cancelling the request.
4.6 Invoking Count Service
You can use the Invoke Count Service screen to create additional count
requests.
To create additional count requests:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Inventory > Invoke Count Service.
The Invoke Count Service screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Proceed.
![](asset-4d.png)
Putting Tasks on Hold
Managing Inventory 33
4.7 Managing Count Tasks
To manage existing count tasks from the Task List or Task Detail screen.
1. From the navigation bar, choose Tasks > Task Console.
2. You can search for Tasks by:
a. Zone (See Task Search By Zone screen)
b. Inventory attributes (See Task Search By Inventory screen)
c. References (See Task Search By Reference screen)
d. Exception (See Task Search By Exception screen)
e. Date (See Task Search By Date screen)
3. Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The Task
List screen displays.
4. Alternatively, you can navigate to the Task List screen by choosing
View Count Tasks from the Count Request Details screen.
5. Select the relevant Count Tasks and choose the appropriate action:
QChoose View Details to view the details of the selected Count
Tasks. The Task Detail screen displays. From this screen, you can
Hold, Release, Cancel, or Complete count tasks.
Q Choose Assign To User to assign the selected count tasks to a
user. The Assign to User screen displays.
QChoose Reprioritize to update the priority of the selected count
tasks. The Reprioritize screen displays.
QChoose Hold to put the selected count tasks on hold. The Hold
Reason screen displays.
QChoose Release to release the selected a count tasks, which had
been put on hold.
QChoose Cancel to cancel the selected count tasks. The Cancel
Task Reason screen displays.
4.8 Putting Tasks on Hold
To put a count task on hold or release a count task that has been on hold
from the Task List OR the Task Detail screen:
![](asset-4e.png)
34 User Guide
Reporting Count Task Completion
1. From the navigation bar, choose Tasks > Task Console.
2. You can search for Tasks by:
a. Zone (See Task Search By Zone screen)
b. Inventory attributes (See Task Search By Inventory screen)
c. References (See Task Search By Reference screen)
d. Exception (See Task Search By Exception screen)
e. Date (See Task Search By Date screen)
3. Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The Task
List screen displays.
4. Alternatively, you can navigate to the Task List screen by choosing
View Count Tasks from the Count Request Details screen.
5. Select the relevant Count Tasks and choose the appropriate action:
QChoose View Details to view the details of the selected Count
Task. The Task Detail screen displays. From this screen, you can
Hold, Release, Cancel, or Complete a count task.
QChoose Hold to put a count task on hold. The Hold Reason screen
displays.
QChoose Release to release a count task that has been put on
hold.
4.9 Reporting Count Task Completion
You can report the completion of a count task either though the console
or the mobile terminal. In the console, you can mark a count task as
complete from the Task Detail screen:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Tasks > Task Console.
2. You can search for Tasks by:
a. Zone (See Task Search By Zone screen)
b. Inventory attributes (See Task Search By Inventory screen)
c. References (See Task Search By Reference screen)
d. Exception (See Task Search By Exception screen)
![](asset-4f.png)
Creating Move Requests
Managing Inventory 35
e. Date (See Task Search By Date screen)
3. Enter the applicable search parameters, and choose Search. The Task
List screen displays.
4. Alternatively, you can navigate to the Task List screen by choosing
View Count Tasks from the Count Request Details screen.
5. Select the relevant count task and choose View Details. The Task
Detail screen displays.
6. Choose Complete to record the completion of the count task. The
Record Count Result Details screen displays.
4.10 Creating Move Requests
Move requests can be automated or created manually. Whenever there is
a demand for a certain product or quantity, move requests are created
and released to the appropriate department. When released, tasks are
generated for the move requests. For example, when a customer
requests shipments with serial numbers, move requests are created for
those shipments and released to the pack station. Move requests can be
created:
QFor Moving Inventory to a Specified Location
QFor Moving Inventory that Exists in a Location
4.10.1 For Moving Inventory to a Specified Location
To create a move request to move inventory to a specific location:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Create Move Request.
The Create Move Request screen displays.
2. On the Create Move Request screen, Create Move Request, Move
Request Items panel, enter the item and quantity that you want to
move.
3. Click Save.
4.10.2 For Moving Inventory that Exists in a Location
To create a move request for inventory existing in a location:
![](asset-50.png)
36 User Guide
Adjusting Inventory
1. Search for inventory. For more information about performing an
inventory search, see Section 4.1, "Searching for Inventory".
2. Select checkboxes of the applicable locations. The Location Inventory
Details screen displays.
3. In the Location Inventory Details screen, select the checkboxes for
the inventory you want to move.
4. Click Create Move Request. The Create Move Request screen displays.
5. Enter information in the applicable fields.
6. Click OK.
4.11 Adjusting Inventory
From time-to-time, it may be necessary to adjust inventory. For
example, a spot location count (separate from scheduled inventory
counts) may reveal shrinkage. In this case, the easiest method for
correcting inventory at that location is to perform an inventory
adjustment. You can adjust the item quantity at the location level or on a
license plate. You can adjust inventory:
QFor a New Product
QFor an Existing Product
4.11.1 For a New Product
To create inventory for a new product at a specific location and adjust
the quantity:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Adjust Location
Inventory. The Adjust Location Inventory Criteria screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Proceed. The Adjust Location Inventory Details screen displays.
4. Adjust the item quantity as needed.
4.11.2 For an Existing Product
To adjust the quantity for an existing product:
![](asset-51.png)
Changing Inventory Attributes
Managing Inventory 37
1. Search for inventory. For more information about performing an
inventory search, see Section 4.1, "Searching for Inventory".
2. Select the checkboxes for the applicable locations. The Location
Inventory Details screen displays.
3. In the Location Inventory Details screen, select the checkboxes for
the inventory you want to adjust.
4. Click Adjust Location Inventory. The Adjust Location Inventory Details
screen displays.
5. In the Quantity panel, enter the new quantity for the item.
6. In the Modification Reasons panel, enter the applicable adjustment
reason code.
7. Click Save.
4.12 Changing Inventory Attributes
You can change an item’s inventory attributes, such as product class,
inventory status, country of origin, ship by date, FIFO number, or tag
number without changing the on hand quantity. To change inventory
attributes for an item, you:
QFind Specific Inventory
QChange Attributes Across Locations
4.12.1 Find Specific Inventory
To find specific inventory for an item:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Change Location
Inventory Attributes. The Change Location Inventory Attributes
(Criteria) screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields and click Proceed. The
Change Location Inventory Attributes screen displays.
3. In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes panel, enter the new attributes.
4. In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Audit Reason panel,
enter the reasons why the inventory was adjusted.
![](asset-52.png)
38 User Guide
Cleaning Out Accounting Bin
5. Click Save.
4.12.2 Change Attributes Across Locations
To change an item's inventory attributes across locations:
1. Search for inventory. The Location Inventory screen displays.
For more information about performing an inventory search, see
Section 4.1, "Searching for Inventory".
2. Do any of the following:
a. Select a checkbox for which you want to enter the new attributes.
Click Change Inventory Attributes. The Change Location Inventory
Attributes screen displays.
b. Select checkboxes of the applicable locations.
–Click View Details. The Location Inventory Details screen
displays.
–In the Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory Details
panel, select checkboxes of the applicable inventory for which
you want to change attributes.
–Click Change Inventory Attributes. The Change Location
Inventory Attributes screen displays.
3. In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes panel, enter the new attributes.
4. In the Change Location Inventory Attributes, Audit Reason panel,
enter modification reasons for adjusting the inventory.
5. Click Save.
4.13 Cleaning Out Accounting Bin
Warehouses clean out the inventory in accounting bin locations at the
end of a physical or cycle count process.
![](asset-53.png)
Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels
Managing Inventory 39
To clean out the inventory at an accounting bin location:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Accounting Bin
Adjustment. The Accounting Bin Adjustment Details Criteria screen
displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Proceed. The Accounting Bin Adjustment Details screen displays.
4. In the Accounting Bin Adjustment Reasons panel, enter the applicable
adjustment reason code.
5. Click Save.
4.14 Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels
The SKU labels are applied on hazardous items.
To print SKU labels:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inventory > Print SKU Labels.
2. The Print Stock Keeping Unit Search By Item screen displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields and click Search. The Item
List screen displays.
4. Select the checkbox of an item for which you want to print the SKU
label.
5. Click Print. The Print screen displays.
The following label format depicts the default label printed for hazardous
items:
Note: Before cleaning the inventory at an accounting bin
location, you need to understand the functionality of the
ZEROOUT_LOCATION_INV transaction. For more information
about this transaction, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-54.png)
40 User Guide
Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels
Table 4–1 Hazmat SKU Label
Fields
DOT SHIPPING NAME The proper shipping name.
ITEM The item identifier.
HAZARD CLASS The item’s hazard class.
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER The four-digit number that identifies the hazardous
items (such as explosives and poisonous materials) of
commercial importance. This is widely used in
international commerce, such as when labelling the
contents of the shipment containers.
PACKING GROUP Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous item
within its hazard class or division and the type of
packaging required for the item. The valid values are:
Packing Group I - high danger, Packing Group II -
medium danger, Packing Group III - Low danger.
DOT LABEL CODE Indicates the label code of the hazardous item.
![](asset-55.png)
Performing Value-Added Services 41
5
Performing Value-Added Services
The Sterling WMS supports VAS operations, which include creating work
orders for services.
A work order captures activities and the completion status of each
activity that is required to perform services such as:
QKitting–assembling components for a kit item.
QDe Kitting–disassembling a kit item. This may be done to acquire an
individual component to complete another order.
QCompliance–value-added service that is performed to supply an
item to a specific buyer for made-to-customer orders.
QInventory Change–converting inventory from one UOM to another.
QProvided Service–service performed at a customer site.
QDelivery Service–service performed for a product delivery to the
customer site.
You can include one or more service activities such as assembling
components, applying logos, or packing components in a work order. You
can assign a sequence number to indicate the order in which you want to
perform the activities.
This chapter explains the various VAS processes and how you can
perform them. It covers the following use cases:
QCreating a Work Order
QSearching for Work Orders
QConfirming Activities Included in the Work Order
![](asset-56.png)
42 User Guide
Searching for Work Orders
5.1 Creating a Work Order
You can create a work order for a service.
To create a work order:
1. From the navigation bar, choose VAS > Create Work Order. The
Create Work Order screen displays.
2. In Service Item Group, select the appropriate service item group
associated with the work order.
3. In Service Item ID, enter the identifier of the service item.
4. In Item ID, enter the identifier of the parent item or kit item.
5. In Unit Of Measure, select the appropriate UOM.
6. In Product Class, select the appropriate product class.
7. In Requested Quantity, enter the quantity of parent items required.
8. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
9. Click Proceed. The Create Work Order screen displays.
10. Enter information in the applicable fields.
11. Click Save. The Work Order Details screen displays.
5.2 Searching for Work Orders
The following Work Order Search screens let you search for work orders
based on different criteria:
QWork Order Search By Item screen
QWork Order Search By Container screen
QWork Order Search By Date screen
QWork Order Search By Activity screen
QWork Order Search By Components screen
To navigate to the search screens:
1. From the navigation bar, choose VAS > Work Order Console. Initially,
the Work Order Search By Item screen displays. Select the applicable
search view from the Views drop-down list.
![](asset-57.png)
Searching for Work Orders
Performing Value-Added Services 43
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Work Order List
screen.
5.2.1 Viewing Work Order Details
You can view the details of the work order you created in the Work Order
Details screen.
To view the details of a work order:
1. From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.
2. From the action bar, click View Details. The Work Order Details screen
displays.
5.2.2 Viewing Work Order Tasks
You can view the tasks associated with a work order in the Work Order
Details screen.
To view the tasks associated with a work order:
1. From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.
2. From the action bar, click View Tasks. The Task List screen displays.
5.2.3 Viewing Move Requests
You can view the move requests associated with a work order in the
Move Request List screen.
To view the move requests associated with a work order:
1. From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.
2. From the action bar, click View Move Requests. The Move Request List
screen displays.
![](asset-58.png)
44 User Guide
Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order
5.2.4 Confirming Work Orders
To confirm a work order, you must confirm all service activities included
in the work order.
To confirm a work order:
1. From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.
2. From the action bar, click Confirm. The VAS Station screen displays.
For more information about confirming activities included in a work
order, see Section 5.3, "Confirming Activities Included in the Work
Order".
5.2.5 Cancelling Work Orders
You can cancel a work order.
To cancel a work order:
1. From the Work Order List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable work orders.
2. From the action bar, click Cancel. The Cancellation Reason screen
displays.
3. In Cancellation Reason Code, enter the applicable cancellation reason
code.
4. Click Ok.
5.3 Confirming Activities Included in the Work
Order To confirm or complete the work order, you must confirm all activities
included in the work order.
To confirm activities included in a work order:
1. From the navigation bar, click VAS > VAS Station. The VAS Station
screen displays.
2. In Scan, enter or scan the work order number or container number.
![](asset-59.png)
Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order
Performing Value-Added Services 45
3. In Location, select the VAS station where you want to perform the
activity.
4. In Activities panel, the activities associated with the service displays.
Select the activity that you want to confirm.
5. In Qty To Process, provided in the Quantity panel, enter the item
quantity you want to process.
6. Click Save.
If the item or any of its components is serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or
time sensitive, capture the extended attributes of the item. For more
information about capturing an the extended attributes of the item,
see the appropriate section in this guide.
7. To confirm or complete the work order, repeat Step 4 through Step 6
until the item’s quantity to be confirmed for all activities equals to
zero.
5.3.1 Capturing the Extended Attributes of Multiple
Serial-Tracked and Serialized Kits in a VAS Station
You can confirm or complete a work order that includes more than one
kit at a time if all the kits are serial-tracked and the components are
serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or normal items.
The procedure to capture the extended attributes of multiple quantities
of serial-tracked kits with serial-tracked, tag-tracked, or normal
components is as follows:
1. In the Qty To Process field provided in the Quantity panel in the VAS
Station screen, enter the number of serial-tracked kits you want to
process.
Note: You can capture the tag attributes for a
tag-controlled item only if the node confirming the work
order is configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operations performed within the node. For more
information about capturing the tag attributes, refer to the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
![](asset-5a.png)
46 User Guide
Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order
For more information about performing activities in the VAS Station
screen, see Section 5.3, "Confirming Activities Included in the Work
Order".
2. Click Save.
3. In the Serial Entry screen that is displayed, enter the serial number
of the first serial-tracked kit in the Serial # field.
4. If a tag-tracked or tag-controlled item is present, the Tag Entry
screen is displayed. Enter the Batch #, Lot #, and so on as
applicable, and click Close.
5. In the Serial Entry screen that is displayed, you can either enter the
serial numbers of the components of the first serial-tracked kit one
after the other in the Serial # field, or click the Enter Serial Range
button to enter the serial numbers of the start and end components.
For more information about the fields available in the Serial Entry
screen, see Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended
Attributes", and Section 28.2, "Serial Entry".
6. To confirm or complete the work order, repeat steps 3-6 for the
remaining serial-tracked kits until the value in the Qty Completed
Note: You can capture the tag attributes for a
tag-controlled item only if the node confirming the work
order is configured to capture the tag attributes in all the
operations performed within the node. For more
information about capturing the tag attributes, refer to the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
Note: For a serial-tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined, but secondary information is not
provided, the Enter Serial Range button is not displayed.
Note: If the first serial-tracked kit contains different types
of components, perform step 5 for all the components.
![](asset-5b.png)
Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order
Performing Value-Added Services 47
field in the Quantity panel in the VAS Station screen equals the
number of serial-tracked kits entered in step 1.
Note: The Enter Serial Range button is available only for
the serial-tracked items in a serial-tracked kit, and not for
the serial-tracked kit.
![](asset-5c.png)
48 User Guide
Confirming Activities Included in the Work Order
![](asset-5d.png)
Performing Outbound Tasks 49
6
Performing Outbound Tasks
The Outbound Shipment Console provides information about outbound
shipments and shipment containers. This console provides details about
sellers, node users, and carriers necessary to coordinate and ensure
on-time delivery of shipments.
You can either include a sales order release into an existing outbound
shipment or create an outbound shipment for a set of orders.
An outbound shipment can be included in a delivery plan by attaching it
to a load. For more information about managing delivery plans and loads,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
This chapter explains the various outbound tasks and how you can
perform them. It covers the following use cases:
QManaging Outbound Shipment Tasks
QOutbound Execution
QManaging Manifests
QScheduling Dock Appointments
QPlanning Resources for Outbound Tasks
6.1 Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks
This section provides instructions to complete the following tasks using
the Application Console:
QCreating an Outbound Shipment
QSearching for Outbound Shipments
QModifying an Outbound Shipment
![](asset-5e.png)
50 User Guide
Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks
QAdding Holds to an Outbound Shipment
6.1.1 Creating an Outbound Shipment
You can use the Shipment Entry screen to manually create an outbound
shipment for a sales order or transfer order.
To create an outbound shipment:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Create Outbound
Shipment. The Shipment Entry screen displays.
2. In Enterprise, select the enterprise associated with the shipment.
3. In Shipment #, enter a number to identify the shipment, if applicable.
If you do not specify the number, the system generates a unique
shipment number.
4. In Buyer, enter the buyer associated with the shipment you are
creating, if applicable.
5. In Seller, enter the seller associated with the shipment you are
creating.
6. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
7. Click Create Shipment. The Shipment Details screen displays.
8. In the Shipment Lines panel, enter the details of the items you want
to add as part of the shipment.
9. Enter other information if applicable.
10. Click Save.
6.1.1.1 Setting Up Shipment Supervisory Overrides
You can set up supervisory overrides for a shipment.
To set up supervisory overrides for a shipment, in the Shipment Entry
screen:
1. From the action bar, click Supervisory Overrides.
2. Check the Allow Overage box of the applicable overrides.
3. Click OK.
![](asset-5f.png)
Managing Outbound Shipment Tasks
Performing Outbound Tasks 51
6.1.2 Searching for Outbound Shipments
The following Outbound Shipment Search screens let you search for
outbound shipments based on different criteria:
QOutbound Shipment Search By Status
QOutbound Shipment Search By Date
QOutbound Shipment Search By Carrier
QOutbound Shipment Search By Item
QOutbound Shipment Search By Wave
To navigate to the search screens:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Outbound Shipment
Console. Initially, the Outbound Shipment Search By Status screen
displays. Select the applicable search view from the Views drop-down
list.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Shipment List screen.
6.1.3 Modifying an Outbound Shipment
You can modify certain attributes of a shipment. For example, you can
modify the carrier service for any shipment that has not been shipped.
To modify an outbound shipment:
1. Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about searching for shipments, see
Section 6.1.2, "Searching for Outbound Shipments".
2. Select the check box of the shipment that you want to modify.
3. From the action bar, click Modify Shipment. The Modify Shipment
screen displays.
4. Enter information in the applicable fields.
5. Click OK to save the changes.
![](asset-60.png)
52 User Guide
Outbound Execution
6.1.4 Adding Holds to an Outbound Shipment
You can add holds to a shipment to prevent it from being processed by
transactions or to prevent certain modifications on it.
To add holds to a shipment:
1. Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2,
"Searching for Outbound Shipments".
2. Select the check boxes of the applicable shipments.
3. From the action bar, click View Holds. The View Holds screen displays.
4. From the Shipment Holds inner panel, click Add Holds. The Add Holds
screen displays.
5. In Hold Type, select the appropriate hold type that you want to add to
the shipment.
6. Click Save.
6.2 Outbound Execution
This section provides instructions to complete the following tasks using
the Application Console:
QPick Planning
QPicking
QPacking and Unpacking Containers
QCreating a Load
QAdding Holds to a Load
QAdding Shipments to a Load
6.2.1 Pick Planning
You can create waves to pick inventory for a shipment, specify a pick
strategy for each wave to determine the best process and locations to
use to pick inventory, thus optimizing the labor cost. For more
information about configuring a pick strategy, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-61.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 53
6.2.1.1 Creating a Wave
You can create a wave either manually or automatically by the system.
When waves are created, the system determines the shipments to be
picked. The shipments picked are assigned to a particular shipment
group such as parcel, LTL, and TL shipments. After you assign a
shipment group to each shipment, you can create waves for those
groups.
To create a wave:
1. From the navigation bar choose Outbound > Outbound Shipment
Console.
2. The Shipment Search By Status screen displays. For more
information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2, "Searching for
Outbound Shipments".
3. Enter information in the applicable fields.
4. Click Search. The search results display in the Shipment List screen.
5. Select the check boxes of the applicable shipments for which you
want to create a wave.
6. From the action bar, click Create Wave. The Create Wave screen
displays.
7. Click Create New Wave With Shipment Group and select the
applicable shipment group from the drop-down list.
8. Click Save.
6.2.1.2 Auditing a Wave
When you create a wave, the system allows you to audit the created
wave.
To audit a wave:
1. From the Navigation bar, choose Outbound > Wave Console. The
Wave Search By Status screen displays
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results are displayed in the Wave List
screen.
![](asset-62.png)
54 User Guide
Outbound Execution
4. Click the wave number hyperlink. The Wave Summary screen is
displayed.
5. From the Action bar, click . The Wave Audit screen is displayed.
6.2.1.3 Accepting a Wave
Warehouses can choose to monitor waves that are created and decide to
manually release them. This manual decision is called "accepting a
wave".
Shipments that are not accepted can be included in new waves. You can
accept a wave manually or configure to automatically accept it.
To manually accept a wave, in the Wave Summary screen, click Accept
from the action bar.
6.2.1.4 Releasing a Wave
A warehouse specifies the release time for waves. Shipments that do not
have sufficient inventory are removed from the wave.
You can define a schedule to release waves for picking in a warehouse for
a given day. The release schedule considers waves that are accepted and
ready for release. You can define different times and days to release a
wave that belong to a particular shipment group.
To release a wave, in the Wave Summary screen, click Release from the
action bar.
6.2.1.5 Cancelling a Wave
When you cancel a wave, the pick tasks associated with the wave get
cancelled.
To cancel a wave:
1. In the Wave Summary screen, click Cancel from the action bar. The
Cancel Wave screen displays.
Note: An accepted wave has to be assigned a lane based
on the destination or carrier before releasing it. To assign a
lane to the wave, run the ASSIGN_LANE agent on the
trigger agent.
![](asset-63.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 55
2. Select the Cancellation Code Reason associated with the wave.
3. Enter appropriate reasons for canceling the wave.
4. Click Save.
6.2.2 Picking
You can pick inventory using the Mobile Application. For more information
about picking, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Mobile
Application User Guide.
6.2.3 Packing and Unpacking Containers
Packing operations are performed after completing picking or VAS
operations. Certain pick methods including "sort while pick" and "pick
and pack" combine packing activities along with picking.
This section describes the packing process to be followed at the pack
station.
The pack station is designed for a high-speed operation through a web
browser with minimal mouse usage. This can also be used for data entry
operations where barcodes are not readable or available.
The Pack Station console supports packing of shipment containers for
both system-defined and user-defined containers. For a system-defined
containers, the system automatically closes the shipment or container
after packing the items. However, in a user-defined packing process, the
user has to manually close the shipment or container.
![](asset-64.png)
56 User Guide
Outbound Execution
For more information about the Execution Console Framework, see
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".
You can pack cartons, pallets, or both after picking the items. The
packing process can either be system-defined or user-defined. For more
information about the pack planning process, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
This chapter explains in detail the following use cases:
QNavigating to the Pack Details Screen
QPacking System-Suggested Containers
QPacking User-Defined Containers
QPacking a Container with Unknown Contents
QPacking Single Item Shipments
QCapturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
QAdding Items into a Container
QRemoving Items from a Container
QAdding Inner Packs for an Item
QRemoving Inner Packs for an Item
QPacking Containers for a Shipment
QUnpacking Containers for a Shipment
Note: When the shipment is packed, a "ON_SHIPMENT_
PACK_PROCESS_COMPLETE" event that is associated with
the "ADD_TO_CONTAINER" transaction is raised (if
enabled). You can use this event to print shipping labels,
container labels, or both.
Similarly, when the container is packed, a "ON_
CONTAINER_PACK_PROCESS_COMPLETE" event that is
associated with the "ADD_TO_CONTAINER" transaction is
raised (if enabled). You can use this event to print
container labels.
![](asset-65.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 57
6.2.3.1 Navigating to the Pack Details Screen
To access the Pack Details screen, do one of the following:
1. From the navigation bar, click Outbound > Pack Station.
2. From the Container Details screen, click Pack/Unpack.
3. From the Shipment Details screen, click Pack Container.
6.2.3.2 Packing System-Suggested Containers
In this process, the system suggests the container to use to pack the
items. The Pack Details, Items panel provides a clear snapshot of items
that you need to pack into the container.
To pack system-suggested containers:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. Select the pack location where you are performing the pack
operation.
3. Enter or scan the container SCM.
4. Scan the item you want to pack. If the item is serial tracked, the
Serial Entry screen displays where you enter the item’s serial number.
See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
5. In the Add Quantity field, enter or scan the item quantity you want
add to the container:
a. If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays where you
enter the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an
Item’s Extended Attributes".
b. If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
6. Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The container’s weight displays in the
Actual Weight field. You can modify the weight, if necessary.
![](asset-66.png)
58 User Guide
Outbound Execution
6.2.3.3 Packing User-Defined Containers
This process allows you to select the container to pack the items.
To pack the items into the selected container:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. Select the pack location where you are performing the pack
operation.
3. Scan the container SCM or select New Case or New Pallet.
4. Scan the item you want to pack. If the item is serial tracked, the
Serial Entry screen displays where you capture the item’s serial
number. See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended
Attributes".
5. Scan the number of items you want to add to the container:
a. If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays where you
capture the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing
an Item’s Extended Attributes".
b. If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
6. Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The container’s weight displays in the
Actual Weight field. You can modify the weight, if necessary.
7. After you finish packing the container, click Close Container or press
Alt+C. You can scan the next container, if available.
Note: You cannot convert an inventory LPN into an
outbound container.
Note: If an inventory LPN is picked into a
system-suggested outbound container, the LPN ID is not
retained as the child container of the outbound container.
Only SKU and quantity are updated.
![](asset-67.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 59
Note: Before you scan the next container, clear the
display information on the Pack Details screen by clicking
Reset or pressing Alt+R.
![](asset-68.png)
60 User Guide
Outbound Execution
Note:
QIf the inventory LPN is picked into a user-suggested
outbound container, the LPN ID is retained as a child
container of the outbound container.
QAfter you finish packing for a shipment, click Reset or
press Alt+R to clear the information before you start
packing for the next shipment.
QIn the Pack Station, you cannot convert an inventory
LPN into an outbound container.
QIf an empty row displays between line items, it
indicates that you cannot mix attributes. For more
information about mixing attributes, see the section
Defining Pack Planning in the chapter Configuring
Packing in the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: Configuration Guide.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
You cannot pack or unpack shipments.
Cause
The Shipment Modification Rules for the Pack Shipment
and Unpack Shipment modification types are not set to
"Allow Modification".
Resolution
Ensure that the Shipment Modification Rules for the Pack
Shipment and Unpack Shipment modification types are set
to "Allow Modification".
For more information about modification rule types, see
the Order Document Modification Types table in the Order
Modification Types appendix of the Sterling Distributed
Order Management: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-69.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 61
6.2.3.4 Packing a Container with Unknown Contents
You can pack a container with unknown contents.
To pack a container with unknown contents:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. On the Pack Details, Scan panel, in the Scan Identifier field:
a. Enter or scan the shipment number.
b. Enter or scan the container SCM you want to add to the shipment.
The container you scanned is automatically closed.
3. Click Save.
4. After you finish scanning all containers that you want to add to the
shipment, click Close Shipment or press Alt+S.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
You cannot print packing slips when packing cartons.
Cause
QThe "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event check
box is not selected.
QThe printer may not be connected, the printer power or
green light may not be on, or the printer that you want
to print to is incorrectly selected.
Resolution
QSelect the "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event
check box.
QMake sure your printer is connected, the printer power
or green light is on, and select the correct printer that
you want to use.
QEnsure that custom services that are used on the event
to print the labels are correctly implemented and
configured.
![](asset-6a.png)
62 User Guide
Outbound Execution
6.2.3.5 Packing Single Item Shipments
Using the Pack HSDE screen, you can perform item-driven pack process
and pack shipments that have a single item.
In the Pack Details screen, when you scan a barcode in the Scan
Identifier field, the system identifies the shipment to pack based on the
following sequence:
1. Shipment Number, Batch Number, or Outbound Container
2. Serial number (derives the identifier of the item)
3. Identifier of the item
4. Inventory LPN
a. Single SKU LPN
b. Multi-SKU LPN
Based on the information scanned in the Scan Identifier field, the system
first searches for shipments that have a single item and suggests the
shipment with the earliest ship date that can be fulfilled. However, if
multiple shipments are found with the same criteria, the system suggests
the shipment that has the highest quantity. Later, the system suggests
the container in which to pack the items.
The Pack Details, Items panel provides a clear snapshot of items that you
need to pack into the container.
To pack containers for single item shipments:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. For more information about opening
the Pack Details screen, see Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the Pack
Details Screen".
2. Select the pack station from the drop-down list where you want to
pack the items.
Note: When you scan the identifier of an item, the
system considers only loose SKUs present at the pack
station.
When you scan an inventory LPN, the system suggests
shipments whose total quantity is less than or equal to
inventory LPN quantity.
![](asset-6b.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 63
3. In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the shipment number, serial number,
inventory LPN, or identifier of the item, as applicable. The system
suggests the shipment to pack.
If you scan an inventory LPN, the Select SKU screen displays. Select
the item you want to pack. For more information about selecting the
items to pack, see Section 6.2.3.6.4, "Capturing Item Details from an
Inventory LPN".
4. Scan the item you want to pack. If the item is serial tracked, the
Serial Entry screen displays where you capture the item’s serial
number. For more information about capturing an item’s serial
number, see Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended
Attributes".
5. Scan the number of items you want to add to the container:
a. If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays where you
capture the item’s tag attributes. For more information about
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
When you scan the identifier of a pallet or item in the Scan
Identifier field, an "Task type for Pack process is not
configured" error message displays.
Cause
A task type is not configured under the "Packing" activity
group.
Resolution
Configure at least one task type under the "Packing"
activity group.
Note: When you scan the serial number, inventory LPN
(single level container), or item identifier, the item details
display in the Products panel, and the focus is in the
Quantity field.
![](asset-6c.png)
64 User Guide
Outbound Execution
capturing an item’s tag attributes, see Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing
an Item’s Extended Attributes".
b. If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays where you enter the item’s expiration date. For more
information about capturing an item’s expiration date, see
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
6. Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The weight of the container displays in
the Actual Weight field. You can modify the weight, if necessary.
6.2.3.6 Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes
You can capture the extended attributes for serial tracked, tag tracked,
and time sensitive items.
6.2.3.6.1 Capturing an Item’s Serial Numbers
To capture an item’s serial number:
1. In Serial #, enter the primary and secondary serial numbers of the
item.
2. In the Serial #, enter the serial range of the items.
3. In the Count field, the total count of items scanned displays.
The item ID, unit of measure, and requested serial number for the
item are automatically populated by the system in the corresponding
fields.
![](asset-6d.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 65
Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
![](asset-6e.png)
66 User Guide
Outbound Execution
6.2.3.6.2 Capturing an Item’s Tag Attributes
Enter the item’s tag attributes, such as Lot number, Batch number, and
Revision number associated with a tag-tracked item.
Note: You can enter the tag details for an item:
QIf the node is configured to capture the tag attributes
in all operations within the node, or,
QIf the buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of the
inbound compliance.
For more information about capturing tag attributes, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
![](asset-6f.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 67
6.2.3.6.3 Capturing an Item’s Expiration Date
Enter the item’s expiration date. To change this date, choose the Calendar
lookup and specify a new expiration date or press Alt+L.
6.2.3.6.4 Capturing Item Details from an Inventory LPN
You can capture the item details from an inventory LPN.
To capture the item details from an inventory LPN:
1. In Item ID, enter the identifier of the item to pack, or select the item
identifier from the list.
2. Click OK.
Note: The fields displayed in the Tag Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
Note: If the item scanned has inventory information such
as tag number, serial number, expiration date, or quantity
from the barcode translation, you are not prompted to
capture the inventory information.
For example, if a tag-tracked item with lot number "L" has
tag information from the barcode translation that the item
belongs to lot "L", the Tag Entry screen does not display.
![](asset-70.png)
68 User Guide
Outbound Execution
6.2.3.7 Adding Items into a Container
You can add items into a container.
To add items into a container:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. In Add Quantity, enter the item quantity you want to add to the
container.
Note: The Select SKU screen displays if the
SKUPopupRequired flag is set to "Y" in the exuipack_
pack_container.jsp in <INSTALL_
DIR>\repository\eardata\yantra\war\wms\wmspack\det
ail folder.
By default this flag is set to "Y". If you set this flag to "N",
the Select SKU screen displays when you scan a Multi-SKU
LPN.
![](asset-71.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 69
a. If the item you want to pack already exists in the location in one
or more inventory containers (case or pallet), the Select Inventory
Container screen displays. Enter or select the Pallet or Case LPN
from the list. The Location Id is automatically populated by the
system.
b. If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays, where
you capture the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6,
"Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
c. If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays, where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
d. Click Close Container or press Alt+C to indicate that the pack
operation is complete.
![](asset-72.png)
70 User Guide
Outbound Execution
6.2.3.8 Removing Items from a Container
You can remove items from a container.
To remove the items from a container:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. In Remove Qty, enter the item quantity you want to remove from the
container.
a. If the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen displays, where
you enter the item’s tag attributes. See Section 6.2.3.6,
"Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
You cannot print packing slips on packing cartons.
Cause
QThe "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event check
box is not selected.
QThe printer may not be connected, the printer power or
green light may not be on, or the printer that you want
to print to is incorrectly selected.
Resolution
QSelect the "ON_SHIPMENT_PACK_COMPLETE" event
check box.
QMake sure your printer is connected, the printer power
or green light is on, and select the correct printer that
you want to use.
QEnsure custom services that are used on the event to
print the labels are correctly implemented and
configured.
![](asset-73.png)
Outbound Execution
Performing Outbound Tasks 71
b. If the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date Entry screen
displays, where you enter the item’s expiration date. See
Section 6.2.3.6, "Capturing an Item’s Extended Attributes".
6.2.3.9 Adding Inner Packs for an Item
To add inner packs for an item:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. In the Location field, select the location where you are performing the
pack operation.
3. In the Scan Identifier field, enter or scan the container SCM.
4. In the Pack Details, Items panel, select the item for which you want
to record the inner packs and click INNER PACKS.
5. In the Selected Container Details, Quantity Breakup panel, enter the
inner pack quantity and number of inner packs.
6.2.3.10 Removing Inner Packs for an Item
To remove inner packs for an item:
1. Open the Pack Details screen. See Section 6.2.3.1, "Navigating to the
Pack Details Screen".
2. On the Pack Details, Container Properties panel, click Unpack
Container.
3. In the Container Contents panel, select the item for which you want
to remove inner packs.
4. In the Selected Container Details, Quantity Breakup panel, in Remove
Inner Packs field, enter the number of inner packs you want to
remove. Depending on this, the value in the Remove Quantity field is
automatically populated.
5. Click Save.
6.2.3.11 Packing Containers for a Shipment
Once you create a shipment, you can pack all the items in a container for
the shipment.
To pack a container:
![](asset-74.png)
72 User Guide
Outbound Execution
1. Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2,
"Searching for Outbound Shipments".
2. Check the box of the shipment number for which you want to pack
containers.
3. From the action bar, click View Details. The Shipment Details screen
displays.
4. From the action bar, select Pack Container. The Pack Details screen
displays.
5. Select the appropriate pack station from the drop-down list.
6. Click New Case. The item ID and corresponding details get filled
automatically.
7. In SKU, enter or scan the item identifier and press Tab.
The item’s unit of measure and the inventory status display
automatically.
8. In Add Quantity, enter the item quantity to be packed in one
container.
9. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
10. Click Save.
6.2.3.12 Unpacking Containers for a Shipment
You can unpack any packed container to remove inventory from a
container.
To unpack a container:
1. Search for an outbound shipment. The Shipment List screen displays.
For more information about shipment search, see Section 6.1.2,
"Searching for Outbound Shipments".
2. Check the box of the shipment number for which you want to unpack
the containers.
3. From the action bar, click View Details. The Shipment Details screen
displays.
4. From the action bar, click . The Shipment Containers screen
displays.
![](asset-75.png)
Managing Manifests
Performing Outbound Tasks 73
5. Check the boxes of the applicable containers you want to unpack.
6. Click View Details. The Container Contents screen displays.
7. From the action bar, click Pack/Unpack. The Pack Details screen
displays.
8. In the Container Properties panel, click Unpack Container. The
Container Contents screen displays.
9. Enter the quantity you want to remove from the container.
10. Click Save.
6.3 Managing Manifests
This section explains in detail the following use cases:
QNavigating to the Add to Manifest screen
QConverting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container
QAdding Containers to a Manifest
QViewing the Container’s Contents
QRecording the Weight of Containers
QRemoving Containers from a Manifest
QClosing a Manifest
6.3.1 Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen
To access the Add To Manifest screen, from the navigation bar, click
Outbound > Add To Manifest.
6.3.2 Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound
Container
You can use the manifest station to convert an inventory container to an
outbound container.
Note: LPNs picked for shipments with requested serials
cannot be converted into an outbound container.
![](asset-76.png)
74 User Guide
Managing Manifests
To convert an inventory container into an outbound container:
1. Open the Add To Manifest screen. See Section 6.3.1, "Navigating to
the Add to Manifest screen".
2. In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.
3. In Scan Identifier:
a. Enter or scan the shipment number.
b. Enter or scan the inventory container.
If the item is serial-tracked and the serial number is not captured
during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial number.
For more information about capturing the item’s serial number,
see Section 6.3.3.1, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number". Click
Close.
The system automatically converts the inventory container into an
outbound container.
6.3.3 Adding Containers to a Manifest
You can add containers to an existing manifest or add to a new manifest
after packing it.
To add containers to a manifest:
1. From the navigation bar, select Outbound > Add to Manifest. The Add
To Manifest screen is displayed.
2. In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.
3. In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM that you want to
add to the manifest.
If the item is serial-tracked or if the serial number is not captured
during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial number. For
Note: Do not scan the shipment number if you use the
Sterling WMS Task Framework to move the inventory
container.
![](asset-77.png)
Managing Manifests
Performing Outbound Tasks 75
more information about capturing the serial number, See
Section 6.3.3.1, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number".
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Click Add to Manifest.
Important: Save the container’s information and packing
notes entered (if any) before manifesting.
![](asset-78.png)
76 User Guide
Managing Manifests
Note: You can customize the manifest station to perform
generic status changes on a container.
To customize the manifest station:
QDefine the custom pipeline by extending the default
pipeline associated with a transaction ID. For more
information about configuring process models, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
QExtend the existing resource and modify the JSP to
contain
JSP=/wms/wmsmanifest/detail/exuimanifest_
detail_anchor.
jsp?TransactionId=<TransactionId>. For more
information about defining or extending resources, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
QCreate a Menu Entry for the newly created resource
and use the new screen to perform a generic status
change. For more information about defining menus,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
![](asset-79.png)
Managing Manifests
Performing Outbound Tasks 77
Troubleshooting Tip:
The Tracking Number and Freight Charges are not getting
generated while manifesting
Problem
The system does not automatically generate the tracking
number and freight charges for a manifested container.
Cause
No records are found for parcel carrier preferences
pertaining to the node.
Resolution
In the Applications Manager, add parcel carrier preferences
to a node, and also enter the node’s shipping account
number associated with the carrier. For more information
about parcel carrier preferences, see the Defining a Node’s
Parcel Carrier Preferences in the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Troubleshooting Tip:
An error message, "YDM00166 - No record found in YFS_
FREIGHT_TERMS table" pops up
Problem
An error message, "No record found in YFS_FREIGHT_
TERMS table" occurs.
Cause
The freight term is not configured for your Enterprise.
Resolution
Configure the freight terms for the Enterprise. For more
information about configuring freight terms, see the
section Creating a Freight Term in the Sterling Logistics
Management: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-7a.png)
78 User Guide
Managing Manifests
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
You cannot add containers to a manifest that is in "Closed"
or "Requested for Closure" status.
Cause
The system does not allow to add containers to a manifest
that is in "Closed" or "Requested for Closure" status.
Resolution
Add containers to a manifest that is in "Closure Failed" or
"Open" status.
Troubleshooting Tip:
An error message "YCS00006 - NMFC data is not set up for
the item" pops up
Problem
An error message, "NMFC data is not set up for the item"
occurs.
Cause
The NMFC code does not exist for the item.
Resolution
Enter the item’s NMFC code. For more information about
defining product item’s classifications, see the Defining a
Product Item’s Classifications in the Catalog Management:
Configuration Guide.
![](asset-7b.png)
Managing Manifests
Performing Outbound Tasks 79
Troubleshooting Tip:
An error message, "YDM00171 - Shipping Account No not
set up for the carrier" pops up
Problem
An error message, "Shipping Account No not set up for the
carrier" occurs.
Cause
A. The Shipping Account number is not configured for the
Parcel Carrier of the shipping node, OR
B. The Shipping Account number is not configured for the
Carrier of the Buyer.
Resolution
A. If the Freight Terms on the shipment is Prepaid,
configure the Shipping Account number for the Parcel
Carrier of the shipping node. For more information about
defining the parcel carrier preferences of the node, see the
section Defining a Node’s Parcel Carrier Preferences in the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
B. If the Freight Terms on the shipment is Collect,
configure the Billing Account number for the Carrier of the
Buyer. For more information about defining the carrier
preferences of the buyer, see the section Defining Carrier
Preferences Parameters in the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
![](asset-7c.png)
80 User Guide
Managing Manifests
Troubleshooting Tip:
An error message, "Class not found exception" pops up
Problem
An error message, "Class not found exception" occurs.
Cause
The ycsbe.jar file is not included in the classpath
environment variable.
Resolution
Include the ycsbe.jar file in the classpath and restart the
Application Server.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Capturing Weight using the Weighing Scale
Problem
Using a weighing scale you cannot capture the package’s
weight.
Cause
The weighing scale is not integrated with the system, the
weighing scale’s power is off, or the weighing scale is
configured incorrectly.
Resolution
Make sure that the weighing scale is integrated with the
system, the weighing scale’s power is on, and the weighing
scale is configured correctly.
![](asset-7d.png)
Managing Manifests
Performing Outbound Tasks 81
6.3.3.1 Capturing the Item’s Serial Number
To capture a serial number for a serial-tracked item, enter or scan the
item’s serial number and component serial numbers. Click Close or press
Alt+O to return to the Add To Manifest screen.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
You cannot print a FedEx label for a package that is
manifested.
Cause
The printer may not be connected, the printer power or
green light may not be on, or the printer that you want to
print to is selected incorrectly.
Resolution
Make sure your printer is connected, the printer power or
green light is on, and select the correct printer that you
want to use.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Error while Manifesting
Problem
While scanning a package to manifest, an error message
pops up.
Cause
The problem is related to FedEx Powership limitations.
Resolution
See the FedEx Powership guide for a list of error codes and
their descriptions.
![](asset-7e.png)
82 User Guide
Managing Manifests
6.3.4 Viewing the Container’s Contents
You can view the details of all items packed in a container. On the
Container Contents screen you can view the item’s product class, unit of
measure, quantity to be packed, and the actual quantity packed in the
container.
1. Open the Add To Manifest screen. For more information about
navigating to the Add to Manifest screen, see Section 6.3.1,
"Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen".
2. In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.
3. In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM to view the
contents packed in the container.
4. Click View Contents. The Container Contents screen displays.
6.3.5 Removing Containers from a Manifest
You can remove packed containers from a manifest before closing the
manifest.
To remove packed containers from a manifest:
1. From the navigation bar, select Outbound > Remove from Manifest.
The Remove From Manifest screen is displayed.
2. In Station, select the station from where you want to remove the
container from the manifest.
3. In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM of the container
you want to remove from the manifest.
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Click Remove from Manifest.
Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
![](asset-7f.png)
Recording Container’s Weight
Performing Outbound Tasks 83
6.3.6 Closing a Manifest
After all the containers are added to a manifest, you can close the
manifest.
To close a manifest:
1. From the navigation bar, select Outbound > Manifest Console. The
Manifest search window is displayed.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields and click Search. The
Manifest List screen is displayed.
3. Select the check box adjacent the manifest you want to close.
4. Click Close Manifest. The Close Manifest screen is displayed.
5. Enter information in the applicable fields.
6. Click OK.
6.3.7 Recording the Weight of Containers
You can record the weight of a container.
To record the weight of a container:
1. Open the Add To Manifest screen. For more information about
navigating to the Add to Manifest screen, see Section 6.3.1,
"Navigating to the Add to Manifest screen".
2. In Station, select the station from the drop-down list where you are
manifesting the containers.
3. In Scan Identifier, enter or scan the container SCM.
4. Click Weigh. The Weigh Station screen displays where you can record
the container’s weight.
6.4 Recording Container’s Weight
You can record the weight of containers that belong to TL, LTL, or parcel
shipments using the Weigh Station HSDE screen.
Note: If trailer numbers are not associated with a
manifest, the Close Manifest screen is displayed.
Otherwise, the manifest is closed directly.
![](asset-80.png)
84 User Guide
Recording Container’s Weight
This section explains in detail the following use cases:
QNavigating to the Weigh Station Screen
QRecording the Container’s Weight
QConverting an Inventory Container into an Outbound Container
6.4.1 Navigating to the Weigh Station Screen
To access the Weigh Station screen, from the navigation bar, click
Outbound > Weigh Station.
6.4.2 Recording the Container’s Weight
To record the container’s weight:
1. Open the Weigh Station screen. See Section 6.4.1, "Navigating to the
Weigh Station Screen".
2. In the Location ID field, select the manifest location.
3. In the Scan Identifier field, enter or scan the container SCM to check
weight. If the item is serial tracked and the serial number is not
captured during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial
number. See Section 6.4.3, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number".
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Click Weigh or press Alt+W. The container’s weight is recorded.
6.4.3 Capturing the Item’s Serial Number
To capture the serial number for a serial-tracked item, enter or scan the
item’s serial number and component serial numbers. Click Close or press
Alt+O to return to the Weigh Station screen.
Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
![](asset-81.png)
Recording Container’s Weight
Performing Outbound Tasks 85
6.4.4 Converting an Inventory Container into an Outbound
Container
To convert an inventory container into an outbound container:
1. Open the Weigh Station screen. See Section 6.4.1, "Navigating to the
Weigh Station Screen".
2. In the Location ID field, select the manifest location.
3. In the Scan Identifier field:
a. Enter or scan the shipment number.
b. Enter or scan the inventory container.
If the item is serial tracked, and the serial number is not captured
during the pick or pack process, capture the item’s serial number.
See Section 6.4.3, "Capturing the Item’s Serial Number". Click
Close.
The system automatically converts the inventory container into an
outbound container.
6.4.5 Creating a Load
You can create a load.
To create a load:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Create Load. The Create
Load screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Save.
Note: LPNs picked for shipments with requested serial
numbers cannot be converted into an outbound container.
Note: Do not scan the shipment number if you use the
Sterling WMS Task Framework to move inventory LPN.
![](asset-82.png)
86 User Guide
Recording Container’s Weight
6.4.6 Searching for Loads
You can search for loads using the Load Console screen. For more
information about load search, see the Sterling Logistics Management:
User Guide.
6.4.7 Adding Holds to a Load
You can add holds to a load to prevent it from being processed by
transactions or to prevent certain modifications to be applied to it.
To add holds to a load:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Load Console. The Load
Search by Summary screen displays. For more information about load
search, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide. Select
the applicable search view from the Views drop-down list.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Load Console
Summary screen. For more information about the Load Console
Summary screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
4. Check the boxes of the applicable shipment mode and click View
Details. The Load List screen displays. For more information about the
Load List screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
5. Check the boxes of the applicable load number for which you want to
view the details.
6. From the action bar, click View Holds. The View Holds screen displays.
For more information about the View Holds screen, see the Sterling
Logistics Management: User Guide.
7. From the Load Holds inner panel, click Add Holds. The Add Holds
screen displays. For more information about the View Holds screen,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
8. Click Save.
6.4.8 Adding Shipments to a Load
You can add shipments to an existing load that are shipped to the same
delivery address.
![](asset-83.png)
Scheduling Dock Appointments
Performing Outbound Tasks 87
To add shipments to a load:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Load Console. The Load
Search by Summary screen displays. For more information about load
search, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide. Select
the applicable search view from the Views drop-down list.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Load Console
Summary screen. For more information about the Load Console
Summary screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
4. Check the boxes of the applicable shipment mode and click View
Details. The Load List screen displays. For more information about the
Load List screen, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
5. Check the boxes of the applicable load number for which you want to
view the details.
6. From the action bar, click View Details. The Load Details screen
displays. For more information about the Load Details screen, see the
Sterling Logistics Management: User Guide.
7. From the action bar, click Add Shipments. The Outbound Shipment
Search By Status screen displays. For more information about
shipment search, see Section 6.1.2, "Searching for Outbound
Shipments".
8. Enter the applicable search parameters and click Search. The
Shipment Lookup List screen displays. For more information about
the Shipment Lookup List screen, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.
9. Select the check boxes of the applicable shipments that you want to
add to the load.
10. From the action bar, click Add to Load.
6.5 Scheduling Dock Appointments
The dock scheduling functionality allows you to manage appointments for
locations in a warehouse to receive inbound shipments and ship
outbound shipments. The dock scheduling rules enable you to specify
number of days in advance to take a dock appointment. Scheduling of
docks is based on the warehouse calendar associated with the dock and
![](asset-84.png)
88 User Guide
Scheduling Dock Appointments
takes into consideration the working days, holidays, and shifts that are
valid for receiving or shipping operations. Each dock can have its own
calendar and specify the shifts when it is available.
For more information about dock appointments, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Concepts Guide.
Scheduling dock appointments may involve a combination of any of the
following tasks which are explained in detail in this section:
QSearching for a Dock Appointment
QViewing Dock Schedule Details
QTaking a New Dock Appointment
QModifying a Dock Appointment
QCanceling a Dock Appointment
QManaging Docks
QRemoving a Dock Group Constraint
6.5.1 Searching for a Dock Appointment
You can search for a dock appointment.
To search for a dock appointment:
1. From the navigation bar, select Inbound > Dock Delivery
Appointments or, select Outbound > Dock Pickup Appointments. The
Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes screen displays.
2. Enter the search criteria for the dock appointment as applicable. For
more information about the search criteria, see Table 8.47.
3. Click Search. The Dock Schedule Details screen displays where you
can view the dock appointments for each dock that meets your
search criteria.
6.5.2 Viewing Dock Schedule Details
To view dock schedule details, perform a search for the docks meeting
your desired criteria. See Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock
Appointment" for information about conducting this search. The Dock
Schedule Details screen displays, which provides visibility to the dock
![](asset-85.png)
Scheduling Dock Appointments
Performing Outbound Tasks 89
appointment calendar. This screen displays the inbound, outbound, and
both inbound and outbound docks with their:
QAvailable time slots for creating new appointments.
QUnavailable time slots due to calendar constraints.
QUnavailable time slots due to appointments already taken.
For more information about the Dock Schedule Details screen, see
Table 8–78.
6.5.3 Taking a New Dock Appointment
You can take a new dock appointment.
To take a new dock appointment:
1. Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.
2. In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
the desired free time slot which is indicated by the block shaded in
grey; . The Dock Appointment screen displays.
3. Enter the applicable information in the Appointment Details panel.
4. Click Save.
For specific information about the field requirements for taking a dock
appointment, see Table 8–80.
6.5.4 Modifying a Dock Appointment
You can modify a dock appointment.
To modify a dock appointment:
1. Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.
2. In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
the time slot of the appointment you want to modify which is
indicated by clicking one of these two shaded blocks: or .
3. Enter the appointment details in the Appointment Details panel.
![](asset-86.png)
90 User Guide
Scheduling Dock Appointments
4. Click Save.
For specific information about the field requirements when modifying
a dock appointment, see Table 8–80.
6.5.5 Canceling a Dock Appointment
You can cancel a dock appointment.
To cancel a dock appointment:
1. Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.
2. In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
the dock appointment that you want to delete which is indicated by
clicking this shaded block: . The Dock Appointment screen
displays.
3. Click Cancel.
6.5.6 Managing Docks
You can enter additional constraints for the maximum number of
appointments that can be taken for a group of docks in the Dock Group
Details screen.
To enter additional constraints for a group of docks:
1. Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.
2. In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
Manage Dock Groups action. The Dock Group Details screen displays.
Note: In the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation Applications
Manager when performing the task of Defining the Node’s
Attributes, if the Dock Schedules are Managed By field is set
to Sterling TMS, the Dock Schedule Details Screen is non-edit-
able. For more information about Dock Schedule, see the Sell-
ing and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
![](asset-87.png)
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
Performing Outbound Tasks 91
3. Enter the details in the Dock Group Max No. of Appointments.
4. Click Save to save the maximum number of dock group appointment
constraints.
For more information about the field requirements for managing
docks, see Table 8–82.
6.5.7 Removing a Dock Group Constraint
You can remove a dock appointment constraint.
To remove a dock appointment constraint:
1. Perform a search for the docks meeting your desired criteria. See
Section 6.5.1, "Searching for a Dock Appointment" for information
about conducting this search.
2. In the Dock Schedule Details screen, Dock Availability panel, select
Manage Dock Group action. The Dock Group Details screen displays.
3. Check the boxes of the dock appointment constraints you want to
remove.
4. From the Dock Group Max No. of Appointments action bar, click
Remove.
6.6 Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
The Resource Planning tool provides warehouses with the ability to plan
for expected workload and determine the number of resources required
to complete the activity. Having visibility to expected resources enables a
warehouse to accurately plan for overtime, temporary staffing, and so
forth, thus optimizing the resource costs.
For more information about resource planning, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Concepts Guide.
Resource Planning may involve a combination of the following tasks
which are explained in detail in this section:
QDefining Standard Capacity
QViewing Capacity Details
–Transferring Resources Temporarily
![](asset-88.png)
92 User Guide
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
–Assigning Shifts
QViewing Demand Details
–Performing a Demand Search
–Moving Shipments
QConfirming a Plan
6.6.1 Defining Standard Capacity
You can define the standard capacity for each resource pool.
To define the standard capacity for resource pools:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Define Standard
Capacity. The Defining Standard Capacity screen displays.
2. Select the appropriate resource pool and click Standard Capacity. The
Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details screen displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields.
4. Click Save.
6.6.2 Viewing Capacity Details
You can view the capacity details for various resource pools.
To view the capacity details for various resource pools:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Resource Planning. The
Resource Planning Capacity Search screen displays.
2. In the start date field, enter the date for which you want to begin
planning resources.
3. In the #of days field, enter the total number of days for which you
want to plan resources.
4. Next to the Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, choose the unit
of measure in which you want the capacity and demand to be
displayed.
5. Check the box "Consider Pending Task", if you want to consider the
pending tasks to be completed as a backlog for the chosen date.
6. Click Search. The Resource Planning Screen displays.
![](asset-89.png)
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
Performing Outbound Tasks 93
7. Within the Plan Resources Panel, when a capacity is chosen for a
resource pool on a specific date, the Capacity Details screen displays.
6.6.2.1 Transferring Resources Temporarily
Use the Capacity Details screen to move resources between various
resource pools.
To move resources between resource pools:
1. Open the Capacity Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Capacity Details screen, see Section 6.6.2, "Viewing
Capacity Details".
2. Within the Other Resource Pools panel, choose the resources you
want to move and click Pull Resources. The Transfer Resources
Screen displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields.
4. Click Save.
6.6.2.2 Assigning Shifts
You can assign shifts to resources within their resource pools.
To assign shifts to resources within resource pools:
1. Open the Capacity Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Capacity Details screen, see Section 6.6.2, "Viewing
Capacity Details".
2. Within the Member Resources panel, choose the resource you want to
assign to the shifts and click Assign Shifts. The Assign Shifts Screen
displays.
3. Click to add new shifts and enter information in the applicable
fields.
4. Click Save.
6.6.3 Viewing Demand Details
You can view the resource demand details.
To view the resource demand details:
![](asset-8a.png)
94 User Guide
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Resource Planning. The
Resource Planning Capacity Search screen displays.
2. In the start date field, enter the date for which you want to begin
planning resources.
3. In the # of days field, enter the total number of days for which you
want to plan resources.
4. Next to the Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, choose the unit
of measure in which you want the capacity and demand to be
displayed.
5. Check the box "Consider Pending Task", if you want to consider the
pending task to be completed as a backlog for the chosen date.
6. Click Search. The Resource Planning Screen displays.
7. Choose the demand for a selected date against an appropriate
resource pool, the Demand Details screen displays.
6.6.3.1 Performing a Demand Search
You can search for demands based on the specified criteria.
To search for demand restricted to a constraint:
1. Open the Demand Details screen. For more information about
navigating to the Demand Details screen, see Section 6.6.3, "Viewing
Demand Details".
2. Within the Demand panel, enter information in the appropriate fields
to restrict the search.
3. Click Search. The demand break-up by the appropriate choice of
fields displays.
6.6.3.2 Moving Shipments
You can move shipments to an appropriate date.
To move shipments to a later date:
1. Click against the appropriate date. The Move screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Move.
![](asset-8b.png)
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
Performing Outbound Tasks 95
6.6.4 Confirming a Plan
You can confirm a plan for resources.
To confirm the plan:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Outbound > Resource Planning. The
Resource Planning Capacity Search screen displays.
2. In the start date field, enter the date for which you want to begin
planning resources.
3. In the # of days field, enter the total number of days for which you
want to plan resources.
4. Next to the Show Demand and Capacity Data in field, choose the unit
of measure in which you want the capacity and demand to be
displayed.
5. Check the box "Consider Pending Task", if you want to consider the
pending tasks to be completed as a backlog for the chosen date.
6. Click Search. The Resource Planning Screen displays.
7. Click on the View Details action. The Planning Summary screen
displays.
8. Click Confirm Plan.
![](asset-8c.png)
96 User Guide
Planning Resources for Outbound Tasks
![](asset-8d.png)
Managing Tasks 97
7
Managing Tasks
You can use the Task Console to manage paper-based tasks such as pick
and count. The Task Console provides task-related information to node
users.
This chapter explains the various task-related activities and how you can
perform them. It covers the following use cases:
QSearching for Tasks
QConfirming a Batch
QRecording Count
QManually Logging Productivity
QSearching for Productivity Logs
QDeriving Labor Standards
QViewing User Time Sheet
7.1 Searching for Tasks
The following Task Search screens let you search for tasks based on
different criteria:
QTask Search By Task Type screen
QTask Search By Zone screen
QTask Search By Inventory screen
QTask Search By Reference screen
QTask Search By Exception screen
![](asset-8e.png)
98 User Guide
Searching for Tasks
QTask Search By Date screen
QTask Search By At Risk Tasks screen
To navigate to the search screens:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Task Console. Initially, the
Task Search By Task Type screen displays. Select the applicable
search view from the Views drop-down list.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Task List screen.
7.1.1 Viewing Task Details
You can view task details using the Task Detail screen.
To view task details:
1. From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.
2. From the action bar, click View Details. The Task Detail screen
displays.
7.1.2 Assigning Tasks to a User
You can manually assign tasks to a user using the Assign to User screen.
To assign tasks to a user:
1. From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.
2. From the action bar, click Assign To User. The Assign to User screen
displays.
3. In Assign To User, enter the identifier of the user to whom you want
to assign the tasks.
4. Click Ok.
7.1.3 Reprioritizing Tasks
You can manually reprioritize tasks using the Reprioritize screen.
To reprioritize tasks:
![](asset-8f.png)
Searching for Tasks
Managing Tasks 99
1. From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.
2. From the action bar, click Reprioritize. The Reprioritize screen
displays.
3. Select the appropriate value from the Task Priority drop-down list.
4. Click Ok.
7.1.4 Putting Tasks on Hold
You can manually put tasks on hold using the Hold Reason screen.
To put tasks on hold:
1. From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.
2. From the action bar, click Hold. The Hold Reason screen displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields.
4. Click Ok.
7.1.5 Releasing a Task
You can manually release tasks that are put on hold.
To release a task that is put on hold:
1. From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.
2. From the action bar, click Release.
7.1.6 Canceling a Task
You can cancel tasks using the Cancel action in the Task List screen. You
can use the Cancel Task Reason screen to enter a reason for cancelling a
task.
To cancel a task:
1. From the Task List screen, select the check boxes of the applicable
tasks.
![](asset-90.png)
100 User Guide
Recording Count
2. From the action bar, click Cancel. The Cancel Task Reason screen
displays.
3. Enter information in the applicable fields.
4. Click Ok.
7.2 Confirming a Batch
You can confirm a batch after completing the paper-based tasks.
To confirm a batch:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Confirm Batch. The Confirm
Batch screen displays.
2. In Batch #, enter the batch number associated with the task you
want to complete.
3. In Total Minutes Taken to Complete Tasks, enter the total time taken
to complete the task.
4. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
5. Click Confirm to complete the paper-based task.
6. Click Confirm with Details to complete the task with more detailed
information. The Complete Batch screen displays.
7. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
8. Click Save to confirm the batch.
7.3 Recording Count
You can record the results of paper-based count using the Recording
Count Results screen.
To record count results:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Record Count. The Recording
Count Results screen displays.
2. In Task ID, enter the identifier of the task associated with the count
task you want to complete.
3. In Location, enter the location where you performed the count.
![](asset-91.png)
Searching for Productivity Logs
Managing Tasks 101
4. Click Proceed. The Record Count Result Details screen displays.
5. In the Items panel, enter the quantity of inventory you counted.
6. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
7. Click Save.
7.4 Manually Logging Productivity
You can manually log productivity for a completed task that is associated
with a productivity type.
To manually log productivity:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Log Productivity. The Log
Productivity screen displays.
2. In Productivity Type, enter the productivity type against which you
want to log productivity.
You cannot manually log productivity for productivity types that are
associated with certain task types. Such task types are associated
with tasks and are suggested to a user. For example, putaway,
retrieval, and outbound picking.
3. In User, enter the node user’s identifier.
4. Enter other information as applicable.
5. Click Create Productivity. The Productivity Details screen displays.
6. In Productivity Metrics panel, enter the number of cases.
7. Enter other information in the applicable fields.
8. Click Save.
7.5 Searching for Productivity Logs
The Productivity Search By Productivity Type screen lets you search for
productivity logs.
To navigate to the search screen:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Productivity Console. The
Productivity Search By Productivity Type screen displays.
![](asset-92.png)
102 User Guide
Deriving Labor Standards
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Productivity List
screen.
7.5.1 Viewing Productivity Log Records
You can view productivity type details using the Productivity Details
screen.
To view productivity type details:
1. From the Productivity List screen, select the check boxes of the
applicable productivity log records.
2. From the action bar, click View Details. The Productivity Details
screen displays. For more information about logging productivity
details, see Section 7.4, "Manually Logging Productivity".
7.5.2 Deleting a Productivity Log
To manually delete a productivity type:
1. From the Productivity List screen, select the check boxes of the
productivity types you want to delete.
2. From the action bar, click Delete.
7.6 Deriving Labor Standards
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation provides the ability to automatically
derive labor standards or Standard Allowable Minutes (SAM) based on
the historical data of tasks or activities performed by warehouse users
over a period of time. The Derive Labor Standards console allows you to
derive labor standards for one activity at a specified time. You can
identify this activity by productivity characteristics defined for a
productivity type associated with the task.
This chapter provides the navigation path to the Derive Labor Standards
screens. Deriving Labor Standards involves the following tasks:
QActivities Search by Date Range
QViewing Productivity Summary
QDerive Labor Standards
![](asset-93.png)
Viewing User Time Sheet
Managing Tasks 103
7.6.1 Activities Search by Date Range
You can search for activities performed during the selected date range.
To search for activities:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Derive Labor Standards. The
Activities Search By Date Range screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The search results display in the Productivity Type List
screen.
7.6.2 Viewing Productivity Summary
You can view productivity summary.
To view productivity summary:
1. From the navigation bar, choose Task > Derive Labor Standards. The
Activities Search By Date Range screen displays.
2. Enter information in the applicable fields.
3. Click Search. The Productivity Type List screen displays.
4. Select the appropriate productivity type from the list and click View
Summary. The Productivity Summary screen displays.
7.6.3 Derive Labor Standards
You can derive labor standards for a productivity type.
To derive labor standards:
1. From the Productivity Summary screen, choose the appropriate user
name and click Compute SAM. The Derive Labor Standards screen
displays.
2. Enter SAM values in the applicable fields.
3. Click Save.
7.7 Viewing User Time Sheet
The Time Sheet screen allows you to view activities performed by node
users, and utilization for a node user, based on a date range.
![](asset-95.png)
105
Part II
Warehouse Management System Screen
Reference
The chapters in this section provide screen and field descriptions for all
Warehouse Management System screens.
This section contains the following chapters:
QInbound Shipment Console Screens
QReceipt Console Screens
QCreate Inbound Shipment Screens
QReceive Console Screens
QInspect Inbound Receipts Screens
QInspect Return Receipts Screens
QCreate Move Request Screens
QCreate Count Request Screens
QCount Console Screens
QMove Request Console Screens
QLocation Inventory Console Screens
QAdjust Location Inventory Screens
QAccounting Bin Adjustment Screens
QPrint Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens
QReceipt Adjustment Screens
QCreate Work Order Screens
![](asset-96.png)
106 User Guide
QWork Order Console Screens
QValue-Added Services Station Screens
QOutbound Shipment Console Screens
QCreate Outbound Shipment Screens
QWave Console Screens
QCreate Wave Screens
QPack Station Screens
QManifest Console Screens
QCreate Load Screens
QLoad Console Screens
QAdd To Manifest Screens
QRemove From Manifest Screens
QWeigh Station Screens
QLocation Inventory Audit Console Screens
QTask Console Screens
QConfirm Batch Screens
QRecord Count Screens
QLog Productivity Screens
QProductivity Console Screens
QDerive Labor Standards Screens
QUser Time Sheet Screens
QSterling WMS Prints
QSterling WMS Reports
QUsing Report Studio
![](asset-97.png)
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 107
8
Inbound Shipment Console Screens
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for all Inbound
Shipment Console screens.
8.1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments that fall under a
specified status.
Table 8–1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprises Select this option to search across all enterprises.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number for which you want to
search, if applicable.
PO # Enter the purchase order number for which you want
to search, if applicable.
Customer PO# Enter the customer’s purchase order number for which
you want to search, if applicable.
Plan # Enter the plan number of the inbound shipment for
which you are searching, if applicable.
Origin Node Enter the origin node under which you want to search
for inbound shipments, if applicable.
Destination Node Enter the destination node under which you want to
search for inbound shipments, if applicable.
![](asset-98.png)
108 User Guide
Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by status.
8.2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments that fall within a
particular date range.
Status Select the status range of the inbound shipments for
which you want to search, if applicable.
Include Closed
Shipments Select this if you want to search for inbound
shipments that have been closed, as well as those that
are open.
Held Shipments Check this box if you want to search for inbound
shipments that are held.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 8–2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprises Select this option to search across all enterprises.
Carrier/Service Select the carrier or service for which you are
searching, if applicable.
Status Select the shipment status for which you are
searching, if applicable
Table 8–1 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Status
Fields
![](asset-99.png)
Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 109
The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by date.
8.3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments that belong to a
specific carrier.
Enter Shipment Dates Select this check box to enter the shipment date range
for which you want to search.
Enter Delivery Dates Select this check box to enter the delivery date range
for which you want to search.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 8–3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprises Select this option to search across all enterprises.
Shipment Mode Select the shipment mode of transportation for which
you want to search, if applicable
Carrier/Service Select the carrier or service for which you want to
search, if applicable.
BOL # Enter the bill of lading number for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Pro # Enter the Pro number for which you want to search, if
applicable.
Table 8–2 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Date
Fields
![](asset-9a.png)
110 User Guide
Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by carrier.
8.4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
Use this screen to search for inbound order shipments based on the item
information such as product class, unit of measure, item ID and so on.
Trailer # Enter the trailer number for which you want to search,
if applicable.
Status Select the shipment status for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Requires Routing Select this check box if the shipment requires dynamic
routing.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 8–4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprises Select this option to search across all enterprises.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Click to find the specific item you want to use.
Product Class Select the item’s product class for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Table 8–3 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Carrier
Fields
![](asset-9b.png)
Inbound Order Shipment List
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 111
The Inbound Order Shipment List screen displays as a result of your
inbound shipment search by item.
8.5 Inbound Order Shipment List
The Inbound Order Shipment List window displays the results of an
inbound order shipment search. You can perform actions on a single
shipment or multiple shipments by selecting the check boxes next to the
shipments you want to perform an action on and then choosing the
applicable action from the action bar.
Unit Of Measure Select the item’s unit of measure for which you want
to search, if applicable.
Buyer Enter the buyer of the shipment for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Click to find the specific buyer you want to
use.
Seller Enter the seller of the shipment for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Click to find the specific seller you want to
use.
Status Select the shipment status for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Include Closed
Shipments Select this check box to search for closed shipments, if
applicable.
Has Hazardous Items Select check box to search for inbound shipments that
contain hazardous items.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 8–4 Inbound Order Shipment Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-9c.png)
112 User Guide
Inbound Order Shipment List
Table 8–5 Inbound Order Shipment List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen where you can view the shipment
details.
Start Receipt This action takes you to the Start Receipt screen
where you can create a receipt to receive the
shipment.
Receive This action takes you to the Receive screen where you
can enter the items that you received in to a
warehouse, such as a pallet, case, or SKU.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipment’s documents or labels.
Delete Shipment This action allows you to delete the selected
shipments.
Add To Delivery Plan This action takes you to the Add Delivery Plan screen
where you can add shipments to a delivery plan.
Create Pick List This action takes you to the Create Picklist screen
where you can create a picklist for the selected
shipments, if applicable.
Report/Record receipt This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.
View Holds This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the shipment.
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number. Click this link to go to the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen. Click this link
to view the shipment details.
Status The current status of the shipment.
Expected Ship Date The date the shipment is expected to ship.
Actual Ship Date The actual date of shipment.
Expected Delivery Date The date the shipment is expected to be delivered.
Actual Delivery Date The actual date the shipment was delivered.
Origin The shipment’s origin node.
![](asset-9d.png)
Inbound Order Shipment Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 113
8.6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
The Inbound Order Shipment Details screen provides various information
about a single shipment. The actions that can be performed in the
Inbound Order Shipment Details screen are explained in the following
tables.
Destination The shipment’s destination node.
Mode The mode of transportation used to ship the shipment.
Table 8–6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
View Icons
Loads - This icon takes you to the Loads screen
where you can view the loads that are carrying
the shipment.
Containers - This icon takes you to the Containers
screen where you can view all packed containers
included in the shipment.
Instructions - This icon takes you to the Inbound
Order Shipment Instructions screen where you can
view special instructions pertaining to an inbound
shipment, such as handling instructions.
Shipment Audits - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Audits screen where you can view audit trail
for shipment modifications.
Shipment Dates - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Dates screen where you can modify
inbound shipment dates and delivery dates for
the selected shipment.
Alerts - This icon takes you to the Shipment Alerts
screen where you can view the alerts for the
selected shipments.
Receiving Discrepancies - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Receipt Discrepancy screen where you can
view discrepancies, if any, for the received
shipment. Valid values include Over Receipt,
Under Receipt, and Damaged Receipt.
Table 8–5 Inbound Order Shipment List
![](asset-9e.png)
114 User Guide
Inbound Order Shipment Details
Receipts - This icon takes you to the Receipts screen
where you can view a list of shipment receipts.
Activity Demand - This icon takes you to the Activity
Demand screen where you can view the shipment’s
activity demand.
Additional Attributes - This icon takes you to the
Additional Attributes screen where you can view
additional attributes for a shipment.
Actions
Record Container
Details This action takes you to the Record Container Details
screen where you can record container details for a
container that is to be received.
Confirm Shipment This action allows you to confirm the selected
shipment.
Start Receipt This action takes you to the Start Receipt screen
where you can create a receipt to receive the
shipment.
Receive This action takes you to the Receive screen where you
can enter the items that you received in a
warehouse, such as a pallet, case, or SKU.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipment’s documents or labels.
Create Pick List This action takes you to the Create Picklist screen
where you can create a picklist for the selected
shipments, if applicable.
Create Alert This action takes you to the Create Alerts screen
where you can alerts for the selected shipment.
Report/Record Receipt This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.
View Holds This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the shipment.
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Table 8–6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
![](asset-9f.png)
Inbound Order Shipment Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 115
Plan # The number of the delivery plan with which the
inbound shipment is associated, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier.
Seller The Seller’s identifier.
Ship Node The node from which the inbound shipment ships.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the shipment.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits. Click the icon to go to
the View Holds screen where you can view holds that
are applied to the inbound shipment.
PO # The purchase order number associated with the
shipment.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the shipment contains any hazardous item.
Break Bulk Node This field displays only if the shipment belongs to a
break bulk load.
The break bulk node that is receiving the break bulk
load displays.
Table 8–7 Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen, Ship From
The address from which the shipment is shipped.
Click to go to the Modify Address screen where you can change the ship
from address.
Table 8–8 Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen, Ship To
The address to which the shipment is shipped.
Click to go to the Modify Address screen where you can change the ship to
address.
Table 8–6 Inbound Order Shipment Details
![](asset-a0.png)
116 User Guide
Inbound Order Shipment Details
Table 8–9 Inbound Order Shipment Details Screen, Totals
Fields
Weight The total weight of the inbound shipment. This field
can be modified.
Volume The total volume of the inbound shipment. This field
can be modified.
No. of Containers The number of packed containers in an inbound
shipment.
Table 8–10 Inbound Order Shipment Details, Carrier Info
Fields
Delivery Method The delivery method for the shipment.
Ship Mode Select the mode of transportation for the shipment.
Values include 'LTL', 'TL', and 'PARCEL’.
Carrier/Service Select the carrier service for the outbound shipment.
Trailer # Enter the outbound shipment’s trailer number.
BOL # Enter the outbound shipment’s bill of lading number.
Seal # Enter the outbound shipment’s seal number.
Pro # Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.
Routing Source Indicates if routing was pre-assigned by the system or
specified through an external system.
Load # The outbound shipment’s load number.
Routing Error Code The routing error code automatically displays by the
system, if applicable.
Requested Carrier
Service The requested carrier service for the outbound
shipment.
Table 8–11 Inbound Order Shipment Details, Charges
View Icon
Charges - This icon takes you to the Charges screen
where you can enter or modify additional charges
imposed to the shipment or container.
![](asset-a1.png)
Inbound Order Shipment Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 117
Fields
Carrier Account # Indicates the carrier account number for the
shipment.
Freight Terms Indicates the freight terms used for the shipment.
Valid values include COLLECT, PREPAID, TP-COLLECT,
and TP-PREPAID.
COD Pay Method Select the COD payment type for the carrier.
Estimated Shipment
Charges The estimated charge for shipping the outbound
shipment.
Actual Shipment
Charges The actual charge for shipping the outbound shipment.
Freight Charge The charge applied by the carrier for shipping the
outbound shipment.
Table 8–12 Shipment Details, Shipment Lines
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen where you can view the shipment line
attributes for the selected shipments.
Add Release This action allows you to add an order release to the
shipment. For more information, see the Sterling
Distributed Order Management: User Guide.
Remove Line This action enables you to remove the selected
shipment lines from the shipment.
Fields
Shipment Line # Enter the outbound shipment line number.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Line Details
screen and view the shipment line attributes for the
selected shipment line number.
PO # The purchase order number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.
Line # The inbound shipment line number.
Release # The order release number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.
Table 8–11 Inbound Order Shipment Details, Charges
![](asset-a2.png)
118 User Guide
Modify Address
8.7 Modify Address
Use this screen to modify the address.
Item ID The inbound shipment line item’s item identifier.
Description The inbound shipment line item’s description.
PC The inbound shipment line item’s product class.
UOM The inbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.
Expected Serial # The expected serial number for the order.
Editable if the order is not available on the system.
Mark For The mark for address associated with the item.
Quantity The shipment line’s expected quantity.
If a receipt is made against the order, quantity is
displayed as 0.
Received Quantity Indicates the quantity received for the item in this
shipment. If the receipt is against an order, it indicates
the quantity received for the order.
Important: To receive inventory for a Level 1 node,
choose the Report/Record Receipt button.
Table 8–13 Shipment Address Details
Field
First Name The first name of the person receiving the shipment.
Middle Name The middle name of the person receiving the
shipment.
Last Name The surname of the person receiving the shipment.
Company The name of the company where the shipment is sent.
Day Time Phone The daytime phone number for the person receiving
the shipment.
Table 8–12 Shipment Details, Shipment Lines
![](asset-a3.png)
Charges
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 119
8.8 Charges
This screen provides visibility to any additional charges pertaining to the
inbound shipment.
Evening Phone The evening phone number for the person receiving
the shipment.
Mobile Phone The mobile phone number for the person receiving the
shipment.
Fax The facsimile number for the person receiving the
shipment.
E-Mail The electronic mailing address for the person receiving
the shipment.
Address Line 1 The first line of the mailing address for the shipment.
Address Line 2 The second line of the mailing address for the
shipment.
Address Line 3 The third line of the mailing address for the shipment.
Address Line 4 The fourth line of the mailing address for the
shipment.
Address Line 5 The fifth line of the mailing address for the shipment.
Address Line 6 The sixth line of the mailing address for the shipment.
City The city of the mailing address for the shipment.
State The state of the mailing address for the shipment.
Postal Code The postal code of the mailing address for the
shipment.
Country The country of the mailing address for the shipment.
Table 8–14 Charges Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Table 8–13 Shipment Address Details
Field
![](asset-a4.png)
120 User Guide
Shipment Line Details
8.9 Shipment Line Details
This screen provides visibility to the shipment line details for the selected
shipment line number.
Plan # The number of the delivery plan with which the
inbound shipment is associated, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier.
Seller The Seller’s identifier.
Ship Node The node from which the inbound shipment ships.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Status The inbound shipment status.
Order # The order associated with the shipment.
Table 8–15 Charges Screen, Shipment Charges
Fields
Charge
Category/Charge
Name
The name of the additional inbound shipment charge.
Estimated Charge The estimated additional charge for the inbound
shipment.
Actual Charge The actual additional inbound shipment charge.
Table 8–16 Charges, Container Charges
Fields
Container # The container number.
Actual Freight Charge The carrier’s freight charge for shipping the container.
Table 8–14 Charges Screen, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-a5.png)
Shipment Line Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 121
Table 8–17 Shipment Line Details Screen, Shipment Line
Fields
Shipment Line # The shipment line number.
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
PO # The purchase order number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.
Order Line # The order line number to which the inbound shipment
line belongs.
Release # The order release number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.
Item ID The inbound shipment line item’s item ID.
Description Description of the item.
Is Hazardous Item Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.
Product Class The inbound shipment line item’s product class.
Unit of Measure The inbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.
Expected Serial # The serial number expected on the order.
Quantity The shipment line’s expected quantity.
If a receipt is made against an order, quantity is
displayed as 0.
Received Quantity Indicates the quantity received for the item in this
shipment. If the receipt is against an order, it indicates
the quantity received for the order.
Original Qty Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.
![](asset-a6.png)
122 User Guide
Loads
8.10 Loads
This screen helps you view loads carrying the shipments.
Table 8–18 Shipment Line Details Screen, Line Attributes
Fields
Segment Type The segment type of the item. A segment type
indicates an inventory category. Typical values are
MTC (Made To Customer) or MTO (Made To Order).
Segment The segment number of the item. A segment holds
either the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
COO The country of origin.
FIFO # FIFO number is a date-based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order for which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send items in the same order
in which they were received into the warehouse (First
In - First Out).
Net Weight The net weight of the item.
Net Weight UOM The unit of measure used for the net weight.
Wave # The wave number.
Customer PO # The customer purchase order number.
Department Code The department code associated with the shipment
line.
Table 8–19 Loads Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
![](asset-a7.png)
Ship Node Detail
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 123
8.11 Ship Node Detail
This screen provides visibility to the ship node details for the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from which the inbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
PO # The inbound shipment purchase order number.
Table 8–20 Loads Screen, Loads
Actions
View Details This action allows you to view the details of the load.
For more information, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.
Fields
Load # The load number to which the inbound shipment
belongs.
Load Type The load type as defined by your business practices.
Carrier/Service The Carrier or Carrier service that is transporting the
load.
Origin The location of the load’s origin.
Destination The location of the load’s destination.
Status The load status.
Table 8–19 Loads Screen, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-a8.png)
124 User Guide
Organization Details
8.12 Organization Details
This screen provides visibility to an organization’s details.
Table 8–21 Ship Node Detail Screen, Ship Node
Fields
Ship Node The ship node associated with the shipment.
Description A brief description of the ship node.
Interface The interface that the node uses to communicate with
the Sterling WMS.
Parent Organization The identifier of the organization that owns the ship
node.
Parent Organization
Name The name of the organization that owns the ship node.
Identified By Parent As The node identifier as it is seen by the parent
organization.
GLN The Global Location Number used to identify the ship
node as a legal entity.
Table 8–22 Ship Node Detail Screen, Ship Node Address
The street address of the ship node sending the shipment.
Table 8–23 Ship Node Detail Screen, Contact Address
The street address for the contact person at the ship node.
Table 8–24 Organization Details
Field Description
Organization Information
Organization Code The code that identifies the organization.
Organization Name The name of the organization.
![](asset-a9.png)
Organization Primary Contact Address Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 125
8.13 Organization Primary Contact Address
Details This screen provides visibility to the address details for an organization's
primary contact.
DUNS Number The unique nine-digit sequence recognized as the
universal standard for identifying and keeping track of
over 92 million businesses worldwide. The Dun and
Bradstreet (D&B) unique nine-digit identification
sequence used to identify and keep track of single
business entity. The Sterling WMS does not associate
any logic with the DUNS number.
Account Number With
Hub If the organization is not the Hub, this is the account
number that the organization has with the Hub
organization.
Primary Enterprise The primary enterprise of the organization.
Primary URL Enter the URL of the organization’s Internet address, if
applicable.
Primary Contact Address
This inner panel displays the current street address for the primary contact for
this organization. Click to view the Primary Contact Address Details. For
more information about the Primary Contact Address Details window, see
Organization Primary Contact Address Details.
Corporate Address
This inner panel displays the current corporate street address for this
organization. Click to view the Corporate Address Details. For more
information about the Corporate Address Details window, see Organization
Corporate Address Details.
Table 8–25 Primary Contact Address Details
Field Description
First Name The first name of the organization’s primary contact.
Middle Name The middle name of the organization’s primary
contact.
Table 8–24 Organization Details
Field Description
![](asset-aa.png)
126 User Guide
Organization Primary Contact Address Details
Last Name The surname of the organization’s primary contact.
Company The name of the company where the organization’s
primary contact can be reached.
Day Time Phone The phone number where the organization's primary
contact can be reached.
Evening Phone The phone number where the organization's primary
contact can be reached in the evening.
Mobile Phone The mobile phone number for the organization's
primary contact
Fax The facsimile number for the organization's primary
contact.
E-Mail The electronic mailing address for the organization's
primary contact.
Address Line 1 The first line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Address Line 2 The second line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Address Line 3 The third line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Address Line 4 The fourth line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Address Line 5 The fifth line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Address Line 6 The sixth line of the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
City The city for the street address for the organization's
primary contact.
State The state for the street address for the organization's
primary contact.
Postal Code The postal code for the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Country The country for the street address for the
organization's primary contact.
Table 8–25 Primary Contact Address Details
Field Description
![](asset-ab.png)
Organization Corporate Address Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 127
8.14 Organization Corporate Address Details
This screen provides visibility to the corporate address details for an
organization.
Table 8–26 Corporate Address Details
Field Description
First Name The first name of the person you are addressing at the
organization's corporate site.
Middle Name The middle name of the person you are addressing at
the organization's corporate site.
Last Name The surname name of the person you are addressing
at the organization's corporate site.
Company The organization's corporate name.
Day Time Phone The day-time phone number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.
Evening Phone The evening phone number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.
Mobile Phone The mobile phone number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.
Fax The facsimile number for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.
E-Mail The electronic mailing address for the person you are
contacting at the organization's corporate site.
Address Line 1 The first line of the organization's corporate street
address.
Address Line 2 The second line of the organization's corporate street
address.
Address Line 3 The third line of the organization's corporate street
address.
Address Line 4 The fourth line of the organization's corporate street
address.
Address Line 5 The fifth line of the organization's corporate street
address.
Address Line 6 The sixth line of the organization's corporate street
address.
![](asset-ac.png)
128 User Guide
Containers
8.15 Containers
This screen provides visibility to packed containers included in an
inbound shipment.
City The city of the of the organization's corporate street
address.
State The state of the of the organization's corporate street
address.
Postal Code The postal code of the of the organization's corporate
street address.
Country The country of the of the organization's corporate
street address.
Table 8–27 Shipment Containers Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Table 8–26 Corporate Address Details
Field Description
![](asset-ad.png)
Inbound Order Shipment Instructions
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 129
8.16 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions
This screen provides visibility to special instructions for an inbound
shipment, such as handling instructions.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
PO # The inbound shipment purchase order number.
Table 8–28 Shipment Containers Screen, Containers
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.
Delete Containers This action takes you to the Delete Container screen
where you can remove the container from the
shipment.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Net Weight The weight of the container’s content.
Net Weight UOM The net weight unit of measure associated with the
shipment.
Gross Weight The weight of the container plus its contents.
Gross Weight UOM The unit of measure used for the gross weight.
Freight Charge The charge applied by the Carrier for shipping the
container.
Received Indicates whether the shipment was received.
Table 8–27 Shipment Containers Screen, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-ae.png)
130 User Guide
Inbound Order Shipment Instructions
Table 8–29 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node The node where the inbound shipment is received.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates whether or not the shipment contains
hazardous items.
Table 8–30 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions Screen, Instructions
Actions
Delete Instruction This action allows you to delete the selected
instructions.
Fields
![](asset-af.png)
Shipment Status Audits
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 131
8.17 Shipment Status Audits
This screen provides visibility to status modification details performed
against an inbound shipment.
Instruction Type The type of instruction, such as Gift, Pick, Pack, Ship,
or Other. This field can be modified.
Text The specific instructions to be performed on the order
line. This field can be modified.
Table 8–31 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node The node where the inbound shipment is received.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
view the shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates whether or not the shipment contains
hazardous items.
Table 8–30 Inbound Order Shipment Instructions Screen, Instructions
![](asset-b0.png)
132 User Guide
Shipment Audits
8.18 Shipment Audits
This screen provides visibility to status modification details performed
against an inbound shipment.
Table 8–32 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment Status Audits
Fields
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Old Status The inbound shipment status before the status
modification.
Old Status Date The date the inbound shipment entered the old status.
New Status The inbound shipment status after the status
modification.
New Status Date The date the status modification was made.
Reason Code The assigned code for the modification reason.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 8–33 Shipment Audits, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
![](asset-b1.png)
Shipment Audits
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 133
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is
shipped. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen and view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node The node where the inbound shipment is received.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates whether or not the shipment contains
hazardous items.
Table 8–34 Shipment Audits, Shipment Audits
Fields
Date The date and time on which the shipment was
modified.
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Context The modifications carried out against the shipment.
Modification The attribute that was modified for the shipment.
Old Value The attribute value before making the modifications.
New Value The attribute value after it was modified.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 8–35 Shipment Audits, Shipment Line Audits
Fields
Date The date and time on which the shipment line was
modified.
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Context The modifications carried out against the shipment
line.
Table 8–33 Shipment Audits, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-b2.png)
134 User Guide
Shipment Dates
8.19 Shipment Dates
This screen allows you to modify inbound shipment dates and delivery
dates for the selected shipment.
Line # The shipment line number that was modified.
Modification The attribute that was modified for the shipment line.
Old Value The attribute value before making the modifications.
New Value The attribute value after it was modified.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 8–36 Shipment Dates Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Table 8–35 Shipment Audits, Shipment Line Audits
Fields
![](asset-b3.png)
Shipment Alerts
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 135
8.20 Shipment Alerts
This screen provides visibility to alerts for the selected shipments.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
PO # The inbound shipment purchase order number.
Table 8–37 Shipment Dates Screen, System Dates
Fields
Requested Shipment
Date The requested shipment date associated with the
shipment.
Expected Shipment
Date The expected shipment date associated with the
shipment.
Actual Shipment Date The actual shipment date associated with the
shipment.
Requested Delivery
Date The requested delivery date associated with the
shipment.
Expected Delivery Date The expected delivery date associated with the
shipment.
Actual Delivery Date The actual delivery date associated with the shipment.
Table 8–38 Shipment Dates Screen, New Dates
Fields
Date Type The date type. For example, Shipment or Delivery.
Requested The Buyer requested date for the specified date type.
This field can be modified.
Expected The expected date for the specified date type. This
field can be modified.
Actual The actual date for the specified date type. This field
can be modified.
Table 8–36 Shipment Dates Screen, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-b4.png)
136 User Guide
Shipment Alerts
Table 8–39 Alert List Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
PO # The inbound shipment purchase order number.
Table 8–40 Alert List Screen, Alert List
Actions
View Details This action allows you to view alert details. For more
information about alerts, see the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User
Guide.
Fields
Alert ID The alert identifier.
![](asset-b5.png)
Additional Attributes
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 137
8.21 Additional Attributes
This screen provides visibility to additional attributes for a shipment.
Type The type of alert raised. For example, ON_FAILURE or
FAILED_AUTH. For more information about alerts, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.
Description A brief description of the alert.
Queue The message queue to which the alert has been
assigned to.
Priority The priority of the alert.
Owner The user who is handling the alert.
Raised On The date the alert was raised.
Table 8–41 Additional Attributes Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node Indicates the node that is receiving the inbound
shipment.
Table 8–40 Alert List Screen, Alert List
![](asset-b6.png)
138 User Guide
Shipment Receipt Discrepancy
8.22 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy
This screen provides visibility to view discrepancies for the received
shipment.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the inbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Table 8–42 Additional Attributes Screen, Additional Attributes
Fields
Overage Allowed Indicates whether a shipment overage is allowed.
For outbound shipments, overage means shipping
more than was initially intended in a shipment.
For inbound shipments, overage means receiving more
than the expected quantity in a shipment.
Manually Entered Indicates whether the shipment was manually entered,
or generated automatically.
Order Available On
System Indicates whether the order that is associated with the
shipment is available in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation, or if it only exists in an external system.
Case Content
Verification Not
Required
Indicates whether the case content verification is
required for this shipment.
Pallet Content
Verification Not
Required
Indicates whether the pallet content verification is
required for this shipment.
Shipment Entry
Overridden Indicates whether the shipment entry override is
allowed.
Gift Indicates if the shipment has gift items.
Table 8–41 Additional Attributes Screen, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-b7.png)
Shipment Receipt Discrepancy
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 139
Table 8–43 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy Screen, Shipment
Actions
Manage Receiving
Discrepancies This action takes you to the Manage Receiving
Discrepancies screen where you can manage any
discrepancies found in the shipments.
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
PO # The inbound shipment purchase order number.
Table 8–44 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy Screen, Receipt Discrepancy
Fields
PO # The purchase order number.
Line The purchase order’s line number.
Item ID The item identifier.
![](asset-b8.png)
140 User Guide
Manage Receiving Discrepancies
8.23 Manage Receiving Discrepancies
This screen provides management functionality for any discrepancies
found in the inbound shipments.
Product Class The product class of the item.
Unit of Measure The unit of measure in which the item is measured.
Discrepancy Type The type of discrepancy.
Discrepancy Quantity The quantity of discrepancy.
Table 8–45 Manage Receiving Discrepancies Screen, Shipment
Actions
Reason Entry Complete Click this action to adjust the Discrepancy Reason and
Reason Quantity, if the fields are grayed out. The sum
of the Discrepancy Reasons and Reason
Quantities add up to the Discrepancy Quantity.
Reopen Reason Entry Click this action if your adjustments add up
correctly, then the fields get grayed out. If the
adjustments do not add up correctly but you
need to close the window, you can finish working
with the receiving discrepancies later.
Fields
PO # The purchase order number.
Line The purchase order’s line number.
Item ID The item identifier.
Product Class The product class of the item.
Unit of Measure The unit of measure in which the item is measured.
Discrepancy Type The type of discrepancy.
Discrepancy Quantity The quantity of discrepancy.
Discrepancy Reason The reason for the discrepancy.
Reason Quantity The reason for the discrepancy quantity.
Table 8–44 Shipment Receipt Discrepancy Screen, Receipt Discrepancy
Fields
![](asset-b9.png)
Receipt Summary
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 141
8.24 Receipts
This screen provides visibility to receipt details for the selected shipment.
8.25 Receipt Summary
This screen provides visibility to the receipt’s summary for the selected
receipts.
Table 8–46 Inbound Order Receipt List Screen, List
Actions
View Summary This action takes you to the Receipt Summary screen
where you can view the receipt’s summary details.
View Details This action takes you to the Receipt Details screen
where you can view the receipt details.
Receive This action allows you to view containers that are
expected to be received in the Receipt Details screen.
Close Prereceipt This action allows you to close prereceipts.
Close Receipt This action allows you to close receipts.
Report/Record Receipt This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.
Fields
Receipt # The receipt number.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer The Buyer associated with the receipt.
Seller The Seller associated with the receipt.
Receipt Start Date The receipt start date.
Receiving Node The receiving node associated with the receipt.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open.
Receipt Status The receipt status.
![](asset-ba.png)
142 User Guide
Receipt Summary
Table 8–47 Receipt Summary
View Icons
Details - This icon takes you to the Receipt Details
screen where you can view receipt details for the
shipment.
Instructions - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Instructions screen where you can view special
instructions for an inbound shipment, such as
handling instructions.
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Status Audits screen where you can view a list of
status audits for the selected receipt.
Actions
Inventory View Click this action to go to the location inventory screen
and view inventory details at a location in the
warehouse. For more information about this screen,
see the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
User Guide.
Close Prereceipt This action allows you to close prereceipts that you
selected.
Close Receipt This action allows you to close receipts that you
selected.
Receive This action allows you to view containers that are
expected to be received in the Receipt Details
screen.
Report/Record Receipt This action takes you to the Receive (Report or Record
Receipt) screen where you can record paper-based
receipt details.
Fields
Receipt # The identifying number of the receipt.
Shipment # The identifying number of the shipment.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the order.
Buyer The buyer organization that placed the order. Click this
link to go to the Organization Details screen where you
can view the seller organization details.
![](asset-bb.png)
Receipt Summary
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 143
Seller The seller organization that placed the order. Click this
link to go to the Organization Details screen and view
the seller organization details.
Receipt Start Date The receipt start date.
Receiving Node The receiving node. This takes you to the Ship Node
Detail screen where you can view the ship node
details.
Receiving Dock The dock location that received the receipt.
Receipt Status The current status of the receipt. Click this link to go
to the Shipment Status Audits screen and view a list of
status audits for the selected receipt.
Receipt Open Indicates whether the receipt is open or not.
No Of Expected Pallets The number of pallets expected to receive.
No Of Expected
Cartons The number of cartons expected to receive.
Table 8–48 Receipt Summary Screen, Items
Actions
View Containers Click this action to go to the Order Receipt Container
screen and view the receipt’s container details. For
more information, see the appropriate section in this
guide.
Adjust Receipt Click this action to go to the Adjusting a Receipt
screen and adjust a receipt. For more information, see
the appropriate section in this guide.
Inspect Click this link to go to the Inspect Inbound Receipts
screens and inspect items you received. For more
information, see the appropriate section in this guide.
Fields
Item ID The item identifier.
Item Description The item’s description.
PC The product classification such as first quality, second
quality, or finished good.
UOM The line item’s unit of measure.
Table 8–47 Receipt Summary
![](asset-bc.png)
144 User Guide
Receipt Details
8.26 Receipt Details
This screen provides visibility to receipt details for the inbound shipment.
Disposition Code The disposition code to determine the product
classification and inventory status.
Order # The return associated with the inbound order.
Line # The inbound shipment order line number.
Release # The release number to which the inbound shipment
line belongs.
Tag This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture
tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Container Serial Details and
view a container’s serial details.
Net Weight The item’s net weight.
Net Weight UOM The unit of measure used for the net weight.
Quantity The number of items.
Table 8–49 Inbound Order Receipt Details Screen, Receipt
Fields
Receipt # The identifying number for the receipt.
Shipment # The identifying number for the shipment.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer organization that placed the order.
Seller The Seller organization that is handling the order.
Receipt Start Date The start date of the receipt.
Receiving Node The node that received the order.
Receiving Dock The location where the order was received.
Table 8–48 Receipt Summary Screen, Items
![](asset-bd.png)
Receipt Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 145
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is still open.
No Of Pallets Indicates the number of pallets.
No Of Cartons Indicates the number of cartons.
Table 8–50 Inbound Order Receipt Details Screen, Receipt Lines
Fields
Item ID The inbound shipment line item identifier.
Item Description The description of the receipt line item.
PC The inbound shipment line item’s product class.
UOM The inbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.
Disposition Code The disposition code to determine the product
classification and inventory status.
Order # The order number to which the inbound shipment line
belongs.
Line # The inbound order shipment line number.
Release # The release number to which the inbound shipment
line belongs.
Ship By Date The date by which the inbound shipment line must
ship by.
COO The container’s country of origin.
Serial # The container’s serial number.
Tag This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture
tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Container Serial Details and
view a container’s serial details.
Quantity The number of items received.
Table 8–49 Inbound Order Receipt Details Screen, Receipt
Fields
![](asset-be.png)
146 User Guide
Receipt Line Details
8.27 Receipt Line Details
This screen provides visibility to inbound order’s shipment receipt line
details.
Table 8–51 Receipt Line Details Screen, Container
Fields
Receipt # The inbound order receipt number associated with the
receipt.
Shipment # The inbound order shipment number associated with
the receipt.
Order # The inbound order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise that received the receipt.
Receiving Node The node that received the receipt.
Receiving Dock The dock location that received the receipt.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt that was received.
Case ID Case LPN that was received.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN that was received.
Table 8–52 Receipt Line Details Screen, Container Details
Fields
Item ID The item identifier of the line item packaged in the
container.
Item Description The description of the item received.
PC The product classification of the line item packaged in
the container such as first quality, second quality, or
finished good.
UOM The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.
Disposition Code The disposition code to determine the product
classification and inventory status.
Order # The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.
![](asset-bf.png)
Receipt Container
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 147
8.28 Receipt Instructions
This screen provides visibility to special instructions for an inbound
shipment, such as handling instructions. For more information, see the
appropriate section in this guide.
8.29 Receipt Status Audits
This screen provides visibility to a list of status audits for the selected
receipt. For more information, see the appropriate section in this guide.
8.30 Receipt Container
This screen provides visibility to items packaged in an inbound order
shipment receipt’s container. For more information, see the appropriate
section in this guide.
Line # The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs to.
Release # The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.
Ship By Date The date by which the container must be shipped.
COO Country of origin associated with the item.
Serial # The serial number associated with the item.
Tag This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture
tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Container Serial Details and
view a container’s serial details.
Quantity The quantity of the line item packaged in the
container.
Table 8–52 Receipt Line Details Screen, Container Details
Fields
![](asset-c0.png)
148 User Guide
Activity Demand
8.31 Activity Demand
This screen provides visibility to the shipment’s activity demand.
Table 8–53 Shipment Activity Demand Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
Table 8–54 Shipment Activity Demand Screen, Activity Demand List
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.
Fields
Shipment Line # The outbound shipment line number.
Location ID The item location in the node.
![](asset-c1.png)
Record Container Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 149
8.32 Record Container Details
This screen provides the ability to record container details for a container
that is to be received.
Activity Code The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.
Pallet Id The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.
Case Id The case LPN that belong to the work order.
Item ID The items that belong to the work order.
Priority Indicates the priority of the demand.
Demand Quantity The quantity of the order that was demanded.
Satisfied Quantity The extent to which the demand is satisfied.
Demand Satisfied Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Table 8–55 Pack Container Screen, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the inbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
view the delivery plan details. For more information on
delivery plan details, see Section 2.5, "Delivery Plan
Details".
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the buyer
organization details.
Seller The Seller’s identifier. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen and view the seller
organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is sent.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen and
view the node details for the shipment.
Table 8–54 Shipment Activity Demand Screen, Activity Demand List
![](asset-c2.png)
150 User Guide
Record Container Details
Destination The inbound order’s shipment destination.
Status The inbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen and view the
shipment’s status audits.
Table 8–56 Pack Container Screen, Ship To
The address to where the container is shipped.
Table 8–57 Pack Container Screen, Inbound Order Container Details
Fields
Container Type Select whether the container is a pallet or a case.
Container SCM Enter the shipment container marking number of the
pallet or carton.
Tracking # Enter the container’s tracking number used to track
the container’s status and location.
Declared Value Enter the value used to calculate customs charges.
This field is only applicable for international shipments.
Gross Weight Enter the weight of the container plus its contents.
Net Weight Enter the weight of the container's contents.
Height Enter the height of the container.
Width Enter the width of the container.
Length Enter the length of the container.
Table 8–55 Pack Container Screen, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-c3.png)
Start Receipt
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 151
8.33 Start Receipt
This screen provides the ability to create a new receipt to receive a
shipment.
Table 8–58 Pack Container Screen, Unpacked Items
Fields
Tag Details This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture
tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Container Serial Details and
view a container’s serial details.
PO # The purchase order number associated with the
unpacked items.
Line # The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs.
Release # The order release number to which the unpacked line
item belongs.
Item ID The item identifier of the unpacked line item.
PC The product classification of the unpacked line item.
UOM The unit of measure of the unpacked line item.
Quantity The quantity associated with the unpacked items.
Pack Quantity The quantity of the line item that remains unpacked.
Table 8–59 Start Receipt
Fields
Receipt # Enter the inbound shipment receipt number associated
with the receipt.
Receiving Dock The dock location that received the receipt.
Receipt Date The date you create a receipt.
To change this date, you can use the Calendar lookup.
![](asset-c4.png)
152 User Guide
Print
Click Save to save the receipt information.
8.34 Receive
This Receipt Details (Execution Console Framework) screen provides the
ability to enter items that you received in a warehouse, such as pallet,
case, and SKU.
For more information about Execution Console Framework, see the
appropriate section in this guide.
8.35 Print
This screen provides print capabilities.
Shipment # The inbound order shipment number.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Expected Delivery Date The date the shipment is estimated to arrive.
Receiving Node The node that received the shipment.
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt.
No Of Expected Pallets The number of pallets in the receipt.
No Of Expected
Cartons The number of cartons in the receipt.
Table 8–60 Print
Fields
Print Service Name Choose the applicable document or label you want to
print.
Printer Name Choose the printer from which you want to print the
document or label.
No. of Copies Enter the total number of copies of the document or
label you want to print.
Table 8–59 Start Receipt
Fields
![](asset-c5.png)
Receive (Report or Record Receipt)
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 153
8.36 Create Picklist
This screen provides the ability to create picklist for the selected
shipments. When you create a picklist, the status changes to "Shipment
Being Picked". For more information, see the Inbound Order Shipment
Details screen.
8.37 Create Alerts
This screen provides the ability to create alerts for the selected shipment
in this screen. For field value descriptions, see Table 8–39 and
Table 8–40.
8.38 Receive (Report or Record Receipt)
This screen provides the ability to record paper-based receipt details.
Note: You can create a picklist only if the PRINT_PICK_
LIST transaction is valid for the shipment at its current
status in the shipment pipeline. For more information
about transaction details, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
Table 8–61 Receive, Receipt
Field
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt.
Receipt Start Date The receipt start date.
Receiving Node The node that received the shipment.
Receipt Status The receipt status.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open.
![](asset-c6.png)
154 User Guide
Receive (Report or Record Receipt)
No Of Pallets The number of pallets.
No Of Cartons The number of cartons.
Table 8–62 Receive, Lines to Receive
Field
Pallet ID This field is displayed only if you are using the Sterling
WMS.
Click this option button to enter the Pallet ID.
Case ID This field is displayed only if you are using the Sterling
WMS.
Click this option button to enter the Case ID.
None This field is displayed only if you are using the Sterling
WMS.
Click this option button if neither a pallet nor a case is
received.
Shipment Line # The shipment line number.
Click to add unexpected items in the
shipment.
PO # The purchase order number to which the shipment
belongs to.
Release # The order release number to which the shipment
belongs.
Item ID The item you are receiving is displayed.
Table 8–61 Receive, Receipt
Field
Pallet ID Enter the Pallet ID.
Pallet Completely
Received Select this check box if the
pallet is completely received.
Case ID Enter the Case ID.
Case Completely
Received Select this check box if the case
is completely received.
![](asset-c7.png)
Receive (Report or Record Receipt)
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 155
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Product Class The shipment line item’s product class.
Total Quantity The total quantity contained in the shipment line or
order line.
Received Quantity The quantity that has been received in the shipment
line or order line.
Quantity To Be
Received The total quantity to be received in the shipment line,
or the quantity of released items in the order line.
Disposition Code The disposition code is automatically populated by the
system from the receiving rules. Modify the disposition
code, if applicable.
Receiving Quantity Enter the quantity being received in the shipment line.
Note: If the item is tag-controlled, additional fields are
displayed, depending upon the item’s tag attributes.
If the item is serial-controlled, an additional field is
displayed to let you enter the serial number.
Table 8–63 Receive, Serial Range
Field Description
Serial # Enter the serial number of the item.
Click to add a new serial number.
Click to go to the serial range panel, where you
can enter the serial range of the items.
From Serial # Enter the start serial number.
To Serial # Enter the end serial number.
Click to add a new serial range.
Table 8–62 Receive, Lines to Receive
Field
![](asset-c8.png)
156 User Guide
Inbound Order Container Search By All Attributes
8.39 Add Delivery Plan
This screen provides the ability to add shipments to a delivery plan.
8.40 Inbound Order Container Search By All
Attributes
This screen helps you search inbound containers by all attributes.
Table 8–64 Select Delivery Plan Screen, Delivery Plan
Fields
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Plan # Enter the delivery plan number to which you want to
add the inbound shipment.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
plan number you want to use.
Plan Name Enter the delivery plan name to which you want to add
the inbound shipment.
Plan Date Enter the delivery plan date and time through which
the delivery plan you are adding the inbound shipment
to is valid.
Table 8–65 Inbound Order Container Search by All Attributes
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type for which you
want to search.
PO # Enter the purchase order number for which you are
searching, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter the inbound shipment number for which you are
searching, if applicable.
Container # Enter the container number for which you are
searching, if applicable.
Container Type Enter the type of containers for which you are
searching, if applicable.
Tracking # Enter the tracking number under which you want to
search for containers, if applicable.
![](asset-c9.png)
Inbound Order Container List
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 157
8.41 Inbound Order Container List
The Container List window displays the results of a container search. You
can perform actions on a single container or multiple containers by
selecting the check boxes of the containers you want to perform an
action on and choosing the applicable action from the action bar.
Item ID Enter the item ID included in the containers for which
you are searching, if applicable.
Container SCM Enter the container SCM for which you are searching,
if applicable.
Containers With
Logical Kits Only Select the check box to search for containers only with
logical kits, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of inbound shipments you
want returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 8–66 Inbound Order Container List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.
Pack/Unpack This action takes you to the Pack or Unpack screen
where you can pack or unpack a container.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.
Delete This action takes you to the Delete Container screen
where you can delete an inbound container.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Shipment # The inbound shipment to which the container belongs.
Table 8–65 Inbound Order Container Search by All Attributes
Fields
![](asset-ca.png)
158 User Guide
Container Details
8.42 Container Details
The Container Detail screen provides various information about an
inbound container. The actions that can be performed in the Container
Detail screen are explained in the following tables.
Status The container status.
Manifested Indicates if the container was manifested.
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Ship Date The date by which the container must ship.
Received Indicates whether the shipment has been received.
Table 8–67 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container
View Icon
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Container
Status Audits screen where you can view a list of
status audits that you modified for an inbound
container.
Actions
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Shipment # The inbound shipment to which the container belongs.
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
Ship Date The date by which the container must ship.
Container Group The container group to which the container belongs.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
Table 8–66 Inbound Order Container List
![](asset-cb.png)
Container Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 159
Received Indicates whether the shipment has been received.
Ship To The address to where the container is shipped.
Table 8–68 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Ship To
The address to where the shipment is shipped.
Click to go to the Modify Address screen and change the ship to address.
Table 8–69 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container Info
Fields
Carrier/Service The Carrier or Carrier service shipping the container.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.
Pallet/Carton SCM The shipment container marking number of the pallet
or carton.
Declared Value The value used to calculate customs charges. This field
is only applicable for international shipments.
Gross Weight The weight of the container plus the contents.
Actual Weight The weight of just the container.
Size The size of the container.
Length The length of the container.
Width The width of the container.
Height The height of the container.
Net Weight The weight of the container’s content.
Table 8–67 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container
![](asset-cc.png)
160 User Guide
Container Details
Table 8–70 Inbound Order Container Details Screen, Container Line
Details
Fields
Tag Details This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled,
and if the receiving node is configured to capture
tags when receiving inventory into a warehouse
or in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Container Serial Details and
view a container’s serial details.
Order # The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.
Line # The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs.
Release # The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.
Item ID The item identifier of the line item packaged in the
container.
PC The product classification of the line item packaged in
the container.
UOM The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.
Description The description of the item.
Ship By Date The date by which the container line must be shipped
by.
Quantity The quantity of the line item packaged in the
container.
Table 8–71 Inbound Order container Details Screen, Child Containers
Fields
Container # The container number.
Status The container status.
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
![](asset-cd.png)
Container Serial Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 161
8.43 Container Serial Details
You can view a container’s serial details with the help of this screen.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Table 8–72 Serial Details
Fields
Node Node associated with the item.
Location Location associated with the item.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Serial # The serial number associated with the container items.
Table 8–73 Serial Details Screen, Child Serials
Fields
Secondary Serial #1 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #2 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #3 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #4 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #5 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #6 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #7 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #8 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #9 Component serial number of the item.
Table 8–71 Inbound Order container Details Screen, Child Containers
Fields
![](asset-ce.png)
162 User Guide
Pack or Unpack
8.44 Container Status Audits
This screen provides visibility to a list of status audits that you modified
for a inbound container.
8.45 Pack or Unpack
This Pack Details (Execution Console Framework) screen provides the
ability to pack or unpack containers.
For more information about the Execution Console Framework, see the
appropriate section in this guide.
Table 8–74 Container Status Audits Screen, Container
Fields
Container # The inbound container number.
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Container Type The inbound container type.
Ship Date The date by which the container must ship.
Container Group The container group to which the container belongs.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
Table 8–75 Container Status Audits Screen, Container Status Audits
Fields
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Old Status The inbound shipment status before the status
modification.
Old Status Date The date the inbound shipment entered the old status.
New Status The inbound container status after the status
modification.
New Status Date The date the status modification was made.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
![](asset-cf.png)
Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 163
8.46 Delete Container
This screen provides the ability to delete an inbound container.
Click OK.
8.47 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Use this screen to search for dock appointments by all attributes.
Table 8–76 Delete Container
Fields
Remove quantity from
shipment line Choose this option to remove the quantity from the
shipment line.
Backorder removed
quantity Choose this option to backorder the removed quantity.
Table 8–77 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node The node associated with the docks displays.
Start Date The start date is defaulted to the current date.
Enter the start date of the appointment for which you
are searching, if applicable.
Choose the calendar lookup to change the date.
Number of Days To
Display Enter the maximum number of days to be displayed
on the dock schedule calendar as a result of your
search, if applicable. By default, the value displayed is
5.
Location Enter the dock location, if applicable.
Choose the lookup option to search for dock locations.
Inbound Delivery Check this checkbox to search for inbound docks, if
applicable.
Outbound Pickup Check this checkbox to search for outbound docks, if
applicable.
Appointment # Enter the appointment number for which you are
searching, if applicable.
![](asset-d0.png)
164 User Guide
Dock Schedule Details
The Dock Schedule Details screen displays as a result of your dock
appointment search by all attributes.
8.48 Dock Schedule Details
This screen provides visibility to the dock appointment calendar. It
displays the inbound, outbound, and both inbound and outbound docks
with their:
QAvailable time slots for creating new appointments.
QUnavailable time slots due to calendar constraints.
QUnavailable time slots due to appointments already taken.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.
Order # Enter the order number for which you are searching
for the dock appointment, if applicable.
Load # Enter the load number for which you are searching for
the dock appointment, if applicable.
Carrier Enter the carrier for which you are searching for the
dock appointment, if applicable.
BOL # Enter the bill of lading number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.
Table 8–78 Dock Schedule Details, Dock Availability
Actions
Manage Dock Group This action button takes you to the Dock Group Details
screen.
Zoom In Click this action button to view more definitive details
of the appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom In
are supported.
Table 8–77 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Fields
![](asset-d1.png)
Dock Appointment
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 165
8.49 Dock Appointment
You can create new appointments or modify existing appointments with
the help of this screen.
Zoom Out Click this action button to view a larger area of the
appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom Out are
supported.
Displays the dock locations for the nodes that are of the dock type INBOUND,
OUTBOUND, and BOTH.
Table 8–79 Dock Schedule Details, Legend
Indicates an appointment for the searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates appointments that do not match the
searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates free slots for which new appointments can
be taken.
Click a slot to create a new dock appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates the unavailable slots due to the calendar
constraints.
Table 8–80 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
Actions
Cancel Click this action button to cancel an appointment.
Fields
Table 8–78 Dock Schedule Details, Dock Availability
![](asset-d2.png)
166 User Guide
Dock Appointment
Appointment # The appointment number associated with the dock
displays, if applicable.
The appointment number displays only for existing
appointments.
Location The dock location for which you chose to take an
appointment displays here.
Appointment Type By default, the Outbound Pickup appointment type is
selected for outbound dock locations, and Inbound
Delivery for inbound and both inbound and outbound
dock locations.
Start Date This start date is defaulted with the date of the
selected slot.
Enter the start date on which you want to take an
appointment or choose the calendar lookup to change
the date.
Start Time This start time is defaulted with the time of the
selected slot.
Enter the start time of the appointment or choose the
time lookup to change the time.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number you want to associate with
the dock appointment, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to search for shipments. The
shipment’s weight, volume, number of cases and
number of pallets automatically displays.
Load # Enter the load number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to search for loads. The
number of cases and number of pallets associated with
the load automatically displays.
Order # Enter the order number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
BOL # Enter the bill of lading number you want to associate
with the dock appointment, if applicable.
PRO # Enter the PRO number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Carrier Select the carrier for which you want to take an
appointment, if applicable.
Table 8–80 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
![](asset-d3.png)
Dock Group Details
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 167
Click Save to save the dock appointment.
8.50 Dock Group Details
You can enter constraints on the maximum number of appointments that
can be taken for the group of docks associated with a node.
Notes Enter any additional information associated with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Weight Enter the weight of the shipment, if applicable.
Volume Enter the volume of the shipment, if applicable.
No Of Cases Enter the number of cases contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.
No Of Pallets Enter the number of pallets contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.
Estimate End Time Click this button to calculate and display the estimated
end time in the End Time field.
The estimated end time is calculated based on SAM
defined in the productivity type, which is associated
with the task type for trailer loading and unloading
activities.
End Time To specify a pre-determined end time, enter the end
time.
Choose the time lookup to change the time.
Table 8–81 Dock Group Details, Dock Group
Fields
Node The node associated with the docks displays.
Table 8–80 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
![](asset-d4.png)
168 User Guide
Dock Group Details
Click Save to save the maximum number of dock group appointment
constraints.
Table 8–82 Dock Group Details, Dock Group Max No. of Appointments
Action
Remove Click this action button to remove the selected
appointment constraints.
Fields
Start Time Indicates the start time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.
Click to create an appointment constraint.
End Time Indicates the end time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.
Sunday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Monday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Tuesday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Wednesday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Thursday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Friday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Saturday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window.
![](asset-d5.png)
View Holds
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 169
8.51 View Holds
You can view holds that are applied to the selected shipments in this
screen.
Table 8–83 View Holds, Inbound Order Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The inbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The inbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the inbound shipment is
associated with.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the inbound shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the buyer.
Seller The identifier for the seller.
Ship Node The node from where the inbound shipment is
shipped.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the inbound shipment.
Status The inbound shipment status.
Release # The order release number to which the inbound
shipment line belongs.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the inbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Merge Node If you have order lines coming from multiple nodes
and want to consolidate them into one load, enter a
node at which you want all of the dependent order
lines to be consolidated with the parent order line.
Note: Merge Node is only relevant in a Deliver
Together dependency.
Table 8–84 View Holds, Shipment Holds
Actions
Add Holds This action takes you to the Add Holds screen where
you can add holds to the selected inbound shipment.
Fields
![](asset-d6.png)
170 User Guide
View History
8.52 Add Holds
You can add holds to the inbound shipment on this screen.
8.53 View History
Every time the status of an order hold changes, useful information
regarding the status change is recorded in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation. In this screen, you can view the history of an order hold.
Hold Description A brief description of the hold.
Hold Status The current status of the hold.
Hold Comment Any additional comments for the hold.
Action Select the action that you want to apply to the hold
from the drop-down list.
Reason Enter the reason for the hold.
Table 8–85 View Holds, Resolved Holds
Fields
Hold Description A brief description of the hold.
Reason The reason for changing this hold to resolved status.
Table 8–86 Add Holds, Shipment Holds
Fields
Hold Type Select the hold type associated with the inbound
shipment from the drop-down list.
Reason Enter the reason for the hold.
Table 8–84 View Holds, Shipment Holds
Actions
![](asset-d7.png)
View History
Inbound Shipment Console Screens 171
Table 8–87 View History, Primary Information
Fields
Shipment# The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipper’s reference number.
Plan # The outbound shipment’s plan number
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment
Buyer The Buyer’s identifier.
Seller The Seller’s identifier.
Ship Node The node from which the outbound shipment ships.
Receiving Node The node which receives the outbound shipment
Status The status of the outbound shipment.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the shipment contains any hazardous item.
Merge Node The node that has multiple order lines and is
consolidated into one shipment.
![](asset-d8.png)
172 User Guide
View History
![](asset-d9.png)
Receipt Console Screens 173
9
Receipt Console Screens
The Receipt Console provides:
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
order number, shipment number.
QVisibility to receipt summary.
QVisibility to receipt details and receipt line details.
QClosure of receipts and prereceipts.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Receipt
Console.
9.1 Receipt Search By Receipt
The Receipt Search By Receipt screen lets you perform a receipt search
by receipt.
Table 9–1 Receipt Search By Receipt
Fields Description
Document Type Select the document type associated with the receipt
you want to search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprises Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Receiving Node The node associated with the receipt displays.
Receiving Dock Enter the receiving dock associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.
![](asset-da.png)
174 User Guide
Receipt Search By Item
Choosing Search displays the search results in the Receipt List screen.
9.2 Receipt Search By Item
The Receipt Search By Item screen lets you perform a receipt search by
item.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.
Buyer Enter the buyer associated with the receipt you want
to search for, if applicable.
Seller Enter the seller associated with the receipt you want
to search for, if applicable.
Order # Enter the order number associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number associated with the receipt
you are searching for, if applicable.
Receipt Date Enter the date range through which you want to
search for the receipts, if applicable.
Receipt Status Select the status of the receipt you want to search for,
if applicable.
Closed Receipts Only Select Closed Receipts Only if the search is applicable
only for the closed receipts.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of the search.
Note: It is recommended that you do not use spaces
before or after any text you enter in the search fields, as this
may result in inconsistent or inaccurate results.
Table 9–1 Receipt Search By Receipt
Fields Description
![](asset-db.png)
Receipt Search By Container
Receipt Console Screens 175
Choosing Search displays the search results in the Receipt List screen.
9.3 Receipt Search By Container
The Receipt Search By Container screen lets you perform a receipt
search by container.
Table 9–2 Receipt Search By Item
Fields Description
Document Type Select the document type associated with the receipt
you want to search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprises Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Receiving Node The node associated with the receipt displays.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.
Serial # Enter the serial number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Disposition Code Select the disposition code you are searching for, if
applicable.
Inspection Pending Select this option if you are searching for inspection
pending receipts.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
Note: It is recommended that you do not use spaces
before or after any text you enter in the search fields, as this
may result in inconsistent or inaccurate results.
![](asset-dc.png)
176 User Guide
Receipt List
Choosing Search displays the search results in the Receipt List screen.
9.4 Receipt List
The Receipt List screen displays the result of a receipt search. You can
perform actions on a single receipt or on multiple receipts by selecting
the check boxes of the relevant receipts and choosing the applicable
action from the action bar.
The fields in the Receipt List screen are always the same, irrespective of
whether you are searching for a Receipt in the Inbound Order Console
(using the Supply Collaboration module), the Inbound Receipt Console or
the Return Receipt Console (using the Warehouse Management System
module), or in the Return Console (using the Reverse Logistics module).
This chapter describes the screens in terms of the Return Receipt
Console. However, the field descriptions hold true in all similar scenarios,
across all consoles mentioned above.
Table 9–3 Receipt Search By Container
Fields Description
Document Type Select the document type associated with the receipt
you want to search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprises Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Receiving Node The node associated with the receipt displays.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN you are searching for.
Case ID Enter the case LPN you are searching for.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
Note: It is recommended that you do not use spaces
before or after any text you enter in the search fields, as this
may result in inconsistent or inaccurate results.
![](asset-dd.png)
Return Order Receipt Summary
Receipt Console Screens 177
9.5 Return Order Receipt Summary
The Return Order Receipt Summary screen provides visibility of a
receipt’s summary.
Table 9–4 Return Receipt List
Actions
View Summary This action takes you to the Return Order Receipt
Summary screen, which lets you view a receipt
summary.
View Details This action takes you to the Receipt Details screen,
which lets you view the return receipt details.
Close Prereceipt This action closes a prereceipt.
Close Receipt This action closes a receipt.
Report/Record receipt. This action takes you to the Receive screen, which lets
you record paper based receipt details.
Fields
Receipt # Receipt number associated with the receipt. Click this
link to view the receipt details.
Shipment # Shipment number associated with the receipt.
Order # Order Number associated with receipt.
Enterprise Enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer Buyer associated with the receipt.
Seller Seller associated with the receipt
Receipt Start Date The start date of the receipt.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.
Receipt Status Status of the receipt.
![](asset-de.png)
178 User Guide
Return Order Receipt Summary
Table 9–5 Return Order Receipt Summary, Return Receipt
Return Receipt
This panel contains basic information about a receipt.
Note: You can choose receipt actions by selecting the view icon in the title bar.
View Icons
Details - This icon takes you to the Receipt Details
screen, which lets you view receipt details.
Instructions - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Instructions screen, which lets you view a receipt’s
summary instruction
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Receipt
Status Audits screen, which lets you view a
receipt’s summary status audit list.
Expected Receipt - This icon takes you to the
Expected Receipt screen, which lets you view the
details of the expected receipt.
Actions
Inventory View This action takes you to the Location Inventory
screen, which lets you view location inventory
details for a receipt. For more information about
the Location Inventory screen, see the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: User Guide.
Close Prereceipt This action closes a prereceipt.
Close Receipt This action closes a receipt.
Receive This action takes you to the Receive Details screen,
which lets you record receipt details. For more
information about the Receive Details screen, see
the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
User Guide.
Report/Record Receipt This action takes you to the Receive screen, which lets
you record paper based receipt details.
Fields
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
![](asset-df.png)
Return Order Receipt Summary
Receipt Console Screens 179
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Choose the Shipment # link to view the shipment
detail for the particular shipment.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt. Click this link to
view buyer details.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt. Click this link to
view seller details.
Receipt Start Date The start date of the receipt.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received. Click this link
to view the receiving node details.
Receiving Dock The dock location that received the receipt.
Important: You can receive receipts into multiple
locations.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view the status audits for a receipt.
No Of Expected Pallets The number of expected pallets in the receipt.
No Of Expected
Cartons The number of expected cartons in the receipt.
Table 9–6 Return Order Receipt Summary, Items
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Receipt Line Details
screen, which lets you view a receipt’s item line
details.
Adjust Receipt This action takes you to the Adjust Receipt
screen, which lets you adjust the receipt of an
item. For more information about the Adjust
Receipt screen, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.
Table 9–5 Return Order Receipt Summary, Return Receipt
![](asset-e0.png)
180 User Guide
Return Order Receipt Summary
Inspect This action takes you to the Inspect Return Receipt
Details screen, which lets you view the return receipt
items and the receipts that are already inspected. For
more information about how to inspect return
receipts, see the appropriate section in this guide
or the Sterling Reverse Logistics: User Guide.
Fields
Item ID The item ID.
Description A brief description of the item.
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Disposition Code The disposition of the item.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Release # The release number associated with the receipt.
Tag # The tag number.
Clicking this link lets you view the tag details for an
item.
Quantity The number of units in UOM on the receipt.
Table 9–7 Return Order Receipt Summary, Containers
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Receipt Line Details
(Container) screen, which lets you view a receipt’s
container line details.
Adjust Receipt This action takes you to the Adjust Receipt
screen, which lets you adjust the receipt of an
item. For more information about the Adjust
Receipt screen, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.
UnReceive Container This action lets you unreceive the selected containers.
Table 9–6 Return Order Receipt Summary, Items
![](asset-e1.png)
Receipt Line Details
Receipt Console Screens 181
9.6 Receipt Line Details
The Receipt Line Details screen lets you view a receipt’s item line details.
Fields
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Table 9–8 Receipt Line Details, Receipt Line
Fields Description
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received.
Receiving Dock The location where the shipment is received.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Item ID The item ID.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Line # The order line number associated with the receipt.
Release # The release number associated with the receipt.
Table 9–9 Receipt Line Details, Tag Information
Fields Description
Batch# The batch number associated with the tag.
Table 9–7 Return Order Receipt Summary, Containers
![](asset-e2.png)
182 User Guide
Order Receipt Container
9.7 Order Receipt Container
The Order Receipt Container screen lets you view an order receipt’s
container details.
Table 9–10 Order Receipt Container, Item Header
Fields Description
Receipt # Receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # Shipment number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise Enterprise associated with the receipt.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received.
Receiving Dock Location where the shipment is received.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Item ID The item ID.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Line # The order line number associated with the receipt.
Release # The release number associated with the receipt.
Table 9–11 Order Receipt Container, Item Containers
Fields Description
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Segment Type The segment type associated with the receipt.
Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
![](asset-e3.png)
Receipt Line Details (Container)
Receipt Console Screens 183
9.8 Receipt Line Details (Container)
The Receipt Line Details (Container) screen lets you view a receipt’s
container details.
Segment # The segment number associated with the receipt.
Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
Serial The serial number associated with the receipt.
Quantity The number of units in UOM on the receipt.
Table 9–12 Receipt Line Details (Container), Container
Fields Description
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Receiving Node The node associated with the receipt.
Receiving Dock The location where the shipment is being received.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Table 9–13 Receipt Line Details (Container), Container Details
Fields Description
Item ID The item ID.
Item Description Description of the item.
Table 9–11 Order Receipt Container, Item Containers
Fields Description
![](asset-e4.png)
184 User Guide
Receipt Instructions
9.9 Receipt Instructions
The Receipt Instructions screen lets you view a receipt’s summary
instruction.
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Disposition Code The item’s disposition code.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Release # The release number associated with the receipt.
Segment Type The segment type associated with the receipt.
Note: A segment type indicates an inventory
category. Typical values are MTC - Made To Customer
or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # The segment number associated with the receipt.
Note: A segment holds either the specific buyer or
specific order number that requires dedication.
Ship By Date The date reflecting the time sensitivity of the
inventory.
COO The country of origin associated with the receipt.
Serial # The serial number associated with the receipt.
Tag # The tag number associated with the receipt.
Quantity The number of units in UOM on the receipt.
Table 9–13 Receipt Line Details (Container), Container Details
Fields Description
![](asset-e5.png)
Receipt Instructions
Receipt Console Screens 185
Table 9–14 Receipt
Fields Description
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view shipment details.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view buyer details.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view seller details.
Receipt Start Date The start date of the receipt process.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received.
Click this link to view the receiving node details.
Receiving Dock The location where the shipment was received.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view a receipt’s status audits.
No Of Expected Pallets The number of expected pallets associated with the
receipt.
No Of Expected
Cartons The number of expected cartons associated with the
receipt.
Table 9–15 Receipt Summary Instructions, Instructions
Actions
Delete Instruction This action deletes the selected instruction
Fields
![](asset-e6.png)
186 User Guide
Receipt Status Audits
Click to add a new instruction.
9.10 Receipt Status Audits
The Receipt Status Audits screen lets you view a receipt’s summary
status audit list.
Instruction Type Select the type of instruction.
Text Enter the Instruction text.
Table 9–16 Receipt
Fields Description
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view shipment details.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view buyer details.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view seller details.
Receipt Start Date The start date of the receipt process.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received.
Click this link to view the receiving node details.
Receiving Dock The location where the shipment was received.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view a receipt’s status audits.
Table 9–15 Receipt Summary Instructions, Instructions
![](asset-e7.png)
Receipt Details
Receipt Console Screens 187
9.11 Receipt Details
The Receipt Details screen lets you view receipt details.
No Of Expected Pallets The number of expected pallets associated with the
receipt.
No Of Expected
Cartons The number of expected cartons associated with the
receipt.
Table 9–17 Receipt Summary Status Audits, Status Audit List
Fields Description
Modified By The user associated with the modification of the
record.
Old Status The receipt status before the status modification.
Old Status Date The date the receipt entered the old status.
New Status The status of the receipt after the status change.
New Status Date The status date recorded on the receipt at the most
recent status change.
Reason Code The reason code indicating the reason for the status
change.
Reason Text The text reason entered against audit.
Table 9–18 Receipt
Fields Description
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view shipment details.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Table 9–16 Receipt
Fields Description
![](asset-e8.png)
188 User Guide
Receipt Details
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view buyer details.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt.
Click this link to view seller details.
Receipt Start Date The start date of the receipt process.
Receiving Node The node where inventory was received.
Click this link to view the receiving node details.
Receiving Dock The location where the shipment was received.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open. If open, you can
receive the receipts.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Click this link to view a receipt’s status audits.
No Of Expected Pallets The number of expected pallets associated with the
receipt.
No Of Expected
Cartons The number of expected cartons associated with the
receipt.
Table 9–19 Receipt Details, Receipt Lines
Action
Adjust Receipt This action takes you to the Adjust Receipt
screen, which lets you adjust the receipt of an
item. For more information about the Adjust
Receipt screen, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.
Fields
Item ID The item ID.
Description A brief description of the item.
Table 9–18 Receipt
Fields Description
![](asset-e9.png)
Receipt Details
Receipt Console Screens 189
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Disposition Code The disposition of the item.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Order # The order number associated with the receipt.
Line # The line number associated with the receipt.
Release # The release number associated with the receipt.
Ship By Date The date the inventory must be shipped by.
COO The country of origin associated with the receipt line
item.
Serial # The serial number associated with the receipt line
item.
Tag # The tag number associated with the receipt line item.
Click this link to view a receipt’s tag details.
Quantity The number of units in UOM on the receipt.
Table 9–19 Receipt Details, Receipt Lines
![](asset-ea.png)
190 User Guide
Receive
9.12 Receive
The Receive screen lets you record paper-based receipt details.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
An error message, "There is no inventory for put away at
the SourceLocation" occurs.
Cause
When multiple inbound shipments are received into the
same location, and the inventory being received is not an
LPN.
Resolution
To resolve this issue, do one of the following:
QManually create move requests for receipts that you
already received. For more information about creating
move requests, see Create Move Request.
QFor receipts that are expected to be received, ensure
that the inventory is license plated and that you don't
receive inbound shipments and inventory for put away
into the same location.
Table 9–20 Receive, Receipt
Fields Description
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the receipt.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the receipt.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the receipt.
Buyer The buyer associated with the receipt.
Seller The seller associated with the receipt.
Receipt Start Date The receipt start date.
Receiving Node The node that received the shipment.
![](asset-eb.png)
Receive
Receipt Console Screens 191
Receipt Status The receipt status.
Receipt Open Indicates if the receipt is open.
No Of Pallets The number of pallets.
No Of Cartons The number of cartons.
Table 9–21 Receive, Lines to Receive
Fields Description
Pallet ID Select this to receive an expected pallet and enter the
pallet identifier.
Check the Pallet Completely Received box to close the
pallet.
Case ID Select this to receive an expected case and enter the
case identifier.
Check the Case Completely Received box to close the
case.
None Select this to receive loose inventory.
Tag Details Click on the icon, to view and hide tag details.
The lot number associated with the tag displays, if
applicable.
Shipment Line # The shipment line number.
Order # The order number to which the shipment belongs.
Release # The order release number to which the shipment
belongs.
Item ID The item you are receiving displays.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
PC The item’s product class.
Total Quantity The total quantity contained in the shipment line.
Received Quantity The total quantity received in the shipment line.
Quantity To Be
Received The quantity available for receiving in the shipment
line.
Table 9–20 Receive, Receipt
Fields Description
![](asset-ec.png)
192 User Guide
Receive
Disposition Code The disposition code is automatically populated by the
system from the receiving rules. Modify the disposition
code, if applicable.
Receiving Quantity Enter the quantity you want to receive in the shipment
line.
Tag Identifiers Enter the identifier for the tag, such as, Lot #, Batch
#, etc.
Table 9–21 Receive, Lines to Receive
Fields Description
![](asset-ed.png)
Create Inbound Shipment Screens 193
10
Create Inbound Shipment Screens
Shipments (ASN) are transmitted to warehouses through EDI downloads,
fax, or e-mail, and also when a trailer arrives with no prior notice.
The shipment entry console enables you to manually create shipments
from fax, e-mail or telephone conversations, and also for those trailers
that arrive with no prior notice.
The Shipment Entry screen enables you to create an inbound shipment.
10.1 Shipment Entry
Use this screen to create an inbound shipment.
Table 10–1 Shipment Entry
Actions
Supervisory Overrides This action takes you to the Shipment Supervisory
Overrides screen where you can set up supervisory
overrides for an inbound shipment.
Fields
Document Type Select the document type associated with the
shipment you are creating for.
Valid values are 'Purchase Order' or 'Transfer Order'.
For an outbound shipment, valid value is 'Sales Order'
Receiving Node The receiving node where the receipt is being
performed.
This is automatically populated by the system based
on the user profile.
![](asset-ee.png)
194 User Guide
Shipment Supervisory Overrides
Click Create Shipment to create an inbound order shipment. For more
information, see the appropriate section in this guide.
10.2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides
Use this screen to set up supervisory overrides for an inbound shipment.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the shipment you
are creating for, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number for the shipment you are
creating, if applicable. A unique number is
automatically generated by the system, if number is
not specified.
Ship Node Enter the shipping node associated with the shipment.
This represents the seller's ship node.
Buyer Enter the buyer associated with the shipment you
want to create, if applicable.
Seller Enter the seller associated with the shipment you want
to create.
PO # Enter the purchase order number associated with the
shipment.
Release# Enter the release number of the order against which
the shipment is being created, if applicable.
Pro# Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment you are creating, if applicable.
Carrier/Service Select the carrier service availed for transporting the
shipment, if applicable.
BOL# Enter the bill of lading number of the shipment you
are creating, if applicable.
Trailer# Enter the trailer number of the shipment you are
creating, if applicable.
Table 10–1 Shipment Entry
![](asset-ef.png)
Shipment Supervisory Overrides
Create Inbound Shipment Screens 195
Click OK.
Table 10–2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides
Fields
Override Shipment
Entry Select this check box to override shipment entry.
Do not verify Pallet
Content Select this check box to skip pallet content verification
for the shipment.
Do not verify Case
Content Select this check box to skip case content verification
for the shipment.
Suppress Overage
Check Select this check box to suppress overage check.
Allow receiving
unexpected Items on
Shipment
Select this check box to allow receiving of unexpected
items in the shipment.
![](asset-f0.png)
196 User Guide
Shipment Supervisory Overrides
![](asset-f1.png)
Receive Console Screens 197
11
Receive Console Screens
The Receive console enables you to receive expected containers, build
cases or pallets, receive blind receipts, and receive over-receipt quantity.
This console is designed to support scanning of information, utilizing the
available barcodes. You can also enter information manually.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Receive
Console.
11.1 Receive Details
The Receive Details screen provides a detailed information about a
receipt.
Table 11–1 Receive Details, Receive
Actions
Close Pallet This action closes the pallets received. Alternatively,
press Alt+P.
Close Case This action closes the pallets received. Alternatively,
press Alt+C.
Save This action saves the information entered.
Reset This action clears the information entered.
Alternatively, press Alt+P.
![](asset-f2.png)
198 User Guide
Receive Details
Fields
Shipment # Enter the shipment number associated with the
receipt.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific shipment number you want to use.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number for the shipment associated
with the receipt.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific receipt number you want to use.
Enterprise The enterprise is automatically populated by the
system.
Order # The order number is automatically populated by the
system, if applicable.
For shipments received without order, the order
number is not available.
Seller This value is automatically populated by the system.
Ship Node The ship node is automatically populated by the
system.
Pallet ID/Case ID Enter the pallet or case LPN, if applicable.
This value is required only if pallets or case LPNs are
being associated to inventory during receipt or for a
Pallet LPN pre-associated with the shipment. For case
LPNs pre-associated with the shipment, use the 'Item
ID/Case ID' field.
Location Enter the location where inventory is being received.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific location you want to use.
If an open receipt exists for a shipment, the location
corresponding to the receipt’s receiving location
automatically displays.
Item ID/Case ID Enter the item ID or case LPN.
The case LPN, if entered, could be an existing LPN or a
new pre-printed LPN. Once the receipt of the case LPN
is completed, scan the next item or case LPN, if
applicable.
Table 11–1 Receive Details, Receive
![](asset-f3.png)
Receive Details
Receive Console Screens 199
Case ID The case LPN corresponding to the last item scanned
displays.
Disposition Code The disposition code is automatically populated by the
system from the receiving rules. Modify the disposition
code, if necessary.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific disposition code you want to use.
Item ID The item ID corresponding to the last item scanned
displays, if applicable.
QIf the item is serial tracked, the Serial Entry
screen displays, which lets you capture the serial
number.
QIf the item is tag tracked, the Tag Entry screen
displays, which lets you capture the tag details.
QIf the item is time sensitive, the Expiration Date
Entry screen displays, which lets you capture the
expiration date.
QIf the item is serial-tracked and if you are
performing Returns Receiving, the Serial Entry
screen displays, which lets you capture the serial
number.
COO The country of origin associated with the item is
automatically populated by the system.
Choose the field and lookup icon or press Alt+L to find
the specific country of origin you want to use.
Description The item’s description.
Quantity Enter the quantity received in the UOM, if applicable.
The quantity for a UPC Code, UPC Case Code or valid
Case LPN scanned is automatically recognized by the
system.
UOM Select the UOM corresponding to the quantity.
UOM Quantity The UOM quantity is automatically populated by the
system.
Total Quantity The total quantity is automatically populated by the
system.
Inspection Comments Enter any additional comments, if applicable.
Table 11–1 Receive Details, Receive
![](asset-f4.png)
200 User Guide
Serial Entry
11.2 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen enables you enter or scan the item’s serial
number.
Note: If you select "Do Not Verify Pallet Contents" or "Do
Not Verify Case Contents" check-boxes, you need not
enter or scan the item details.
Table 11–2 Receive Details, Receive Instructions
The item’s receiving instructions code and text displays, if available.
Table 11–3 Receive Details, Activity Demand Instruction
Activity Demand Instruction
The activity demand instructions for the inventory received displays, if
available.
Fields
Activity Code The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
receipt.
Examples of activities during a receipt include
Cross-Dock, QC, VAS for repacking.
Demand Quantity The current demand for the item.
Demand Satisfied Indicates whether the demand is satisfied.
Is Infinite Demand Indicates whether the demand is infinite.
Table 11–4 Receive Barcode Types
Fields
Pallet/Case ID ShippingOrInventoryContainer
Location Location
Item ID/Case ID ItemOrShippingContainer
Item ID Item
![](asset-f5.png)
Serial Entry
Receive Console Screens 201
The Serial Entry screen also enables you enter the serial number range
of an item.
Table 11–5 Serial Entry
Field
Count The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.
Serial # The component serial number of the item.
Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
Table 11–6 Serial Entry, Serial Range
Field
Count The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.
From Serial # The start serial number of the item.
To Serial # The end serial number of the item.
Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.
![](asset-f6.png)
202 User Guide
Expiration Date Entry
11.3 Tag Entry
The Tag Entry screen enables you capture the tag numbers, such as,
Lot# and Batch#, associated with the tag tracked SKU.
11.4 Expiration Date Entry
The Expiration Date Entry screen enables you capture the expiration
date.
Note: You can enter the item’s tag attributes when
receiving inventory in a warehouse that is configured to
capture the tag details, or when performing operations
within the node. For more information about capturing the
tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Table 11–7 Tag Entry
Field
Batch # Enter the batch number associated with the tag.
Note: The fields displayed in the Tag Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
Table 11–8 Expiration Date Entry
Field
Expiration
Date The item’s expiration date. To change this date, choose the
Calendar lookup or press Alt+L.
![](asset-f7.png)
Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens 203
12
Inspect Inbound Receipts Screens
The Inspect Inbound Receipt Console lets you inspect inbound receipts.
The procedure for inspecting an inbound receipt is similar to inspecting a
return receipt. For more information about screen and field description,
see Chapter 13, "Inspect Return Receipts Screens".
![](asset-f8.png)
204 User Guide
![](asset-f9.png)
Inspect Return Receipts Screens 205
13
Inspect Return Receipts Screens
The Inspect Return Receipt console enables you to:
QRecord inspection details
QView next disposition suggestions based on the current disposition
status
QEnter appropriate inspection comments while inspecting an item
QView item inspection details for a receipt
QSearch for receipts by disposition code
QInspect receipts from receipt summary screen
13.1 Inspect Receipt
You can enter the return receipt criteria in this screen.
Table 13–1 Inspect Receipt
Fields
Node Select the node where the receipt has been received.
Location Enter the location where the receipt has been
received.
Choose lookup option to find the specific Location you
want to search for.
Item ID Enter the item ID you want to inspect associated with
the receipt.
Choose lookup option to find the specific Item ID you
want to search for.
![](asset-fa.png)
206 User Guide
Inspect Return Receipt Details
Click Proceed. The Inspect Return Receipt Details screen is displayed and
you can view the return receipt’s item details.
13.2 Inspect Return Receipt Details
This screen provides visibility to return receipt item details and receipt
lines that are already inspected. You can also inspect receipts that are
not inspected.
Receipt # Enter the return receipt number you want to inspect.
Choose lookup option to find the specific Receipt
Number you want to search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the return
receipt.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.
Product Class Select the product class. Product class indicates the
item’s inventory categorization.
Orders are placed for an item and product class.
Typical examples are Irregular, FD (Factory Defects).
Serial # Enter the item’s serial number you want to inspect, if
applicable.
Case ID Enter the case LPN associated with the container.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure you want to inspect.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status of the receipt you want to
inspect.
Table 13–2 Inspect Return Receipt Details, Return Receipt Item
Fields
Receipt # The return receipt number associated with the item.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the return
receipt.
Return # The return order number.
Table 13–1 Inspect Receipt
Fields
![](asset-fb.png)
Inspect Return Receipt Details
Inspect Return Receipts Screens 207
Item ID The item ID.
Product Class The product class indicating the item’s inventory
categorization.
Orders are placed for an item and product class.
Typical examples are Irregular, FD (Factory Defects).
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Receipt Status The status of the receipt.
Receiving Node The receiving node.
Receiving Dock The dock location that received the receipt.
Location The location.
Inventory Status The inventory status of the receipt.
Location Quantity The return receipt quantity currently available in the
location.
Table 13–3 Inspect Return Receipt Details, Receipt Lines to be
Inspected
Fields
Line The receipt line number.
Serial # The item’s serial number.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Ship By Date The date by which the inventory must be shipped.
Disposition The disposition entered while accepting the return
against the quantity.
Remaining Qty The quantity against the disposition.
Comments Enter any additional comments, if necessary.
New Disposition Select the new disposition receipt details.
Disposition Qty Enter the disposition quantity for the receipt.
Disposition Comments Enter any additional comments for the disposition.
Table 13–2 Inspect Return Receipt Details, Return Receipt Item
Fields
![](asset-fc.png)
208 User Guide
Inspect Return Receipt Details
Table 13–4 Inspect Return Receipt Details, Receipt Lines Already
Inspected
Fields
Line The receipt line number that has already been
inspected.
Serial # The receipt serial number that has already been
inspected.
Ship By Date The date by which the inventory must be shipped.
Quantity The receipt quantity that has already been inspected.
Disposition Code The disposition code associated with the receipt
quantity.
Inspection Date The inspection date when the receipt was inspected.
User The user that inspected the receipt.
Comments The inspection comments for the receipt, if available.
![](asset-fd.png)
Create Move Request Screens 209
14
Create Move Request Screens
The Create Move Request console enables you to create ad-hoc move
requests.
14.1 Create Move Request
You can create a move request with the help of this screen. For more
information about Move Request Console screens, see Move Request
Console Screens.
Table 14–1 Create Move Request, Move Request Header
Fields
Node Select the node associated with move request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are creating the request for.
Activity Group Select the activity group for the move request you are
creating.
This is a mandatory field and corresponds to a group
that performs work at a station.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group.
Move Request # Enter the move request number you want to move.
Source Location Enter the source location for the move request you
want to create. A source location is typically given
when creating move requests for putaway.
This field is mandatory if Target Location is not given.
![](asset-fe.png)
210 User Guide
Create Move Request
Target Location Enter the target location for the move request you
want to create. A target location is typically given,
when creating move requests for retrieval.
This field is mandatory if Source Location is not given.
Requested By Enter the user who requested the move.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number for the move request you
want to create, if applicable.
The receipt number is used to limit the move request
to a specific inbound shipment.
Segment Type Select the segment type for the move request you
want to create, if applicable.
The segment type is used to limit the move request to
specific inventory.
Segment # Enter the segment number for the move request you
want to create, if applicable.
Start No Earlier Than Enter the start date and time of the tasks for the move
requests, if applicable.
The system defaults the values to the current date and
time.
Finish No Later Than Enter the date and time by which the task is expected
to be completed, if applicable.
The start and finish times provides resource planning
capabilities by determining the shift that performs the
tasks.
Priority Select the priority for the move request you are
creating.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user. The default value is 'Normal'.
Release Immediately Select the check box if the move request is to be
released immediately.
Table 14–1 Create Move Request, Move Request Header
Fields
![](asset-ff.png)
Create Move Request
Create Move Request Screens 211
Table 14–2 Create Work Order, Move Request References
Fields
Shipment # Enter the shipment number associated with the move
request, if applicable
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific shipment
number you want to use.
Wave # Enter the wave number associated with the move
request you want to search for, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific wave
number you want to use.
Work Order # Enter the work order associated with the move request
you want to search for, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific work order
number you want to use.
Table 14–3 Create Move Request, Move Request Items
Fields
Item ID Enter the item you want to move.
This is required if target location is specified and none
of Receipt #, Segment Type and Segment# is
specified.
Click on to add item details.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you want to move.
UOM Select the unit of measure of the item you want to
move.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status of the item you want to
move.
Quantity Enter the quantity of the item you want to move.
This is mandatory if item is specified.
![](asset-100.png)
212 User Guide
Create Move Request
Table 14–4 Create Move Request, Move Request Containers
Fields
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN of the container you want to
move.
Click on to add container details.
Case ID Enter the case LPN of the container you want to move.
NOTE: The move request criteria entered can be provided
in part or complete. The following examples provides a
better understanding of such combinations.
QExample 1: To putaway inventory at a location, specify
only the Source Location.
QExample 2: To retrieve inventory to a location, specify
the Target Location along with Item or Quantity, or a
receipt number, segment type and number.
QExample 3: To putaway inventory at a container level,
specify only the pallet and/or case LPN.
![](asset-101.png)
Create Move Request
Create Move Request Screens 213
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
Not able to release Move Request created for a Pallet
containing Multi-SKU or Multi-level Containers with the
‘Putaway each SKU separately for Multi-SKU’ check box
selected in ‘Putaway Preference For Multi-level Containers’.
Cause
The Putaway each SKU separately for Multi-SKU check
box is selected.
Resolution
Define the Putaway Strategy Rule from the Source Zone to
a blank Target Zone.
For more information about the Shipment Selector Details
screen, see the section Setting Up Activity Constraints for
Multi-Level Container in the chapter Configuring Quality
Control in the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.
![](asset-102.png)
214 User Guide
Create Move Request
![](asset-103.png)
Create Count Request Screens 215
15
Create Count Request Screens
The Create Count Request screen enables you to create count requests.
15.1 Create Count Request
Use the Create Count Request screen to create a count request. For more
information about Count Console, see Count Console Screens.
Table 15–1 Create Count Request, Primary Information Panel
Field
Click and select Create Count Request from the drop-down list, if applicable.
Node Select the node associated with the count request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are creating the count
request for.
Across Enterprises Choose this option if you are creating the count
request across enterprises.
Count Request # Enter the count request number associated with the
count request you are creating, if applicable.
The system generates a unique request number, if a
value is not specified.
Request Type Select the request type associated with the count
request, if applicable.
For more information about setting a request type, see
the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.
![](asset-104.png)
216 User Guide
Create Count Request
Table 15–2 Create Count Request, Count Request Criteria
Actions
Get Number Of
Locations This action takes you to the Number Of Locations
screen where you can view the total number of
locations for count within the specified range.
Fields
Zone Enter the zone associated with the count request you
want to create, if applicable.
When all locations in a zone are to be counted, only
zone is entered.
Pallet ID Enter the container’s pallet LPN associated with the
count request you are creating, if applicable.
Receipt # Enter the specific receipt number associated with the
count request you want to create, if applicable.
Location Enter the specific location identifier associated with the
count request you want to create, if applicable.
Case ID Enter the container’s case LPN associated with the
count request you are creating, if applicable.
Either Case or Pallet LPN can be entered.
Product Class Select the product class of the item associated with
the count request you are creating, if applicable.
From Location Enter the start location, if you are counting a range of
locations.
To Location Enter the end location, if you are counting a range of
locations.
Aisle Number Enter the number of the aisle at the location.
Bay Number Enter the number of the bay at the location.
Level Number Enter the number of the level at the location.
By Item Choose this option if you are creating the count
request for an item.
By Item Classification Choose this option if you are creating the count
request for an item classification.
![](asset-105.png)
Create Count Request
Create Count Request Screens 217
After entering the relevant information in the above fields, the count
request is created upon clicking the Create Count Request button. The
Count Request Details screen displays.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item associated with count
request you are creating, if applicable. This is
applicable only when count request is created for
items.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the count request you are creating, if applicable. This
is applicable only when count request is created for
items.
Item Classification Enter the classification of the item associated with
count request you are creating, if applicable. This is
applicable only when count request is created for item
classification.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the count classifications configurations.
Table 15–3 Create Count Request, Count Request Information
Fields
Priority Select the priority for the count request you are
creating, if applicable.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user.
The default value is 'Normal'.
Requesting User ID The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.
Start No Earlier Than The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable.
Table 15–2 Create Count Request, Count Request Criteria
![](asset-106.png)
218 User Guide
Create Count Request for Location Range
15.2 Create Count Request for Location Range
Use the Create Count Request for Location Range to create a count
request based on location level. For more information about Count
Console, see Count Console Screens.
1. Click and select Create Count Request For Location Range from the
drop-down list.
Table 15–4 Create Count Request for Location Range, Count Request
Criteria
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the count request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are creating the count
request for.
Across Enterprises Choose this option if you are creating the count
request across enterprises.
Request Type Select the request type associated with the count
request, if applicable.
For more information about setting a request type, see
the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.
From Location Enter the start location, if you are counting a range of
locations.
To Location Enter the end location, if you are counting a range of
locations.
Priority Select the priority for the count request you are
creating, if applicable.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user.
The default value is 'Normal'.
Requesting User ID The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.
![](asset-107.png)
Create Count Request for Location Range
Create Count Request Screens 219
2. After entering the relevant information in the above fields, the count
request is created upon clicking the Create Count Requests.
3. Click Get Number Of Locations In Range, the Location List Detail
screen is displayed.
When a From Location and To Location range is specified, the
Location List Detail screen displays all the locations starting with the
From Location ID, but within the numerical range specified. If, for
example, the From Location is L1 and the To Location is L2, all the
locations starting with L1*(where * is any numeric value) are
displayed.
Start No Earlier Than The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable.
Table 15–4 Create Count Request for Location Range, Count Request
Criteria
Field Description
![](asset-108.png)
220 User Guide
Create Count Request for Location Range
![](asset-109.png)
Count Console Screens 221
16
Count Console Screens
The Count Console provides:
QComprehensive visibility into count request status and count results
that are recorded.
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information.
16.1 Count Request Search By Count Request
Attributes
You can search for count requests by count request attributes with the
help of this screen.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 16–1 Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the count request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the count
request.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching for the count
requests across enterprises.
Request Type Select the request type associated with the count
request you want to search for, if applicable.
![](asset-10a.png)
222 User Guide
Count Request Search By Count Criteria
The Count Request List screen displays as a result of this search.
16.2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria
You can search for count requests by count criteria with the help of this
screen.
Count Request # Enter the count request number you are searching for,
if applicable.
Requesting User ID Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.
Priority Select the priority associated with the count request
you are searching for, if applicable
Start No Earlier Than Enter the start date and time range for the count
request, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than Enter the date and time range by which the count
request is expected to be complete, if applicable.
Status Select the status range of the count request you are
searching for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 16–2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the count request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the count
request.
Across Enterprises Choose this option if you are searching for count
requests across enterprises.
Table 16–1 Count Request Search By Count Request Attributes
Fields
![](asset-10b.png)
Count Request Search By Count Criteria
Count Console Screens 223
Request Type Select the request type associated with the count
request you want to search for, if applicable.
Count Request # Enter the count request number you are searching for,
if applicable.
Request Name Enter the count request name you are searching for, if
applicable.
Zone Enter the zone associated with the count request you
are searching for, if applicable.
Location Enter the location associated with the count request
you want to search for, if applicable
Pallet ID Enter the container’s pallet LPN associated with the
count request you are searching for.
Case ID Enter the container’s case LPN associated with the
count request you are searching for.
Note: Either the Case ID or Pallet ID may be specified.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number associated with the count
request you are searching for, if applicable.
Item ID Enter the item’s item ID associated with the count you
want to search for, if applicable.
Product Class Select the item’s product class associated with the
count request you are searching for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the item’s unit of measure associated with the
count request you are searching for, if applicable.
Physical Count Plan Enter the particular physical count plan name you are
searching for, if applicable.
Item Classification Enter the item classification associated with the count
request you are searching for, if applicable.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations.
Status Select the status range of the count request you are
searching for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Table 16–2 Count Request Search By Count Criteria
Fields
![](asset-10c.png)
224 User Guide
Count Request List
The Count Request List screen displays as a result of this search.
16.3 Count Request Search By Location Range
You can search for Count Requests for Location Range with the help of
this screen.
16.4 Count Request List
The Count Request List window displays the results of a count request
search. You can perform actions on a single count request or multiple
count requests by selecting the check boxes of the count requests you
want to perform an action on and choosing the applicable action from the
action bar.
Table 16–3 Count Request Search By Location Range
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the count request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the count
request.
Across Enterprises Choose this option if you are searching for count
requests across enterprises.
Request Type Select the request type associated with the count
request you want to search for, if applicable.
From Location Enter the start location, if you are counting a range of
locations.
To Location Enter the end location, if you are counting a range of
locations.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Table 16–4 Count Request List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Count Request Details
screen where you can view count request details for
the selected count requests.
![](asset-10d.png)
Count Request Details
Count Console Screens 225
16.5 Count Request Details
You can view count request details with the help of this screen.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the select count requests.
Fields
Count Request # The count request number associated with the count
request. Click this link to view count request details.
Request Name The count request name associated with the automatic
cycle count request.
Location The location identifier.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the count request.
Item ID The Item ID associated with the count request.
Description The item’s description.
Priority The count request priority.
Start No Earlier Than The date and time after which the count task is
suggested.
Requesting User The user who placed the count request.
Status The count request status.
Table 16–5 Count Request Details, Primary Information
Actions
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the select count requests.
Fields
Node The node associated with the count request.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with count request.
Count Request # The count request number associated with the count
request.
Table 16–4 Count Request List
![](asset-10e.png)
226 User Guide
Count Request Details
Request Name The count request name associated with the count
request.
Request Type The request type associated with the count request.
Pipeline ID The pipeline identifier that the count request goes
through.
Status The count request status.
Table 16–6 Count Request Details, Count Request Criteria
Fields
Zone The zone associated with the count request.
Pallet ID The container’s Pallet LPN associated with the count
request.
Receipt # The receipt Number associated with the count request.
Location The location Identifier associated with the count
request.
Case ID The container’s Case LPN associated with the count
request.
Product Class The item’s product class.
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Item ID The Item ID associated with the count request.
Description The item’s description.
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Table 16–7 Count Request Details, Count Request Information
Fields
Priority The count request priority.
Requesting User The user for whom the count request is placed.
Table 16–5 Count Request Details, Primary Information
![](asset-10f.png)
Count Result List
Count Console Screens 227
16.6 Count Result List
You can view a list of count results with the help of this screen.
Start No Earlier Than The date and time after which the count task is
suggested.
Finish No Later Than The date and time before which the count task is
expected to be complete.
Table 16–8 Count Request Details, Count Result Summary
Actions
Accept Variance This action takes you to the Acceptance Variance
Reason where you can enter appropriate reasons
for accepting the variance.
Fields
# of count results The number of count results associated with the count
iteration.
# of variances Number of variances associated with the count
iteration.
This link is enabled only if the number of count
variances is less than the maximum records displayed.
Click this link to go to the Count Result List screen
where you can view a list of count results for which
you want to accept variance.
Count Accuracy The percentage of the count result accuracy.
Table 16–9 Count Result List, Count Request Results
Actions
Accept Variance This action takes you to the Acceptance Variance
Reason where you can enter appropriate reasons
for accepting the variance.
Table 16–7 Count Request Details, Count Request Information
Fields
![](asset-110.png)
228 User Guide
Count Result List
View Audit This action enables you to view the audits for all the
inventory adjustments relating to this count request.
For more information, see the Location Inventory
Audit Console Screens.
Fields
Count Request # The count request number associated with the count
result.
Count Iteration The number of times a count request has undergone
iterations.
# Of Locations In
Variance The number of locations in variance associated with
the count iteration.
# Of Items In Variance The number of items in variance associated with the
count iteration.
Item ID The item ID associated with the count iteration.
Net Variance Quantity The net quantity in variance associated with the count
iteration.
Net Variance Value The net value associated with the net quantity in
variance.
This is computed as the VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.
Currency The currency code associated with the net variance
value.
Table 16–10 Count Result List, Item Details
Actions
Create Count Request This action takes you to the Create Count Request
screen where you can create count requests.
Fields
Details Click on the icon to alternatively hide and display
the count result details.
Organization The organization associated with the count request.
Location The location identifier.
Table 16–9 Count Result List, Count Request Results
![](asset-111.png)
Count Result List
Count Console Screens 229
Original Location The location where the LPN or serial-tracked item was
present before the count is performed.
Parent Case ID The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.
Pallet ID The container’s pallet LPN associated with the count
request.
Case ID The container’s case LPN associated with the count
request.
Item ID The item ID associated with the count request.
Description The item’s description.
PC The item’s product class.
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Net Variance Quantity The net quantity in variance associated with the count
iteration.
Net Variance Value The net value associated with the net quantity in
variance.
This is computed as the VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.
Currency The currency code associated with the net variance
value.
Table 16–10 Count Result List, Item Details
![](asset-112.png)
230 User Guide
Count Result List
Table 16–10 Count Result List, Item Details
Inventory Status The item’s inventory status.
An inventory status indicates an inventory
sub-classification. Typical values are ONHAND or
HELD.
Tag # The item’s tag number.
You can view the tag number, if the node being
counted is configured to capture the tag attributes
in all operations performed within the node. For
more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.
Segment Type The item’s segment type.
A segment type indicates an inventory category.
Typical values are MTC - Made To Customer or
MTO - Made to Order.
Segment The item’s segment number.
A segment number indicates either the specific
buyer or specific order number that requires
dedication.
Ship By Date The date the item must be shipped by.
Serial # The item’s serial number.
System Quantity The system reported quantity for the count criteria.
Count Quantity The quantity counted physically for the count
criteria.
Variance Quantity The difference of Count quantity and System
quantity.
![](asset-113.png)
Count Result List
Count Console Screens 231
Table 16–11 Count Result List, Container Details
Fields
Location The location identifier associated with the count
request.
Organization The organization associated with the count request.
Parent Case ID The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.
Pallet ID The container’s Pallet LPN associated with the count
request.
Table 16–10 Count Result List, Item Details
Variance Value The value associated with the quantity in
variance.
This is computed as VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.
Currency The currency code associated with the variance
value.
Last Variance Quantity The variance quantity prior to the present
variance quantity.
Last But One Variance
Quantity The variance quantity prior to the previous
variance quantity.
Variance Type The variance type can be:
Q'New' if new inventory (not on system) is
counted at the location.
Q'Missing' if inventory expected at the location
by the system is not counted.
Q'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.
Variance Accepted Indicates if the variances was accepted.
![](asset-114.png)
232 User Guide
Create Count Request
16.7 Acceptance Variance Reason
Use this screen to enter appropriate reasons for accepting the variance.
Click OK to accept variance at the selected location. The variance quantity
is deposited into a bin for verification, if the adjustment reason code is
associated with a virtual bin location during warehouse configuration. For
more information about variance acceptance, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
16.8 Create Count Request
You can create count requests with the help of this screen. For more
information about creating count requests, see Create Count Request
Screens.
Case ID The container’s Case LPN associated with the count
request.
Variance Type The variance type can be:
Q'New' if new inventory (not on system) is counted
at the location.
Q'Missing' if inventory expected at the location by
the system is not counted.
Q'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.
Table 16–12 Acceptance Variance Reason
Fields
Reason Code Enter the reason code to associate with the variance
being accepted.
Reason Text Enter text to associate with the variance being
accepted.
Table 16–11 Count Result List, Container Details
Fields
![](asset-115.png)
Cancellation Reason
Count Console Screens 233
Click OK. A new count request is initiated for the entered criteria.
16.9 Cancellation Reason
You can cancel a count request with the help of this screen.
Table 16–13 Create Count Request, Count Request Information
Fields
Count Request # Enter the count request number for the count request
you are creating.
Priority Select the priority for the count request you are
creating, if applicable.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user.
The default value is 'Normal'.
Requesting User ID The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.
Start No Earlier Than The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable
Table 16–14 Cancellation Reason
Fields
Cancellation Reason
Code Select the reason code for cancellation of the count
request.
Reason Text Enter the reason for the count request cancellation.
![](asset-116.png)
234 User Guide
Record Count Result Details
16.10 Record Count Result Details
Use this screen to record count results to indicate the completion of a
count task operation.
Table 16–15 Record Count Result Details, Count Request Details
Fields
Task ID The task’s ID. Click this link to go to the Summary
Task Detail where you can view summary task details.
Task Type The name of a task type.
Count Iteration The number of iterations performed in executing the
count request.
Node The node where count is performed.
Enterprise The enterprise whose product is counted.
Count Request # The count request number against which the count
result is recorded.
Zone The zone where count is performed.
Location The location that is counted.
User The user performing the count.
Case ID The case LPN.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN.
Receipt # The receipt number to which the inventory being
counted belongs.
User The user associated with the count.
Item ID The Item ID associated with the count.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Product Class The item’s product class.
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
![](asset-117.png)
Record Count Result Details
Count Console Screens 235
Item Classification The classification of the item associated with count
request you are creating, if applicable. This is
applicable only when count request is created for item
classification.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the count classifications configurations.
Status The count request status.
Table 16–16 Record Count Result Details, Items
Fields
Click on to add a new item details.
Tag/Serial Click to enter the tag or serial details.
You can view the tag details, if the node being counted
is configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operations performed within the node. For more
information about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Serial # Enter the serial number of the item.
Count Quantity Enter the count quantity for an item tag.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Parent Case ID The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.
Pallet ID The container’s pallet LPN containing the item or case
LPN.
Case ID The container’s case LPN containing the item.
Item ID The item’s ID.
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The unit of measure: The item’s unit of measure.
Table 16–15 Record Count Result Details, Count Request Details
Fields
![](asset-118.png)
236 User Guide
Record Count Result Details
Inventory Status The item’s inventory status.
An inventory status indicates an inventory
sub-classification. Typical values are ONHAND or
HELD.
System Quantity The system quantity for the count criteria.
Count Quantity Enter the count quantity for the item.
Serial #
From_Serial_# The start serial number of the serial range.
End_serial_# The end serial number of the serial range.
Table 16–17 Record Count Result Details, Serial
Field Description
Serial # Enter the serial number of the item.
Count Quantity Enter the count quantity for the item.
Click to add a new serial number.
Click to go to the serial range panel where you can enter the serial range of
the items
From Serial # Enter the start serial number.
To Serial # Enter the end serial number.
Click to add a new serial number.
Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.
Table 16–16 Record Count Result Details, Items
Fields
![](asset-119.png)
Count Result Search By Variance
Count Console Screens 237
Click Save to record the count results.
16.11 Count Result Search By Variance
The count requests result in task creation, which can be completed
through RF or batch sheets. You can view the count request results in the
Count Result Console.
The Count Result Search window provides extensive search capabilities
using granular level information such as variance value, variance
quantity and provides a list of count results having variances.
You can search for count results by variance with the help of this screen.
Table 16–18 Record Count Result Details, Containers
Fields
Click on to add new container details.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the container.
Parent Case ID The case LPN that contains child LPNs, which were
counted.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Variance Type The variance type can be:
Q'New' if new inventory (not on system) is counted
at the location.
Q'Missing' if inventory expected at the location by
the system is not counted.
Q'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-11a.png)
238 User Guide
Count Result Search By Variance
Table 16–19 Count Result Search By Variance
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the count result.
Enterprise Select the enterprise whose count result you are
searching for.
Across Enterprises Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Count Request # Enter the count request number associated with the
count result you are searching for.
Item ID Enter the item ID you want to search for, if applicable.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.
Variance Quantity Enter the variance quantity of the count result you are
searching for, if applicable.
This limits the search to count results that comply with
the variance quantity. For example, show all count
results for variance quantity greater than 10 for the
UOM specified.
Variance Value Enter the variance value of the count result you are
searching for, if applicable.
This limits the search to count results that comply with
the variance value. For example, show all count
results for variance value greater than 100.
Latest summary Task Check this option to limit the results to the last
summary task for the criteria entered. Summary task
represents the grouped tasks by reference value. For
example, by count request number.
![](asset-11b.png)
Count Result Details
Count Console Screens 239
The Count Result Details screen displays as a result of this search.
16.12 Count Result Details
You can view the count result details with the help of this screen.
Variance Value Choose either 'Negative', 'Positive' or 'Any' to limit
results based on the variance value.
'Negative' - limits result to all variances, which has
reduced inventory.
'Positive' - limits results to all variances, which has
incremented inventory.
'Any' - shows results for all variances
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Table 16–20 Count Result Details, Item Details
Fields
Details Click on the icon, to alternatively view and hide the
count result details.
Count Request # The count request number associated with the count
result.
Count Iteration The number of iterations performed in executing the
count request.
Organization The organization associated with the count request.
Location The location identifier.
Item ID The Item ID.
Description The item’s description.
Product Class The item’s product class
Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Table 16–19 Count Result Search By Variance
Fields
![](asset-11c.png)
240 User Guide
Count Result Details
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Net Variance Quantity The net quantity in variance associated with the count
iteration.
Net Variance Value The net value associated with the net quantity in
variance.
This is computed as the VARIANCE_QUANTITY *
UNIT_COST where the variance quantity is for the
Inventory UOM.
Currency The currency code associated with the net variance
value.
Table 16–21 Count Result Details, Container Details
Fields
Count Request # The count request number associated with the count
result.
Count Iteration The number of iterations performed in executing the
count request.
Location The location identifier associated with the count
request.
Organization The organization associated with the count request.
Pallet ID The container’s Pallet LPN associated with the count
request.
Case ID The container’s Case LPN associated with the count
request.
Variance Type The variance type can be:
Q'New' if new inventory (not on system) is counted
at the location.
Q'Missing' if inventory expected at the location by
the system is not counted.
Q'No Variance' if there is no discrepancy.
Table 16–20 Count Result Details, Item Details
Fields
![](asset-11d.png)
Invoke Count Service
Count Console Screens 241
16.13 Invoke Count Service
You can create count requests with the help of this screen.
Table 16–22 Invoke Count Service, Invoke Service
Fields
Document Type The count document type displays.
Node The node for which additional count requests are
created displays.
Agent Criteria Enter the agent criteria to invoke the create count
request service. Use the lookup icon to choose the
agent criteria from the Agent Criteria List screen.
![](asset-11e.png)
242 User Guide
Invoke Count Service
![](asset-11f.png)
Create Physical Count Screens 243
17
Create Physical Count Screens
Physical count in a warehouse is process of taking stock of inventory
after shutting down the warehouse, after which the warehouses start
planning in advance and also stops certain activities for starting the
physical count.
The Create Physical Count Plan screen enables you to create a physical
count plan.
The activities of the following activity groups should be stopped before
starting a physical count:
QPutaway
QReplenishment
QRetrieval
QOutbound Picking
QReceipt
QCount
QValue-Added Service
QPacking
QOutbound Inventory Container Build
QShipping Container Build
QShipping
QInspection
After the physical count is completed, all the activities should be enabled
again.
![](asset-120.png)
244 User Guide
Create Physical Count Plan
17.1 Create Physical Count Plan
The Create Physical Count Plan screen is used to create a plan for the
physical count.
Click Create Plan, to go to the Plan for Physical Count Details screen. For
more information about the screen, see Section 18.3, "Physical Count
Plan Details" in Chapter 18, "Physical Count Console Screens".
Table 17–1 Create Physical Count Plan
Fields
Node The node for which you want to create the physical
count.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want create the
physical count.
Plan Name Enter the plan name for which you want create the
physical count.
Plan Date Enter the date and time on which to create the
physical count.
Duration Select the duration of the physical count (you can
select the appropriate number of days from the drop-
down list).
![](asset-121.png)
Physical Count Console Screens 245
18
Physical Count Console Screens
The Physical Count Console provides the capability to view the physical
count plans.
18.1 Physical Count Plan Search
You can search for a planned physical count, based on the enterprise,
plan name, status, and date range.
The Physical Count Plan List screen displays the search results.
Table 18–1 Physical Count Plan Search
Fields
Enterprise The enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Plan Name Enter the plan name you are searching.
Plan Date Enter the start date and time associated with the plan
name you are searching.
To - Enter the end date and time associated with the
plan name you are searching.
Status The status associated with the plan name you are
searching.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records that you want
listed as search result.
![](asset-122.png)
246 User Guide
Physical Count Plan Details
18.2 Physical Count Plan List
The Physical Count Plan List screen displays the search results, based on
the plan name search.
18.3 Physical Count Plan Details
The Physical Count Details screen displays all the categories that are
available in the YFS_PHY_CNT_CATEGORY table. The 12 categories that
are provided out of the box and available in the YFS_PHY_CNT_
CATEGORY table have the same name as that of activities.These
categories can be stopped before starting a physical count. You can
group the activities, and provide each group with a logical name. After
the grouping, the YFS_PHY_ CNT_CATEGORY table will contain only a
single entry, which is the logical name you provided to the grouping you
created, instead of individual entries for each of the activities.
Table 18–2 Physical Count Plan List
Actions
View Details This takes you to the Physical Count Plan Details
screen, where you can view the details of the physical
count plan and perform various actions on the physical
count plan.
Start This takes you to the beginning of the plan.
End This changes the status of the physical count plan to
’Completed’. This can be used only when the physical
count status is ’In Progress’.
Cancel This displays a Cancellation Reason screen for
cancelling a selected plan.
Delete This action deletes the physical count plan.
Fields
Plan Name The plan name of the physical count plan.
Start Date The start date associated with the plan name.
Duration The duration of the physical count plan.
Duration UOM The Unit Of Measure for the duration of the physical
count plan.
Plan Status The status of the plan.
![](asset-123.png)
Physical Count Plan Details
Physical Count Console Screens 247
Let us consider an example. If you want to group PUTAWAY, RECEIPT,
and RETREIVAL into a logical group name, and you call this group
InWarehouseMovements, the YFS_PHY_CNT_CATEGORY table will have a
single entry, that is, InWarehouseMovements, instead of individual
entries for PUTAWAY, RECEIPT, and RETREIVAL.
However, the YFS_PHY_CNT_CAT_ACT_GRP table will contain three
entries corresponding to InWarehouseMovements against each of the
three activities grouped under it, for example, InWarehouseMovements is
the category name and PUTAWAY is the activity name,
InWarehouseMovements is the category name and RECEIPT is the
activity name, and InWarehouseMovements is the category name and
RETREIVAL is the activity name.
In the Physical Count Details screen, when you hover the mouse over the
logical name, in this case, InWarehouseMovements, the list of activities
under that group is displayed.
To stop an activity that is available in the YFS_ACTIVITY table, the
activity should be present in the YFS_PHY_CNT_CAT_ACT_GRP table, and
you should have a corresponding relationship with the YFS_PHY_CNT_
CAT_ACT_GRP table and YFS_PHY_CNT_CATEGORY table. Henceforth,
the name to which the activity has been mapped in the YFS_PHY_CNT_
CATEGORY table will be shown in the Physical Count Plan Details screen.
You can view the physical count plan details with the help of this screen.
Table 18–3 Physical Count Plan Details
Fields
Node The node for which the physical count was created.
Enterprise The enterprise for which the physical count was
created.
Plan Name The plan name for which the physical count was
created.
Start Enter the date and time for which the physical count
was created.
Duration The duration for physical count.
Status The status of the physical count plan.
Enter the duration before which the following activities need to be stopped
![](asset-124.png)
248 User Guide
Physical Count Plan Details
Putaway Enter the appropriate duration to stop putting an item
(pallet, case, single) into storage.
Replenishment Enter the appropriate duration to stop replenishing.
Retrieval Enter the appropriate duration to stop retrieving.
Outbound Picking Enter the appropriate duration to stop outbound
picking.
Receipt Enter the appropriate duration to stop receiving.
Count Enter the appropriate duration to stop cycle count.
Value Added Services Enter the appropriate duration to stop confirmation of
value added service.
Packing Enter the appropriate duration to stop packing.
Outbound Inventory
Container Build Enter the appropriate duration to stop the outbound
inventory container build.
Shipping Container
Build Enter the appropriate duration to stop the shipping
container build.
Shipping Enter the appropriate duration to stop shipping.
Inspection Enter the appropriate duration to stop inspection of
received items.
Note: At the time of configuration if you check the 'Allow
other inventory operations during Physical count' box at
the node level, then in such scenario none of the activities
can be stopped before creating the physical count.
In such case, if you create the Physical Count the
’Inventory Operations are allowed during Physical Count
Planning cannot be done at activity group level’ message
displays in the Physical Count Plan Details screen.
Table 18–3 Physical Count Plan Details
Fields
![](asset-125.png)
Physical Count Plan Details
Physical Count Console Screens 249
Note: If you want to remove the duration of an activity
that you have entered in the Physical Count Plan Details
screen, in such scenario you need to enter the duration as
0 days/hours.
Note: You can cancel a physical count plan, thereby
canceling the tasks associated with that physical count
plan. However, when you cancel only the individual tasks
associated with a physical count plan, the individual tasks
get cancelled, but the corresponding physical count plan
does not get cancelled.
![](asset-126.png)
250 User Guide
Physical Count Plan Details
![](asset-127.png)
Move Request Console Screens 251
19
Move Request Console Screens
The Move Request Console is used to manage all processes for a move
request, including the abilities to view and modify the move requests.
The Move Request Console provides:
QComprehensive visibility of move request details in addition to move
request line details.
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information.
19.1 Move Request Search By Item
You can search for move requests based on the item information such as
product class, unit of measure, item ID and so on.
Table 19–1 Move Request Search By Item
Fields
Node Select the node associated with move request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Activity Group Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.
Move Request # Enter the move request number you are searching for,
if applicable.
![](asset-128.png)
252 User Guide
Move Request Search By Location
The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by item.
19.2 Move Request Search By Location
You can search for move requests based on the location in this screen.
Item ID Enter the item ID you want to search for, if applicable.
Priority Select the move request priority you are searching for.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user. The default value is 'Normal'.
Segment Type Enter the segment type you are searching for, if
applicable.
Segment # Enter the segment number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number you want to search for, if
applicable.
Move Request Status Enter the move request status you are searching for, if
applicable.
Has Exceptions Choose Has Exceptions, if you want to search for
move requests that have exceptions.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 19–1 Move Request Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-129.png)
Move Request Search By Location
Move Request Console Screens 253
The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by location.
Table 19–2 Move Request Search By Location
Fields
Node Select the node associated with move request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Activity Group Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.
Source Location Enter the source location associated with the move
request you are searching for, if applicable.
Target Location Enter the target location associated with the move
request you are searching for, if applicable.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container, you
are searching for.
Case ID Enter the case LPN associated with the container you
are searching for.
Move Request Status Enter the move request status you are searching for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-12a.png)
254 User Guide
Move Request Search By Date
19.3 Move Request Search By Date
You can search for move requests based on the dates in this screen.
Table 19–3 Move Request Search By Date
Fields
Node Select the node associated with move request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Activity Group Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.
Requesting User ID The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
Requesting User ID associated with the move request
you want to use.
Start No Earlier Than The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter different start date and time for the move
request, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter the different finish date and time for the move
request you are searching for, if applicable.
Priority Select the priority associated with the request you are
searching for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
![](asset-12b.png)
Move Request Search By References
Move Request Console Screens 255
The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by date.
19.4 Move Request Search By References
You can search for move requests based on the references in this screen.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 19–4 Move Request Search By References
Fields
Node Select the node associated with move request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Activity Group Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.
Requesting User ID Choose the field and lookup icon to find specific
Requesting User ID associated with the move request
you want to use.
Wave # Enter the wave number associated with the move
request you want to search for, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number associated with the move
request you want to search for, if applicable.
Work Order # Enter the work order number associated with the
move request you want to search for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
![](asset-12c.png)
256 User Guide
Move Request Search By Tag Attributes
The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by references.
19.5 Move Request Search By Tag Attributes
You can search for move request based on tag attributes in this screen.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 19–5 Move Request Search By Tag Attributes
Fields
Node Select the node associated with move request.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Activity Group Select the activity group you are searching for, if
applicable.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group you are searching for, if applicable.
Item ID Enter the item ID you want to search for, if applicable.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.
Tag # Enter tag number corresponding to item.
Serial # Enter the serial number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
![](asset-12d.png)
Move Request List
Move Request Console Screens 257
The Move Request List screen displays as a result of move request search
by tag attributes.
19.6 Move Request List
The Move Request List window displays the results of a move request
console search. You can perform actions on a single move request or
multiple move requests by selecting the check boxes of the move
requests you want to perform an action on and choosing the applicable
action from the action bar.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 19–6 Move Request List
Actions
View All Lines This action takes you to the Move Request Details
screen where you can view move request details for all
lines.
Release This action lets to release a move request. On
releasing a move request, tasks get created.
View Tasks This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.
View Lines With
Exceptions This action takes you to the Move Request Details
screen where you can view move request details for
lines with exceptions.
Fields
![](asset-12e.png)
258 User Guide
Move Request Details
19.7 Move Request Details
You can view move request details in this screen.
Move Request # Move request number associated with the move
request.
Click this link to go to the Move Request Details screen
to view lines having exceptions for the selected move
request.
Activity Group The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, SHIPPING, VAS, PACKING and QC.
For Activity Code The activity code associated with the activity group.
Priority The priority of the move request.
Requesting User ID The user who requested the move.
Has Exceptions Indicates if exceptions are found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Start No Earlier Than Enter the earliest date and time a task should be
started.
Status The current status of the move request.
Table 19–7 Move Request Details, Move Request
View Icons
Alerts - This icon takes you to the Move Request
Alerts screen where you can view alerts for the
move request.
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Status
Audit Details where you can view a list of status audits
for the move request.
Actions
Table 19–6 Move Request List
![](asset-12f.png)
Move Request Details
Move Request Console Screens 259
Release This action lets to release a move request. On
releasing a move request, tasks get created.
View Tasks This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.
Fields
Activity Group The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, VAS, PACKING and QC.
For Activity Code The activity code associated with the activity group.
Node Node associated with the move request.
Move Request # Move request number associated with the move
request.
Requested By The user who requested the move
Status Indicates status of the move request.
Has Exceptions Indicates if exceptions are found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Priority The priority of the move request.
Table 19–8 Move Request Details, Task References
Fields
Shipment # Shipment number associated with the request.
Wave # Wave number to which a request belongs
Work Order # Work order number associated with the request.
Table 19–7 Move Request Details, Move Request
![](asset-130.png)
260 User Guide
Move Request Details
Start No Earlier Than Enter the earliest date and time a task should be
started.
Finish No Later Than Enter the latest date and time a task should be
completed.
Table 19–9 Move Request Details, Move Request Items
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Move Request Line Details
screen where you can view move request line details.
View Tasks This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.
Source Location Location where the task starts.
Target Location Location where the task ends.
Enterprise Enterprise associated with the request.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Item Id The Item ID
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Inventory Status Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.
Requested Quantity Quantity in the Item's unit of measure that is required
to be moved.
Table 19–8 Move Request Details, Task References
Fields
![](asset-131.png)
Move Request Details
Move Request Console Screens 261
Released Quantity Quantity in the Item's unit of measure for which tasks
have been created.
Released Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.
Is Cancelled Indicates whether the request has been cancelled.
Tag # The tag number associated with a tag-controlled item.
The tag number displays only when the node
performing the move request is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operations within
the node. For more information about capturing
the tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.
Table 19–10 Move Request Details, Move Request Containers
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Move Request Line Details
screen where you can view move request line details.
View Tasks This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you view a list of tasks associated with the move
request.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancellation Reason
screen where you can enter appropriate reasons for
cancelling the move request.
Fields
Source Location Location where the task starts.
Target Location Location where the task ends.
Enterprise Enterprise associated with the request.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the request.
Table 19–9 Move Request Details, Move Request Items
![](asset-132.png)
262 User Guide
Move Request Alerts
19.8 Move Request Alerts
You can view alters for the move request in this screen.
Released Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.
Is Cancelled Indicates whether the request is cancelled.
Table 19–11 Move Request Alerts, Move Request
Fields
Activity Group The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, VAS, PACKING and QC.
Node Node associated with the move request.
Move Request # Move request number associated with the move
request.
Priority Priority of the move request.
Requested By User who requested the move
Status Indicates status of the move request.
Has Exceptions Indicates if exceptions were found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Table 19–12 Move Request Alerts, Alerts
Actions
View Details This action provides visibility to alert details. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Fields
Alert ID The alert identifier associated with the alert.
Table 19–10 Move Request Details, Move Request Containers
![](asset-133.png)
Status Audit Details
Move Request Console Screens 263
19.9 Status Audit Details
You can view a list of status audit for the move request in this screen.
Type Indicates the alert type.
Description A brief description of the alert.
Queue The queue associated with the alert.
Priority Indicates the priority of the alert.
Status The alert status.
Owner The user who raised the alert.
Raised On The date and time the alert was raised.
Table 19–13 Status Audit Details, Move Request
Fields
Activity Group The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, VAS, PACKING and QC.
For Activity Code The activity code associated with the activity group.
Node Node associated with the move request.
Move Request # Move request number associated with the move
request.
Requested By User who requested the move.
Status Indicates status of the move request.
Has Exceptions Indicates if exceptions are found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Priority Priority of the move request.
Table 19–12 Move Request Alerts, Alerts
![](asset-134.png)
264 User Guide
Move Request Line Details
19.10 Cancellation Reason
You can enter appropriate reason for cancelling a move request in this
screen.
19.11 Move Request Line Details
You can view move request line details for items or containers in this
screen.
Table 19–14 Status Audit Details, Status Audit List
Fields
Old Status Old status of the move request.
Old Status Date Previous date on which status of the move request
was changed.
New Status New status of the move request.
New Status Date Date on which move request was changed to new
status.
Table 19–15 Cancellation Reason
Fields
Reason Code Select the applicable reason for the cancellation.
Reason Text Enter any additional comments for the cancellation.
Table 19–16 Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Header
View Icon
This action takes you to the Move Request Line
Activity Demand where you can view a list of activity
demands for the move request line.
Fields
Move Request # Move request number associated with the move
request.
![](asset-135.png)
Move Request Line Details
Move Request Console Screens 265
Target Location Location where the task ends.
Source Location Location where the task starts.
Enterprise Enterprise associated with the request.
Requested Quantity Quantity in the Item's unit of measure that is required
to be moved.
Is Cancelled Indicates whether the request is cancelled.
Released Quantity Quantity in the Item's unit of measure for which tasks
have been created.
Released Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.
Has Exceptions Indicates if exceptions are found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Table 19–17 Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Details
Fields
Item Id The Item ID
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Ship By Date The date by which the item must be shipped so that it
is usable.
Inventory Status Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.
Segment Type A segment type indicates an inventory category.
Typical values are MTC – Made to Customer, and MTO
- Made to Order.
Table 19–16 Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Header
![](asset-136.png)
266 User Guide
Move Request Line Activity Demand
19.12 Move Request Line Activity Demand
You can view a list of activity demand for the move request line in this
screen.
Segment A segment holds either the specific buyer or specific
order number.
Country Of Origin The manufacturing country code.
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the request.
Serial # The serial number associated with the request.
Target Location The location where the task ends.
Table 19–18 Move Request Line Activity Demand, Move Request Line
Header
Fields
Move Request # Move request number associated with the move
request.
Target Location Location where the task ends.
Source Location Location where the task starts.
Enterprise Enterprise associated with the request.
Requested Quantity Quantity in the Item's unit of measure that is required
to be moved.
Is Cancelled Indicates whether the request is cancelled.
Released Quantity Quantity in the Item's unit of measure for which tasks
have been created.
Released Indicates whether a line is fully tasked.
Has Exceptions Indicates if exceptions are found while releasing a
move request.
You can view exceptions associated with a move
request in the Alert Detail window. For more
information, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform User Guide.
Table 19–17 Move Request Line Details, Move Request Line Details
Fields
![](asset-137.png)
Activity Demand
Move Request Console Screens 267
19.13 Activity Demand
You can view the activity demand details for the selected location in this
screen.
Table 19–19 Move Request Line Activity Demand, Activity Demand List
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.
Fields
Location ID The item location in the node. Click this link to go to
the Activity Demand screen where you can view the
activity demand details for the selected location.
Activity Code The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.
Pallet Id The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.
Case Id The case LPN that belong to the work order.
Item ID The items that belong to the work order.
Demand Quantity The current demand for the item.
Satisfied Quantity The extent to which the demand is satisfied.
Demand Satisfied Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Table 19–20 Activity Demand, Activity Demand
Fields
From Activity Group The requesting department. Valid values include
RECEIPT, SHIPPING, VAS, PACKING and QC.
From Activity Code The activity code associated with the activity group.
Node The node associated with the activity demand.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the activity demand.
Priority The priority of the demand.
Is Infinite Demand Indicates if the demand is infinite.
![](asset-138.png)
268 User Guide
Activity Demand
Demand Quantity The current demand for the item.
Satisfied Quantity The extent to which the demand is satisfied.
Demand Satisfied Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Table 19–21 Activity Demand, Activity Demand Details
Fields
Demand Location Id The location where demand exists.
Choose the lookup icon to find the specific location you
want to use.
Pallet Id The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case Id The case LPN associated with the container.
Item ID The items associated with the activity demand.
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Inventory Status Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.
Segment Type The segment type associated with the activity
demand.
Segment The segment number associated with the activity
demand.
Table 19–22 Activity Demand, Activity Demand References
Fields
From Shipment No Indicates inventory associated with the shipment.
For Shipment No The shipment number associated with the shipment
line.
Table 19–20 Activity Demand, Activity Demand
Fields
![](asset-139.png)
Activity Demand
Move Request Console Screens 269
For Shipment Line No The shipment line number for which the demand
exists.
From Work Order # The work order number associated with the activity
demand.
For Work Order # The work order number for which the demand was
placed.
Move Request # The move request number associated with the activity
demand.
Table 19–22 Activity Demand, Activity Demand References
Fields
![](asset-13a.png)
270 User Guide
Activity Demand
![](asset-13b.png)
Location Inventory Console Screens 271
20
Location Inventory Console Screens
The operations in a warehouse are broken into different processes such
as receiving, picking, packing, VAS, returns. It is critical to capture and
track inventory at granular levels for these processes. Visibility is
required at the granular level to provide comprehensive management of
inventory in a warehouse.
Location Inventory Console provides:
QComprehensive visibility to inventory at an enterprise and node level.
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
serial number, lot number at a warehouse location.
QAbility to alter inventory at a location level.
QAbility to modify granular inventory attributes at a location.
QVisibility to audits of inventory changes at a location level.
20.1 Location Inventory Search By Item
You can search for location inventory for a particular item with the help
of this screen.
Table 20–1 Location Inventory Search By Item
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
![](asset-13c.png)
272 User Guide
Location Inventory Search By Item
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the item’s unit of measure you are searching
for, if applicable.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.
Zone Enter the zone you want to search for, if applicable.
Location Enter the location ID you want to search for, if
applicable.
Locations Frozen Select the appropriate check boxes to search for
locations that are frozen for pick, and/or due to count
variance, if applicable.
Show Inventory From
Consumable
Organizations
Select to include a consumable organization’s
inventory as part of the search.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Table 20–1 Location Inventory Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-13d.png)
Location Inventory Search By Container
Location Inventory Console Screens 273
The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by item.
20.2 Location Inventory Search By Container
You can search for location inventory for a particular container with the
help of this screen.
Note: When Inventory Organizations, say E1, V1 and V2
have items with the same GTIN but different Item ID in
different catalogs, then the following needs to be selected
as a search criteria to search for an inventory by item:
QConsuming inventory organization (E1) should be
specified as an Enterprise
QItem Id
QUOM
QSelect Show Inventory From Consumable
Organizations.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Note: If you want to view the entire inventory of an item
across enterprises with the same GTIN for different catalogs,
select the Show Inventory From Consumable Organizations
box, enter the UOM, Enterprise associated with the item, and
the Item ID.
![](asset-13e.png)
274 User Guide
Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes
The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by container.
20.3 Location Inventory Search By Additional
Attributes
You can search for location inventory by additional attributes with the
help of this screen.
Table 20–2 Location Inventory Search By Container
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Enter the case LPN associated with the container.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 20–3 Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes
Fields
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
![](asset-13f.png)
Location Inventory Search By Segment
Location Inventory Console Screens 275
The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by additional attributes.
20.4 Location Inventory Search By Segment
You can search for location inventory that fall within a particular segment
with the help of this screen.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.
Serial # Enter the serial number associated with the item you
are searching for, if applicable.
Country Of Origin Enter the manufacturing country code, if applicable.
Ship By Date Enter the date by which the item must be shipped, if
applicable.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number, if applicable.
Inventory Age (days) Enter the number of days that inventory has been in
the node, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 20–3 Location Inventory Search By Additional Attributes
Fields
![](asset-140.png)
276 User Guide
Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by segment.
20.5 Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
You can search for location inventory by tag attributes with the help of
this screen.
Table 20–4 Location Inventory Search By Segment
Fields
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.
Segment Type Select the segment type of the item you are searching
for, if applicable.
Segment # Enter the segment number of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-141.png)
Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
Location Inventory Console Screens 277
The Location Inventory screen displays as a result of location inventory
search by tag attributes.
Table 20–5 Location Inventory Search By Tag Attributes
Fields
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the item’s unit of measure you are searching
for, if applicable.
Tag # Select the tag number associated with the
tag-controlled item.
The tag number displays only when the node that is
tracking inventory is configured to capture the tag
attributes in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-142.png)
278 User Guide
Location Inventory
20.6 Location Inventory
The Location Inventory list window displays the results of a location
inventory search. You can perform actions at a single location or multiple
locations by selecting the check boxes of the locations you want to
perform an action on and choosing the applicable action from the action
bar.
Table 20–6 Location Inventory, Items
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Location Inventory Details
screen where you can view location inventory details
for the selected items.
Change Inventory
Attributes This action takes you to the Change Location
Inventory Attributes (Criteria) screen where you can
modify inventory attributes for an item.
Node Level Inventory This action takes you to the Node Level Inventory
screen where you can view item’s inventory at a node
level.
Create Count Request This action takes you to the Create Count Request
screen where you can create count requests for the
selected items.
Create Move Request This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Note: If you have multiple inventories at a location,
you cannot create a move request. Instead, go to the
Location Inventory Details screen to create a move
request.
Fields
Location The location associated with the item. Click this link to
go to the Location Details screen where you can view
location details.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID.
![](asset-143.png)
Location Inventory
Location Inventory Console Screens 279
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Description A brief description of the item.
Status Inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.
Quantity The item quantity that exists in the location.
Table 20–7 Location Inventory, Containers
A case or pallet with LPNs that are directly associated with the criteria
displays. Given an LPN as a criteria, the next level of LPNs associated
with the criteria LPN displays.
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view container details.
Create Count Request This action takes you to the Create Count Request
screen where you can create a count request for the
selected containers.
Create Move Requests This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Break LPN This action takes you to the Break License Plate
Number screen where you can break an LPN to
remove contents from the LPN.
Fields
Location The location associated with the container. Click this
link to go to the Location Details screen where you can
view location details.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the container.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Table 20–6 Location Inventory, Items
![](asset-144.png)
280 User Guide
Location Inventory Details
20.7 Location Inventory Details
This screen provides visibility to item inventory details at a location.
Receipt # The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.
Is Outbound Container Displays ’Y’ if the container is an outbound container.
Table 20–8 Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory
View Icons
Audit - This icon provides visibility to location
inventory audits at a node. For more information, see
the Location Inventory Audit List.
Serials - This icon takes you to the Location Inventory
Serial Details screen where you can view location
inventory serial details at a node.
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Location The location associated with the item. Click this link to
go to the Location Details screen where you can view
location details.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID. Click this link to go to the Item Details
screen where you can view item details.
Item Description Description of the item.
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
On Hand Quantity Number of units of the item this location.
Pend In Quantity Number of units of the item having open tasks to
move into the location.
Table 20–7 Location Inventory, Containers
![](asset-145.png)
Location Inventory Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 281
Pend Out Quantity Number of units of this item having open tasks to
move out of the location.
Net Quantity Total number of units of the item available, calculated
as OnHand Qty + PendIn Qty - PendOut Qty.
Table 20–9 Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory Details
Actions
Adjust Location
Inventory This action allows you to adjust inventory at a
location. For more information, see the Adjust Location
Inventory Details screen.
Transfer Inventory
Ownership This action takes you to the Transfer Inventory
Ownership screen.
Change Inventory
Attributes This action takes you to the Change Location
Inventory Attributes (Criteria) screen where you can
modify inventory attributes for an item.
Create Move Requests This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Fields
Status Inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the criteria.
Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at the location
Pend Out Quantity Number of units of this item waiting to move out of
the location.
Pend In Quantity Number of units of this item waiting to move into the
location.
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Table 20–8 Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory
![](asset-146.png)
282 User Guide
Location Inventory Serial Details
20.8 Location Inventory Serial Details
You can view location inventory serial details for the selected item with
the help of this screen.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
COO Country Of Origin: Manufacturing country code
Ship By Date Date by which the item must be shipped so that it is
usable.
FIFO # FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.
Receipt # The number used to identify all inventory attached to
a receipt.
Tag # The tag number associated with the serial number.
The tag number displays only when the node that is
tracking inventory is configured to capture the tag
attributes in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Location Inventory Tag
Details screen where you can location inventory tag
details.
Table 20–10 Item Serial Details, Item
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Location Location Identifier.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID.
Table 20–9 Location Inventory Details, Location Inventory Details
![](asset-147.png)
Location Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 283
20.9 Location Details
You can view location details at a node with the help of this screen.
Product Class Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure
Item Description Description of the item
On Hand Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.
Pend In Quantity Number of units of the item having open tasks to
move into the location.
Pend Out Quantity Number of units of this item having open tasks to
move out of the location.
Net Quantity Total number of units of the item available, calculated
as On Hand Quantity + Pend In Quantity - Pend Out
Quantity.
Table 20–11 Location Inventory Serial Details, Serial List
Actions
Create Move Requests This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Fields
Serial # Serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial # 1 Component serial numbers of the item.
Secondary Serial # 2 Component serial numbers of the item.
Secondary Serial # 3 Component serial numbers of the item.
Table 20–10 Item Serial Details, Item
Fields
![](asset-148.png)
284 User Guide
Location Details
Table 20–12 Location Details, Location Information
Actions
Dedications This action takes you to the Location SKU Dedications
screen where you can view location SKU
dedications at node.
Fields
Location Location Identifier.
Location Type Type of location in the warehouse. Valid values are
INTRANSIT (Mobile locations), STAGING (drop-off,
sorting), VIRTUAL, REGULAR and DOCK.
Zone Zone to which the location belongs.
Velocity Code Velocity code associated to the location.
The velocity code associates the location to a SKUs
throughput. Typically, fast moving items are stored in
the lower level locations, or locations reachable by
hand, in the bulk zone.
Freeze Move In Displays 'Y' if the location is frozen for putaway, else
displays 'N'.
Freeze Move Out Displays ’Y’ if the location is frozen for pick, else
displays 'N'.
Storage Code Storage code associated with the location.
Location storage code allows the warehouse to store
items that match the storage profile of a location. For
example, hazardous inflammable items need locations
close to fire extinguishers.
In Staging Location Displays the staging location for inventory being
putaway to the location.
Out Staging Location Displays the staging location for inventory being
retrieved from the location
Dedicated Location Displays 'Y', if location is dedicated to a SKU. Displays
'N', if location is not dedicated to any SKU.
![](asset-149.png)
Location Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 285
Table 20–13 Location Details, Location Size Information
Fields
Location Size Code Defines the capacity of a location.
Infinite Capacity Display a checked box, if the size code is marked as
INFINITE
Maximum Weight The maximum weight that a location can hold in the
UOM.
The weight UOM is populated automatically from the
node's locale.
Length The length measurement of the location in the UOM.
The length UOM is populated automatically from the
node’s locale.
Width The width measurement of the location in the UOM.
The width UOM is populated automatically from the
node’s locale.
Height The height measure of the location in the UOM.
The height UOM is populated automatically from the
node’s locale.
Table 20–14 Location Details, Location Transactional Attributes
Fields
Freeze On Variance Indicates if the location is frozen due to count
variance.
Fill Code Fill code indicates if the location is Empty, Partially Full
or Full. These values are automatically updated during
inventory updates at the location.
Available Volume Available volume indicates unoccupied physical volume
of the location.
Available Weight Available weight indicates the additional physical
weight the location can hold.
![](asset-14a.png)
286 User Guide
Location SKU Dedications
20.10 Location SKU Dedications
You can view location SKU Dedications at a node with the help of this
screen.
Table 20–15 Location SKU Dedications, Locations
Fields
Location Location Identifier.
Location Type Type of location in the warehouse. Valid values are
INTRANSIT (Mobile locations), STAGING (drop-off,
sorting), VIRTUAL, REGULAR and DOCK.
Zone Zone to which the location belongs
Velocity Code Velocity code associated to the location.
The velocity code associates the location to a SKUs
throughput. Typically, fast moving items are stored in
the lower level locations, or locations reachable by
hand, in the bulk zone.
Freeze Move In Displays 'Y' if the location is frozen for putaway, else
displays 'N'.
Freeze Move Out Displays ’Y’ if the location is frozen for pick, else
displays 'N'.
Storage Code Storage code associated with the location.
Location storage code allows the warehouse to store
items that match the storage profile of a location. For
example, hazardous inflammable items need locations
close to fire extinguishers.
In Staging Location Displays the staging location for inventory being
putaway to the location.
Out Staging Location Displays the staging location for inventory being
retrieved from the location
Dedicated Location If 'Y' if the location is dedicated to a SKU. If 'N', if the
location is not dedicated to a SKU.
![](asset-14b.png)
Item Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 287
20.11 Item Details
You can view location inventory item details at a node with the help of
this screen.
Table 20–16 Location SKU Dedications, SKU Dedications
Fields
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID.
PC Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure
Status The current inventory status.
Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
Minimum Quantity The minimum SKU quantity that should be maintained
in the location.
The inventory monitor uses this value to trigger
replenishments from the bulk area.
Maximum Quantity Enter the maximum SKU quantity that the location can
hold.
The inventory monitor uses this value to estimate the
quantity to be replenished from the bulk area. The
quantity replenished is the difference between the
maximum quantity and the minimum quantity,
considering the demand at the location and inventory
UOM for the SKU.
![](asset-14c.png)
288 User Guide
Item Details
Table 20–17 Item Details, Item Attributes
Fields
Item ID The item ID.
Organization The organization code associated with the Item.
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Unit Cost The cost of one unit of the item.
GTIN The item’s Global Trade Item Number.
Is Hazardous Item Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
Table 20–18 Item Details, Inventory Tracking Attributes
Fields
Serial Tracked Displays 'Y' if the item is serial-tracked, else displays
'N'.
Tag Tracked Displays 'Y' if the item is tagged, else displays 'N'.
Time Sensitive Displays 'Y' if the item is time sensitive, else displays
'N'.
Table 20–19 Item Details, Standard Quantities
Fields
Alternate UOM The item’s alternate unit of measure.
Units Units of the item for the alternate UOM.
![](asset-14d.png)
Item Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 289
Table 20–20 Item Details, Hazmat Information
Fields
Proper Shipping Name The proper shipping name or description of the
hazardous item.
Hazard Class The item’s hazard class.
UN Number The four-digit number that identifies the hazardous
items (such as explosives and poisonous materials) of
commercial importance. This is widely used in
international commerce. For example, the contents
packaged in the shipping containers.
Packing Group Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous item
within its hazard class or division, and the type of
packaging required for the item. The valid values are:
Packing Group I - high danger, Packing Group II -
medium danger, Packing Group III - Low danger.
Label Code The label code of the hazardous item.
Special Provisions Special provisions to be provided for shipping the
hazardous item.
Symbol Indicates the hazmat symbol of the hazardous item.
Sort Order A unique number assigned to identify a hazardous
item.
Exception The packing exception for shipping the hazardous
item.
Packing Instructions
NonBulk Indicates additional requirements for non-bulk
packaging.
Bulk Indicates additional requirements for bulk packaging.
Passenger Air Indicates the maximum quantity that can be shipped
when shipping on a passenger aircraft or rail.
Cargo Air Indicates the maximum quantity that can be shipped
when shipping on a cargo aircraft.
Vessel The vessel stowage location code used to identify
where the cargo is stowed on a vessel.
Vessel SP The other vessel stowage plans.
![](asset-14e.png)
290 User Guide
Location Inventory Tag Details
20.12 Location Inventory Tag Details
You can view location inventory tag details at a node with the help of this
screen.
Table 20–21 Location Inventory Tag Details, Location Inventory
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Location Location Identifier.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID.
Item Description Description of the item.
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Unit of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Inventory Status inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.
Tag Details The tag details are restricted to a container level or at
an item level at the location based on the appropriate
action chosen.
Table 20–22 Location Inventory Tag Details, Tag Details
Fields
The item’s tag information displays only when the node that is tracking
inventory is configured to capture the tag attributes in all operations performed
within the node. For more information about capturing the tag attributes, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.
Revision # Revision number associated with the tag.
Lot # Lot number associated with the tag.
Batch # Batch number associated with the tag.
![](asset-14f.png)
Change Location Inventory Attributes
Location Inventory Console Screens 291
20.13 Change Location Inventory Attributes
(Criteria)
You can enter the criteria to modify location inventory attributes for an
item with the help of this screen.
Click Proceed. The Change Location Inventory Attributes screen displays.
20.14 Change Location Inventory Attributes
You can modify location inventory attributes for an item with the help of
this screen.
Table 20–23 Location Inventory Tag Details, Tag Attributes
Fields
Manufacturing Date Lot manufacturing date
Lot Attribute 1 Other lot attribute
Lot Attribute 2 Other lot attribute
Lot Attribute 3 Other lot attribute
Lot Key Reference Stores reference information for the lot number.
Lot Expiration Date Expiry date of Lot associated with the tag.
Table 20–24 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Location Location Identifier.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable
Item ID The item ID.
Unit of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
![](asset-150.png)
292 User Guide
Change Location Inventory Attributes
Table 20–25 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Location Location Identifier.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID.
Unit of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
Table 20–26 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes
Fields
Product Class Select the product class of the item.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status of the item.
Country Of Origin Select the manufacturing country code
Ship By Date Enter the date by which the item must be shipped.
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
Serial # The item’s serial number displays if there is only one
quantity at the location.
Receipt # The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.
FIFO # Enter the FIFO number.
Revision # Revision Number
![](asset-151.png)
Node Level Inventory
Location Inventory Console Screens 293
20.15 Node Level Inventory
You can view node level inventory for an item with the help of this
screen.
Lot # The lot number of the line item packaged in the
container.
Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.
Table 20–27 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Audit Reason
Fields
Adjustment Reason
Code Reason for the inventory transaction. Filled in typically
when user does an inventory adjustment.
Reason Text Description of the adjustment status.
Table 20–28 Change Location Inventory Attributes, References
Fields
Reference#1 Generic references.
Reference#2 Generic references.
Reference#3 Generic references.
Reference#4 Generic references.
Reference#5 Generic references.
Table 20–29 Node Level Inventory, Item Information
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Table 20–26 Change Location Inventory Attributes, Location Inventory
Attributes
Fields
![](asset-152.png)
294 User Guide
Node Level Inventory
Item ID The item ID.
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Description A brief description of the item.
Table 20–30 Node Level Inventory, Supply
Fields
Supply Type Indicates the supply type associated with the
inventory status. The supply type indicates
classification of the inventory. This value is populated
automatically by the Sterling WMS from the inventory
status configuration. Typical values include ONHAND,
INTRANSIT.
Quantity The total quantity for the supply type against an item
at the node.
On Hand Supply Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.
Table 20–31 Node Level Inventory, Demand
Fields
Demand Type Indicates the type of demand against the inventory. A
demand type is associated with events against an
order including order create, order release and the
supply type for available inventory. Typical values
include ALLOCATED, FORECAST.
Quantity The total quantity for the demand type against an item
at the node.
Table 20–29 Node Level Inventory, Item Information
Fields
![](asset-153.png)
Container Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 295
20.16 Container Details
You can view container details at a location with the help of this screen.
Promised Demand Displays 'Y', if the demand is a promised demand, else
displays 'N'. A demand is promised if placed against an
outbound order or work order
Allocated Demand Displays 'Y', if the demand is an allocated demand,
else displays 'N'. A demand is allocated upon release
against an outbound order or work order.
Table 20–32 Container Details, Container
View Icons
Audit - This icon provides visibility to location
inventory audits at a node. For more information, see
the Location Inventory Audit List.
Serials - This icon takes you to the Container Serial
Details screen where you can view container’s serial
details at a node.
Fields
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the Container.
Node The node associate with the container.
Location The location associated with the container. Click this
link to go to the Location Details screen where you can
view location details.
Receipt # The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.
Parent Container ID The parent container ID of the case LPN displays, if
applicable.
Table 20–31 Node Level Inventory, Demand
Fields
![](asset-154.png)
296 User Guide
Container Details
Outer Most Case ID The outermost case LPN of the case LPN displays, if
applicable
Is Outbound Container Indicates whether the container is an outbound
container.
Table 20–33 Container Details, Container Details
Actions
View Item Details This action takes you to the Item Details screen where
you can view the item details.
Adjust Container
Inventory This action allows you to adjust inventory at a
location. For more information, see the Adjust Location
Inventory Details screen.
Change Inventory
Attributes This action takes you to the Change Location
Inventory Attributes (Criteria) screen where you can
modify inventory attributes for an item.
Create Move Requests This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Fields
Case Id Case LPN associated with the criteria.
Item ID The item ID.
PC Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Description A brief description of the item.
Status Inventory Status: Refers to an inventory sub
classification based on the results of the inventory
control processes within the warehouse.
Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.
Pend Out Quantity Number of units of this item having open tasks to
move out of the location.
Table 20–32 Container Details, Container
![](asset-155.png)
Container Serial Details
Location Inventory Console Screens 297
20.17 Container Serial Details
You can view container’s serial details at a node with the help of this
screen.
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
COO Country Of Origin: Manufacturing country code.
Ship By Date Date by which the item must be shipped so that it is
usable.
FIFO # FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.
Receipt # The number used to identify all stock attached to a
receipt.
Tag # Tag associated with the serial number.
The tag number displays only when the node that is
tracking inventory is configured to capture the tag
attributes in all operations performed within the node.
For more information about capturing the tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Location Inventory Tag
Details where you can view the tag details.
Table 20–34 Container Serial Details, Container
Fields
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the container.
Node The node associated with the item.
Table 20–33 Container Details, Container Details
![](asset-156.png)
298 User Guide
Create Count Request
20.18 Create Count Request
You can create a count request for the selected items or containers in
this screen.
Location The location associated with the item.
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the container
items.
Table 20–35 Container Serial Details, Serial List
Actions
Create Move Requests This action takes you to the Create Move Request
screen where you can create a move request for the
selected containers.
Fields
Serial # The item’s serial number.
Item ID The items’ item ID.
PC The product class of the item.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Description A brief description of the item.
Table 20–34 Container Serial Details, Container
Fields
![](asset-157.png)
Create Move Request
Location Inventory Console Screens 299
Click OK.
20.19 Create Move Request
You can create a move request for the selected items or containers in
this screen.
Table 20–36 Create Count Request, Count Request Information
Fields
Priority Select the priority for the count request you are
creating, if applicable.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user.
The default value is 'Normal'.
Requesting User ID The current user id is automatically populated by the
system.
Enter the requesting user ID associated with the count
request, if applicable.
Start No Earlier Than The current system date is automatically populated.
Enter a different start date and time for the count
request, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than Enter the end date and time for the count request, if
applicable.
Table 20–37 Create Move Request, Move Request Header
Fields
Activity Group Select the activity group for the move request you are
creating.
For Activity Code Select the activity code associated with the activity
group.
Move Request # Enter a move request number, if applicable.
The system generates a unique request number
automatically, if you do not enter any value.
![](asset-158.png)
300 User Guide
Break License Plate Number
Click OK.
20.20 Break License Plate Number
When you break an LPN, all contents from the LPN are removed and
placed directly into the current location. On breaking an LPN, the LPN is
deleted from inventory. Use this screen to enter appropriate reasons for
breaking an LPN.
Priority Select the priority for the move request you are
creating.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low. This is
used to group and sequence tasks for users. A task
with 'Urgent' priority is assigned to the next available
user. The default value is 'Normal'.
Target Location Enter the target location for the move request you
want to create. A target location is typically entered
when creating move requests for retrieval.
This field becomes mandatory if you do not specify the
Source Location.
Requested By Enter the user that requested for move request
creation.
The system automatically displays the current user.
Start No Earlier Than Enter the start date and time of the tasks for the move
requests, if applicable.
The system automatically displays the current date
and time.
Finish No Later Than Enter the date and time by which the task is expected
to be completed, if applicable.
The start and finish times provides resource planning
capabilities by determining the shift that performs the
tasks.
Release immediately Check the check box if you want to immediately
release the move request being created.
Table 20–37 Create Move Request, Move Request Header
Fields
![](asset-159.png)
Break License Plate Number
Location Inventory Console Screens 301
Click OK. The system places all the contents of the LPN into the location
and removes the LPN from inventory. On removing the LPN from
inventory, the LPN cannot be built again.
Note: You cannot remove contents from LPNs for an
outbound containers.
Table 20–38 Break LPN Reason, Break LPN Reason Code
Fields
Reason Code Enter the applicable reason for breaking LPN or search
for the reason code.
Click the lookup icon to select the adjust reason code
from the list.
All reason codes not associated with the bin location
are displayed.
Reason Text Enter additional information as to why the LPN was
broken.
![](asset-15a.png)
302 User Guide
Break License Plate Number
![](asset-15b.png)
Adjust Location Inventory Screens 303
21
Adjust Location Inventory Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Adjust Location
Inventory screens.
21.1 Adjust Location Inventory Criteria
You can enter the adjust location inventory criteria in this screen.
Table 21–1 Adjust Location Inventory, Adjust Location Inventory
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the Item, if applicable.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are adjusting the inventory
for, if applicable.
Location Enter the location ID you want to adjust inventory for.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN you are adjusting inventory for.
Note: You can also enter a non-existing pallet LPN.
Case ID Enter the case LPN you are adjusting inventory for.
Note: You can also enter a non-existing case LPN.
Item ID Enter the item ID for which you want to adjust the
quantity.
This field is mandatory.
Product Class Select the product class for the item you are adjusting
for.
This field is mandatory.
![](asset-15c.png)
304 User Guide
Adjust Location Inventory Details
Click Proceed. The Adjust Location Inventory Details screen displays
where you can view location inventory details and adjust the quantity
appropriately.
21.2 Adjust Location Inventory Details
You can view the location’s inventory details and adjust the quantity
appropriately in this screen.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item you are
adjusting for.
This field is mandatory.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status of the item you are
adjusting for.
This field is mandatory.
Note: Location ID is mandatory if case ID or pallet ID is
not entered.
Table 21–2 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Adjust Location
Inventory
Fields
Node The node associated with the item.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Location Location identifier.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN to be adjusted.
Case ID Case LPN to be adjusted.
Item ID The item ID.
Table 21–1 Adjust Location Inventory, Adjust Location Inventory
Fields
![](asset-15d.png)
Adjust Location Inventory Details
Adjust Location Inventory Screens 305
Product Class Product Class: Indicates the item's inventory
categorization. Orders are placed for an item and
product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR, FD
(Factory Defects).
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
Inventory Status Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.
Table 21–3 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Additional Inventory
Attributes
Fields
Receipt # Enter the receipt number for the inventory, if
applicable.
The number used to identify all inventory attached to
a receipt.
FIFO # Enter the FIFO number to associate with the
inventory, if applicable.
FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which inventory arrived
at the node. This is used to send out inventory that
arrived first than the ones that arrived later.
Country Of Origin Enter the manufacturing country code to associate
with the inventory.
Segment Type Enter the segment type to associate with the
inventory.
A segment type indicates an inventory category.
Typical values are MTC - Made To Customer or MTO -
Made to Order.
Table 21–2 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Adjust Location
Inventory
![](asset-15e.png)
306 User Guide
Adjust Location Inventory Details
Segment # Enter the segment number to associate with the
inventory.
Typically, a segment holds either the specific buyer or
specific order number that requires dedication.
Ship By Date Enter date by which the item must be shipped, if
applicable.
Used for products with shelf life or perishables.
Table 21–4 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Add Serials
Fields
Serial # Enter the serial number of the items.
Click to go to the serial range panel, where you can enter the serial range of
the items.
From Serial # Enter the start serial number.
To Serial # Enter the end serial number.
Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.
Table 21–5 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Quantity
Actions
Adjustment Cost This action takes you to the Adjustment Cost Details
where you can view an item’s adjustment cost
details.
Table 21–3 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Additional Inventory
Attributes
Fields
![](asset-15f.png)
Adjustment Cost Details
Adjust Location Inventory Screens 307
21.3 Adjustment Cost Details
You can view the adjustment cost details for an item in this screen.
Fields
Current Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at the location.
Adjust Quantity Enter the quantity you want to adjust.
Use '-' sign before entering quantity to reduce
inventory.
Table 21–6 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Modification Reason
Fields
Reason Code This field is mandatory.
Select the reason code associated with adjustment.
This is used for tracking and reporting purposes.
Reason Text Enter text to indicate the reason for the adjustment.
Table 21–7 Adjust Location Inventory Details, References
Fields
Reference #1 Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.
Reference #2 Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.
Reference #3 Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.
Reference #4 Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.
Reference #5 Enter any other references to be used.
Typical values are order #, count request #.
Table 21–5 Adjust Location Inventory Details, Quantity
![](asset-160.png)
308 User Guide
Adjustment Cost Details
Table 21–8 Adjustment Cost Details, Adjustment Cost
Fields
Item ID The item ID.
Item Description Description of the item.
Current Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at the location.
Adjustment Quantity Number of adjusting units of the item at the location.
Quantity After
Adjustment Number of units of the item on-hand after making the
adjustments.
Unit Cost The unit cost of an item.
Adjustment Cost The adjustment cost for an item.
![](asset-161.png)
Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens 309
22
Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Accounting Bin
Adjustment screens.
22.1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details Criteria
You can enter the accounting bin adjustment details criteria in this
screen.
Click Proceed. The Accounting Bin Adjustment Details screen displays.
22.2 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
You can view the inventory details for a location and empty the
accounting bin appropriately.
Table 22–1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Accounting Bin
Adjustment Details
Fields
Node The node to which you need to empty the accounting
bin.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to empty the
accounting bin from the drop-down list, if applicable.
Location Enter the identifier of the location to which you want
to empty the accounting bin.
![](asset-162.png)
310 User Guide
Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
22.2.1 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
You can view the inventory details and empty the accounting bin
appropriately
22.2.2 Location Inventory Details
You can view the inventory details for a particular location.
Table 22–2 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Accounting Bin
Adjustment Details
Fields
Node The node to which you need to empty the accounting
bin.
Enterprise The enterprise for which the accounting bin needs to
be emptied.
Location The identifier of the location to which the accounting
bin needs to be emptied.
Table 22–3 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Location Inventory
Details
Fields
# of Inventory Items Displays number of inventory items in the accounting
bin.
Total Value Displays the total cost of all items in the accounting
bin.
![](asset-163.png)
Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
Accounting Bin Adjustment Screens 311
22.2.3 Accounting Bin Adjustment Reasons
You can select the reason for cleaning out the accounting bin.
Note: Depending on the adjustments made in the count
location, the inventory in the bin location may be positive
or negative. The total number of units and the total value
of all items in the accounting bin depends on the positive
or negative inventory that is present in the bin location.
For example, if the bin location has:
ITEM01 = +10 units
ITEM02 = -15 units
The total number of units present in the bin location is -5
units and not +25 units.
Table 22–4 Accounting Bin Adjustment Details, Accounting Bin
Adjustment Reasons
Fields
Reason Code Select the appropriate reason code for cleaning out
the accounting bin.
This field is used for tracking and reporting purposes.
This field is mandatory.
Reason Text Enter the reason for cleaning out the accounting bin, if
applicable.
Note: When you click the Save button, the system raises
the ZEROOUT_LOC_IS_INITIATED event on the ZEROOUT_
LOCATION_INV transaction, which is triggered externally.
For more information about externally triggered
transactions, see the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-164.png)
312 User Guide
Accounting Bin Adjustment Details
![](asset-165.png)
Transfer Inventory Ownership 313
23
Transfer Inventory Ownership
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Transfer Inventory
Ownership screens.
23.1 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes
You can transfer the inventory ownership for an item at a particular
location with the help of the Transfer Inventory Ownership screen.
Table 23–1 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Inventory
Field Description
Node The node associated with the item.
Location Location identifier.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the criteria.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the criteria, if applicable
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID.
Unit of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
Table 23–2 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Inventory Detail
Field Description
Product Class The product class of the item.
Inventory Status The inventory status of the item.
![](asset-166.png)
314 User Guide
Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes
Country Of Origin The manufacturing country code.
Ship By Date The date by which the item must be shipped.
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer number or specific order number
that requires dedication.
Serial # The item’s serial number is displayed if there is only
one quantity at the location.
Receipt # The number used to identify all the stock attached to a
receipt.
FIFO # The FIFO number.
Table 23–3 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Transfer Detail
Field Description
Inventory Organization
Code Organization code of the consumable inventory
organization.
Quantity Number of units of the item on-hand at this location.
Table 23–4 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Audit Reason
Field Description
Reason Code Reason for the inventory transaction. Filled in typically
when a user carries out an inventory adjustment.
Reason Text Description of the adjustment status.
Table 23–5 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, References
Field Description
Reference#1 Generic references.
Reference#2 Generic references.
Table 23–2 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, Inventory Detail
Field Description
![](asset-167.png)
Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes
Transfer Inventory Ownership 315
Reference#3 Generic references.
Reference#4 Generic references.
Reference#5 Generic references.
Table 23–5 Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes, References
Field Description
![](asset-168.png)
316 User Guide
Transfer Inventory Ownership Attributes
![](asset-169.png)
Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens 317
24
Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Print SKU Labels
screens.
24.1 Print Stock Keeping Unit Search By Item
Use this screen to search items for which you want to print the SKU
labels.
Table 24–1 Print SKU Labels Search By Item
Fields
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search, if
applicable.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
enterprises in the system.
Item ID Enter the item identifier for which you want to search.
Default Product Class Select the item’s product class for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the item’s unit of measure for which you want
to search, if applicable.
Short Description Select the item’s short description for which you want
to search, if applicable.
Master Catalog ID Select the item’s identifier in the master catalog for
which you want to search, if applicable.
![](asset-16a.png)
318 User Guide
Item List
The Item List screen displays as a result of your print SKU label search
by item.
24.2 Item List
The Item List window displays the results of an item search. You can
perform actions on a single item or multiple items by selecting the
checkboxes of the items you want to print the labels and choosing the
Print action from the action bar.
GTIN Select the item’s Global Trade Item Number for which
you want to search, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 24–1 Print SKU Labels Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-16b.png)
Print
Print Stock Keeping Unit Labels Screens 319
24.3 Print
You can print the SKU labels for hazardous items with the help of this
screen.
Table 24–2 Item List
Action
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.
Fields
Item ID The item identifier.
Default PC The item’s default product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Short Description A brief description of the item.
Master Catalog ID The item’s identifier in the catalog it belongs to.
Catalog Organization The organization that owns the catalog containing the
item.
Table 24–3 Print
Fields
Print Service Name Choose the applicable label you want to print.
Printer Name Choose the printer to print the label from.
No. of Copies Enter the total number of copies of the label you want
to print.
![](asset-16c.png)
320 User Guide
Print
![](asset-16d.png)
Receipt Adjustment Screens 321
25
Receipt Adjustment Screens
Use the Receipt Adjustment screen to adjust the receipt quantity for
inventory that you have already received.
25.1 Receipt Adjustment
Use this screen to enter the inventory adjustment criteria.
Table 25–1 Receipt Adjustment
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type.
Valid values include Purchase Order and Transfer
Order.
Node Select the node associated with the receipt.
The node automatically populates based on the user.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the receipt you
are adjusting.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number to adjusting receipt against.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Receipt you want to use.
Pallet ID Enter the LPN corresponding to the pallet that you
want to adjust receipt of, if applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.
![](asset-16e.png)
322 User Guide
Adjust Receipt
Click Proceed. The Adjust Receipt screen is displayed where you can
validate the criteria you entered against the receipt number for filtering
the results.
25.2 Adjust Receipt
This screen enables you to validate the criteria you entered in the Receipt
Adjustment screen against the receipt number for filtering the results.
Case ID Enter the LPN corresponding to the case that you want
to adjust receipt of, if applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.
Item ID Enter the item associated with the receipt that you are
adjusting receipt of, if applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Item you want to use.
Product Class Select the product class associated with the receipt, if
applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the adjustment details
panel.
Unit of Measure Select the UOM associated with the receipt, if
applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.
Serial # Enter the serial number associated with the receipt, if
applicable.
This filters the receipt details in the Adjust Receipt
window. For more information, see the Adjust Receipt
screen.
Table 25–1 Receipt Adjustment
Fields
![](asset-16f.png)
Adjust Receipt
Receipt Adjustment Screens 323
Table 25–2 Adjust Receipt, Receipt
Fields
Enterprise Code The enterprise you are adjusting for is displayed.
Node The node you are adjusting for is displayed.
Receipt # The receipt number you are adjusting for is displayed.
Location The dock location.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
location you want to use.
Pallet ID The LPN corresponding to the pallet you are adjusting
for is displayed, if applicable.
Case ID The LPN corresponding to the case you are adjusting
for is displayed, if applicable.
Item ID The item you are adjusting for is displayed, if
applicable.
Product Class The product class of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.
Unit of Measure The UOM of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.
Table 25–3 Adjust Receipt, Receipt Lines
Fields
Item ID The item you are adjusting for is displayed, if
applicable.
Product Class The product class of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.
Unit of Measure The UOM of the item you are adjusting for is
displayed, if applicable.
Serial # The serial number of the item that you are adjusting
for is displayed, if applicable.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status that you are adjusting for.
![](asset-170.png)
324 User Guide
Modification Reason
Click Adjust. The Modification Reason screen is displayed where you
enter appropriate reasons for adjusting the received quantity.
25.3 Modification Reason
You can enter appropriate reasons for adjusting the received quantity.
Click OK.
Quantity The quantity received for the item, product class and
UOM for the receipt is displayed.
UnReceive Quantity Enter the quantity that you are removing from the
receipt for the item, product, class, UOM and
inventory status.
Table 25–4 Modification Reason
Fields
Reason Code Select the applicable reason for the modification.
Reason Text Enter any additional comments for the modification.
Table 25–3 Adjust Receipt, Receipt Lines
Fields
![](asset-171.png)
Create Work Order Screens 325
26
Create Work Order Screens
Work orders are generated in a warehouse to support VAS activities.
These work orders may be generated automatically from an order, based
on min/max levels configured for an item (using events) or created
manually.
The Create Work Order console allows you to create work orders for the
selected service.
26.1 Create Work Order
You can create a work order for VAS related activities with the help of
this screen.
Table 26–1 Create Work Order Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the work order you
are creating.
The node is automatically populated based on the
user.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the work order
you are creating.
Work Order # Enter the work order number for the work order you
are creating.
The system automatically generates a unique number
if a value is not entered.
![](asset-172.png)
326 User Guide
Create Work Order
Service Item Group Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are creating.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING, INVENTORY
CHANGES, INVENTORY COMPLIANCE.
Note: You can create work orders for the
"KITTING" service item group without specifying
the components.
Purpose Select the purpose associated with the work order you
are creating.
Valid values are Order, Stock, Ship.
Priority Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority Is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.
Start No Earlier Than Enter the start date and time for the work order, if
applicable.
Finish No Later Than Enter the end date and time for the work order, if
applicable
Service Item ID Enter the service item ID associated with the item you
want to create.
If not entered the service associated with the parent
item in the catalog based on service item group
chosen is populated.
Ignore Run Quantity Select this check box to ignore the run quantity.
Release Immediately Select this check box if work order is released
immediately on completion of allocation process.
Table 26–1 Create Work Order Screen, Primary Information
Fields
![](asset-173.png)
Additional Item Details
Create Work Order Screens 327
After entering the relevant information in the above fields, the work
order is created upon clicking the Proceed button. The Work Order
Details screen displays.
26.2 Additional Item Details
You can enter additional tag details pertaining to the item selected for
the work order in the Work Order Details screen.
Table 26–2 Create Work Order Screen, Work Order Item Data
Fields
Item ID Enter the item created as a result of the work order.
Also referred to as 'Kit Item' or 'Parent Item'.
This is mandatory for service item groups of
KITTING,DE-KITTING, INVENTORY CHANGE,
INVENTORY COMPLIANCE.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the work order you are creating.
Product Class Select the product class of the item associated with
the work order you are creating
Segment Type Select the segment type of the item associated with
the work order you are creating, if applicable.
Typical values include 'MTO' - Made to Order or 'MTC' -
Made To Customer.
Segment Enter the specific order number or customer number
associated with the work order you are creating.
This is applicable only if Segment Type is chosen.
Requested Quantity Enter the quantity of the item being created on the
work order.
![](asset-174.png)
328 User Guide
Work Order Details
Click OK to return to the Work Order Details screen.
26.3 Work Order Details
This screen lets you enter some more information related to the work
order creation process such as Component Items, Activities and
Additional Item Data.
Table 26–3 Additional Item Details Screen, Tag Details
Fields
Tag Identifiers Enter the unique tag identifiers you have specified for
the item. For example, Lot #.
Tag Attributes Enter any descriptive identifiers specified for the item.
For example, Manufacture Date.
Lot # Enter the Lot number
associated with this tag
identifier.
Batch # Enter the Batch number
associated with this tag
identifier.
Revision # Enter the Revision number
associated with this tag
identifier.
Lot Key
Reference Enter the Lot key reference
associated with this tag
attribute.
Manufacturing
Date Enter the manufacturing date
for this tag attribute.
Lot Attribute 1 Enter the lot attribute 1 with
this tag attribute.
![](asset-175.png)
Work Order Details
Create Work Order Screens 329
Table 26–4 Work Order Details Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order displays.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order
displays.
Work Order # The work order number for the work order displays.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order
is automatically populated.
Status The of the work order displays.
Service Item ID The identifier of the service item displays.
Purpose The purpose associated with the work order displays.
Table 26–5 Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data
Actions
Additional Item Details This action takes you to the Additional Item Details
screen to enter tag details for the item.
You can enter the tag details only when the node
fulfilling the work order is configured to capture the
tag attributes in all operations performed within the
node. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Fields
Item ID The item created as a result of the work order. Also
referred to as 'Kit Item' or 'Parent Item'.
This is mandatory for service item groups of
KITTING,DE-KITTING, INVENTORY CHANGE,
INVENTORY COMPLIANCE.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure of the item associated with the
work order you created displays.
Product Class The product class of the item associated with the work
order you are creating displays.
Description The description of the item displays.
![](asset-176.png)
330 User Guide
Work Order Details
The container details appear only for the Dekitting service item group.
Segment Type The segment type of the item associated with the work
order you created displays.
Typical values include 'MTO' - Made to Order or 'MTC' -
Made To Customer.
Segment The specific order number or customer number
associated with the work order you created displays.
This is applicable only if Segment Type is chosen.
Requested Quantity The quantity of the item being created on the work
order.
Table 26–6 Work Order Details Screen, Quantity
Fields
Requested The requested quantity of items displays.
Confirmed The confirmed quantity of items displays.
Allocated The allocated quantity of items displays.
Cancelled The cancelled quantity of items displays.
Released The released quantity of items displays.
Table 26–7 Work Order Details Screen, Container Details
Fields
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Enter the case LPN associated with the container.
Serial # Enter the serial number.
Table 26–8 Work Order Details Screen, Component Items
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected tag
details.
Fields
Table 26–5 Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data
![](asset-177.png)
Work Order Details
Create Work Order Screens 331
Activities are populated from the service item associated with the work
order or the item. All activities to be associated with the item being
created are specified for the component quantity.
Tag Details You can view the tag details only when the node
fulfilling the work order is configured to capture the
tag attributes in all operations performed within the
node. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Item ID The component item details display.
Product Class The product class associated with component item
displays.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure of the item associated with the
work order displays.
Description The component item’s description displays.
Qty Per Kit The component item quantity required for the parent
item displays.
Segment Type The segment type for the component inventory
displays, if applicable.
Segment The order number or customer name for the
component inventory displays, if applicable.
Table 26–9 Work Order Details Screen, Activities
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected tag
details.
Fields
Instructions Enter any additional instructions for the activity.
Table 26–8 Work Order Details Screen, Component Items
![](asset-178.png)
332 User Guide
Work Order Details
The following note is essential if you want to view the inventory
compliance for an item.
Location Details The location where the activity is performed displays.
Click on the icon, to view and hide location
details.
Inv Upd Activity Inventory updated for the activity.
Seq # Enter a sequence for the activity being performed.
Activity Code Select the activity code to associate with the location
and quantity.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
activity code you want to use.
Note: The screen that displays when you select Inventory
Compliance as the service group code, depends on the
Service Involves Segment Change field configuration. For
more information about configuring the Service Involves
Segment Change field, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
Table 26–9 Work Order Details Screen, Activities
Preferred
Location Click on the icon to add new
location.
Requested
Quantity Enter the quantity you want to
move into the location.
![](asset-179.png)
Work Order Console Screens 333
27
Work Order Console Screens
Work Order Console provides:
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
work order number, segment type, segment number.
QComprehensive visibility at an enterprise and node level.
27.1 Work Order Search By Item
You can perform work order search by a service item or a product item
ID.
Table 27–1 Work Order Search By Item
Fields
Node Select the node for which you want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Allocated Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.
Released Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.
Service Item Group Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.
![](asset-17a.png)
334 User Guide
Work Order Search By Container
The Work Order List screen displays the search results.
27.2 Work Order Search By Container
You can perform work order search by the pallet or case IDs or the serial
number of the container.
Service Item ID Select the appropriate service item ID for the work
order for which you want to search.
Work Order Status
Range Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching of, if applicable.
Held Work Orders With
Hold Type Select the check box and select the hold type from the
list that you want to search for work orders with that
hold type, if applicable.
Work Order # Enter the work order number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.
Segment Type Select the segment type associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.
Segment # Enter the segment number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.
Priority Select the priority associated with the work order you
are searching for, if applicable.
Item ID Enter the item ID associated with work order you want
to search for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
Table 27–2 Work Order Search By Container
Fields
Node Select the node for which you want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Table 27–1 Work Order Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-17b.png)
Work Order Search By Date
Work Order Console Screens 335
The Work Order List screen displays the search results.
27.3 Work Order Search By Date
You can perform work order search by the start and finish dates of the
work order.
Allocated Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.
Released Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.
Service Item Group Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.
Status Range Select the status range associated with the item you
are searching of, if applicable.
Work Order # Enter the work order number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.
Segment Type Select the segment type associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.
Segment # Enter the segment number associated with the work
order you are searching for, if applicable.
Priority Select the priority associated with the work order you
are searching for, if applicable.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container, if
applicable.
Case ID Enter the case LPN associated with the container, if
applicable.
Serial # Enter the serial number associated with the container
you are searching for, if applicable
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
Table 27–2 Work Order Search By Container
Fields
![](asset-17c.png)
336 User Guide
Work Order Search By Date
The Work Order List screen displays the search results.
Table 27–3 Work Order Search By Date
Fields
Node Select the node for which you want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Allocated Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.
Released Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.
Service Item Group Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.
Service Item ID Select the appropriate service item ID for the work
order for which you want to search.
Status Range Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching for, if applicable.
Priority Select the priority associated with the work order you
are searching for, if applicable.
Start No Earlier Than By default, the system displays Start No Earlier Than
date and time.
Enter the Start No Earlier Than date and time
associated with the work order for which you want to
search.
Finish No Later Than By default, the system displays Finish No Later Than
date and time.
Enter the Finish No Later Than date and time
associated with the work order for which you want to
search.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
![](asset-17d.png)
Work Order Search By Components
Work Order Console Screens 337
27.4 Work Order Search By Activity
You can perform work order search by an activity code.
The Work Order List screen displays the search results.
27.5 Work Order Search By Components
You can perform work order search by an component item ID.
Table 27–4 Work Order Search By Activity
Fields
Node Select the node for which you want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Allocated Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.
Released Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.
Service Item Group Select the appropriate service item group for the work
order you are searching.
Valid values are KITTING, DEKITTING,PROVIDED
SERVICE,INVENTORY CHANGE,INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.
Item ID Enter the service item ID associated with the work
order you want to search for, if applicable.
Status Range Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching for, if applicable.
Activity Code Enter the activity code associated with the work order
for which you want to search.
Activity location Enter the activity location associated with the work
order for which you want to search.
Is Complete Select this option if you are searching for only
completed work orders.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
![](asset-17e.png)
338 User Guide
Work Order List
The Work Order List screen displays the search results.
27.6 Work Order List
The Work Order List window displays the results of an work order search.
You can perform actions on a single work order line or multiple work
order lines by selecting the check boxes of the work order lines you want
to perform an action on and choosing the applicable action from the
action bar.
Table 27–5 Work Order Search By Components
Fields
Node Select the node for which you want to search.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to search.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Allocated Select the appropriate allocation level for the work
order you are searching.
Released Select the appropriate released level for the work
order you are searching for.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for, if applicable.
Status Range Select the status range associated with the work order
you are searching for, if applicable.
Component Item ID Enter the component item ID associated with the work
order you want to search for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
Table 27–6 Work Order List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Work Order Details screen
where you can view the details of the work order and
perform various actions on the work order.
![](asset-17f.png)
Work Order List
Work Order Console Screens 339
View Tasks This action takes you to the task search screen. For
more information about viewing the tasks, see the
Sterling Warehouse Management System: User Guide.
Note: You can view tasks only for a single work order
at a time.
View Move Request This action takes you to the move request search
screen. For more information about viewing the move
requests, see the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: User Guide.
Note: You can view tasks only for a single work order
at a time.
Confirm This action lets you confirm the work order by taking
you to the VAS station. For more information about
viewing VAS stations, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.
Cancel This action pops up a Cancellation Reason screen for
cancelling the selected work orders.
Fields
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order. Click this link to view the work order details.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the work order.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order.
Item ID The Item ID of the item associated with the work
order.
UOM The UOM code of the item associated with the work
order.
Priority The work order priority.
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
Table 27–6 Work Order List
![](asset-180.png)
340 User Guide
Work Order Details
27.7 Work Order Details
The work order detail screen enables you to perform certain actions such
as confirm, cancel or allocate a work order. You can also view the status
audits and outbound shipments from this screen.
Order # The order number of the item.
Status The work order status.
This icon displays only if the work order is put on
hold.
Table 27–7 Work Order Details Screen, Primary Information
View Icons
This icon takes you to the shipments screen where you
can view the outbound shipment details.
This icon takes you to the Work Order Status Audits
screen which displays audit activity information
pertaining to the specific work order.
Activity Demand - This icon takes you to the Work
Order Activity Demand screen where you can view the
work order’s activity demand.
Actions
Confirm This action lets you confirm the work order by taking
you to the VAS station. For more information about
viewing VAS stations, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: User Guide.
Allocate This action enables you allocate a work order.
Release This action enables you to release a work order.
Note: You cannot create retrieval move requests when
releasing work orders for the "KITTING" service item
group that does not have components.
Cancel This action pops up a Cancellation Reason screen
where you can cancel the selected work orders.
Table 27–6 Work Order List
![](asset-181.png)
Work Order Details
Work Order Console Screens 341
View Holds This action takes you to the Work Order Holds screen
where you can view holds that are applied to the work
order.
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order.
Status The work order status.
Click on to go to the Work Order Holds where you
can view various holds that are applied to the work
order.
Priority Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.
Start No Earlier Than Work order date to start no earlier than.
Finish No Later Than Work date to finish no later than.
Service Item ID The service item ID associated with the item.
Purpose The purpose associated with the work order.
Table 27–8 Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data
Action
Additional Item Details This action takes you to the Additional Item Details
screen to enter tag details for the item.
You can enter the tag details, if you have selected the
option, When performing any node operation
during the ship node tag capture configuration. For
more information about capturing tag attributes, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Fields
Table 27–7 Work Order Details Screen, Primary Information
![](asset-182.png)
342 User Guide
Work Order Details
Item ID Enter the item created as a result of the work order.
Also referred to as 'Kit Item' or 'Parent Item'.
This is mandatory for service item groups of KITTING,
DE-KITTING, INVENTORY CHANGE, INVENTORY
COMPLIANCE.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the work order you are creating.
Product Class Select the product class of the item associated with
the work order you are creating
Segment Type Select the segment type of the item associated with
the work order you are creating, if applicable.
Typical values include 'MTO' - Made to Order or 'MTC' -
Made To Customer.
Segment Enter the specific order number or customer number
associated with the work order you are creating.
This is applicable only if Segment Type is chosen.
Requested Quantity Enter the quantity of the item being created on the
work order.
Table 27–9 Work Order Details Screen, Quantity
Fields
Requested Quantity requested by the work order.
Confirmed Quantity confirmed by the work order.
Allocated Quantity allocated to the work order.
Cancelled Quantity cancelled from the work order.
Released Quantity released by the work order.
Table 27–10 Work Order Details Screen, Container Details
Fields
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Enter the case LPN associated with the container.
Serial # Enter the serial number.
Table 27–8 Work Order Details Screen, Work Order Item Data
![](asset-183.png)
Work Order Details
Work Order Console Screens 343
Activities are populated from the service item associated with the work
order or the item. All activities to be associated with the item being
created are specified for the component quantity.
Table 27–11 Work Order Details Screen, Component Items
Action
Delete This action deletes the selected tag details.
Fields
Tag Details Click on to view the tag details.
You can view the tag details only if the inventory tag
attributes are captured in all operations performed
within the node. For more information about capturing
the tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Item ID Enter the component associated with parent item you
want to create.
Click on to add component item details.
PC Select the product class associated with component
item.
UOM Select the unit of measure of the item associated with
the work order you are creating.
Qty Per Kit Enter the component item quantity required for the
parent item.
Segment Type Select segment type for the component inventory, if
applicable.
Segment Enter order number or customer name for the
component inventory, if applicable.
Table 27–12 Work Order Details Screen, Activities
Action
Delete This action deletes activities that you have selected.
Fields
Instructions Enter any additional instructions for the activity.
![](asset-184.png)
344 User Guide
Work Order Status Audits
27.8 Work Order Status Audits
You can view any status modifications performed against a work order.
Location Details The location where the activity is performed displays.
Click on the icon, to view and hide location
details.
Inv Upd Activity Inventory updated for the activity.
Seq # Enter a sequence for the activity being performed.
Activity Code Select the activity code to associate with the location
and quantity.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
activity code you want to use.
Table 27–13 Work Order Status Audits Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order.
Status The work order status.
Start No Earlier Than Work order date to start no earlier than.
Finish No Later Than Work date to finish no later than.
Service Item ID The service item ID associated with the item.
Table 27–12 Work Order Details Screen, Activities
Preferred
Location Click on the icon to add new
location.
Requested
Quantity Enter the quantity you want to
move into the location.
![](asset-185.png)
Work Order Activity Demand
Work Order Console Screens 345
27.9 Work Order Activity Demand
This screen provides visibility to the work order’s activity demand.
Table 27–14 Work Order Activity Demand, Primary Information
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order.
Status The work order status.
Click on to go to the Work Order Holds where you
can view holds that are applied to the work order.
Priority Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.
Start No Earlier Than Work order date to start no earlier than.
Finish No Later Than Work date to finish no later than.
Service Item ID The service item ID associated with the item.
Purpose The purpose associated with the work order.
Table 27–15 Work Order Activity Demand, Activity Demand List
Action
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.
Fields
Location ID The item location in the node.
Activity Code The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.
Pallet Id The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.
Case Id The case LPN that belong to the work order.
![](asset-186.png)
346 User Guide
Work Order Holds
27.10 Work Order Holds
You can view the various types of holds that are applied to the work
order.
Item ID The items that belong to the work order.
Demand Quantity Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Satisfied Quantity The extent to which the demand is satisfied.
Demand Satisfied Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Table 27–16 Work Order Holds Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order.
Status The work order status.
Start No Earlier Than Work order date to start no earlier than.
Finish No Later Than Work date to finish no later than.
Service Item ID The service item ID associated with the item.
Table 27–17 Work Order Holds Screen, Work Order Holds
Actions
Add Holds This action takes you to the Add Holds screen where
you can add holds for the selected work order.
Fields
Click this icon to go to the View History screen where
you can view the hold history for the selected hold.
Hold Description A brief description of the hold.
Hold Status The current status of the hold.
Table 27–15 Work Order Activity Demand, Activity Demand List
![](asset-187.png)
View History
Work Order Console Screens 347
27.11 Add Holds
You can add holds for the work order with the help of this screen.
27.12 View History
In this screen you can view the hold history for the selected hold.
Hold Comment Any additional comments for the hold.
Action Select the action from the list that you want to apply
for the hold.
Reason Enter the reason for the hold.
Table 27–18 Work Order Holds Screen, Approved Holds
Fields
Click this icon to go to the View History screen where
you can view the hold history for the selected hold.
Hold Description A brief description of the hold.
Reason The reason for the hold.
Table 27–19 Add Holds Screen, Work Order Holds
Fields
Hold Type Select the work order hold type from the list.
Reason Enter the reason for the hold.
Table 27–20 View History Screen, Primary Information
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Service Item Group The service item group associated with the work order.
Status The work order status.
Table 27–17 Work Order Holds Screen, Work Order Holds
![](asset-188.png)
348 User Guide
Work Order Details for Provided Service Items
27.13 Cancellation Reason
You can cancel a work order from the Work Order List screen by selecting
the appropriate work orders or from the Work Order Details screen for
cancelling a particular work order.
27.14 Work Order Details for Provided Service
Items You can view work order details for provided service items from the work
order Work Order List screen. From the work order list, select the check
boxes of PS service item group work orders and view the work order
details.
Start No Earlier Than Work order date to start no earlier than.
Finish No Later Than Work date to finish no later than.
Service Item ID The service item ID associated with the item.
Table 27–21 View History Screen, Work Order Holds
Fields
Hold Type The hold type.
Date/Time The date and time at which the hold was created.
User ID The user who created the hold.
Status The current status of the hold.
Comment Any additional comments for the hold.
Hold Transaction The hold transaction.
Table 27–22 Cancellation Reason
Fields
Cancellation Reason
Code Select the reason code associated with cancellation.
This field is mandatory.
Reason Text Enter any additional comments for the cancellation.
Table 27–20 View History Screen, Primary Information
Fields
![](asset-189.png)
Appointment Details
Work Order Console Screens 349
27.15 Appointment Details
You can plan an appointment for a work order of provided service item
group. In Appointment, click on icon. The Plan Appointment window
displays.
Table 27–23 Work Order Details for Provided Service Items
Fields
Node The node associated with the work order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Quantity Requested The quantity requested by the work order.
Status The work order status.
Priority Select the priority for the work order you are creating,
if applicable. Appropriate priority is assigned to all
tasks for the work order.
Valid values are Urgent, High, Normal, Low.
Appointment The appointment associated with the work order. Click
on to view the appointment details.
Service Item ID The service item ID associated with the item.
Purpose The purpose associated with the work order.
Ship To Details of the location the item is being shipped to.
Table 27–24 Appointment Details
Fields
Currently Chosen
Appointment Slot Appointment Slot chosen for the work order.
Start Date The start date of the work order. Click on to view
the calendar.
Delay Window The days to be delayed for the work order.
![](asset-18a.png)
350 User Guide
Appointment Details
![](asset-18b.png)
Value-Added Services Station Screens 351
28
Value-Added Services Station Screens
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for all Value-Added
Services Station screens.
28.1 VAS Station
VAS activities are performed in their appropriate locations. For example,
monogramming is done in a different location from packaging. Each
individual location is a VAS Station.
This screen provides:
QThe ability to scan outbound container number or work order number
to identify work order.
QThe ability to confirm at an activity level in the appropriate station.
Table 28–1 VAS Station, Work Order
Actions
Save This action confirms that a certain activity specified in
the Activities panel is complete for the quantity
specified.
Clicking Save after the completion of the last activity
confirms the work order.
Reset This action clears all the entries in the Work Order
Panel.
![](asset-18c.png)
352 User Guide
VAS Station
Scan Enter or scan container number or work order number.
Container number represents an outbound container
for which the work order is created.
Serial number may also be scanned to determine the
work order, if the work order was created for a specific
serial number.
If the work order is being completed into a pallet or
case with LPN, the LPN to be associated with is
scanned here for an activity. For all subsequent
activities the LPN may be scanned here as well.
Location Select the location associated with the station.
Work Order # The work order number associated with the work
order.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the work order.
Service Item Group The item service group associated with the work
order.
Note: To be able to confirm a Work Order you should
have an Inventory Status Transition Rule setup for the
Zone that the VAS location belongs. This Inventory Status
Transition Rule should be defined from Blank to an
Inventory Status that is associated with an ONHAND
Supply Type.
Table 28–2 VAS Station, Work Order Item Data
Fields
Item ID The item on the work order displays, if applicable.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure on the work order displays, if
applicable.
Product Class The product class on the work order displays, if
applicable.
Service Item ID The service item identifier on the work order displays.
Table 28–1 VAS Station, Work Order
![](asset-18d.png)
VAS Station
Value-Added Services Station Screens 353
Segment Type The segment type for the item on the work order
displays, if applicable. Typical values are MTO - Made
To Order, MTC - Made To Customer.
Segment The segment number for the item on the work order
displays, if applicable. Typical values are the order
number or the customer number corresponding to the
Segment Type.
Table 28–3 VAS Station, Container/Serial #
Fields
Pallet ID The pallet LPN into which the work order quantity
being built displays.
Case ID The case LPN into which the work order quantity being
built displays.
Serial # The serial number displays.
Table 28–4 VAS Station, Activities
Displays the activities corresponding to the service item.
Table 28–5 VAS Station, Quantity
Fields
Qty Completed Quantity completed on the work order displays.
Qty Remaining Quantity remaining to be completed on the work order
displays.
Qty To Process Enter the quantity to process for the corresponding
activity.
Table 28–2 VAS Station, Work Order Item Data
![](asset-18e.png)
354 User Guide
Serial Entry
28.2 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen lets you capture the item’s serial number.
Start Time Stamp By default, the system’s date and time displays.
Enter the work order activity’s start date and time, if
applicable.
End Time Stamp By default, the system’s date and time displays.
Enter the work order activity’s end date and time, if
applicable.
Table 28–6 VAS Station, Activity Instructions
Fields
Instruction Text Instruction corresponding to the activity selected
displays.
Instruction Usage Instruction Usage corresponding to the activity
selected displays.
Table 28–7 VAS Station, Component Items
Fields
Item The component item for the work order, if applicable.
Description The component item description.
Quantity Number of units of the item in inventory UOM.
Table 28–5 VAS Station, Quantity
![](asset-18f.png)
Serial Entry
Value-Added Services Station Screens 355
Tag Entry
Table 28–8 Serial Entry
Action
Close This action closes the Serial Entry screen.
Fields
Count The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.
Item ID The item’s item ID is automatically populated by the
system.
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure is automatically populated
by the system.
Requested Serial # The serial number requested in the work order.
Serial # The serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #1 The component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #2 The component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #3 The component serial number of the item.
Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry screen vary
depending on the item scanned.
Note: In the Serial Entry screen when you click on Toggle
Serial Range button, you can enter the serial range.
Table 28–9 Serial Entry, Serial Range
Fields
Count The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.
Item ID The item’s identifier is automatically populated by the
system.
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure is automatically populated
by the system.
![](asset-190.png)
356 User Guide
Serial Entry
The Tag Entry screen lets you capture the tag numbers associated with
the tag tracked SKU. You can use the Tag Entry screen to track Lot#,
Batch#, and so on.
Requested Serial # The serial number requested in the work order.
From Serial # The start serial number of the item.
To Serial # The end serial number of the item.
Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.
Note: You can enter the tag attributes only when the
node that is confirming the work order is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operations performed
within the node. For more information about capturing the
tag attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Table 28–9 Serial Entry, Serial Range
Fields
![](asset-191.png)
Expiration Date Entry
Value-Added Services Station Screens 357
28.3 Expiration Date Entry
The Expiration Date Entry screen lets you capture the expiration date.
Table 28–10 Tag Entry
Action
Close This action closes the Tag Entry screen.
Fields
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure of the item.
Batch # Enter the batch number associated with the tag.
Revision # Enter the revision number.
Note: The fields displayed in the Tag Entry screen vary
depending on the item scanned.
Table 28–11 Expiration Date Entry
Action
Close This action closes the Expiration Date Entry screen.
Fields
Item ID The item ID of the item.
Expiration Date Enter the item’s expiration date.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the specific
expiration date you want to use.
Note: The fields displayed in the Expiration Date Entry
screen vary depending on the item scanned.
![](asset-192.png)
358 User Guide
Expiration Date Entry
![](asset-193.png)
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 359
29
Outbound Shipment Console Screens
The Outbound Shipment Console provides:
QExtensive search capabilities using granular level information such as
plan #, customer PO#.
QAbility to modify outbound shipment instruction.
QAbility to view discrepancies found in the outbound shipments.
29.1 Outbound Shipment Search By Status
You can search for shipments that fall under a particular status with the
help of this screen.
Table 29–1 Shipment Search By Status
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
Enterprises in the system.
Note: If you belong to a team, the system only
searches across the Enterprises allowed by that group.
For more information about teams, see the section
Defining Teams in the chapter Configuring User Security
of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number to search for, if applicable.
![](asset-194.png)
360 User Guide
Outbound Shipment Search By Status
The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by status.
Order # Enter the order number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Customer PO # Enter the number of the customer’s purchase order
number you are searching for, if applicable.
Plan # Enter the plan number the outbound shipment you are
searching for belongs to, if applicable.
Origin Node Enter the origin node you want to search for outbound
shipments under, if applicable.
Destination Node Enter the destination node you want to search for
outbound shipments under, if applicable.
Status Select the status range of the outbound shipments you
want to search for, if applicable.
Include Closed
Shipments Select this if you want to search for outbound
shipments that have been closed, as well as those that
are open, if applicable.
Pack And Hold
Shipment Select this if you want to search for outbound
shipments that are packed and kept on hold, if
applicable.
Held Shipments Check this box if you want to search for outbound
shipments that are held.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 29–1 Shipment Search By Status
Fields
![](asset-195.png)
Outbound Shipment Search By Date
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 361
29.2 Outbound Shipment Search By Date
You can search for shipments that fall within a particular date range with
the help of this screen.
The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by date.
Table 29–2 Shipment Search By Date
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
Enterprises in the system.
Note: If you belong to a team, the system only
searches across the Enterprises allowed by that group.
For more information about teams, see the section
Defining Teams in the chapter Configuring User
Security of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Carrier/Service Choose the Carrier/Service you want to search for
outbound shipments under, if applicable.
Status Choose the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.
Enter Shipment Dates Enter the requested ship date range, expected ship
date range, actual ship date range you want to search
for outbound shipments through, if applicable.
Enter Delivery Dates Enter the requested delivery date range, expected
delivery date range, actual delivery date range you
want to search for outbound shipments through, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-196.png)
362 User Guide
Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier
29.3 Outbound Shipment Search By Carrier
You can search for shipments that belong to a particular carrier with the
help of this screen.
Table 29–3 Shipment Search By Carrier
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
Enterprises in the system.
Note: If you belong to a team, the system only
searches across the Enterprises allowed by that group.
For more information about teams, see the section
Defining Teams in the chapter Configuring User
Security of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Shipment Mode Select the shipment mode, if applicable
Carrier/Service The Carrier/Service you want to search for outbound
shipments under, if applicable.
BOL # The bill of lading number of the outbound shipments
you are searching for, if applicable.
PRO # The PRO number of the outbound shipments you are
searching for, if applicable.
Trailer # The trailer number of the outbound shipments you are
looking for, if applicable.
Status Select the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.
Requires Routing Choose this option if the shipment requires dynamic
routing.
Max Records The maximum number of outbound shipments you
want returned from your search.
![](asset-197.png)
Outbound Shipment Search By Item
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 363
The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by carrier.
29.4 Outbound Shipment Search By Item
You can search for shipments based on the item information such as
product class, unit of measure, item ID and so on.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 29–4 Shipment Search By Item
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use.
Choose Across Enterprises to search across all
Enterprises in the system.
Note: If you belong to a team, the system only
searches across the Enterprises allowed by that group.
For more information about teams, see the section
Defining Teams in the chapter Configuring User
Security of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Item ID The item ID.
Product Class The item’s product class.
Unit of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer.
Seller The identifier for the Seller.
Status Select the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.
Include Closed
Shipments Select this if you want to search for outbound
shipments that have been closed, as well as those that
are open, if applicable.
![](asset-198.png)
364 User Guide
Outbound Shipment Search By Wave
The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by item.
29.5 Outbound Shipment Search By Wave
You can search for outbound shipment that fall within a particular wave
in this screen.
Has Hazardous Items Select this check box to search for outbound
shipments that contain hazardous items, if applicable.
Max Records The maximum number of outbound shipments you
want returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 29–5 Shipment Search By Wave
Fields
Document Type Select the document type to you want to search for, if
applicable.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you are searching.
Across Enterprise Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Wave # Enter the wave number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Load # Enter the load number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Carrier/Service Select the carrier/service you are searching for, if
applicable.
Buyer Enter the buyer associated with the shipment you
want to search for, if applicable.
Table 29–4 Shipment Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-199.png)
Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 365
The Shipment List screen displays as a result of outbound shipment
search by wave.
29.6 Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling
The warehouse supervisor can choose the pick strategy based on the
profile identifier density of the shipments. Usually, large shipments are
picked individually and small shipments are group together and picked
together, and sorted later.
You can search for shipments based on their profile identifiers.
Status Select the shipment status you are searching for, if
applicable.
Shipment In Wave Choose this option if you are searching for the
shipments in wave.
Shipment Not In Wave Choose this option if you are searching for the
shipments not in wave.
Ignore Cancelled
Shipment Lines Select this check box if you are considering only
Shipment Lines with quantity greater than zero. This
check box displays only when "Shipment Not In Wave"
is selected.
All Choose this option if you are searching for all the
shipments.
Has Shortage Choose this option
Enter Shipment Dates Choose to enter shipment date range you want to
search for outbound shipments, if applicable.
Enter Delivery Dates Choose to enter delivery date range you want to
search for outbound shipments, if applicable.
Max Record Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 29–5 Shipment Search By Wave
Fields
![](asset-19a.png)
366 User Guide
Outbound Shipment Search By Profiling
Table 29–6 Shipment By Profile Search
Fields Description
Enterprise Select the enterprise.
Profile ID Select the profile ID from the drop down list.
You can also click to select the Profile ID.
Consider Profiles Select this to view the shipment’s state There are
three options:
Already In Wave - Select this to view the shipments
that are in wave.
Not In Wave - Select this to view the shipments that
are not in wave.
All - Select this to view all the shipments.
Show Profiles Select to view the More number of Shipment First and
Less number of Shipment First. There are two options:
More number of Shipment First - Select this to view
high- density profile ID shipments first.
Less number of Shipment First - Select this to view
low-density profile ID shipments first.
Max Records Enter the number to display the maximum records.
Table 29–7 Shipment Profile Summary
Actions
View Details This takes you to the Shipment Details screen, where
you can view the shipment details.
Create Wave This takes you to the Create Wave screen, where you
can create a wave for the selected shipment group.
Fields
Profile ID The identifier of a shipment.
# of Shipments The number of shipments.
![](asset-19b.png)
Shipment List
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 367
29.7 Shipment List
The Shipment List window displays the results of a shipment search. You
can perform actions on a single shipment or multiple shipments by
selecting the check boxes of the shipments you want to perform an
action on and choosing the applicable action from the action bar.
# of Shipments in
Wave The number of waved shipments.
# of Shipments Not in
Wave The number of shipments that are not waved.
Table 29–8 Shipment List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Shipment Details screen
where you can view the shipment details.
Modify Shipment This action takes you to the Modify Shipment screen
where you can modify a shipment.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipment’s documents or labels.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancel Selected
Shipments screen where you can cancel an outbound
shipment.
Create Wave This action takes you to the Create Wave screen where
you can create wave for the selected shipment group.
Add To Delivery Plan This action takes you to the Select Delivery Plan
screen where you can add shipment to a delivery plan.
Delete Shipment This action allows you to delete the selected
shipments.
Remove From Wave This action allows you to remove the selected
shipments from a wave.
View Holds This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the outbound
shipment.
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number.
Table 29–7 Shipment Profile Summary
![](asset-19c.png)
368 User Guide
Shipment Details
29.8 Shipment Details
The Shipment Details screen provides shipment information for the
selected shipments. The actions that you can perform in the Shipment
Details screen are explained in the following tables.
Status The shipment status.
Buyer The identifier for the buyer.
Carrier/Service The Carrier and Carrier service use to ship the
outbound shipments.
Expected Ship Date The date the shipment is estimated to ship on.
Origin The shipment’s origin node.
Destination The shipment’s destination node.
Total Weight The total weight of the outbound shipment.
Total Volume The total volume of the outbound shipment.
Tag/Serial Requested Indicates if tag or serial details exist for the outbound
shipment.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays,
if the ship node is configured to capture tags in
all operations performed within the node, or if
the buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of
their inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing tag attributes, see the Selling
and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
Table 29–9 Shipment Details, Shipment
View Icons
Loads - This icon takes you to the Shipment Loads
screen where you can view any load carrying an
outbound shipment.
Containers - This icon takes you to the Shipment
Containers screen where you can view all packed
containers included in the outbound shipment.
Table 29–8 Shipment List
![](asset-19d.png)
Shipment Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 369
Instructions - This icon takes you to the Shipment
Instructions screen where you can add, modify or
delete the instructions for a shipment.
Shipment Audits - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Audits screen where you can view audit trail
for shipment modifications.
Shipment Dates - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Dates screen where you can view and
modify outbound shipment dates and delivery
dates.
Alerts - This icon takes you to the Alerts screen where
you can view the alerts for an outbound shipment.
Additional Attributes - This icon takes you to the
Additional Attributes screen where you can view
additional attributes for the selected shipment.
Activity Demand - This icon takes you to the
Shipment Activity Demand screen where you can view
the shipment’s activity demand.
Actions
Confirm Shipment This action allows you to manually confirm an
outbound shipment, if the shipment is not
automatically confirmed.
Pack Containers This action takes you to the Pack Containers screen
where you can pack any unpacked items into
containers for shipping.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipping documents or labels.
Cancel This action takes you to the Cancel Selected
Shipments screen where you can cancel an outbound
shipment.
Create Pick List This action enables you to create a picklist for the
selected shipments, if applicable.
Split Shipment This action takes you to the Split Shipment screen
where you can split an outbound shipment.
Create Alert This action takes you to the Create Alerts screen
where you can create an alert for the shipment.
Table 29–9 Shipment Details, Shipment
![](asset-19e.png)
370 User Guide
Shipment Details
Release From ESP Hold This action allows you to release a shipment from the
ESP Hold.
Remove From Wave This action allows you to remove the shipment from a
wave.
View Holds This action takes you to the View Holds screen where
you can view the holds applied to the outbound
shipment.
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # Enter the outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer Indicates the buyer associated with the shipment.
Click this link to go to the Organization Details to view
the buyer organization details.
Seller Indicates the seller associated with the shipment. Click
this link to go to the Organization Details to view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen to
view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen to view the shipment’s receiving node details.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits to view shipment status
audits. Click the icon to go to the View Holds
screen where you can view holds that are applied to
the outbound shipment.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Break Bulk Node This field displays only if the shipment belongs to a
break bulk load.
The break bulk node that is receiving the break bulk
load displays.
Table 29–9 Shipment Details, Shipment
![](asset-19f.png)
Shipment Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 371
Table 29–10 Shipment Details, Execution Attributes
Actions
View Tasks This action takes you to the Task List screen where
you can view a list of tasks associated with the
shipment. For more information about this, see
Section 41.12, "Task List".
Fields
Execution Status The status of wave corresponding to the shipment.
Pack And Hold Select the check box to pack and hold the outbound
shipment, if applicable.
Shipment Sort Lane The lane where containers are sorted by shipment,
when 'Sort by Shipment' option is chosen.
Carrier Sort Lane The lane where containers are sorted by carrier, when
'Sort by Carrier' option is chosen.
Wave # The wave number to which the outbound shipment
belongs to.
Has Shortage Indicates if the outbound shipment has inventory
shortage when included in the wave.
Packed Quantity Indicates the total quantity packed.
Table 29–11 Shipment Details, Ship To
View Icon
Address Details - Choose this icon to view or modify
the Ship To addresses. For more information about the
screen, see Address Details.
The name and address of the person or organization where the shipment is
shipped.
Table 29–12 Shipment Details, Totals
Fields
Weight Enter the total weight associated to the shipment in
the appropriate UOM.
![](asset-1a0.png)
372 User Guide
Shipment Details
Volume Enter the total volume associated to the shipment in
the appropriate UOM.
No. of Containers Displays the total number of containers available in
the shipment.
Table 29–13 Shipment Details, Carrier Info
Actions
Manage Special
Services This action takes you to the Special Services List
screen where you can select special services for the
carrier.
Fields
Delivery Method The delivery method for the shipment.
Ship Mode Select the shipment mode for the shipment. Values
include 'LTL', 'TL', 'PARCEL’
Carrier/Service Select the carrier service for the outbound shipment.
Trailer # Enter the outbound shipment’s trailer number.
BOL # Enter the outbound shipment’s bill of lading number.
Seal # Enter the outbound shipment’s seal number.
Pro # Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.
Routing Source Indicates if the routing was either pre-assigned, by the
system or through an external system.
Load # The outbound shipment’s load number.
Routing Error Code The system automatically displays the routing error
code, if applicable.
Requested Carrier
Service The requested carrier service for the outbound
shipment.
Table 29–12 Shipment Details, Totals
Fields
![](asset-1a1.png)
Shipment Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 373
Airway Bill # Indicates the airway bill number for tracking the
shipment. The airway bill is a document of carriage
which is issued by airlines to shippers of cargo. The
airway bill number:
QIs an evidence of a contract of carriage.
QProves receipt of goods for shipment.
QIs a freight bill.
Is Revised Indicates whether the Ship To address has changed
since the creation of the outbound shipment.
Return Carrier Service Select the carrier service for the return shipment from
the drop-down list.
Note: If you do not select the carrier service for the
return shipment from the drop-down list, the carrier
service used for an outbound shipment is used for the
return shipment.
Table 29–14 Shipment Details, Charges
View Icon
Charges - This icon takes you to the Charges screen
where you can enter or modify additional charges
imposed to the shipment and/or container.
Fields
Carrier Account # Indicates the carrier account # for the shipment.
Freight Terms Indicates the freight terms used for the shipment.
Valid values include COLLECT, PREPAID, TP-COLLECT
and TP-PREPAID.
COD Pay Method Select the COD payment type for the carrier.
Estimated Shipment
Charges The estimated charge for shipping the outbound
shipment.
Actual Shipment
Charges The actual charge for shipping the outbound shipment.
Freight Charge The charge applied by the carrier for shipping the
outbound shipment.
Table 29–13 Shipment Details, Carrier Info
![](asset-1a2.png)
374 User Guide
Shipment Details
Table 29–15 Shipment Details, Shipment Lines
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Shipment Line Details
screen where you can view the shipment line
attributes for the selected shipments.
Add Release This action takes you to the Add Release screen where
you can add an order release line to include in the
shipment.
Remove Line This action allows you remove the selected shipment
lines from the shipment.
Fields
Shipment Line # Enter the outbound shipment line number.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Line Details
screen to view the shipment line attributes for the a
shipment.
- This icon takes you to the Logical Kits screen
where you can view the item kit components for the
shipment line.
Order # Enter the order number being received on the
shipment, if applicable.
Line # Enter the order line number being received on the
shipment, if applicable.
Release # Enter the release number, if applicable
Item ID Enter the item ID for the SKU.
Description The item’s description
PC Select the product class for the item.
UOM Select the unit of measure for the item.
Requested Serial # The serial number requested in the order.
Editable if the order is not available on the system.
Mark For The mark for address associated with the item.
Quantity Number of requested units of the item included in the
shipment.
Over Ship Quantity Indicates quantity of an item over shipped.
![](asset-1a3.png)
Modify Shipment
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 375
29.9 Special Services List
You can select the applicable special services for a carrier.
29.10 Modify Shipment
You can modify a shipment in this screen.
Shortage Qty Indicates the shortage quantity on the order for the
item.
Original Qty Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.
Table 29–16 Special Services List
Fields
Special Services Check the applicable special services for the carrier
and click Save. Valid values are:
QDeclared Value Insurance
QShip Notification
QAdult Signature Required
QDelivery Confirmation
QSaturday Delivery
QSignature Required
QSaturday Pickup
QTagless COD
QReturn Shipping Label Required
Table 29–17 Modify Shipment
Fields
Carrier/Service Select the carrier and carrier service used to ship the
outbound shipment.
Expected Ship Date The date the shipment is estimated to ship on.
Table 29–15 Shipment Details, Shipment Lines
![](asset-1a4.png)
376 User Guide
Address Details
29.11 Address Details
You can modify an outbound shipment or container ship to address in
this screen.
Shipment Sort Lane The lane where containers are sorted by shipment,
when 'Sort by Shipment' option is chosen.
Carrier Sort Lane The lane where containers are sorted by carrier, when
'Sort by Carrier' option is chosen.
Table 29–18 Address Details
Fields
Address Line 1 The first address line.
Address Line 2 The second address line, if applicable.
Address Line 3 The third address line, if applicable.
Address Line 4 The fourth address line, if applicable.
Address Line 5 The fifth address line, if applicable.
Address Line 6 The sixth address line, if applicable.
City The city.
State The state.
Postal Code The postal code.
Country The country.
First Name The first name.
Middle Name The middle name.
Last Name The surname.
Company The company.
Day Time Phone The day time phone number.
Evening Phone The evening phone number.
Mobile Phone The mobile phone number.
Table 29–17 Modify Shipment
Fields
![](asset-1a5.png)
Charges
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 377
29.12 Charges
You can modify additional charges imposed to the shipment and/or
container in this screen.
Fax The fax number.
E-Mail The e-mail address.
Table 29–19 Charges, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer.
Seller The identifier for the Seller.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Receiving Node Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen to view the shipment’s receiving node details.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits to view shipment status
audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Table 29–18 Address Details
Fields
![](asset-1a6.png)
378 User Guide
Shipment Loads
29.13 Shipment Loads
You can view any load carrying an outbound shipment with the help of
this screen.
Table 29–20 Charges, Shipment Charges
Fields
Charge
Category/Charge
Name
The name of the additional outbound shipment charge.
Estimated Charge The estimated additional charge for the outbound
shipment.
Actual Charge The actual additional outbound shipment charge.
Table 29–21 Charges, Container Charges
Fields
Container # The container number.
Actual Freight Charge The Carrier’s freight charge for shipping the container.
Table 29–22 Loads, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer.
Seller The identifier for the Seller.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.
![](asset-1a7.png)
Shipment Containers
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 379
29.14 Shipment Containers
You can view the packed containers included in an outbound shipment in
this screen.
Table 29–23 Loads, Loads
Actions
View Details The actions lets you view the load details. For more
information, see the Sterling Logistics Management:
User Guide.
Fields
Load # The load number the outbound shipment belongs to.
Load Type The load type as per your business practices.
Carrier/Service The Carrier and Carrier service transporting the load.
Origin The load’s origin location.
Destination The load’s destination location.
Status The load status.
Table 29–24 Shipment Containers, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer.
Seller The identifier for the Seller.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.
![](asset-1a8.png)
380 User Guide
Shipment Instructions
29.15 Shipment Instructions
You can view special instructions pertaining to an outbound shipment,
such as handling instructions in this screen.
Table 29–25 Shipment Containers, Containers
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.
Delete Containers This action takes you to the Delete Selected
Containers where you can delete the selected
containers from the shipment.
Modify
Containerization This action takes you to the Modify Containerization
screen.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Net Weight The net weight.
Gross Weight The container’s total weight (including packaging).
Freight Charge The charge applied by the Carrier for shipping the
container.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Manifested Indicates whether the container is manifested.
Table 29–26 Shipment Instructions, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
![](asset-1a9.png)
Shipment Status Audits
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 381
29.16 Shipment Status Audits
You can view any status modifications performed against an outbound
shipment status in this screen.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer.
Seller The identifier for the Seller.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Receiving Node Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment. Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail
screen to view the shipment’s receiving node details.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits to view shipment status
audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Table 29–27 Shipment Instructions, Instructions
Actions
Delete Instruction This actions lets you delete the selected shipment
instructions.
Fields
Instruction Type The type of instruction, such as Gift, Pick, Pack, Ship,
or Other. This field can be modified.
Text The specific instructions to be performed on the order
line. This field can be modified.
Table 29–28 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Table 29–26 Shipment Instructions, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-1aa.png)
382 User Guide
Shipment Status Audits
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The outbound shipment’s destination.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Table 29–29 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment Status Audits
Fields
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Old Status The outbound shipment status before the status
modification.
Old Status Date The date the outbound shipment entered the old
status.
New Status The outbound shipment status after the status
modification.
New Status Date The date the status modification was made.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 29–28 Shipment Status Audits, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-1ab.png)
Shipment Dates
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 383
29.17 Shipment Dates
You can change dates pertaining to the outbound shipment, such as
shipment dates and delivery dates in this screen.
Table 29–30 Shipment Dates, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.
Table 29–31 Shipment Dates, System Dates
Fields
Requested Shipment
Date The requested shipment date.
Expected Shipment
Date The expected shipment date.
Actual Shipment Date The actual shipment date.
![](asset-1ac.png)
384 User Guide
Alerts
29.18 Alerts
You can view shipment alerts in this screen.
Requested Delivery
Date The requested delivery date.
Expected Delivery Date The expected delivery date.
Actual Delivery Date The actual delivery date.
Table 29–32 Shipment Dates, New Dates
Fields
Date Type The date type. For example, Shipment or Delivery.
Requested The Buyer requested date for the date type. This field
can be modified.
Expected The expected date for the date type. This field can be
modified.
Actual The actual date for the date type. This field can be
modified.
Table 29–33 Shipment Alerts, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Table 29–31 Shipment Dates, System Dates
Fields
![](asset-1ad.png)
Alerts
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 385
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains any
hazardous item.
Table 29–34 Shipment Alerts, Alert List
Actions
View Details This action allows you to view alert details. For more
information about alerts, see the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User
Guide.
Fields
Alert ID The alert ID.
Type The type of alert raised. For example, ON_FAILURE or
FAILED_AUTH. For more information about alerts, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.
Description A brief description of the alert.
Queue The queue the alert has been assigned to.
Priority The alert priority.
Owner The user who is handling the alert.
Raised On The date the alert was raised.
Table 29–33 Shipment Alerts, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-1ae.png)
386 User Guide
Additional Attributes
29.19 Additional Attributes
You can view shipment additional attributes in this screen.
Table 29–35 Additional Attributes, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
![](asset-1af.png)
Shipment Activity Demand
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 387
29.20 Shipment Activity Demand
You can view activity demand for the selected outbound shipments in this
screen.
Table 29–36 Additional Attributes, Additional Attributes
Fields
Overage Allowed Indicates whether the overage is allowed.
For outbound shipments, overage means shipping
more than was initially intended in a shipment.
For inbound shipments, overage means receiving more
than the expected quantity in a shipment.
Manually Entered Indicates whether the shipment was manually entered,
or generated automatically.
Order Available On
System Indicates whether the order that is associated with the
shipment is available in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation, or if it only exists in an external system.
Case Content
Verification Not
Required
Indicates whether the case content verification is
required for this shipment.
Pallet Content
Verification Not
Required
Indicates whether the pallet content verification is
required for this shipment.
Shipment Entry
Overridden Indicates whether the shipment entry is allowed.
Gift Indicates whether the shipment line is a gift.
Table 29–37 Shipment Activity Demand
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
![](asset-1b0.png)
388 User Guide
Shipment Activity Demand
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node Indicates the node that is receiving the outbound
shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Table 29–38 Shipment Activity Demand, Activity Demand List
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected activity
demands.
Shipment Line # The outbound shipment line number.
Location ID The item location in the node.
Activity Code The activity to be performed on items belonging to the
work order.
Pallet Id The pallet LPN that belong to the work order.
Case Id The case LPN that belong to the work order.
Item ID The items that belong to the work order.
Priority Indicates the priority of the demand.
Demand Quantity Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Satisfied Quantity The extent to which the demand is satisfied.
Demand Satisfied Indicates whether the demand is satisfied or not.
Table 29–37 Shipment Activity Demand
Fields
![](asset-1b1.png)
Shipment Audits
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 389
29.21 Shipment Audits
You can view any modifications performed against an outbound shipment
in this screen.
Table 29–39 Shipment Audits, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number with which the outbound
shipment is associated, if applicable. Click this link to
go to the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can
add an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Has Hazardous Item Indicates if the shipment has any hazardous item.
Table 29–40 Shipment Audits, Shipment Audits
Fields
Date The date and time on which the shipment was
modified.
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Context The modifications carried out against the shipment.
Modification The attribute that was modified for the shipment.
![](asset-1b2.png)
390 User Guide
Logical Kits
29.22 Logical Kits
You can view the kit components for a logical kit in this screen.
Old Value The attribute value before making the modifications.
New Value The attribute value after it was modified.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 29–41 Shipment, Shipment Line Audits
Fields
Date The date and time on which the shipment line was
modified.
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Context The modifications carried out against the shipment
line.
Line # The shipment line number that was modified.
Modification The attribute that was modified for the shipment line.
Old Value The attribute value before making the modifications.
New Value The attribute value after it was modified.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 29–42 Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line
Fields
Shipment Line # The shipment line number.
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Table 29–40 Shipment Audits, Shipment Audits
Fields
![](asset-1b3.png)
Logical Kits
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 391
Order # The order number to which the outbound shipment
line belongs.
Order Line # The order line number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.
Release # The order release number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.
Item ID The outbound shipment line item’s item ID.
Description The item’s description.
Is Hazardous Item Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.
Product Class The outbound shipment line item’s product class.
Unit of Measure The outbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.
Requested Serial # The serial number requested in the order.
Quantity Number of requested units of the item included in the
shipment.
Over Ship Quantity Indicates quantity of an item over shipped.
Original Qty Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.
Table 29–43 Shipment Line Details, Line Attributes
Fields
Segment Type Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment # Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
COO The country of origin.
FIFO # FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.
Net Weight The net weight.
Table 29–42 Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line
Fields
![](asset-1b4.png)
392 User Guide
Pack Containers
29.23 Pack Containers
(Applicable only for Distributed Order Management, Supply Collaboration,
and Reverse Logistics)
You can pack any unpacked items into containers for shipping in this
screen.
Net Weight UOM The net weight unit of measure.
Wave # The wave number.
Customer PO # The customer’s purchase order number.
Table 29–44 Shipment Line Details, Kit Components
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Shipment Line Details
screen where you can view the shipment line details.
Fields
Item ID The item ID for the SKU.
Description Description of the item.
PC Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Qty Per Kit Number of units of the item included in the kit.
Wave # The wave number associated with the shipment line.
Quantity Number of units of the item included in the shipment.
Table 29–45 Pack Container, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Table 29–43 Shipment Line Details, Line Attributes
Fields
![](asset-1b5.png)
Pack Containers
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 393
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The outbound shipment’s destination.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Table 29–46 Pack Container, Ship To
The address the shipment is shipped to.
Click to go to the Address Details screen where you can modify the ship to
address.
Table 29–47 Pack Container, Container Details
Fields
Container Type Select whether the container is a case or pallet.
Container SCM Enter the shipment container marking number of the
case or pallet.
Tracking # Enter the container’s tracking number used to track
the container’s status and location.
Table 29–45 Pack Container, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-1b6.png)
394 User Guide
Pack Containers
Declared Value Enter the declared value used to calculate customs
charges. This field is only applicable to international
shipments.
Gross Weight Enter the weight of the container plus its contents.
Net Weight Enter the net weight of the container.
Height Enter the height of the container.
Width Enter the width of the container.
Length Enter the length of the container.
Table 29–48 Pack Container, Unpacked Items
Fields
Tag/Serial This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled
or serial tracked. The column label that displays is the
name of the unique identifier you have defined (for
example, Lot #). If you have defined more than one
unique identifier, the label that displays is Tag #. To
view the details associated with the container line,
click the hypertext link.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Order # The order number associated with the unpacked items.
Line # The order line number to which the line item packaged
in the container belongs to.
Release # The order release number to which the unpacked line
item belongs.
Item ID The item ID of the unpacked line item.
PC The product class of the unpacked line item.
UOM The unit of measure of the unpacked line item.
Table 29–47 Pack Container, Container Details
Fields
![](asset-1b7.png)
Pack Containers
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 395
If the item is serial-controlled, an additional field is displayed to let you
enter the serial number.
Quantity The quantity associated with the unpacked items.
Pack Quantity Enter the item quantity you can pack in the container.
Table 29–49 Pack Container, Serial Range
Field Description
Serial # Enter the serial number of the item.
Click to add a new serial number.
Click to go to the serial range panel, where you
can enter the serial range of the items.
From Serial # Enter the start serial number.
To Serial # Enter the end serial number.
Click to add a new serial range.
Note: While packing whenever there is requested serial
defined in shipment lines of the outbound shipment, the
'Enter serial range' button is not displayed in the screen.
Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.
Table 29–48 Pack Container, Unpacked Items
Fields
![](asset-1b8.png)
396 User Guide
Cancel Selected Shipments
29.24 Packing a Container
You can pack any unpacked items into containers for shipping in this
screen. For more information on this, see Section 8.45, "Pack or
Unpack".
29.25 Print
You can print documents or labels and apply to an outbound shipment
with the help of this screen.
29.26 Cancel Selected Shipments
This screen allows you to cancel the selected outbound shipments.
Table 29–50 Print
Fields
Print Service Name Choose the applicable document or label you want to
print.
Printer Name Choose the printer to print the document or label
from.
No. of Copies Enter the total number of copies of the document or
label to print.
Table 29–51 Cancel Selected Shipments
Fields
Backorder cancelled
quantity Select if the quantity that was cancelled from a
shipment must be backordered.
Cancellation Reason
Code Select the applicable reason code for cancellation.
Reason Text Enter reason for cancellation of the outbound
shipment.
![](asset-1b9.png)
Split Shipment
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 397
29.27 Split Shipment
Use this screen to split an outbound shipment.
Table 29–52 Split Shipment, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with, if applicable. Click this link to go to
the Select Delivery Plan screen where you can add
an outbound shipment to a delivery plan.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the Buyer. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
buyer organization details.
Seller The identifier for the Seller. Click this link to go to the
Organization Details screen where you can view the
seller organization details.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Click this link to go to the Ship Node Detail screen
where you can view the node details for the shipment.
Destination The outbound shipment’s destination.
Status The outbound shipment status. Click this link to go to
the Shipment Status Audits screen where you can
view the shipment’s status audits.
Table 29–53 Split Shipment, Shipment Lines
Actions
Split Lines This action takes you to the Split Shipment Lines
where you can split the selected shipment line or
container lines.
Fields
Shipment Line # The line number on the shipment for the item.
Order # The order number to which the shipment line belongs
Line # The line number to which the shipment line belongs.
![](asset-1ba.png)
398 User Guide
Split Shipment
Release # The order release number to which the shipment line
belongs.
Item ID The item ID for the SKU.
Description The item’s description.
PC Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Mark For The net weight of item expected
Quantity Number of units of the item included in the shipment.
Split Qty Enter the number of units of the item to be split.
Table 29–54 Split Shipment, Shipment Containers
Actions
Split Containers This action takes you to the Split Shipment Lines
where you can split the selected shipment line or
container lines.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Tracking # The tracking number used to track a container during
the shipment process.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Net Weight The container’s net weight.
Gross Weight The container’s total weight (including packaging).
Freight Charge The charge applied by the Carrier for shipping the
container.
Table 29–53 Split Shipment, Shipment Lines
![](asset-1bb.png)
Ship Node Detail
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 399
29.28 Split Shipment Lines
Use this screen to split a shipment or container lines in this screen.
29.29 Create Alerts
You can create alerts for the selected outbound shipments in this screen.
For field value descriptions, see the Shipment Alerts, Shipment and
Shipment Alerts, Alert List tables.
29.30 Ship Node Detail
You can view the ship node details for an inbound shipment in this
screen.
Table 29–55 Split Shipment, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the outbound
shipment is automatically generated and populated by
the system.
Enter the outbound shipment number, if applicable.
Table 29–56 Ship Node Details, Ship Node
Fields
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment ships.
Description A brief description of the ship node.
Interface The interface the node uses to communicate with the
system.
Parent Organization The organization that owns the ship node.
Parent Organization
Name The name of the parent organization.
Identified By Parent As The node ID as it is seen by the parent organization.
GLN The GLN number.
Table 29–57 Ship Node Detail, Ship Node Address
The ship node’s address.
![](asset-1bc.png)
400 User Guide
Organization Details
29.31 Organization Details
You can view an organization’s details in this screen.
Table 29–58 Ship Node Detail, Contact Address
The contact address for the ship node.
Table 29–59 Organization Details
Field Description
Organization Information
Organization Code The code that identifies the organization.
Organization Name The name of the organization.
DUNS Number The unique nine-digit identification sequence which
provides unique identifiers of single business entities.
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation does not associate
any logic with the DUNS number.
Account Number With
Hub If the organization is not the Hub, the account number
that the organization has with the Hub.
Primary Enterprise The primary enterprise of the organization.
Primary URL Enter the URL of the organization’s Internet address, if
applicable.
Primary Contact Address
This inner panel displays the current primary contact address for this
organization. Click to view the Primary Contact Address Details. For more
information about the Primary Contact Address Details window, see Address
Details.
Corporate Address
This inner panel displays the current corporate address for this organization.
Click to view the Corporate Address Details. For more information about the
Corporate Address Details window, see Address Details.
![](asset-1bd.png)
Shipment Line Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 401
29.32 Select Delivery Plan
You can add an outbound shipment to a delivery plan in this screen.
29.33 Shipment Line Details
You can view an outbound shipment line details in this screen.
Table 29–60 Select Delivery Plan
Fields
Plan # Enter the plan number of the delivery plan you want to
add the outbound shipment to.
Plan Name Enter the name of the delivery plan you want to add
the outbound shipment to.
Plan Date Enter the date range through which the delivery plan
you are adding the outbound shipment to is valid.
Table 29–61 Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line
Fields
Shipment Line # The shipment line number.
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Enterprise The Enterprise associated with the shipment.
Order # The order number to which the outbound shipment
line belongs.
Order Line # The order line number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.
Release # The order release number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.
Item ID The outbound shipment line item’s item ID.
Description The item’s description.
Is Hazardous Item Displays ’Y’ if the item is a hazardous item, or 'N' if it
is not a hazardous item.
Product Class The outbound shipment line item’s product class.
Unit of Measure The outbound shipment line item’s unit of measure.
Requested Serial # The serial number requested in the order.
![](asset-1be.png)
402 User Guide
Shipment Line Details
Quantity Number of requested units of the item included in the
shipment.
Over Ship Quantity Indicates quantity of an item over shipped.
Original Qty Indicates the original quantity on the order for the
item.
Table 29–62 Shipment Line Details, Line Attributes
Fields
Segment Type The item’s segment type. A segment type indicates an
inventory category. Typical values are MTC - Made To
Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Segment The item’s segment number. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
COO The country of origin.
FIFO # The FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute
that helps understand the order in which stock arrived
at the node. This is used to send out items that
arrived first than the ones that arrived later.
Net Weight The net weight.
Net Weight UOM The net weight unit of measure.
Wave # The wave number.
Customer PO # The customer’s purchase order number.
Table 29–63 Shipment Line Details, Requested Tag
Fields
Tag Identifiers The requested tag identifiers for this shipment line.
Tag Attributes The requested tag attributes for this shipment line.
Table 29–61 Shipment Line Details, Shipment Line
Fields
![](asset-1bf.png)
Create Wave
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 403
29.34 Add Release
You can add an order release line to be included in an outbound shipment
in this screen. For more information, see the Sterling Distributed Order
Management: User Guide.
29.35 Create Wave
You can create wave for the selected shipment group in this screen.
Table 29–64 Shipment Line Details, Actual Tag
Actions
Delete This action deletes the specified tag quantity from the
shipment line.
Fields
The attributes shown here depend on the tag identifiers and attributes
configured.
Quantity Indicates the quantity on the order with this tag
criteria.
Table 29–65 Create Wave
Fields
Node Node associated with the wave.
Create New Wave With
Shipment Group Select the shipment group for the wave.
Add To Wave # Choose this option to add shipment to an existing
wave number.
You can also click to select a wave number.
Consider Select one of the following options:
All Eligible Shipments - Choose this to select all the
shipments.
First Shipments based on Expected Ship Date - Choose
this to select the first shipments based on the
expected ship date.
![](asset-1c0.png)
404 User Guide
Container Search By All Attributes
29.36 Containers
A container is the physical packaging of outbound shipment line items
included in a shipment. Cartons and pallets are examples of containers.
You can use the Outbound Shipment Console to search for individual
containers and view details such as container dimensions and line items
packed in the container.
29.37 Container Search By All Attributes
You can search for containers by all attributes with the help of this
screen.
Table 29–66 Container Search By All Attributes
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable
Order # Enter the order number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Shipment # Enter the outbound shipment number you are
searching for, if applicable.
Container # Enter the container number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Container Type Enter the type of containers you are searching for, if
applicable.
Tracking # Enter the tracking number you want to search for
containers under, if applicable.
Item ID Enter the item ID included in the containers you are
searching for, if applicable.
Container SCM Enter the container SCM number you are searching for,
if applicable.
Has Hazardous Items Select this check box to search for containers
containing hazardous items, if applicable.
Containers With
Logical Kits Only Select this if you want to search for containers only
with logical kits, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.
![](asset-1c1.png)
Container Search By Status
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 405
The Container List screen displays as a result of outbound container
search by all attributes.
29.38 Container Search By Status
You can search for containers that fall within a particular status with the
help of this screen.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 29–67 Container Search By Status
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type to search for, if
applicable.
Node Select the node for which you want to search.
Shipment # Enter the outbound shipment number you are
searching for, if applicable.
Container # Enter the container number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Container Type Enter the type of containers you are searching for, if
applicable.
Container Contains Select the container quantity you are searching for, if
applicable.
Status Select the status range of the container you want to
search for, if applicable.
Carrier/Service Select the carrier/service you are searching for, if
applicable.
Container Group Select the container group you are searching for, if
applicable.
Wave # Enter the wave number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Outermost Containers
Only Select check box to search for outermost containers
only, if applicable.
![](asset-1c2.png)
406 User Guide
Container List
The Container List screen displays as a result of outbound container
search by status.
29.39 Container List
The Container List window displays the results of a container search. You
can perform actions on a single container or multiple containers by
selecting the check boxes of the containers you want to perform an
action on and choosing the applicable action from the action bar.
Unmanifested
Containers Only Select check box to search for unmanifested
containers only, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of outbound shipments
you want returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 29–68 Container List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the container details.
Pack/Unpack This action takes you to the Pack or Unpack screen
where you can pack or unpack a container.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the container’s documents or labels.
Delete This action lets you delete an inbound container.
Void Tracking# This action lets you void a container’s tracking
number.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Table 29–67 Container Search By Status
Fields
![](asset-1c3.png)
Container Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 407
29.40 Container Details
The Container Details screen provides container information associated
with the shipment. The actions that can be performed in the Container
Details screen are explained in the following tables.
Shipment # The shipment number of the shipment the container
belongs to.
Status The container status.
Manifested Indicates whether the container is manifested.
Container Type Indicates whether it is a Pallet or Carton.
Tracking # The tracking number used to track a container during
the shipment process.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Ship Date The date the container ships on.
Table 29–69 Container Details, Container
View Icon
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Container
Status Audits where you can view the container’s
status audits.
Container Activity List - This icon takes you to the
Container Activity List where you can view activities
performed against an outbound container.
Actions
Pack/Unpack This action takes you to the Pack or Unpack screen
where you can pack or unpack a container.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print the shipping documents or labels.
Void Tracking # This action takes lets you void a container’s
tracking number.
Fields
Container # The container number.
Table 29–68 Container List
![](asset-1c4.png)
408 User Guide
Container Details
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
Container Group The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
Parent Container # The parent container #. This field displays only if the
container is a child container.
Parent Container Type
#The type of parent container used. For example,
Carton or Pallet. This field displays only if the
container is a child container.
Parent Container
Group # The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking number of the case
or pallet.
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Load # The load number associated with the container. This
field displays only if the container belongs to a load.
Click this link to go to the Load Details screen to view
the load details associated with the container. For
more information, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.
Table 29–70 Container Details, Execution Details
Fields
Container Location Indicates the location where the container is available.
Container Status Indicates the current status of the container.
Is Manifested Indicates whether the container is manifested.
Table 29–71 Container Details, Container Info
Fields
Carrier/Service The Carrier and Carrier service shipping the container.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.
Table 29–69 Container Details, Container
![](asset-1c5.png)
Container Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 409
Gross Weight The weight of the container plus its contents.
COD Pay Method The COD payment type.
Return Tracking # The return tracking number associated with the
container.
Net Weight The container’s content’s weight.
COD Amount The COD amount.
Size The size of the container.
Actual Weight The actual weight of the container.
Actual Freight Charge The actual freight charges for the carrier or service
Length The length of the container.
Billed Weight The billed weight.
Special Services
Surcharges The special services surcharges.
Width The width of the container.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the container contains hazardous items.
Declared Insurance
Value The value used to calculate customs charges. This field
is only applicable to international shipments.
Height The height of the container.
Table 29–71 Container Details, Container Info
Fields
![](asset-1c6.png)
410 User Guide
Container Details
Table 29–72 Container Details, Container Line Details
Fields
Tag Details This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled
or serial tracked. The column label that displays is the
name of the unique identifier you have defined (for
example, Lot #). If you have defined more than one
unique identifier, the label that displays is Tag #.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Click this link to go to the Serial Details screen to the
serial details for the container line.
Order # The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.
Line # The order line number of the line item packaged in the
container.
Release # The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.
Item ID The item ID of the line item packaged in the container.
PC The product class of the line item packaged in the
container.
UOM The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.
Description The item’s description.
Quantity The quantity of the line item to be packaged into the
container.
Packed Quantity The actual quantity of the line item packaged into the
container.
![](asset-1c7.png)
Container Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 411
Table 29–73 Container Details, Inner Pack Details
Fields
Tag Details Click the icon to view and hide tag information of
an inner pack.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Item ID The item’s item ID.
PC The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Description A brief description of the item.
Inner Pack Quantity The item quantity contained in each inner pack.
No Of Inner Packs The total number of inner packs packaged into the
container.
Table 29–74 Container Details, Child Containers
Fields
Container # The container number.
Status The container status.
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
![](asset-1c8.png)
412 User Guide
Container Status Audits
29.41 Serial Details
You can view an outbound container serial details in this screen.
29.42 Container Status Audits
You can view any status modifications performed against an outbound
container status in this screen.
Table 29–75 Serial Details, Serial Information
Fields
Node Node associated with the item.
Location Location associated with the item.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Serial # The serial number associated with the container items.
Table 29–76 Serial Details, Child Serials
Fields
Secondary Serial #1 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #2 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #3 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #4 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #5 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #6 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #7 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #8 Component serial number of the item.
Secondary Serial #9 Component serial number of the item.
Table 29–77 Container Status Audits, Container
Fields
Container # The outbound container number.
Container Type The outbound container type. Valid values are: Pallet
or Case.
![](asset-1c9.png)
Container Status Audits
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 413
Container Group The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
Parent Container # The parent container number.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Parent Container Type The type of parent container used. For example, Case
or Pallet.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Parent Container
Group The container group to which the container belongs.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking number of the case
or pallet.
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Details screen and
view the outbound shipment details.
Table 29–78 Container Status Audits, Container Status Audits
Fields
Modified By The user who performed the modification.
Old Status The outbound shipment status before the status
modification.
Old Status Date The date the outbound shipment entered the old
status.
New Status The outbound shipment status after the status
modification.
New Status Date The date the status modification was made.
Reason Code The reason for the modification.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the modification was
made.
Table 29–77 Container Status Audits, Container
Fields
![](asset-1ca.png)
414 User Guide
Container Activity List
29.43 Container Activity List
You can view details about the outbound container activities in this
screen.
Table 29–79 Container Activity List, Container
Fields
Container # The outbound container number.
Container Type The outbound container type. Valid values are: Pallet
or Case.
Container Group The group to which the container belongs. Valid values
are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
Parent Container # The parent container number.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Parent Container Type The type of parent container used. For example, Case
or Pallet.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Parent Container
Group The group to which the parent container belongs. Valid
values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
This field displays only if the container is a child
container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking number of the case
or pallet.
Shipment # The outbound shipment number identifying the
shipment to which this container belongs.
Click this link to go to the Shipment Details screen and
view the details about this outbound shipment.
Table 29–80 Container Activity List, Container Activities
Fields
Date The date and time when the activity was performed for
this container.
Recorded By The user who performed the activity.
Activity Code Identifies the activity that was performed.
![](asset-1cb.png)
Modify Containerization
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 415
29.44 Pack or Unpack
You can pack or unpack a container in this screen. For more information
about packing a container, see Section 8.45, "Pack or Unpack".
29.45 Delete Selected Containers
You can delete selected container from the shipment in this screen.
29.46 Modify Containerization
You can modify the containerized quantity in this screen.
Location ID Indicates the location where the activity was
performed in the node.
Node Indicates the node where the activity was performed.
Address Indicates the address where the activity was
performed.
Is An Exception Indicates if the activity recorded is an exception to
typically performed activities.
Notes Any additional information about the activity
execution.
Table 29–81 Delete Selected Containers, Delete
Fields
Remove quantity from
shipment line Select the check box to remove the quantity from
shipment line.
Backorder removed
quantity Select the check box to remove backorder quantity.
Table 29–82 Modify Containerization, Container
View Icon
Status Audits - This icon takes you to the Container
Status Audits screen where you can view a list of
status audits that you modified for an outbound
container.
Table 29–80 Container Activity List, Container Activities
Fields
![](asset-1cc.png)
416 User Guide
Modify Containerization
Fields
Container # The container number.
Shipment # The outbound shipment the container belongs to.
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
Ship Date The date by which the container must ship.
Container Group The container group to which the container belongs to.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT, LOAD, or INVENTORY.
Manifested Indicates whether the container is manifested.
Remove quantity from
shipment line Select check box to remove quantity from the
shipment line.
Ship To The address the container is shipped to.
Table 29–83 Modify Containerization, Ship To
The address the shipment is shipped to.
Click to go to the Address Details screen where you can modify the ship to
address.
Table 29–84 Modify Containerization, Container Info
Fields
Carrier/Service The Carrier and Carrier service used to ship the
container.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
container’s status and location.
Pallet/Carton SCM The shipment container marking number of the pallet
or carton.
Declared Value The value used to calculate customs charges. This field
is only applicable to international shipments as it is
insured.
Gross Weight The gross weight of the container.
Actual Weight The actual weight of the container.
Table 29–82 Modify Containerization, Container
![](asset-1cd.png)
Modify Containerization
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 417
Size The size of the container.
Length The length of the container.
Width The width of the container.
Height The height of the container.
Net Weight The net weight of the container.
Table 29–85 Modify Containerization, Container Line Details
Fields
Tag Details This column displays only if the item is tag-controlled
or serial tracked. The column label that displays is the
name of the unique identifier you have defined (for
example, Lot #). If you have defined more than one
unique identifier, the label that displays is Tag #. To
view the details associated with the container line,
click the hypertext link.
The tag details for a tag-controlled item displays, if the
ship node is configured to capture tags in all
operations performed within the node, or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of their inbound
compliance. For more information about capturing tag
attributes, see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Order # The order number to which the line item packaged in
the container belongs.
Line # The container line number and the order line number
of the line item packaged in the container.
Release # The order release number to which the line item
packaged in the container belongs.
Item ID The item ID of the line item packaged in the container.
PC The product class of the line item packaged in the
container.
UOM The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.
Description Description of the item.
Table 29–84 Modify Containerization, Container Info
Fields
![](asset-1ce.png)
418 User Guide
Resolve Short Picked Containers
29.47 Resolve Short Picked Containers
Short picked containers can be resolved manually by requesting the
system to pack additional inventory into the containers or modifying the
Ship By Date The date by which the container line must be shipped.
Containerized Quantity Enter or modify the containerized quantity. If
containers are short picked, you can resolve
short pick by modifying the containerized
quantity. For more information, see the Resolve
Short Picked Containers screen.
Packed Quantity The quantity of the line item packaged in the
container.
Table 29–86 Modify Containerization, Execution Details
Fields
Location The outbound container present in location.
Status The outbound container execution status.
Table 29–87 Modify Containerization, Child Containers
Fields
Container # The container number.
Status The container status.
Container Type The type of container used. For example, Carton or
Pallet.
Tracking # The container’s tracking number used to track the
status and location of the container.
Container SCM The shipment container marking.
Note: The Modify Container action is only available when
that container belongs to a WMS Node.
Table 29–85 Modify Containerization, Container Line Details
Fields
![](asset-1cf.png)
Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 419
containerization quantity on the container and backordering due to
inadequate inventory.
1. Click Short Picked link in the Container Details screen.
2. Modify the Containerized Quantity.
3. Click Save. The status changes to Short Pick Resolved.
29.48 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Use this screen to search for dock appointments by all attributes.
Table 29–88 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node The node associated with the docks displays.
Start Date The start date is defaulted to the current date.
Enter the start date of the appointment for which you
are searching, if applicable.
Choose the calendar lookup to change the date.
Number of Days To
Display Enter the maximum number of days to be displayed
on the dock schedule calendar as a result of your
search, if applicable. By default, the value displayed is
5.
Location Enter the dock location, if applicable.
Choose the lookup option to search for dock locations.
Inbound Delivery Check this checkbox to search for inbound docks, if
applicable.
Outbound Pickup Check this checkbox to search for outbound docks, if
applicable.
Appointment # Enter the appointment number for which you are
searching, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.
Order # Enter the order number for which you are searching
for the dock appointment, if applicable.
Load # Enter the load number for which you are searching for
the dock appointment, if applicable.
![](asset-1d0.png)
420 User Guide
Dock Schedule Details
The Dock Schedule Details screen displays as a result of your dock
appointment search by all attributes.
29.49 Dock Schedule Details
This screen provides visibility to the dock appointment calendar, and
displays inbound, outbound, and both inbound and outbound docks with
their:
QAvailable time slots for creating new appointments.
QUnavailable time slots due to calendar constraints.
QUnavailable time slots due to appointments already taken.
Carrier Enter the carrier for which you are searching for the
dock appointment, if applicable.
BOL # Enter the bill of lading number for which you are
searching for the dock appointment, if applicable.
Table 29–89 Dock Schedule Details, Dock Availability
Actions
Manage Dock Group This action button takes you to the Dock Group Details
screen.
Zoom In Click this action button to view more definitive details
of the appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom In
are supported.
Zoom Out Click this action button to view a larger area of the
appointment calendar. Two levels of Zoom Out are
supported.
Displays the dock locations for nodes that are of the dock type INBOUND,
OUTBOUND, and BOTH.
Table 29–88 Dock Appointment Search By All Attributes
Fields
![](asset-1d1.png)
Dock Appointment
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 421
29.50 Dock Appointment
You can create new appointments or modify existing appointments with
the help of this screen.
Table 29–90 Dock Schedule Details, Legend
Indicates an appointment for the searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates appointments that do not match the
searched criteria.
Click a slot to modify an existing appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates free slots for which new appointments can
be taken.
Click a slot to create a new dock appointment. The
Dock Appointment screen displays.
Indicates the unavailable slots due to the calendar
constraints.
Table 29–91 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
Actions
Cancel Click this action button to cancel an appointment.
Fields
Appointment # The appointment number associated with the dock
displays, if applicable.
The appointment number displays only for the existing
appointments.
Location The dock location for which you chose to take an
appointment displays here.
Appointment Type By default, the Outbound Pickup appointment type is
selected for outbound dock locations, and Inbound
Delivery for inbound and both inbound and outbound
dock locations.
![](asset-1d2.png)
422 User Guide
Dock Appointment
Start Date This start date is defaulted with the date of the
selected slot.
Enter the start date on which you want to take an
appointment or choose the calendar lookup to change
the date.
Start Time This start time is defaulted with the time of the
selected slot.
Enter the start time of the appointment or choose the
time lookup to change the time.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number you want to associate with
the dock appointment, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to search for shipments. The
shipment’s weight, volume, number of cases and
number of pallets automatically displays.
Load # Enter the load number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Choose the lookup icon to search for loads. The
number of cases and number of pallets associated with
the load automatically displays.
Order # Enter the order number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
BOL # Enter the bill of lading number you want to associate
with the dock appointment, if applicable.
PRO # Enter the PRO number you want to associate with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Carrier Select the carrier for which you want to take an
appointment, if applicable.
Notes Enter any additional information associated with the
dock appointment, if applicable.
Weight Enter the weight of the shipment, if applicable.
Volume Enter the volume of the shipment, if applicable.
No Of Cases Enter the number of cases contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.
No Of Pallets Enter the number of pallets contained in the shipment
or load, if applicable.
Table 29–91 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
![](asset-1d3.png)
Dock Group Details
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 423
Click Save to save the dock appointment.
29.51 Dock Group Details
You can enter constraints on the maximum number of appointments that
can be taken for the group of docks associated with a node.
Estimate End Time Click this button to calculate and display the estimated
end time in the End Time field. The estimated end
time is calculated based on SAM definition for the
productivity type, LOADING/UNLOADING
End Time To specify a pre-determined end time, enter the end
time.
Choose the time lookup to change the time.
Table 29–92 Dock Group Details, Dock Group
Fields
Node The node associated with the docks displays.
Table 29–93 Dock Group Details, Dock Group Max No. of Appointments
Action
Remove Click this action button to remove the selected
appointment constraints.
Fields
Start Time Indicates the start time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.
Click to create an appointment constraint.
End Time Indicates the end time of the time slot for which the
maximum number of appointment constraint needs to
be created.
Table 29–91 Dock Appointment, Appointment Details
![](asset-1d4.png)
424 User Guide
View Holds
Click Save to save the maximum number of dock group appointment
constraints.
29.52 View Holds
You can view holds that are applied to the selected outbound shipments
in this screen.
Sunday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Monday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Tuesday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Wednesday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Thursday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Friday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window across dock
locations.
Saturday Enter the maximum number of appointments you can
take on this day in the time window.
Table 29–94 View Holds, Shipment
Fields
Shipment # The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipment reference number.
Plan # The delivery plan number the outbound shipment is
associated with.
Table 29–93 Dock Group Details, Dock Group Max No. of Appointments
![](asset-1d5.png)
View Holds
Outbound Shipment Console Screens 425
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the outbound shipment.
Buyer The identifier for the buyer.
Seller The identifier for the seller.
Ship Node The node from where the outbound shipment is
shipped.
Receiving Node The node that is receiving the outbound shipment.
Status The outbound shipment status.
Release # The shipment release number to which the outbound
shipment line belongs.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the outbound shipment contains hazardous
items.
Merge Node If you have shipment lines coming from multiple nodes
and want to consolidate them into one load, enter a
node at which you want all dependent shipment lines
to be consolidated with the parent shipment line.
Note: Merge Node is only relevant in a Deliver
Together dependency.
Table 29–95 View Holds, Shipment Holds
Actions
Add Holds This action takes you to the Add Holds screen where
you can add holds to the selected outbound shipment.
Fields
Hold Description A brief description of the hold.
Choose the icon to View History of the shipments
that are held.
Hold Status The current status of the hold.
Hold Comment Any additional comments for the hold.
Table 29–94 View Holds, Shipment
Fields
![](asset-1d6.png)
426 User Guide
View History
29.53 Add Holds
You can add holds to the outbound shipment on this screen.
29.54 View History
Whenever the status of a shipment hold changes, the information
regarding the status change is recorded in Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation. In this screen, you can view the history of a shipment hold.
Action Select the action that you want to apply to the hold
from the drop-down list.
Reason Enter the reason for the hold.
Table 29–96 View Holds, Resolved Holds
Fields
Hold Description A brief description of the hold.
Reason The reason for changing this hold to resolved status.
Table 29–97 Add Holds, Shipment Holds
Fields
Hold Type Select the hold type associated with the outbound
shipment from the drop-down list.
Reason Enter the reason for the hold.
Table 29–98 View History, Primary Information
Fields
Shipment# The outbound shipment number.
Shipper’s Ref. # The outbound shipper’s reference number.
Plan # The outbound shipment’s plan number
Table 29–95 View Holds, Shipment Holds
Actions
![](asset-1d7.png)
Create Outbound Shipment Screens 427
30
Create Outbound Shipment Screens
Shipments (ASN) are transmitted to warehouses through EDI downloads,
fax, or e-mail, and also when a trailer arrives with no prior notice.
The shipment entry console enables you to manually create shipments
from fax, e-mail or telephone conversations, and also for those trailers
that arrive with no prior notice.
30.1 Shipment Entry
You can create outbound shipments for a sales or transfer order in this
screen.
Table 30–1 Shipment Entry
Action
Supervisory Overrides This action takes you to the Shipment Supervisory
Overrides screen where you can specify whether the
shipment can have overages.
Fields
Document Type Select the document type associated with the
shipment you are creating.
Valid values are 'Sales Order' or 'Transfer Order'. For
an outbound shipment, valid value is 'Sales Order'
Ship Node The shipping node associated with the shipment. This
represents the seller's ship node.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the shipment you
are creating for, if applicable.
![](asset-1d8.png)
428 User Guide
Shipment Supervisory Overrides
After entering the relevant information in the fields a shipment is created
and you are taken to the Shipment Details screen.
30.2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides
This screen allows you to create overages for the shipment being
created.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number for the shipment you are
creating, if applicable. A unique number is
automatically generated by the system, if number is
not specified.
Receiving Node Select node where the receipt is being performed.
Buyer Enter the buyer associated with the shipment you
want to create, if applicable.
Seller Enter the seller associated with the shipment you want
to create.
Order # Enter the order number, if there is only order on the
shipment.
Release# Enter the release number of the order against which
the shipment is being created, if applicable.
Pro# Enter the PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment you are creating, if applicable.
Carrier/Service Select the carrier service availed for transporting the
shipment, if applicable.
BOL# Enter the bill of lading number of the shipment you
are creating, if applicable.
Trailer# Enter the trailer number of the shipment you are
creating, if applicable.
Table 30–2 Shipment Supervisory Overrides
Field Description
Allow Overage Select to allow overage for the outbound shipment.
Table 30–1 Shipment Entry
![](asset-1d9.png)
Wave Console Screens 429
31
Wave Console Screens
During the normal course of the day, the system automatically generates
waves based on parameters defined by the system administrator. The
waves are generated based on shipment groups that have been given a
sequence and a defined set of selector criteria. When waves are created,
the system analyzes the shipments in need of picking and evaluates
them against a shipment group’s selector criteria based on the group’s
sequence. If the shipment does not match up with the group’s selector
criteria, the shipment is then evaluated by the next shipment group in
the sequence, until a match has been found. The shipment is then added
to that shipment group. Once all shipments have been matched up with
the appropriate shipment groups, waves are created for those groups.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Wave Console.
31.1 Wave Search
The Wave Search screen lets you enter the criteria to search for waves.
Table 31–1 Wave Search
Fields Description
Node Select the node you want to search for waves in.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number of the shipment that
belongs to the wave you are searching for, if
applicable.
Wave # Enter the wave number of the wave you are searching
for, if applicable.
Wave Status Select the status of the waves you are searching for.
![](asset-1da.png)
430 User Guide
Wave List
Click Search to view the search results in the Wave List screen.
31.2 Wave List
The Wave List screen displays the result of a wave search. This screen
lets you perform actions on a single wave or on multiple waves by
selecting the check boxes of the relevant waves and choosing the
applicable action from the action bar.
Shipment Group Enter the shipment group that the waves you are
searching belong to.
Release No Earlier
Than Enter the Release No Earlier Than date range that you
want to search for waves in. Only waves with a
Release No Earlier Than date that falls within the
range you specify considered.
Release No Later Than Enter the Release No Later Than date range that you
want to search for waves in. Only waves with a
Release No Later Than date that falls within the range
you specify considered.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of waves you want
returned from your search.
Table 31–2 Wave List
Actions
Accept This action button moves the wave to the accepted
status.
Release This action button takes you to the Release Wave
screen.
Cancel This action button takes you to the Cancel Wave
screen.
View Summary This action button takes you to the Wave Summary
screen.
Print Wave This action button takes you to the Print Wave screen.
View Alerts This action button takes you to the Alert List screen.
Table 31–1 Wave Search
Fields Description
![](asset-1db.png)
Release Wave
Wave Console Screens 431
31.3 Release Wave
The Release Wave screen lets you request the release of a wave for
picking.
Fields
Wave # The wave number.
Shipment Group The shipment group that the wave belongs to.
Status The status of the wave is in.
Sequence # The sequence number associated with the wave.
Release No Earlier
Than The wave is not released for picking before this date.
Release No Later Than The wave is not release for picking after this date.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
The shipment is getting excluded from the wave, and
therefore cannot ship the shipment.
Cause
The Shipment Selector Details are defined incorrectly, or
shipments are not serialized, or the pick strategy to pick
inventory is not defined for a wave.
Resolution
Make sure that the Shipment Selector Details are defined
correctly, shipments are serialized, and the pick strategy
to pick inventory is defined for a wave.
For more information about Shipment Selector Details
screen, see the section Defining Shipment Selectors in the
chapter Configuring Picking chapter in the Sterling
Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.
Table 31–2 Wave List
![](asset-1dc.png)
432 User Guide
Wave Summary
31.4 Cancel Wave
31.5 Wave Summary
The Wave Summary screen lets you view the details associated with a
wave.
Table 31–3 Release Wave
Field Description
Override Concurrent
Wave Constraint Select Override Concurrent Wave Constraint to
override any existing wave constraints that may keep
the wave from being released, if applicable.
Table 31–4 Cancel Wave
Field Description
Cancellation Reason
Code The code of the reason for cancelling the wave.
Reason Text The description of the reason for cancelling the wave
Table 31–5 Wave Summary, Wave
Actions
View Task Summary This action button takes you to the Task Summary
screen.
Accept This action button moves the wave to the accepted
status.
Release This action button takes you to the Release Wave
screen.
Cancel This action button takes you to the Cancel Wave
screen.
Fields
Wave # The wave number.
Shipment Group The shipment group to which the wave belongs.
Status The current status of the wave.
Priority The wave’s priority.
![](asset-1dd.png)
Wave Summary
Wave Console Screens 433
Release No Earlier
Than The wave is not released for picking before this date.
Release No Later Than The wave is not release for picking after this date.
Table 31–6 Wave Summary, Overall Summary
Fields Description
# Shipments The number of shipments included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Shipment Summary screen.
# Shipment Lines The number of shipment lines included in the wave.
# Batches The number of batches included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Batch Summary screen.
# Work Orders The number of work orders included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Work Order Summary
screen.
# SKUs The number of individual SKUs included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Item Task Summary screen.
# Shipment Profiles The number of shipment profiles included in the wave.
Click this link to view the Shipment Profile Summary
screen.
Volume The total volume of the shipments in the wave.
Table 31–5 Wave Summary, Wave
Case Type The types of cases included in the wave.
Quantity The quantity that the case type holds.
Estimated Cases The estimated number of cases for the case type
needed to fulfill the wave.
Click this link to view the Shipping Containers
Summary screen.
![](asset-1de.png)
434 User Guide
Shipment Summary
31.6 Shipment Profile Summary
The Shipment Profile Summary screen enables you to view a wave’s
shipment profile summary based on the profile identifier.
31.7 Shipment Summary
The Shipment Summary screen enables you to view a wave’s shipment
summary.
Table 31–7 Wave Summary, Task Types
Fields Description
Task Type The task type name performed during the wave.
Description A brief description of the task type.
Open quantity The task quantity that are currently open for a task
type.
Held quantity The task quantity that are held.
Suggested quantity The task suggested quantity that have been assigned
but not accepted.
In Progress quantity The task quantity that are currently in progress.
Complete quantity The task quantity that have been completed.
Cancelled quantity The task quantity that have been cancelled.
Total quantity The total task quantity that were generated for the
wave for a task type.
Table 31–8 Shipment Profile Summary
Fields Description
Profile Id The profile identifier for a shipment.
Status The shipment status.
# Shipments in Wave #
Wave Number The number of shipments included in the wave for
a profile identifier.
Click this link to view the shipments list.
Total The total number of shipments in a wave.
![](asset-1df.png)
Work Order Summary
Wave Console Screens 435
31.8 Batch Summary
The Batch Summary screen enables you to view the summary of batches
created for a wave.
31.9 Work Order Summary
You view the work order summary for a wave.
Table 31–9 Shipment Summary
Fields Description
Carrier The carrier code for the shipment displays.
Status The shipment status.
# Shipments in Wave # 1 The number of shipments included in the wave.
Click this link to view the shipment list.
Total The total number of shipments.
Table 31–10 Batch Summary, Batch List
Actions
View Details This action button takes you to the Batch Detail
screen.
Fields
Batch # The number associated with a task batch.
Task Type The task type associated with a task batch.
Batch Status The status associated with a task batch.
Equipment Type The equipment type associated with a task batch.
No. of Items The number of items included in a task batch.
No. of Containers The number of containers included in a task batch.
First Pick Location The first pick location for a task batch.
Last Pick Location The last pick location for a task batch.
No. Of Locations The number of pick locations in a task batch.
Total Quantity The total quantity associated with a task batch.
![](asset-1e0.png)
436 User Guide
Shipping Containers Summary
31.10 Item Task Summary
You view a summary of tasks created for an item and each task type
from a location for the wave.
31.11 Shipping Containers Summary
The Shipping Containers Summary screen lets you view a summary of
the wave’s shipping containers.
Table 31–11 Work Order Summary
Field
Activity The activity performed on items belonging to the work
order.
Pending Work Orders Total work orders still pending for the activity.
Completed Work
Orders Total work orders completed for the activity.
Table 31–12 Item Task Summary, Item Task List
Fields Description
Item Id The identifier of the item associated with a task type.
Click this link to view the Task List screen.
Item Description A brief description of the item.
Task Type The name of the task type.
Source Location The origin location of the task.
Open quantity The task quantity that is currently open for an item for
a specific task type in the source location.
Held quantity The task quantity that is held for an item for a specific
task type in the source location.
Completed quantity The task quantity that is completed for an item for a
specific task type in the source location.
Total Quantity The total task quantity for an item for a specific task
type in the source location.
![](asset-1e1.png)
Print Wave
Wave Console Screens 437
31.12 Prioritize Wave
The Prioritize Wave screen lets you prioritize a wave.
31.13 Print Wave
The Print Wave screen lets you print wave information. This can be used
by the pickers.
Table 31–13 Shipping Containers Summary
Fields Description
Status The shipment status.
Wave # The wave number associated with the shipment.
# Cases The number of cases in the shipment.
# Pallets The number of pallets in the shipment.
Click this link to view the container list.
Table 31–14 Prioritize Wave
Fields Description
Priority The priority to be applied to the wave.
Release No Earlier
Than The time and date before which the wave cannot
be released.
Release No Later The time and date after which the wave cannot
be released.
Table 31–15 Print Wave
Fields Description
Print Service Name Choose the print service name you want to print.
Printer Name Select the printer name you want to print from.
No. of Copies Enter the total number of copies of waves you want to
print.
![](asset-1e2.png)
438 User Guide
Alert List
31.14 Alert List
The Alert List screen lets you view a wave’s alerts.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
After releasing a wave, you cannot print batch sheets and
shipping labels.
Cause
The printer may not be connected, printer power or green
light may not be on, and/or printer that you want to print
to is not selected.
Resolution
Make sure your printer is connected, printer power or
green light is on, and/or select the correct printer that you
want to use.
Table 31–16 Alert List, Wave
Fields Description
Wave # The wave number.
Description A brief description of the wave.
Shipment Group The shipment group that the wave belongs to.
Status The status the wave is in.
Priority The wave’s priority.
Release No Earlier
Than The wave is not released for picking before this date.
Release No Later Than The wave is not released for picking after this date.
![](asset-1e3.png)
Wave Audit
Wave Console Screens 439
31.15 Wave Audit
The Wave Audits screen allows you to audit the details of a wave.
Table 31–17 Alert List, Alert List
Action
View Details This action button displays the details of the selected
alerts. For more information about alert details, see
the "Viewing Alert Details" chapter of the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform User
Guide.
Fields
Alert ID The alert ID.
Choose this link to view alert details. For more
information about alert details, see the "Viewing Alert
Details" of the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform User Guide.
Type The type of alert raised. For example, ON_FAILURE or
FAILED_AUTH. For more information about alerts, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.
Description A brief description of the alert.
Queue The queue the alert has been assigned to.
Priority The alert priority.
Status Indicates if the alert is open or closed.
Owner The user who is handling the alert.
Raised On The date the alert was raised.
Table 31–18 Wave Audits Screen
Action
Click this action to go to the Wave Audit screen, where
you can view the wave audits.
Fields
Wave
![](asset-1e4.png)
440 User Guide
Wave Audit
Wave # The wave number.
Shipment Group The shipment group to which the wave belongs.
Status The current status of the wave.
Ship Node The node from which the wave was created.
Wave Audit
Date The date on which the wave was modified.
Modified By The name of the user who modified the wave.
Modification The old and new statuses of the wave.
Reason Code The reason code associated with the wave
modification.
Reason Text Additional information about why the wave was
modified.
No of Shipments in
Wave The total number of shipments included in the wave.
Exception Audits
Exception Audit Details Click this hyperlink to view the exception audit details.
Modification Indicates the reasons for exception.
There are two types of modification, Removed from
Wave and Split in Shipment.
Exception Audits Detail
Date The date on which the exception occurred.
Modified By The name of the user who modified the wave.
Reason Code The reason code associated with the wave
modification.
Reason Text Additional information about why the wave was
modified.
Table 31–18 Wave Audits Screen
![](asset-1e5.png)
Wave Audit
Wave Console Screens 441
Old Shipment No The old shipment number of the shipment that is split
from the shipment.
This field is populated if the Modification Type is Split
in Shipment.
New Shipment No The new shipment number of the shipment that is
created after splitting the shipment.
This field is populated if the Modification Type is Split
in Shipment.
Table 31–18 Wave Audits Screen
![](asset-1e6.png)
442 User Guide
Wave Audit
![](asset-1e7.png)
Create Wave Screens 443
32
Create Wave Screens
This chapter provides field value descriptions for the Create Wave screen.
32.1 Create Wave
You can request for a wave creation for a shipment group in this screen.
Click Create Wave to request for a wave creation.
Table 32–1 Create Wave, Create Wave
Field Description
Shipment Group Select the shipment group for which you want to
request for a wave creation.
![](asset-1e8.png)
444 User Guide
Create Wave
![](asset-1e9.png)
Pack Station Screens 445
33
Pack Station Screens
The Pack Station screen enables you to pack cartons and/or pallets after
picking the items.
For more information about Execution Console Framework, see
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".
33.1 Pack Details
This screen enables you to pack cartons and/or pallets after picking the
items. The inner pack quantity breakup for the selected item also
displays. You can add or modify the inner pack quantity and the inner
packs packaged into the container.
![](asset-1ea.png)
446 User Guide
Pack Details
Note: To extend the Pack HSDE functionality in the
Applications Manager, under HSDE_Pack (exuipack) in the
application rules side panel, right-click Pack_Details
resource, and select the Save As option. In the Resource
Details: Pack Details dialog box that is displayed, enter a
prefix in the Resource Prefix field, and click . In the
Resource Details: Pack Details window, in the Detail View
panel, the following attribute is displayed in the Java
Server Page field:
exuipack_pack_
container.jsp?AutoDetectInventoryAttributes=
QIf you set the value of this attribute to "N", in the Pack
HSDE screen of the Console, a dialog box is displayed
depending on the type of item you are packing. Enter
the appropriate inventory attributes in the
corresponding fields.
QIf you set the value of this attribute to “Y”, the
inventory attributes are automatically copied based on
the location inventory information available with the
Sterling Warehouse Management System.
For more information about setting the attributes, refer
to the information provided in Table 33–9.
Table 33–1 Pack Details, Scan
Actions
Close Shipment This action allows you to manually close the shipment
after the packing process is complete. You can also
press Alt+S to close the shipment.
Close Container This action allows you to manually close the container
after the packing process is complete. You can also
press Alt+C to close the container.
Weigh This action enables you to enter the actual weight of
the container. You can also press Alt+W to record the
container’s weight.
![](asset-1eb.png)
Pack Details
Pack Station Screens 447
Fields
Location Select the pack location.
The pack station uniquely identifies devices including
printers and weighing scales attached.
Scan Identifier Enter or scan the container SCM, shipment number,
batch number, LPN identifier, serial number, or item
identifier. In the Instructions panel, shipment or
container level instructions displays. For more
information, see the Instructions table.
In situations where containerization is performed by
the system during wave release, scanning of the
container SCM identifies the shipment.
During post-pick containerization, the shipment
number and the container SCM identifying the
container must be scanned.
The information entered above is used to populate the
Items panel to indicate item and quantities to be
packed into the container.
New Case Click this button to generate a new container SCM for
the case, if applicable.
New Pallet Click this button to generate a new container SCM for
the pallet, if applicable.
Table 33–2 Pack Details, Products
Fields
SKU Enter or scan barcode that identifies the item to be
packed into the container for the shipment. In the
Instructions panel, item level instructions displays. For
more information, see the Instructions table.
The "Last Scanned Item Id" field populates with the
item ID.
Scan Quantity The item quantity scanned during the pack process is
automatically populated by the system.
Table 33–1 Pack Details, Scan
![](asset-1ec.png)
448 User Guide
Pack Details
UOM Select the appropriate item's unit of measure, if
applicable.
This value is automatically populated when UPC code,
UPC Case Code, case with LPN is scanned in the SKU
field.
Add Quantity Enter the quantity to add to the container, if
applicable.
In the SKU field, when you scan the UPC Code, UPC
Case Code or a case LPN, the system automatically
populates the "Add Quantity" value, which is editable.
Inventory Status Select the appropriate inventory status.
Remove Quantity Enter the quantity to remove from the container.
This field is used to correct errors, if any, during the
packing process.
Last Scanned Item Id The item’s Id that was last packed is automatically
populated.
UOM The item’s unit of measure corresponding to the item
Id is automatically populated.
Quantity The item quantity that was last packed is
automatically populated.
Table 33–3 Pack Details, Container Properties
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Container Details screen
where you can view the inner pack details.
Unpack Container This action takes you to the Container Contents screen
where you can remove contents for the selected item
from the shipment container.
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number is automatically populated by
the system from the values scanned into the scan
identifier field.
Table 33–2 Pack Details, Products
Fields
![](asset-1ed.png)
Pack Details
Pack Station Screens 449
Container # The container number is automatically populated by
the system from the values scanned into the scan
identifier field.
This number uniquely identifies a container in a
warehouse. Typically, this is different from the SCM
number.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the shipment.
Ship Mode The shipment mode for the shipment. Values include
'LTL', 'TL', 'PARCEL’
Container SCM The container SCM is automatically populated by the
system from the values scanned into the scan
identifier field.
SCM is an industry standard which identifies the
container and the enterprise.
Container Size Select the size to be associated with the container.
This value is automatically populated, if
containerization is performed by the system
Computed Weight The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system, if containerization is performed by the
system.
Actual Weight Click on the Weigh button or press Alt+W to capture
the actual weight of the container.
Select the unit of measure from the list.
Table 33–4 Pack Details, Items
Fields
Show Items Containing Enter search criteria to search for specific items, if
applicable.
Item ID The item to be packaged in the container.
Description The item description.
Product Class The product class of the line item packaged in the
container.
UOM The unit of measure of the line item packaged in the
container.
Table 33–3 Pack Details, Container Properties
![](asset-1ee.png)
450 User Guide
Pack Details
Inventory Status The item quantity that is currently available.
Quantity To Pack The quantity to be packed into the container.
Pack Quantity Enter the actual quantity that can be packed into the
container.
Requested Tag The item’s tag details, such as lot number or batch
number associated with the tag displays.
You can view the tag details only if the node that is
performing the pack operations is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operations performed
within the node, or if the buyer on the shipment
mandates it as a part of the inbound compliance. For
more information about capturing the tag attributes,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Table 33–5 Instructions
This panel displays the shipment, container, or item level instructions.
Table 33–6 Packing Notes
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete selected packing notes
that you captured during the packing process.
Fields
Notes Displays additional notes being captured during the
packing process.
Table 33–4 Pack Details, Items
Fields
![](asset-1ef.png)
Container Contents
Pack Station Screens 451
33.2 Container Contents
You can view all items packaged into the container. You can also remove
inner packs from the shipment container, if necessary.
Table 33–7 Container Routing Information
Fields
Activity The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging done for the container
as a VAS activity.
Description The activity description is automatically populated by
the system.
Table 33–8 Pack Details, Barcode Types
Fields
Scan Identifier Pack Scan Initiation
SKU Pack SKU Initiation
Table 33–9 Pack Details, Attributes
AutoDetectInventor
yAttributes Behavior
Y Inventory attributes will be automatically copied
based on the location inventory information
available with the Sterling Warehouse
Management System.
N Inventory attributes must be entered during packing.
![](asset-1f0.png)
452 User Guide
Container Contents
Click Save.
Table 33–10 Container Contents
Fields
Item ID The item’s item ID.
Description A brief description of the item.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Packed Quantity The quantity packed into the container.
Remove Quantity Enter the inner pack quantity that you want to remove
from the container.
Requested Tag The item’s tag information, such as lot number or
batch number associated with the tag displays.
You can view the tag details only if the node that is
performing the pack operations has configured to
capture the tag attributes if the buyer on a shipment
mandates it as a part of the inbound compliance. For
more information about capturing the tag attributes,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Table 33–11 Container Contents, Selected Container Details
Fields
Item ID The item ID that you selected for which you want to
remove the inner packs.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Product Class The item’s product class.
Requested Tag The item’s tag details.
You can view the tag details only if the node that is
performing the pack operations has configured to
capture the tag attributes if the buyer on a shipment
mandates it as a part of the inbound compliance. For
more information about capturing the tag attributes,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
![](asset-1f1.png)
Select SKU
Pack Station Screens 453
33.3 Select SKU
You can select the items to pack into a container.
Table 33–12 Selected Container Details, Quantity Breakup
Fields
Inner Pack Quantity The item quantity contained in each inner pack.
No Of Inner Packs The item’s identifier displays.
Unit Of Measure The item’s primary unit of measure displays.
Product Class The product class of the item displays.
Total The total quantity contained in the container.
Table 33–13 Container Contents
Fields
LPN # Displays the identifier of the LPN.
Item ID Enter the identifier of the item.
Item ID Displays the identifier of the item.
Unit Of Measure Displays the unit of measure of the item.
Product Class Displays the product class of the item.
Inventory Status Displays the status of inventory in the LPN.
System Quantity Displays the system-reported quantity of items
available in the LPN.
Actual Quantity Enter the actual quantity of items available in the LPN.
Note: Adjusting the Actual Quantity can be performed
only for items that are not tag controlled, time
sensitive, or serial tracked.
Reason Code Mandatory. Enter the reason code for the
corresponding inventory transaction.
![](asset-1f2.png)
454 User Guide
Serial Entry
33.4 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen enables you enter or scan the item’s serial
number.
The Serial Entry screen also enables you enter the serial number range
for an item.
Table 33–14 Serial Entry
Field
Count The total count of items scanned is automatically
populated by the system.
Item ID The identifier of the item.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure of the item.
Serial # The component serial number of the item.
Table 33–15 Serial Entry, Serial Range
Field
Item ID The identifier of the item.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure of the item.
From Serial # The start serial number of the item.
To Serial # The end serial number of the item.
Note: For a serial tracked or serialized item, if secondary
serials are defined and secondary information is not
provided, then in such scenario the 'Entry Serial Range’
button is not provided in the screen.
![](asset-1f3.png)
Manifest Console Screens 455
34
Manifest Console Screens
The Manifest Console provides field value descriptions for all the Manifest
Console screens.
34.1 Manifest Search By All Attributes
You can search for manifests by all attributes.
Table 34–1 Manifest Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node The node associated with the manifest.
Carrier Select the carrier associated with the manifest you are
searching for.
Manifest # Enter the manifest number associated with the
manifest you are searching for.
Manifest Date By default, the system date and time displays. Enter
the date range associated with the manifest you are
searching for, if applicable.
Manifest Status Select the status of the manifest.
Valid values are: Open, Closure Requested, Closure
Failed, and Closed.
Has Hazardous Items Select this checkbox to search for manifests that
contain hazardous items.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records you want listed
as a result of your search.
![](asset-1f4.png)
456 User Guide
Manifest List
34.2 Manifest List
The manifest list window displays the results of a manifest search. You
can perform actions on a single manifest or multiple manifests by
selecting the checkboxes of the manifests you want to perform an action
on and choosing the action from the action bar.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 34–2 Manifest List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Manifest Details screen
where you can view the details for the selected
manifests.
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print a manifest.
Close Manifest This action takes you to the Close Manifest screen
where you can close a manifest.
Note: If trailer numbers are not associated with a
manifest, the Close Manifest screen is displayed.
Otherwise, the manifest is closed directly.
Fields
Manifest # The manifest number associated with the manifest.
Click this link to view manifest details.
Manifest Date The date on which the manifest was created.
Carrier The carrier service availed to transport the load.
Trailer # The trailer number associated with the manifest.
Manifest Closed Indicates that the manifest has been closed. All
shipments included in the shipment are confirmed,
and you cannot add any new shipments to this
manifest.
Manifest Status Indicates the current status of the Manifest.
![](asset-1f5.png)
Manifest Details
Manifest Console Screens 457
34.3 Manifest Details
The Manifest Details screen provides manifest information for the
selected manifests. The actions that you can perform in the Manifest
Details screen are explained in the following tables.
Table 34–3 Manifest List, Carrier Summary
Actions
Open Manifest This action takes you to the Open Manifest screen
where you can open a new manifest.
Fields
Carrier The carrier service availed to transport the load.
Description A brief description of the carrier.
Date The date associated with the open manifests.
Open Manifests Total number of manifests open.
Total Packages to be
Manifested Total number of packages associated with the
manifest.
Table 34–4 Manifest Details, Details
Fields
Manifest # The manifest number associated with the manifest.
Manifest Date The manifest date on which the manifest was created.
Carrier The carrier associated with the manifest.
Manifest Status The current status of the manifest.
Valid values are: ’Open’ or ’Closed’.
Trailer # The manifest’s trailer number.
Has Hazardous Items Indicates if the manifest contains hazardous items.
![](asset-1f6.png)
458 User Guide
Manifest Details
Table 34–5 Manifest Details, Summary
Actions
Print This action takes you to the Print screen where you
can print a manifest.
Close Manifest This action takes you to the Close Manifest screen
where you can close a manifest.
Fields
Total Shipments Total number of shipments associated with the
manifest.
Total Loads Total loads associated with the manifest.
Partially Manifested
Shipments Number of partially manifested shipments. Click this
link to view partially manifest shipments. For more
information on partially manifest shipments, see the
Load List screen of the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.
Partially Manifested
Loads Number of partially manifested loads. Click this link to
view partially manifest loads. For more information
on partially manifest loads, see the Load List
screen of the Sterling Logistics Management:
User Guide.
Total Packages
Manifested Total number of packages associated with the
manifest. Click this link to go to the Summary By
Carrier Service screen where you can view all
packages manifested for the used carrier service.
Packages to be
manifested to close
manifest
Total number of packages to be manifested to close
manifest.
![](asset-1f7.png)
Summary By Carrier Service
Manifest Console Screens 459
34.4 Summary By Carrier Service
This screen provides the total number of packages manifested for the used
carrier service.
Table 34–6 Manifest Details, Partially Manifested Shipments
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the manifest.
Shipment Status The current status of the shipment.
Valid values are: SHIPMENT CREATED, SHIPMENT
BEING PICKED, SHIPMENT PACKED, and SHIPMENT
SHIPPED.
Table 34–7 Manifest Details, Packages to be Manifested
Fields
Container # The container number associated with the manifest.
Container Status The current status of the container.
Container Location The location where the container is available.
Table 34–8 Manifest Details, Partially Manifested Loads
Fields
Load # The load number associated with the manifest.
Load Status The current status of the load.
Valid values are: LOAD CREATED, TRAILER LOADED,
LOAD INTRANSIT, and LOAD COMPLETED.
![](asset-1f8.png)
460 User Guide
Open Manifest
34.5 Print
Use this screen to print a manifest.
34.6 Open Manifest
Use this screen to open a new manifest.
Table 34–9 Summary By Carrier Service
Fields
Carrier/Service The carrier service associated with the container.
Total Packages The total number of packages manifested for the
carrier service.
Table 34–10 Print
Fields
Print Service Name Choose the manifest print service name you want to
print.
Printer Name Select the printer name you want to print from.
No. of Copies Enter the total number of copies of manifests you
want to print.
Table 34–11 Open Manifest
Fields
Node Node associated with the manifest.
Manifest # Enter the manifest number you want to open.
Manifest Date Enter the date on which the manifest was created.
Trailer # Enter the trailer number associated with the manifest.
![](asset-1f9.png)
Close Manifest
Manifest Console Screens 461
34.7 Close Manifest
Use this screen to close a manifest.
Enterprise Select the enterprise for which you want to open the
manifest.
Shipper Account # For
The Selected
Enterprise
The shipper’s account number for the selected
enterprise displays.
Table 34–12 Close Manifest
Fields
Trailer # Enter the trailer number associated with the manifest.
Table 34–11 Open Manifest
Fields
![](asset-1fa.png)
462 User Guide
Close Manifest
![](asset-1fb.png)
Create Load Screens 463
35
Create Load Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Create Loads screen.
35.1 Create Load
Use the Create Load screen to create loads.
Table 35–1 Create Load, Load
Fields
Load # Enter the load number.
Enterprise Select the enterprise which maintains the ownership of
the load during the delivery process.
Load Type Select the load type.
You can customize this filed as per your business
practices.
Shipment Mode Select the shipment mode for the shipment. Values
include 'LTL', 'TL', 'PARCEL'
Carrier Service Code Select the Carrier service you want to use to transport
the load.
Table 35–2 Create Load, Additional Info
Fields
BOL # Enter the load’s bill of lading number.
Seal # Enter the load’s seal number.
![](asset-1fc.png)
464 User Guide
Create Load
PRO # Enter the load’s PRO number, if applicable.
This value is populated automatically by Sterling WMS
based on the PRO Number Generation settings. For
more information about PRO number generation
settings, see the Sterling Warehouse Management
System: Configuration Guide.
Trailer # Enter the trailer number of the vehicle used to carry
the load.
POD # Enter the Proof Of Delivery (POD) number to indicate
the date on which the load was delivered.
Table 35–3 Create Load, Origin
Fields
At Shipment Origin Select At Shipment Origin to designate the load’s
origin node to be same as the shipment contained in
the load.
At Node Select At Node and enter the applicable node to
designate this node as the load’s origin.
At Address Select At Address and enter the address to designate
this address as the load’s origin.
Choose to add the address. For more information,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User
Guide.
Table 35–4 Create Load, Destination
Fields
At Shipment
Destination Select At Shipment Destination to designate the load’s
destination node to be same as the shipment
contained in the load.
Table 35–2 Create Load, Additional Info
Fields
![](asset-1fd.png)
Create Load
Create Load Screens 465
Click the Save button. This takes you to the Load Details screen. For
more information, see the Sterling Logistics Management: User
Guide.
At Node Select At Node and enter the applicable node to
designate this node as the load’s destination.
At Address Select At Address and enter the address to designate
this address as the load’s destination.
Choose to add the address. For more information,
see the Sterling Logistics Management: User
Guide.
Table 35–4 Create Load, Destination
Fields
![](asset-1fe.png)
466 User Guide
Create Load
![](asset-1ff.png)
Load Console Screens 467
36
Load Console Screens
The Load Console screens lets you:
QSearch using granular level information such as Shipment Mode,
Destination, etc.
QModify granular load attributes at a location.
The Load Console screens also lets you search for loads in various ways,
such as:
QSearch by summary
QSearch by status
QSearch by location
For more information about loads, see the Sterling Logistics
Management: User Guide.
![](asset-200.png)
468 User Guide
![](asset-201.png)
Add To Manifest Screens 469
37
Add To Manifest Screens
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Add To
Manifest screen.
37.1 Add To Manifest
The Add To Manifest screen can be used to add containers to a manifest.
The following table provides field level descriptions of the add to manifest
screen.
Table 37–1 Add To Manifest, Scan
Actions
Add To Manifest This action allows you to add container to a manifest.
Note: If the container has shipment level
integration with FedEx, a message "m of n
package(s) manifested" displays. Here, "m"
indicates the number of containers manifested
and "n" indicates the total number of containers
present in the shipment or load.
View Contents This action takes you to the Container Contents to
view all items packaged into the container.
Save This action allows you to save the container details
that you entered.
Weigh This action takes you to the Weigh Station Screens
where you can record the container’s weight
belonging to TL, LTL, or parcel shipments.
![](asset-202.png)
470 User Guide
Add To Manifest
Reset This action clears all container information that you
entered.
Fields
Station The manifest station identifier.
Scan Identifier The container SCM, shipment, or LPN identifier.
If you scan a load container, the Load # displays in
the Add To Manifest, Container Attributes panel
instead of the Shipment #.
Manifest # Select the manifest number.
Displays any manifest that is open for the carrier.
Table 37–2 Add To Manifest, Container Attributes
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number displays.
Container # The container number displays.
Container SCM The shipment container marking number displays.
Container Size Enter the size of the container.
This is automatically populated when containerization
is performed by the system or when the size is
associated during the pack process.
Computed Weight The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system if containerization is performed by the
system.
Actual Weight Enter the actual weight of the container
Table 37–3 Add To Manifest, Carrier Information
Fields
Carrier/Service The carrier service associated with the container
displays.
Table 37–1 Add To Manifest, Scan
![](asset-203.png)
Add To Manifest
Add To Manifest Screens 471
Billed Weight Enter the container’s billed weight.
Tracking # The tracking number associated to the container
displays.
Enter or scan the tracking number, if association is at
the manifest station.
Special Service
Surcharge Enter the special service surcharges associated with
the container, if applicable.
Return Tracking # Enter the return tracking number of the container.
Actual Freight Charge Enter the total cost of shipping the manifested
package.
Table 37–4 Special Services
Fields
Special Services This panel displays the carrier special services for
shipping the container.
Table 37–5 Instructions
This panel displays manifest instructions and the items being packed.
Table 37–6 Packing Notes
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete selected packing notes
that you captured during the packing process.
Fields
Notes Displays additional notes being captured during the
packing process.
Table 37–3 Add To Manifest, Carrier Information
![](asset-204.png)
472 User Guide
Container Contents
37.2 Container Contents
You can view all items packaged into the container.
Table 37–7 Container Routing Information
Fields
Activity The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging done for the container
as a VAS activity.
Description The activity description is automatically populated by
the system.
Table 37–8 Add To Manifest, Barcode Types
Fields
Container ManifestContainer
Table 37–9 Add To Manifest, Container Contents
Fields
Child Container SCM The child container marking number.
Item ID The item identifier.
Description A brief description of the item.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Quantity The item quantity is automatically populated by the
system.
Packed Quantity The quantity packed in the container.
![](asset-205.png)
Remove From Manifest Screens 473
38
Remove From Manifest Screens
The Remove From Manifest screen enables you to remove containers
from the trailer, or manifest the container before closing the manifest.
For more information about Execution Console Framework, see
Appendix B, "Understanding the Execution Console Framework".
38.1 Remove From Manifest
You can remove packed containers from manifest in this screen.
Table 38–1 Remove From Manifest, Scan
Actions
Remove From Manifest This action allows you to remove a container from the
manifest.
Note: When you remove any container from the
manifest, a confirmation message displays only if
the container is manifested using shipment level
integration, and all containers in the shipment or load
are manifested. On clicking the OK button, all
containers included in the shipment or load are
removed.
View Contents This action takes you to the Container Contents to
view all items packaged into the container.
Save This action allows you to save the container details
that you entered.
Weigh This action takes you to the Weigh Station Screens to
record the container’s weight belonging to TL,
LTL, or parcel shipments.
![](asset-206.png)
474 User Guide
Remove From Manifest
Reset This action clears all container information that you
entered.
Fields
Station The manifest station identifier.
Scan Identifier The container, shipment, or LPN identifier.
Manifest # Select the manifest number.
Any manifest that are open for the carrier displays.
Note: If the container is manifested using shipment level
integration, and all containers on the shipment or load are
manifested, if you attempt to remove any container from
the manifest, a confirmation message displays. On clicking
the OK button, all containers included in the shipment or
load are removed.
Table 38–2 Remove From Manifest, Container Attributes
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number displays.
Container # The container number displays.
Container SCM The shipment container marking number displays.
Container Size Enter the size of the container.
This is automatically populated when containerization
is performed by the system or when the size is
associated during the pack process.
Computed Weight The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system, if containerization is performed by the
system.
Table 38–1 Remove From Manifest, Scan
Actions
![](asset-207.png)
Remove From Manifest
Remove From Manifest Screens 475
Actual Weight The actual weight of the container is either
automatically populated by the system from the
weighing scale attached upon closure of container or
when Weigh action is selected.
Enter the actual weight of the container, if necessary.
Select the unit of measure for the weight, if different
from the value displayed.
The system checks whether the difference between
actual weight and computed weight is greater than the
tolerance.
Ship To Address The address the container is shipped to.
Table 38–3 Remove From Manifest, Ship To
The address the container is shipped to.
Table 38–4 Remove From Manifest, Carrier Information
Fields
Carrier/Service The carrier service associated with the container
displays.
Billed Weight Enter the container’s billed weight.
Tracking # The tracking number associated to the container
displays
Enter or scan the tracking number, if association is at
the manifest station.
Special Service
Surcharge Enter the special service surcharges associated with
the container, if applicable.
Return Tracking # Enter the return tracking number of the container.
Table 38–2 Remove From Manifest, Container Attributes
Fields
![](asset-208.png)
476 User Guide
Container Contents
38.2 Container Contents
You can view all items packaged into the container.
Table 38–5 Special Services
Fields
Actual Freight Charge Enter the actual freight charges for shipping the
container.
Table 38–6 Instructions
This panel displays the instructions and items being packed.
Table 38–7 Packing Notes
Actions
Delete This action allows you to delete selected packing notes
that you captured while packing the container.
Fields
Notes Displays additional notes, if captured while packing the
container.
Table 38–8 Container Routing Information
Fields
Activity The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging done for the container
as a VAS activity.
Description The activity description is automatically populated by
the system.
![](asset-209.png)
Container Contents
Remove From Manifest Screens 477
Table 38–9 Remove From Manifest, Container Contents
Fields
Child Container SCM The child container marking number.
Item ID The item ID.
Description The item’s description.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Quantity The item quantity is automatically populated by the
system.
Packed Quantity The quantity packed in the container.
![](asset-20a.png)
478 User Guide
Container Contents
![](asset-20b.png)
Weigh Station Screens 479
39
Weigh Station Screens
The Weigh Station console lets you record the weight of a container that
belongs to TL, LTL, or parcel shipments.
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Weigh Station
console.
Note: To perform generic status change in the Weigh
Station:
QDefine the custom pipeline by extending the default
pipeline associated with a transaction ID. For more
information about configuring process models, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform
Configuration Guide.
QExtend the existing resource and modify JSP to contain
JSP=/wms/wmsmanifest/detail/exuimanifest_detail_
anchor. jsp?TransactionId=<TransactionId>. For more
information about defining or extending resources, see
the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
QCreate a Menu Entry for the newly created resource
and use the new screen to perform generic status
change. For more information about defining menus,
see the Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
![](asset-20c.png)
480 User Guide
Weigh Station
39.1 Weigh Station
The Weigh Station screen lets you record a container’s weight.
Table 39–1 Weigh Station, Scan
Actions
View contents This action button takes you to the Container Contents
screen.
Save This action button saves the details entered.
Weigh If a weighing scale is connected, this action button
captures the weight on the weighing scale.
Reset This action button resets the screen. It clears all the
details entered into the screen.
Fields
Location Id The manifest location Id.
Scan Identifier The container SCM, shipment, or LPN identifier.
Manifest # Select the manifest number.
Any manifest that are open for the carrier displays.
Table 39–2 Weigh Station, Container Attributes
Fields
Shipment # The shipment number displays.
Container # The container number displays.
Container SCM The shipment container marking number displays.
Container Size Enter the size of the container.
This is automatically populated when containerization
is performed by the system or when the size is
associated during the pack process.
Computed Weight The computed weight is automatically populated by
the system, if containerization is performed by the
system.
![](asset-20d.png)
Weigh Station
Weigh Station Screens 481
Actual Weight The actual weight of the container is either
automatically populated by the system from the
weighing scale attached upon closure of container or
when Weigh action is selected.
Enter the actual weight of the container, if necessary.
Select the unit of measure for the weight, if different
from the value displayed.
The system checks whether the difference between
actual weight and computed weight is greater than
the tolerance.
Ship To Address The address the container is shipped to.
Table 39–3 Weigh Station, Carrier Information
Fields
Carrier The carrier associated with the container displays.
Carrier/Service The carrier service associated with the container
displays.
Tracking# The tracking number associated to the container
displays.
Enter or scan the tracking number, if association is at
the manifest station.
Special Services This panel shows carrier special services associated
with the container.
Table 39–4 Weigh Station, Packing Instructions
Fields
Displays instructions for the shipment and the specific item being packed.
Instruction Code The type of instruction, such as Gift, Pick, Pack, Ship,
or Other.
Instruction Text The specific instructions to be performed
corresponding to the text.
Table 39–2 Weigh Station, Container Attributes
Fields
![](asset-20e.png)
482 User Guide
Serial Entry
39.2 Serial Entry
The Serial Entry screen lets you capture the serial number for a
serial-tracked item.
Table 39–5 Weigh Station, Packing Notes
Actions
Delete This action button deletes the selected packing note.
Fields
Notes Additional notes captured during the packing process
displays.
Click the Delete button to delete notes, if applicable.
Container Routing
Activity The next activity associated with the container packed
is automatically populated by the system.
For example, special packaging for container done as a
VAS activity.
Description The description of the activity is automatically
populated by the system.
Table 39–6 Weigh Station Barcode Type
Field
Container ManifestContainer
Table 39–7 Serial Entry
Fields
Item ID The item Id is automatically populated by the
system.
Unit Of Measure The unit of measure associated with the item is
automatically populated by the system.
Serial # Enter or scan the item’s serial number.
![](asset-20f.png)
Container Contents
Weigh Station Screens 483
39.3 Container Contents
The Container Contents screen provides visibility to all items packaged
into the container.
Secondary Serial #1 Enter or scan the component serial number of the
item.
Secondary Serial #2 Enter or scan the component serial number of the
item.
Secondary Serial #3 Enter or scan the component serial number of the
item.
Note: The fields displayed in the Serial Entry window vary
depending on the item scanned.
Table 39–8 Container Contents
Fields
Child Container
SCM The child container marking number.
Item ID The item’s ID.
Description The item’s description.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Quantity The quantity is automatically populated by the
system.
Packed Quantity The quantity packed in the container.
Table 39–7 Serial Entry
Fields
![](asset-210.png)
484 User Guide
Container Contents
![](asset-211.png)
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens 485
40
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens
Location Inventory Audit console enables you to view item’s and/or
container’s inventory audit details.
40.1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item
You can search for location inventory audits by item with the help of this
screen.
Table 40–1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item
Fields
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Item ID Enter the item ID of the item you want to search for, if
applicable.
Product Class Select the product class of the item you are searching
for if applicable.
Unit Of Measure Select the unit of measure of the item you are
searching for, if applicable.
Location Enter the location ID you want to search for, if
applicable.
![](asset-212.png)
486 User Guide
Location Inventory Audit Search By Container
The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by item.
40.2 Location Inventory Audit Search By
Container
You can search for location inventory audits by container with the help of
this screen.
Audit Type Select the audit type, if applicable.
Task Type Select the task type if applicable.
User ID Enter the user ID.
Activity Date Enter the date range through which you want to
search for if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 40–2 Location Inventory Audit Search By Container
Fields
Field Description
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Table 40–1 Location Inventory Audit Search By Item
Fields
![](asset-213.png)
Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens 487
The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by container.
40.3 Location Inventory Audit Search By
Transaction References
You can search for location inventory audits by transaction references
with the help of this screen.
Pallet ID Enter the pallet LPN you are searching for.
Case ID Enter the case LPN you are searching for.
Activity Date Enter the date range you are searching for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 40–3 Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References
Fields
Node The node associated with the Item you want to search
for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Order # Enter the order number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Table 40–2 Location Inventory Audit Search By Container
Fields
![](asset-214.png)
488 User Guide
Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes
The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by transaction references.
40.4 Location Inventory Audit Search By
Inventory Attributes
You can search for location inventory audits by inventory attributes with
the help of this screen.
Order Line # Enter the order line number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Container # Enter the container number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Reference Enter the reference you are searching for, if
applicable.
Adjustment Reason
Code Select the reason code associated with the
adjustment.
Activity Date Enter the date range you are searching for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 40–3 Location Inventory Audit Search By Transaction References
Fields
![](asset-215.png)
Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens 489
The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by inventory attributes.
Table 40–4 Location Inventory Audit Search By Inventory Attributes
Fields
Node Select the node associated with the Item you want to
search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Inventory Status Select the inventory status of the item want to search
for, if applicable.
Receipt # Enter the receipt number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Tag # Enter the tag number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Serial # Enter the serial number you are searching for, if
applicable.
Ship By Date Enter the date by which the item must be shipped you
are searching for, if applicable.
In Activity Date Enter the date range you are searching for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-216.png)
490 User Guide
Location Inventory Audit List
40.5 Performing a Location Inventory Audit
Search By Count Reference
You can search for location inventory audits by count reference with the
help of this screen.
The Location Inventory Audit List screen displays as a result of location
inventory audit search by count reference.
40.6 Location Inventory Audit List
The Location Inventory Audit List window displays the results of a
location inventory audit search. You can perform actions on a single item
or on multiple items by selecting the check boxes of the required audits
and choosing the action from the action bar.
Table 40–5 Location Inventory Audit Search By Count Reference
Fields
Document Type The system automatically displays the document type.
Node Select the node you want to search for.
Enterprise Select the enterprise associated with the item you
want to search for.
Across Enterprise Choose this option if you are searching across
enterprise.
Count Request # Enter the count request you are searching for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-217.png)
Location Inventory Audit List
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens 491
Table 40–6 Location Inventory Audit List, Item Information
Actions
View Details This action button takes you to the Location Inventory
Audit Details for the selected inventory items.
Fields
Activity Date The date on which any activity was performed on the
inventory. Click this link to view Location Inventory
Audit Detail.
Location The location identifier.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the audit.
Item ID The item ID.
PC The item’s product class. Indicates the item's
inventory categorization. Orders are placed for an item
and product class. Typical examples are IRREGULAR,
FD (Factory Defects).
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Description Description of the item
Status Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse.
Adjustment Type The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.
Reason Code The reason identifier for the adjustment.
User ID The identifier of the user who performed the
adjustments.
Quantity Quantity incremented (+) or decremented (-) in this
transaction
Table 40–7 Location Inventory Audit List, Container Information
Actions
View Details This action button takes you to the Location Inventory
Audit Details for the selected inventory containers.
![](asset-218.png)
492 User Guide
Location Inventory Audit Details
40.7 Location Inventory Audit Details
The item level Location Inventory Audit Details screen lets you view item
inventory audit details.
Fields
Activity Date The date on which any activity was performed on the
inventory. Click this link to view Location Inventory
Audit Detail.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the container.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Location The location identifier.
Parent Pallet ID The parent pallet LPN of the container.
Parent Case ID The parent case LPN of the container.
Adjustment Type The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.
Reason Code The reason identifier for the adjustment.
User ID The identifier of the user who performed the
adjustments.
Audit Type Indicates the type of audit. The Audit Type is either
"In" or "Out". The Audit Type "In" indicates that the
LPN was created in or moved into a location. Audit
Type "Out" indicates that the LPN was removed from
or moved out of a location.
Table 40–8 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Item Information
Fields
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the item.
Item ID The item ID. Click this link to view item details.
Product Class Indicates the item's inventory categorization. Orders
are placed for an item and product class. Typical
examples are IRREGULAR, FD (Factory Defects).
Table 40–7 Location Inventory Audit List, Container Information
![](asset-219.png)
Location Inventory Audit Details
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens 493
Unit Of Measure The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description Description of the item.
Quantity Number of units of the item at this location.
Table 40–9 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Audit Information
Fields
Location The location identifier. Click this link to view location
details.
Date The date on which the audit was performed.
User ID The user associated with the audit.
Task Type The task type associated with the audit.
Pallet ID Pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID Case LPN associated with the container.
Adjustment Type The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.
Table 40–10 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Transaction Reference
Fields
Order # The order number associated with the audit.
Release # The order release number associated with the audit.
Order Line # The order line number associated with the audit.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the audit.
Container # The container number associated with the audit.
Program ID The identifier of the program that created the audit.
Table 40–8 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Item Information
Fields
![](asset-21a.png)
494 User Guide
Location Inventory Audit Details
Adjustment Reason
Code The reason code associated with the adjustment.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the adjustment was
made.
Table 40–11 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Additional Inventory
Attributes
Fields
Serial # The serial number associated with the audit.
FIFO # The FIFO number associated with the audit.
FIFO number is a date based inventory attribute that
helps understand the order in which stock arrived at
the node. This is used to send out items that arrived
first than the ones that arrived later.
Segment # The segment number associated with the audit.
Segment number of the item. A segment holds either
the specific buyer or specific order number that
requires dedication.
Segment Type The segment type associated with the audit.
Segment type of the item. A segment type indicates
an inventory category. Typical values are: MTC - Made
To Customer or MTO - Made to Order.
Ship By Date The ship by date associated with the audit.
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the audit.
Inventory Status The inventory status associated with the audit.
Refers to an inventory sub classification based on the
results of the inventory control processes within the
warehouse
Country Of Origin The manufacturing country code associated with the
audit.
Table 40–10 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Transaction Reference
Fields
![](asset-21b.png)
Location Inventory Audit Details
Location Inventory Audit Console Screens 495
40.8 Location Inventory Audit Details
The container level Location Inventory Audit Details screen lets you view
container inventory audit details.
Table 40–12 Location Inventory Audit Detail, Other References
Fields
Reference #1 Reference values captured for the audit
Reference #2 Reference values captured for the audit
Reference #3 Reference values captured for the audit
Reference #4 Reference values captured for the audit
Reference #5 Reference values captured for the audit
Table 40–13 Location Inventory Audit Details, Container Information
Fields
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the container.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN associated with the container.
Case ID The case LPN associated with the container.
Audit Type The type of audit. The Audit Type is either "In" or
"Out". The Audit Type "In" indicates that the LPN was
created in or moved into a location. Audit Type "Out"
indicates that the LPN was removed from or moved
out of a location.
Table 40–14 Location Inventory Audit Details, Audit Information
Fields
Location The location identifier. Click this link to view location
details.
Date The date on which the audit was performed.
User ID The user id associated with the audit.
![](asset-21c.png)
496 User Guide
Location Inventory Audit Details
Task Type The task type associated with the audit.
Parent Pallet ID The parent pallet LPN of the container.
Parent Case ID The parent case LPN of the container.
Adjustment Type The type of adjustment for the audit. Valid values are:
RECEIPT, ADJUSTMENT, SHIPMENT, RETURN.
Table 40–15 Location Inventory Audit Details, Transaction Reference
Fields
Order # The order number associated with the audit.
Release # The order release number associated with the audit.
Order Line # The order line number associated with the audit.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the audit.
Container # The container number associated with the audit.
Program ID The identifier of the program that created the audit.
Adjustment Reason
Code The reason code associated with the adjustment.
Reason Text Additional information as to why the adjustment was
made.
Table 40–16 Location Inventory Audit Details, Other References
Fields
Reference #1 Reference values captured for the audit.
Reference #2 Reference values captured for the audit.
Reference #3 Reference values captured for the audit.
Reference #4 Reference values captured for the audit.
Reference #5 Reference values captured for the audit.
Table 40–14 Location Inventory Audit Details, Audit Information
Fields
![](asset-21d.png)
Task Console Screens 497
41
Task Console Screens
The Task Console lets you to optimize warehouse throughput and
maximize worker efficiency. It enables you to perform the following task
management tasks:
QAssign tasks
QReprioritize tasks
QModify task location and quantity
QComplete a task
QCancel certain types of tasks
QView summary level information across all tasks for a node
This chapter provides screen and field descriptions for the Task Console.
41.1 Task Search By Task Type
The Task Search By Task Type screen lets you enter the criteria for the
search.
Table 41–1 Task Search By Task Type
Fields
Node Displays the node you are logged in as.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
![](asset-21e.png)
498 User Guide
Task Summary
Click Search to view the search results in the Task Summary screen.
41.2 Task Summary
The Tasks Summary screen displays the tasks that are to be completed
within a specific time frame, which is typically the current day, or the
time selected in your search criteria. If there are tasks that are not yet
complete, these tasks also display.
This screen enables you to quickly determine what work is being done
and which tasks are at risk. The details display as data within a graph
and also within a table as more granular details.
Task Type Choose one or more task types to search for. This is
mandatory.
Start No Earlier Than Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started within the time range specified, if applicable.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 41–1 Task Search By Task Type
Fields
![](asset-21f.png)
Task Summary
Task Console Screens 499
Table 41–2 Task Summary
Task Summary
The Task Summary graph displays a summary of all the available tasks. The
graph displays the following information:
QCompleted - The number of tasks completed. Completed tasks display as
gray boxes in the graph.
QOpen To InProgress - The number of tasks that are either open or in
progress. These tasks display as green boxes in the graph.
Q# Tasks at Risk of Delay - The number of tasks that are at a risk of getting
delayed. These tasks display as red boxes in the graph.
Fields
# Of Users Logged In The number of users currently logged in. Click this link
to view the User List, which displays a list of available
users.
Current Time The current time.
End Of Day Midnight of the present day.
Task Type The task type. Click this link to view the Task
Summary By Zone screen.
Name The name of a task type.
![](asset-220.png)
500 User Guide
Task Summary
Open Tasks The number of tasks that are open, which includes the
following states:
QOpen
QHeld
QSuggested
QIn Progress
Click this link to view the Task Summary By Zone
screen, which displays a breakdown of open task
summaries.
# Tasks At Risk Of
Delay The number of tasks at risk of delay. This is estimated
based on finish time of tasks, the number of users
working on the task type, standard rate, and current
time.
Standard Rate The standard rate of work, or the number of tasks per
hour.
Effort (Hrs) The amount of effort in hours. Effort equals the Open
Tasks divided by the Standard Rate.
# Logged In /
Available Users The number of people logged in who possess the skills
required to perform the task at hand. The first number
indicates how many people are currently performing
the task. The second number indicates the total
number of people capable of performing the task,
including those who are currently performing the task.
For example, 3/5 indicates that five people are
capable of performing a specific task type; three of
those five people are currently performing that task
type. Click this link to view the User List screen,
which displays a list of available users.
Past Due The number of tasks that should have been completed
but are still open.
# Batches The number of batches open for this task type.
Completed Tasks The number of completed tasks.
Table 41–2 Task Summary
![](asset-221.png)
Open Task Summary
Task Console Screens 501
41.3 Task Summary By Zone
The Task Summary By Zone screen lets you view task summaries by
zone. Tasks are grouped by type and listed with information about the zones
where a specific task is performed.
41.4 Open Task Summary
The Open Task Summary screen lets you view an open task summary
breakdown. Tasks are grouped by type and listed with information about
the users performing a task, tasks open, tasks at risk, and estimated
time length to perform those tasks.
Table 41–3 Task Summary By Zone
Fields
Zone The name of the zone where a specific task is
performed.
# Of Tasks Originating
Here The number of tasks that originate in the zone
specified.
# Of Tasks
Terminating Here The number of tasks that end in the zone specified.
Table 41–4 Open Task Summary
Fields
Task Type The name of the zone that has a specific task.
# Of Users Logged In
Performing This Task The number of users logged in who are performing the
task specified.
Scheduled Start Time The time at which a specific task is scheduled to begin.
Scheduled End Time The time at which a specific task is scheduled to finish.
Open Tasks The number of tasks specified that are currently open.
# Of Tasks At Risk Of
Delay The number of tasks specified that are currently at
risk of being delayed.
Estimated Start Time The time at which a specific task is estimated to begin.
Estimated End Time The time at which a scheduled task is estimated to
finish.
![](asset-222.png)
502 User Guide
Task Search By Zone
41.5 User List
The User List screen lets you view a list of available users.
41.6 Task Search By Zone
The Task Search By Zone screen lets you perform a task search by zone.
Table 41–5 User List
Fields
Node The node to which the user belongs.
User ID The ID of the person to perform tasks within the node.
User Name The name of the person that corresponds with a
specific User ID.
Logged In An icon displays to show that the user is logged in.
Most Recent Task The most recent task a user has worked on.
Activity Date The date and time of the activity.
Table 41–6 Task Search By Zone
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.
Task Status Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.
Task ID Enter a task ID to search for, if applicable.
Start Task After Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.
Assigned To User Enter a user name to search for, if applicable. Or
choose the lookup icon to find the user name you want
to search for, if applicable.
![](asset-223.png)
Task Search By Inventory
Task Console Screens 503
Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.
41.7 Task Search By Inventory
The Task Search By Inventory screen lets you perform a task search by
inventory.
Only Unassigned Tasks Choose this to search for only tasks that are not
assigned to a user.
Show Hierarchy Choose this to show a hierarchical list of results, if
applicable. This option is most appropriate when you
are searching for both Summary Tasks and Detail
Tasks at the same time, but not individually.
Search History Choose this to search history records, if applicable. If
selected, only history records are shown.
Show Only Choose Summary Tasks to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks to show a list of detail tasks, if
applicable.
Choose All Tasks to show both summaries and details,
if applicable.
Source Zone Enter the source zone to search for, if applicable.
Source Location Enter the source location to search for, if applicable.
Target Zone Enter the target zone to search for, if applicable.
Target Location Enter the target location to search for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 41–6 Task Search By Zone
Fields
![](asset-224.png)
504 User Guide
Task Search By Inventory
Table 41–7 Task Search by Inventory
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
This search criteria displays the activity group
specified and any task types that belong to it.
Task Type Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.
Task Status Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.
Start Task After Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.
Show Only Choose Summary Tasks to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks to show a list of task details, if
applicable.
Choose All Tasks to show both summaries and details,
if applicable.
Item ID Enter an item ID to search for or choose the lookup
icon to find an item ID to search for, if applicable.
Product Class Select a product class to search for, if applicable.
UOM Select a unit of measure to search for, if applicable.
Item Classification Enter the item classification to search for, if applicable.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations. This
displays only when the Activity Group is ‘Count’.
Inventory Status Select an inventory status to search for, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.
![](asset-225.png)
Task Search By Reference
Task Console Screens 505
Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.
41.8 Task Search By Reference
The Task Search By Reference screen lets you perform a task search by
reference.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 41–8 Task Search By Reference
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.
Task Status Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.
Start Task After Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.
Show Only Choose Summary Tasks to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
Choose Detail Tasks to show a list of task details, if
applicable.
Choose All Tasks to show both summaries and details,
if applicable.
Batch # Enter the batch number to search for, if applicable.
Wave # Enter the wave number to search for, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter the shipment number to search for, if applicable.
Container # Enter the container number to search for, if applicable.
![](asset-226.png)
506 User Guide
Task Search By Exception
Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.
41.9 Task Search By Exception
The Task Search By Exception screen lets you perform a task search by
exception.
Order # Enter the order number to search for, if applicable.
Carrier Enter the carrier to search for, if applicable.
Load # Enter the load number to search for, if applicable.
Move Request # Enter the move request number to search for, if
applicable.
Count Request # Enter the count number to search for, if applicable.
Work Order # Enter the work order number to search for, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 41–9 Task Search By Exception
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.
Table 41–8 Task Search By Reference
Fields
![](asset-227.png)
Task Search By Date
Task Console Screens 507
Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.
41.10 Task Search By Date
The Task Search By Date screen lets you perform a task search by date.
Task Status Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.
Start Task After Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.
Tasks With All
Following Holds Choose one or more of the following check boxes, as
applicable:
QException - to search for all tasks on hold due to
an exception.
QDependency - to search for all tasks on hold
because a prerequisite task has not yet been
completed.
QBatch - to search for all tasks that are on hold
because they have not yet been added to a batch.
Hold Reason If you have chosen to search only tasks marked
"Held", select the hold reason, if applicable.
Show Only Choose one of the following types of tasks to display:
QSummary Tasks - to list only task summaries, if
applicable.
QChoose Detail Tasks - to show a list of task details,
if applicable.
QChoose All Tasks - to show both summaries and
details, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 41–9 Task Search By Exception
Fields
![](asset-228.png)
508 User Guide
Task Search By At Risk Tasks
Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.
41.11 Task Search By At Risk Tasks
The Task Search By At Risk Tasks screen lets you perform a task search
by at risk tasks.
Table 41–10 Task Search By Date
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.
Task Status Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.
Start Task After Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.
Finish Task Before Enter a task completion time range to search within, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-229.png)
Task List
Task Console Screens 509
Click Search to view the search results in the Task List screen.
41.12 Task List
The Task List screen displays the results of a task search. This screen
lets you perform actions on a single task or on multiple tasks by selecting
the check boxes adjacent to the relevant tasks and choosing the
applicable action from the action bar.
Table 41–11 Task Search By At Risk Tasks
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for, if applicable.
This is mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Select an activity group to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose one task type to search for. The search results
are populated based on Activity Group, if applicable.
Task Status Select a task status range to search for, if applicable.
Start Task After Enter a time range to search for tasks that should be
started after the time range specified, if applicable.
Tasks With All
Following Holds Exception—choose this to only search for tasks
marked "Held" due an exception, if applicable.
Dependency—choose this to only search for tasks
marked "Held" due to a dependency, if applicable.
Batch—choose this to only search for tasks marked
"Held" due to batching, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of tasks you want
returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
![](asset-22a.png)
510 User Guide
Task List
Table 41–12 Task List
Actions
View Details This action button takes you to the Task Detail screen.
Task Assign to User This action button takes you to the Assign to User
screen.
Reprioritize This action button takes you to the Reprioritize screen.
Hold This action button takes you to the Hold Reason
screen.
Release This action button releases the specified tasks.
To specify tasks for release, select the check boxes
adjacent to the relevant tasks.
Cancel This action button takes you to the Cancel Task
Reason screen.
Fields
Task ID The task ID.
For all types of searches, Summary tasks are indicated
by a icon. If you select the Show Hierarchy check
box in the search window, Summary tasks displays as
bold text.
Task Type The task type.
Priority The priority assigned to a task type.
Item Classification The item classification of a task.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations. This
displays only when the Activity Group is ‘Count’.
Task Status The status of a task.
Source Location The origin location of a task.
Target Location The destination location of a task.
Primary Reference The primary reference of a task.
Predecessor Task Link to the task that must be completed before the
task that is displayed can be started.
Assigned To User Link to the user profile.
![](asset-22b.png)
Task Detail
Task Console Screens 511
41.13 Task Detail
The Task Detail screen lets you view task summary details.
Table 41–13 Task Detail, Task
Actions
Hold This action button takes you to the Hold Reason
screen.
Release This action button releases the task.
Cancel This action button takes you to the Cancel Task
Reason screen.
Complete This action button takes you to the Record Count
Result Details screen.
Fields
Node The node where a task takes place.
Enterprise The Enterprise that owns a task.
Task Type The name of a task type.
Task ID The task’s ID.
Task Status The status of a task.
Task Priority The priority of task.
Parent Task ID The task ID of the task’s parent.
Created On The date the task request was created.
Pick For Enterprise Perform a picking operation for the enterprise.
Table 41–14 Task Detail, Inventory
Fields
Item ID The item ID of an item in inventory associated with a
task.
Product Class The product class of an item in inventory associated
with a task.
![](asset-22c.png)
512 User Guide
Task Detail
UOM The unit of measure of an item in inventory associated
with a task.
Quantity The quantity of an item in inventory associated with a
task.
Serial # The serial number of an item in inventory associated
with a task.
Ship By Date The date to ship an item in inventory associated with a
task.
Segment The segment an item in inventory belongs to that is
associated with a task.
Segment Type The segment type of an item in inventory associated
with a task.
Inventory Status The condition of an item in inventory associated with a
task.
Case ID The case ID.
Pallet ID The pallet ID.
Item Classification The item classification of a task.
Note: A maximum of three item classifications displays
based on the Count Classifications configurations. This
displays only when the Activity Group is ‘Count’.
Table 41–15 Task Detail, Location
Fields
These columns list information that pertains to the Source (or origin) and the
Target (or destination) locations.
Zone The zone within the location associated with a task.
Aisle The aisle within the location associated with a task.
Location The identifier of the location associated with a task.
Sort Sequence The sorting sequence within the location associated
with a task.
Table 41–14 Task Detail, Inventory
Fields
![](asset-22d.png)
Complete Task
Task Console Screens 513
41.14 Complete Task
The Complete Task screen lets you mark a task as completed.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with a task, if
applicable.
Wave # The wave number associate with a task, if applicable.
Table 41–16 Task Detail, More Attributes
Fields
Start No Earlier Than The earliest date and time a task should be started.
Finish No Later Than The latest date and time a task should be completed.
Assigned To User ID The identifier of the user assigned to complete a task.
Predecessor Task ID The identifier of a task that must be completed before
the task that is displayed can be started.
Equipment ID The identifier of the equipment associated with a task.
Table 41–17 Task Detail, References
Fields
The references that are displayed vary according to the Activity Group utilized.
Batch # The batch number associated with a task, if applicable.
Container # The container number associated with a task, if
applicable.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with a task, if
applicable.
Wave # The wave number associate with a task, if applicable.
Table 41–15 Task Detail, Location
Fields
![](asset-22e.png)
514 User Guide
Complete Task
Table 41–18 Complete Task, Task
Fields
Node The node where a task takes place.
Enterprise The Enterprise that owns a task.
Task Type The name of a task type.
Completed By The name of the user who completed the task.
Choose the field and lookup icon to find the user name
that you want to use.
Table 41–19 Complete Task, Task List
Fields
Source Location Enter the source location where a task originates.
Target Location Enter the target location where a task originates.
Item ID The item ID associated with a specific task.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description The description of the item.
![](asset-22f.png)
Complete Task
Task Console Screens 515
Quantity Enter the quantity of inventory associated with a task.
Inventory Status Select the condition of the inventory associated with a
specific task.
Source Pallet Id Enter the source pallet ID associated with a specific
task.
Table 41–19 Complete Task, Task List
Serial No For serial-controlled items,
enter the serial number.
From Serial # The start serial number for the
serial range.
To Serial # The end serial number for the
serial range.
You can enter the tag details for a
tag-tracked item only if the node that is
performing the task is configured to
capture the tag attributes in all operation
performed within the node or if the buyer
on a shipment mandates it as a part of the
inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation:
Application Platform Configuration Guide.
Lot # For tag-controlled items, enter
the lot number.
Batch # For tag-controlled items, enter
the batch number.
Revision # For tag-controlled items, enter
the revision number.
Quantity For tag-controlled items, enter
the quantity of inventory
associated with the task.
![](asset-230.png)
516 User Guide
Summary Task Detail
Click Save to record the exception reason. Clicking Save after modifying
the Target Location and Quantity fields displays the Modification Reason
screen.
41.15 Modification Reason
The Modification Reason screen lets you enter the modification reason
code and reason text.
41.16 Summary Task Detail
The Summary Task Detail screen displays task summary details.
Source Case Id Enter the source case ID associated with a specific
task.
Target Pallet Id Enter the target pallet ID associated with a specific
task.
Note: In the Serial Entry screen when you click on Toggle
Serial Range button, you can enter the serial range.
Table 41–20 Complete Task Fields
Fields
Reason Code The code of the reason for modification.
Reason Text The description of the reason for modification.
Table 41–21 Summary Task Detail, Summary Task
Actions
Hold This action button takes you to the Hold Reason
screen.
Release This action button releases the task.
Table 41–19 Complete Task, Task List
![](asset-231.png)
Summary Task Detail
Task Console Screens 517
Cancel This action button takes you to the Cancel Task
Reason screen.
Complete This action button takes you to the Record Count
Result Details screen.
Update Count This action button takes you to the Record Count
Result Details screen where you can modify the count
result.
Fields
Node The node where a task takes place.
Enterprise The Enterprise that owns a task.
Task Type The name of a task type.
Task ID The task’s ID.
Task Status The status of a task.
Task Priority The priority of task.
Parent Task ID The task ID of the task’s parent.
Created On The date the task request was created.
Table 41–22 Summary Task Detail, Inventory
Fields
Case ID The case ID.
Pallet ID The pallet ID.
Table 41–23 Summary Task Detail, Location
Fields
These columns list information that pertains to the Source (or origin) and the
Target (or destination) locations.
Zone The zone within the location associated with a task.
Aisle The aisle within the location associated with a task.
Table 41–21 Summary Task Detail, Summary Task
![](asset-232.png)
518 User Guide
Task Status Details
41.17 Task Status Details
The Task Status Details screen lets you view the status of a task on hold.
Location The identifier of the location associated with a task.
Sort Sequence The sorting sequence within the location associated
with a task.
Table 41–24 Summary Task Detail, More Attributes
Fields
Start No Earlier Than The earliest date and time a task should be started.
Finish No Later Than The latest date and time a task should be completed.
Assigned To User ID The identifier of the user assigned to complete a task.
Predecessor Task ID The identifier of a task that must be completed before
the task that is displayed can be started.
Equipment ID The identifier of the equipment associated with a task.
Table 41–25 Task Status Details
Fields
Exception Hold Indicates that a task is on hold due to an exception.
Dependency Hold Indicates that a task is on hold due to a prior
dependency that must be completed.
Batch Hold Indicates that a task is on hold due to batching
reasons.
Hold Reason Code Displays the code associated with putting a task on
hold, if applicable.
Hold Reason Text Displays the description of why a task is on hold, if
applicable.
Table 41–23 Summary Task Detail, Location
Fields
![](asset-233.png)
Assign to User
Task Console Screens 519
41.18 Task Status Audits
The Task Status Audits screen lets you view the status audit trail of a
task.
41.19 Assign to User
The Assign to User screen lets you assign a task to a user.
Table 41–26 Task Status Audits, Task
Fields
Node The node where a task takes place.
Enterprise The Enterprise that owns a task.
Task Type The name of a task type.
Task ID The task’s ID.
Task Status The status of a task.
Task Priority The priority of task.
Parent Task ID The ID of the parent task.
Created On The date a task request was created.
Table 41–27 Task Status Audits, Task Status Audit
Fields
Modified On The date and time a task status changed.
User ID The ID of the user who changed a task status.
Old Status The status of a task before it was changed.
New Status The status a task was changed to.
Reason Code The reason code associated with the status change.
Reason Text The reason text associated with the status change.
Table 41–28 Task Status Audits, Task Status Audit
Field
Assign To Enter the identifier of the user to whom the task is
assigned.
![](asset-234.png)
520 User Guide
User List (selection)
41.20 User Search By All Attributes
The User Search By All Attributes lets you find a task user.
41.21 User List (selection)
This User List screen lets you select a user to whom a task is assigned.
Table 41–29 User Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node Choose a node to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose a task type to search for, if applicable.
User ID Enter a user ID to search for, if applicable.
User Name Enter a user name to search for, if applicable.
Only Logged In Users Check this if you want to narrow your search to
display only users that are currently logged in, if
applicable.
Zone Enter a zone to search for, if applicable.
Aisle Enter an aisle to search for, if applicable.
Source / Target /
Either For the zone and aisle you are searching for, choose
Source to specify an originating point, choose Target
to specify a destination point, or choose Either to
specify that they are either the source or target (or
both).
Max Records Enter the maximum number of users you want
returned from your search.
Table 41–30 User List (selection)
Fields
Node The node to which the user belongs.
User ID The ID of the person to perform tasks within the node.
User Name The name of the person that corresponds with a
specific User ID.
Login Status An icon displays if the user is logged in.
![](asset-235.png)
User Detail
Task Console Screens 521
41.22 Reprioritize
The Reprioritize screen lets you reprioritize a task.
41.23 Hold Reason
The Hold Reason screen lets you put a task on hold.
41.24 Cancel Task Reason
The Cancel Task Reason screen lets you cancel a task.
41.25 User Detail
The user Detail screen lets you view the tasks assigned to a user.
Table 41–31 Reprioritize
Fields
Priority Enter the new priority of the task.
Table 41–32 Hold Reason
Fields
Hold Reason Code Enter the code of the reason for putting the task on
hold.
Hold Reason Text Enter the reason for putting the task on hold.
Table 41–33 Cancel Task Reason
Fields
Reason Code Enter the code of the reason for cancelling the task.
Hold Reason Text Enter the reason for cancelling the task.
![](asset-236.png)
522 User Guide
User Detail
Table 41–34 User Detail, User
Fields
Organization The organization to which a user belongs.
User ID The ID of a person who performs tasks within the
node.
User Name The name of the person that corresponds with a
specific User ID.
Login Status The login status of a user.
Table 41–35 User Detail, User Task Types
Fields
Activity Group The activity groups to which a user belongs.
Task Type The task types associated with a user.
Priority The priority of tasks associated with a user.
Table 41–36 User Detail, User Zones
Fields
Zone The zones associated with a user.
Aisle The aisle associated with a user.
Type The type associated with a user.
![](asset-237.png)
Batch Search By All Attributes
Task Console Screens 523
41.26 Batch Search By All Attributes
The Batch Search By All Attributes screen lets you perform a batch
search.
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
While performing replenishment, if minimum and/or
maximum replenishment tasks are not available.
Cause
The Inventory Below Min and Inventory Below Current
Demand alerts are not selected. Also, all dedicated
locations are below minimum and non-dedicated locations
are below current demand.
Resolution
Ensure that the Inventory Below Min and Inventory Below
Current Demand alerts are selected. Additionally, all
dedicated locations should be above minimum and
non-dedicated locations above current demand.
Table 41–37 Batch Search By All Attributes
Fields
Node Select the appropriate node to search for. This is
mandatory.
Enterprise Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
Enterprise you want to use. Or choose Across
Enterprises to use of all the Enterprises.
Activity Group Choose an activity group to search for, if applicable.
Task Type Choose the task type to search for, if applicable.
Batch # Enter the batch number to search for, if applicable.
Batch Status Choose a batch status to search for, if applicable.
Equipment Type Enter an equipment type to search for, if applicable.
![](asset-238.png)
524 User Guide
Batch List
Click Search to view the search results in the Batch List screen.
41.27 Batch List
The Batch List screen displays the results of a task batch search.
Request # Enter a request number to search for, if applicable.
Wave # Enter a wave number to search for, if applicable.
Shipment # Enter a shipment number to search for, if applicable.
Search History Select this to search only history tasks, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of task batches you want
returned from your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 41–38 Batch List
Actions
View Details This action button takes you to the Batch Detail
screen.
Print This action button takes you to the Print Batch
screen.
Fields
Batch # The number associated with the batch.
Task Type The task type associated with the batch.
Batch Status The completion status of the batch.
Equipment Type The equipment associated with the batch.
Table 41–37 Batch Search By All Attributes
Fields
![](asset-239.png)
Batch Detail
Task Console Screens 525
41.28 Batch Detail
The Batch Detail screen lets you view batch details.
Table 41–39 Batch Detail, Batch
Actions
Complete This action button takes you to the Complete Batch
screen.
Print This action button takes you to the Print Batch
screen.
Fields
Node The node associated with a task batch.
Task Type The task type associated with a task batch.
Batch # The number associated with a task batch.
Batch Status The status associated with a task batch.
Equipment Type The equipment type associated with a task batch.
Created On The date a batch was created.
User ID The ID of the person who created the batch.
Table 41–40 Batch Detail, Task List
Actions
View Details This action button takes you to the Task Detail
screen.
Fields
Task ID The task ID of a specific task.
Task Type The task type of a specific task.
Task Status The current status of a task
Source Location The origin location of a specific task.
Target Location The destination location of a specific task.
Primary Reference The primary reference of a task.
![](asset-23a.png)
526 User Guide
Complete Batch
41.29 Complete Batch
The Complete Batch screen lets you mark a batch as completed.
Item ID The item ID associated with a specific task.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Quantity The item quantity associated with a specific task.
Table 41–41 Complete Batch
Fields
Source Location Enter the source location where a task originates.
Target Location Enter the target location where a task originates.
Item ID The item ID associated with a specific task.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description The description of the item.
Table 41–40 Batch Detail, Task List
![](asset-23b.png)
Complete Batch
Task Console Screens 527
Quantity Enter the quantity of inventory associated with a task.
Inventory Status Select the condition of the inventory associated with a
specific task.
Source Pallet Id While picking a pallet, enter the pallet ID of the pallet
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the pallet ID of the pallet
from which the item is picked.
Table 41–41 Complete Batch
Fields
Serial No For serial-controlled items,
enter the serial number.
From Serial # The start serial number for the
serial range.
To Serial # The end serial number for the
serial range.
You can enter the tag details for a tag-tracked
item only if the node that is performing the task
is configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operation performed within the node or if the
buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of
the inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Lot # For tag-controlled items, enter
the lot number.
Batch # For tag-controlled items, enter
the batch number.
Revision # For tag-controlled items, enter
the revision number.
Quantity For tag-controlled items, enter
the quantity of inventory
associated with the task.
![](asset-23c.png)
528 User Guide
Print Batch
41.30 Print Batch
The Print Batch screen lets you print batch details.
Source Case Id While picking a case, enter the case ID of the case
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the case ID of the case
from which the item is picked.
Target Pallet Id Enter the pallet ID of the pallet into which the item is
deposited.
Note: In the Serial Entry screen when you click on Toggle
Serial Range button, you can enter the serial range.
Table 41–42 Print Batch
Fields
Print Service Name Choose the print service name you want to print.
Printer Name Select the printer name you want to print from.
No. of Copies Enter the number of copies of batch list you want to
print.
Table 41–41 Complete Batch
Fields
![](asset-23d.png)
Confirm Batch Screens 529
42
Confirm Batch Screens
This chapter provides the field descriptions for the Confirm Batch screen.
42.1 Confirm Batch
You can confirm a batch with the help of this screen.
Table 42–1 Confirm Batch
Fields
Batch # Enter the batch number associated with the batch you
are confirming.
Target Location Enter the location where the batch is dropped off.
Choose the field and lookup option to find the specific
target location you want to use.
Target LPN No Enter the LPN number if the batch has been picked
onto an LPN.
User ID Enter the user ID associated with the batch you are
confirming.
This is automatically populated to the current user by
the system.
![](asset-23e.png)
530 User Guide
Complete Batch
1. Click the Confirm button to confirm the batch.
2. Click the Confirm with Details button to complete a batch with
details. This takes you to the Complete Batch screen.
42.2 Complete Batch
The Complete Batch screen allows you to complete a batch that is
confirmed with details.
Start No Earlier Than The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter different start date and time when the batch was
started, if applicable.
Finish No Later Than The current system date and time is automatically
populated.
Enter different finish date and time when the batch
was finished, if applicable.
Table 42–2 Complete Batch
Fields
Source Location Enter the source location where a task originates.
Target Location Enter the target location where a task originates.
Item ID The item ID associated with a specific task.
Product Class The item’s product class.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description The description of the item.
Table 42–1 Confirm Batch
Fields
![](asset-23f.png)
Complete Batch
Confirm Batch Screens 531
Quantity Enter the quantity of inventory associated with a task.
Inventory Status Select the condition of the inventory associated with a
specific task.
Source Pallet Id While picking a pallet, enter the pallet ID of the pallet
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the pallet ID of the pallet
from which the item is picked.
Source Case Id While picking a case, enter the case ID of the case
that is picked.
While picking an item enter the case ID of the case
from which the item is picked.
Table 42–2 Complete Batch
Fields
Serial No For serial-controlled items,
enter the serial number.
You can enter the tag details for a tag-controlled
item, if the node that is confirming a batch is
configured to capture the tag attributes in all
operations performed within the node, or if the
buyer on a shipment mandates it as a part of
the inbound compliance. For more information
about capturing the tag attributes, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform Configuration Guide.
Lot # For tag-controlled items, enter
the lot number.
Batch # For tag-controlled items, enter
the batch number.
Revision # For tag-controlled items, enter
the revision number.
Quantity For tag-controlled items, enter
the quantity of inventory
associated with the task.
![](asset-240.png)
532 User Guide
Modification Reason
Click the Save button to enter appropriate reasons for adjusting the quantity.
This takes you to the Modification Reason screen.
42.3 Modification Reason
Enter the appropriate reasons for adjusting the quantity.
Target Case Id Enter the Case ID of the case into which the item is
deposited.
Target Pallet Id Enter the pallet ID of the pallet into which the item is
deposited.
Table 42–3 Modification Reason
Fields
Reason Code Select the applicable exception reason code for the
modification.
Reason Text Enter any additional comments for the modification.
Table 42–2 Complete Batch
Fields
![](asset-241.png)
Record Count Screens 533
43
Record Count Screens
A warehouse operator records count task results to indicate the
completion of the count task that was assigned. During the process of
recording the count task results, the system automatically computes and
records the count variance.
The Record Count Results screen provides information about recording
the count results.
43.1 Recording Count Results
You can record count results to indicate the completion of a count task
operation with the help of this screen.
Click Proceed. The Record Count Result Details screen displays where
you can record the count task results.
Table 43–1 Record Count Results
Fields
Task ID The count task ID.
Location The location where the count was performed.
![](asset-242.png)
534 User Guide
Recording Count Results
![](asset-243.png)
Log Productivity Screens 535
44
Log Productivity Screens
The Sterling WMS provides the ability to record additional productivity
information. The manual entry of productivity is done for activities that
are done outside of the system but reflect the work done by the user.
Examples include stacking of shipping cartons, checking for consolidation
opportunities and physical check of aisles and locations for cleanliness.
The Log Productivity screen enables you to create productivity.
44.1 Log Productivity
Use this screen to create productivity.
Table 44–1 Log Productivity
Fields
Node Node associated with the productivity.
Enterprise Enter or select the enterprise associated with the
productivity.
Productivity Type Enter the productivity type associated with the
productivity.
Choose the field and lookup icon to go search for the
productivity type. For more information, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application
Platform User Guide.
User Enter the user ID associated with the productivity
Execution Date Enter the date on which the tasks were performed.
![](asset-245.png)
Productivity Console Screens 537
45
Productivity Console Screens
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for all Productivity
Console screens.
45.1 Productivity Search By Productivity Type
You can search for productivity that fall within a particular productivity
type with the help of this screen.
Table 45–1 Productivity Search By Productivity Type
Fields
Node The node associated with productivity.
Enterprise Select the enterprise you are searching for.
Across Enterprises Select this option if you are searching across all
enterprises.
Productivity Type Enter the productivity type you want to search for, if
applicable.
User ID Enter the user ID associated with the productivity you
want to search for, if applicable.
Date of Execution Enter the date range of productivity execution, if
applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
![](asset-246.png)
538 User Guide
Productivity List
The Productivity List screen displays as a result of this search.
45.2 Productivity List
The Productivity List window displays the results of a productivity search.
You can perform actions on a single productivity type or multiple
productivity types by selecting the check boxes of the productivity types
you want to perform an action on and choosing the applicable action
from the action bar.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 45–2 Productivity List
Actions
View Details This action takes you to the Productivity Details screen
where you can modify the productivity details.
Delete This action allows you to delete the selected
productivity.
Fields
Productivity Type The productivity type associated with the productivity.
Description A brief description of the productivity type.
User ID The user associated with the productivity.
Enterprise The enterprise associated with the productivity.
Execution Date The date on which the tasks were performed.
Start Time The start time of the task included in the productivity
batch.
![](asset-247.png)
Productivity Details
Productivity Console Screens 539
45.3 Productivity Details
You can modify the productivity details with the help of this screen.
End Time The end time of the task included in the productivity
batch.
Credited Time Time credited to the user to perform the task.
This value is based on the calculations from the
Standard Allowable Minutes (SAM) details for the
productivity type.
Table 45–3 Productivity Details, Productivity
Fields
Node The node associated with the productivity.
Enterprise Code The enterprise associated with the productivity.
Productivity Type The productivity type associated with the productivity.
User ID The user who performed the tasks.
Execution Date The date on which the tasks were performed.
Credited Time The time credited to the user to perform the tasks.
Table 45–4 Productivity Details, Productivity Metrics
Fields
No. of Pallets Number of pallets handled by the user.
No. of Cases Number of cases handled by the user.
No. of Items Number of items handled by the user.
No. of Units Number of units handled by the user.
No. of Tasks Number of tasks handled by the user.
No. of Source Aisles
Visited Number of source aisles visited by the user.
Table 45–2 Productivity List
![](asset-248.png)
540 User Guide
Productivity Details
No. of Target Aisles
Visited Number of target aisles visited by the user.
No. of Source Location
Visited Number of source locations visited by the user.
No. of Target Location
Visited Number of target locations visited by the user.
Start Time The start time of the task included in the productivity
batch.
End Time The end time of the task included in the productivity
batch.
Table 45–5 Productivity Details, Productivity References
Fields
Request # The request number associated with the productivity
reference.
Order # The order number associated with the productivity
reference.
Receipt # The receipt number associated with the productivity
reference.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the productivity
reference.
Batch # The batch number associated with the productivity
reference.
Carrier The carrier code associated with the productivity
reference.
Load # The load number associated with the productivity
reference.
Bol # The bill of lading number associated with the
productivity reference.
Trailer # The trailer number associated with the productivity
reference.
Table 45–4 Productivity Details, Productivity Metrics
Fields
![](asset-249.png)
Productivity Details
Productivity Console Screens 541
Manifest # The manifest number associated with the productivity
reference.
Item Classification
code The classification code associated with the productivity
reference.
Release # The release number associated with the productivity
reference.
Prime Line # The order line number associated with the productivity
reference.
Sub Line # The order-sub-line number associated with the
productivity reference. For example, kit components
have the same prime line number, but different sub
line numbers for each of the components.
Wave # The wave number associated with productivity
reference.
Wave Date The date on which the wave was released.
Container # The container number associated with the productivity
reference.
Note: The field values displayed vary depending on the
productivity type selected.
Table 45–5 Productivity Details, Productivity References
Fields
![](asset-24a.png)
542 User Guide
Productivity Details
![](asset-24b.png)
Derive Labor Standards Screens 543
46
Derive Labor Standards Screens
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation provides the ability to automatically
derive labor standards or Standard Allowable Minutes (SAM) based on
the historical data of tasks or activities performed by warehouse users
over a period of time. The Derive Labor Standards console enables you to
derive labor standards for a productivity type at a specified time.
Some of the parameters taken into account when deriving the labor
standards are:
QTime spent by the user to complete the task
QNumber of tasks completed in the given period of time
QDistance covered by the user when executing the task
QNumber of source and/or target locations visited by the user
QThe weight borne by the user when executing the task
QNumber of cases or pallets picked
QNumber of items picked
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for the Derive
Labor Standards screens.
46.1 Activities Search By Date Range
You can search for activities that fall within a particular productivity type
on this screen.
![](asset-24c.png)
544 User Guide
Productivity Type List
The Productivity Type List screen displays as a result of this search.
46.2 Productivity Type List
The Productivity Type List window provides visibility to productivity types
associated with the activity.
Table 46–1 Activities Search By Date Range
Fields Description
Node The node associated with the productivity.
Productivity Type Enter the productivity type for which you want to
search, if applicable.
Start Date Enter the start date for the time period to be
considered for calculating the productivity.
This field is mandatory.
End Date Enter the end date for the time period to be
considered for calculating the productivity.
This field is mandatory.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
a result of your search.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 46–2 Productivity Type List
Actions
View Summary This action takes you to the Productivity Summary
screen where you can view the productivity details.
Fields
![](asset-24d.png)
Productivity Summary
Derive Labor Standards Screens 545
46.3 Productivity Summary
You can view the productivity details on this screen.
Productivity Type The productivity type.
Click to view the productivity types associated with
this equipment type.
Description A brief description of the productivity type.
SAM Defined On The date and time when the SAM for the productivity
type was last modified.
SAM Defined By The user who last modified the SAM for the
productivity type.
Table 46–3 Productivity Summary, Productivity Type
Actions
Compute SAM This action takes you to the Derive Labor Standards,
Compute SAM Action screen, which enables you to
compute the SAM for the productivity type.
Fields
Node The node associated with the productivity.
Productivity Type The productivity type.
Description A brief description of the productivity type.
Equipment Type The equipment type associated with the productivity
type.
Table 46–2 Productivity Type List
SAM Defined On The date and time when SAM
was last modified.
SAM Defined By The user who last modified
SAM.
Equipment Type The equipment type associated
with the productivity type.
![](asset-24e.png)
546 User Guide
Productivity Summary
Start Date The start date for the time period to be considered for
calculating the productivity.
End Date The end date for the time period to be considered for
calculating the productivity.
Table 46–4 Productivity Summary, User List
Fields Description
User Name The identifier of the user who performed the tasks.
Credited Minutes The time (in minutes) credited to the user.
Efficiency % The percentage of the user’s efficiency. The user
efficiency is calculated by dividing the time (in
minutes) credited to the user by the total time (in
minutes) taken to complete the task. The credited
time is computed based on the old SAM values.
Estimated Efficiency % The percentage of the user’s estimated efficiency. The
user efficiency is calculated by dividing the time (in
minutes) credited to the user by the total time (in
minutes) taken to complete the task. The credited
time is computed based on derived SAM values.
Table 46–5 Productivity Summary, Execution SAM Estimates
Fields Description
SAM Indicates the standard allowable minutes associated
with the productivity type.
Current Value The current SAM value of the productivity type.
Estimated Value The estimated SAM value of the productivity type.
Table 46–3 Productivity Summary, Productivity Type
![](asset-24f.png)
Derive Labor Standards
Derive Labor Standards Screens 547
46.4 Derive Labor Standards
This screen aids you in deriving the labor standards.
Table 46–6 Productivity Summary, Planning SAM Estimates
Fields Description
SAM Indicates the standard allowable minutes associated
with the productivity type.
Current Value The current SAM value of the productivity type.
Estimated Value The estimated SAM value of the productivity type.
Table 46–7 Derive Labor Standards, Compute SAM Action
Fields Description
Derive Execution
Standards Check this box to derive execution standards.
Derive Planning
Standards Check this box to derive planning standards.
Consider Selected
User(s) % Efficient Enter the values of efficiency percentages for the
selected users.
![](asset-250.png)
548 User Guide
Derive Labor Standards
![](asset-251.png)
User Time Sheet Screens 549
47
User Time Sheet Screens
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation provides the ability to view
productivity information based on the amount of time spent by users on
the various tasks they performed during a given period of time.
This chapter provides the screen and field descriptions for the User Time
Sheet screens.
47.1 User Time Sheet Search By User
The User Time Sheet Search By User screen lets you enter the criteria to
search for a specific user’s time sheet.
Table 47–1 User Time Sheet Search By User
Field Description
Node The node to which the user belongs.
User ID Enter the identifier of the user.
Note: If you do not enter the user ID, the time sheet
displays all users for the selected date.
Date Enter the date for which you want to calculate the
time sheet.
Enter Date Range Click to enter the date range for which you want to
view the user time sheet.
Date of Execution Enter the date range for which you want to complete
the time sheet, if applicable.
Max Records Enter the maximum number of records to be listed as
as a result of your search.
![](asset-252.png)
550 User Guide
Time Sheet
The Time Sheet screen displays as a result of your search.
47.2 Time Sheet
The Time Sheet screen provides visibility to the time spent by users to
perform various tasks during the selected date range. This screen
displays the time slot in colored boxes in a table based on the activity
group to which the task belongs.
Note: Do not use spaces before or after any text you
enter in the search fields, as this may result in inconsistent
or inaccurate results.
Table 47–2 Time Sheet,
Field Description
User Displays the identifier of the user associated with the
time sheet.
Date (s) The date for which the time sheet is calculated.
Utilization % The percentage of the user’s utilization. This is
calculated as:
Utilization% = The amount of time spent by the user
performing the tasks/ the number of hours defined per
day * 100.
Table 47–3 Time Sheet, Legend
Indicates unavailable time slots.
Indicates time slots for put away.
Indicates time slots for replenishment.
Indicates time slots for retrieval.
![](asset-253.png)
Time Sheet
User Time Sheet Screens 551
Indicates time slots for picking.
Indicates time slots for receipt.
Indicates time slots for count.
Indicates time slots for VAS.
Indicates time slots for packing.
Indicates time slots for outbound inventory container
build.
Indicates time slots for shipping container build.
Indicates time slots for shipping.
Indicates time slots for inspection.
Indicates time slots for transportation.
Indicates time slots for login.
Indicates idle time slots.
Table 47–3 Time Sheet, Legend
![](asset-254.png)
552 User Guide
Time Sheet
![](asset-255.png)
Resource Planning Screens 553
48
Resource Planning Screens
The Resource Planning tool provides a warehouse with the ability to plan
for expected workload and determine the number of resources that is
required to complete all activities. Having provided visibility to the
expected resources, warehouse personnel can accurately plan for
overtime, temporary staffing, and so forth thus optimizing the resource
costs.
Resource planning console provides:
QComprehensive visibility to standard capacities.
QAbility to foresee demand and capacity.
QAbility to recognize the availability of resources on selected dates.
QAbility to move resources between various resource pools depending
on the viability.
QAbility to assign extended shifts to various resources based on
demand.
QAbility to push demands to a further date depending on resources and
requested ship dates.
48.1 Defining Standard Capacity
You can define a standard capacity for different resource pools based on
the effective start and end dates, units of measure, and so forth.
![](asset-256.png)
554 User Guide
Defining Standard Capacity
48.1.1 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details
You can view and override the standard capacity details.
Table 48–1 Defining Standard Capacity
Fields
Resource Pool Select the resource pool from the drop-down list for
which you want to define the standard capacity.
Table 48–2 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Resource
Pool
Fields
Resource Pool The resource pool for which the standard capacity is
defined.
Resource Pool
Description The description of the resource pool.
Node The ship node associated with the resource pool.
Capacity Organization The capacity organization defined for the selected
resource pool.
Supervisor ID The identifier of the supervisor.
Table 48–3 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Current
Standard Capacity
Fields
Effective Start Date Enter the start date for which you want to define the
standard capacity.
![](asset-257.png)
Defining Standard Capacity
Resource Planning Screens 555
Effective End Date Enter the end date for which you want to define the
standard capacity.
Table 48–4 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Standard
Capacity Periods
Actions
View Standard
Capacity This action takes you to the Resource Pool Standard
Capacity Details.
Create New This action takes you to the Resource Pool Standard
Capacity Period.
Delete This action deletes the selected standard capacity
periods.
Fields
Start Date Enter the date on which you want to begin the period
for standard capacity.
End Date Enter the date on which you want to end the period for
standard capacity.
Table 48–3 Resource Pool Current Standard Capacity Details, Current
Standard Capacity
Fields
Fields
Slot The name of the slots
available in a warehouse.
Start Time The time at which the slot
begins.
End Time The time at which the slot
ends.
Copy From Enter the value of
capacities you want to
copy to the selected days
of the week.
Days of the Week The capacity of each slot
on all days of the week.
![](asset-258.png)
556 User Guide
Defining Standard Capacity
48.1.1.1 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details
You can view the standard capacity details.
48.1.1.2 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period
You can view the standard capacity period details.
Table 48–5 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details, Resource Pool
Fields
Resource Pool The resource pool for which the standard capacity is
defined.
Resource Pool
Description The description of the resource pool.
Node The node associated with the resource pool.
Capacity Organization The capacity organization defined for the selected
resource pool.
Supervisor ID The identifier of the supervisor of the resource pool.
Table 48–6 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Details, Standard
Capacities
Actions
Copy Capacity This action copies the capacity entered in the "copy
from" field to the selected days of the week.
Fields
Effective Start Date Enter the date on which you want to begin the
standard capacity period.
Effective End Date Enter the date on which you want to end the standard
capacity period.
![](asset-259.png)
Planning Resources
Resource Planning Screens 557
48.2 Planning Resources
You can use the screens described in the following sections to view and
deploy resources optimally to meet the demand.
48.2.1 Resource Planning Capacity Search
You can search for resource demand and capacity and view an overview
by date.
Table 48–7 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period, Resource Pool
Fields
Resource Pool The resource pool for which the standard capacity is
defined.
Resource Pool
Description The description of the resource pool.
Node The node associated with the resource pool.
Capacity Organization The capacity organization defined for the selected
resource pool.
Supervisor ID The identifier of the supervisor.
Table 48–8 Resource Pool Standard Capacity Period, Standard Capacity
Period
Fields
Effective Start Date Enter the date on which you want to begin the
standard capacity period.
Effective End Date Enter the date on which you want to end the standard
capacity period.
![](asset-25a.png)
558 User Guide
Planning Resources
48.2.2 Resource Planning Screen
You can view the details of capacity and demand for various resource
pools.
Table 48–9 Capacity Search
Fields
Node Enter the ship node.
Start Date Enter the date for which you want to view the
capacity.
# of Days Displays the number of days for which you can view
the capacity details based on the start date.
By default, the system displays 7 days.
Show Demand and
Capacity Data in Choose the appropriate unit of measure in which you
want the demand and capacity details to display.
Based on the configuration, the default unit of
measure displays.
Consider Pending Task Check this box if you want to consider all pending
tasks to be completed and included as backlog
demands for the selected day.
Fields
Work Hours The unit of measure of
the capacity in hours.
Work Day The unit of measure of
the capacity in days.
![](asset-25b.png)
Planning Resources
Resource Planning Screens 559
Figure 48–1 Capacity vs Demand
Table 48–10 Resource Planning, Capacity vs Demand
Action
View Details This action takes you to the Planning Summary screen
where you can view the overridden default deployment
of the resources and confirm your plan.
Fields
HR Displays the capacity and demand in hours for the
selected date.
Resource Pools Displays the capacity and demand of different
resource pools for the selected date.
The capacity is displayed in this color.
The demand is displayed in this color.
![](asset-25c.png)
560 User Guide
Planning Resources
48.2.3 Capacity Details
You can view the capacity details for the selected date. You can also
move resources from other resource pools depending on the capacity.
Table 48–11 Resource Planning, Plan Resources
Action
Standard Capacity This action takes you to the Resource Pool Current
Standard Capacity Details screen when you choose the
appropriate resource pool for which you want to define
the standard capacity.
Fields
Resource Pool The list of different resource pools for a node.
Measure The measure of demand and capacity.
When you select the capacity for a day, the capacity
details screen displays for the selected day.
When you select the demand for a day, the demand
details screen displays for the selected day.
Days of the Week The demand and capacity measures for the selected
days of the week.
Note: The selected days of the week are highlighted.
Table 48–12 Capacity Details Screen, Resource Pool Details
Fields
Resource Pool The resource pool for which you want to view the
capacity details.
Date The date on which you want to view the capacity
details.
Demand The demand for a selected resource pool on a chosen
date.
Planned Capacity The capacity planned for a selected resource pool.
Allocated Capacity The sum of capacities for resources within a resource
pool.
![](asset-25d.png)
Planning Resources
Resource Planning Screens 561
Table 48–13 Capacity Detail Screen, Capacity Distribution
Fields
Shift The name of the shift defined for the warehouse.
Planned Capacity The capacity planned for a selected resource pool
during a particular shift.
Allocated Capacity The sum of capacities for resources within a resource
pool during a particular shift.
Excess The excess capacity when the allocated capacity is
higher than the planned capacity.
Shortage The capacity shortage when the allocated capacity is
lower than the planned capacity.
Table 48–14 Capacity Detail Screen, Other Resource Pools
Action
Pull Resources This action takes you to Transfer Resources Screen
that displays the source and target resource pools for
the selected resources.
You can transfer resources from the current resource
pool to the target resource pool.
Fields
Pool Name The name of the resource pool from where you want
to pull the resources.
Allocated Capacity The allocated capacity of resources within the selected
resource pool.
Planned Capacity
(Demand) The planned capacity and the existing demand for the
resource pool on the selected date.
Excess Capacity The capacity in excess within the resource pool on the
selected date.
![](asset-25e.png)
562 User Guide
Planning Resources
48.2.3.1 Transfer Resources Screen
This screen enables you to move resources between various resource
pools.
Table 48–15 Capacity Detail Screen, Member Resources
Action
Assign Shift This action takes you to Assign Shifts Screen where
you can assign shifts to each resource.
Fields
Resource The list of resources within the current resource pool.
Start Time The time when the resource begins the work.
End Time The time when the resource ends the work.
Total Hours The total hours of the resource capacity within the
resource pool.
Table 48–16 Capacity Detail Screen, Pull Resources Action, Transfer
Resources
Fields
Current Resource Pool The resource pool from where you want to move
resources.
Target Resource Pool The resource pool to where you want to move
resources.
Override Shifts Check this box if you want to override the time range
for a shift.
Table 48–17 Capacity Detail Screen, Transfer Resources, Assign Shift
Fields
Shift Displays the shift to which the user belongs.
Start Time The time when the shift begins.
End Time The time when the shift ends.
Assigned Check this box to assign shifts to resources.
![](asset-25f.png)
Planning Resources
Resource Planning Screens 563
48.2.3.2 Assign Shifts Screen
This screen enables you to assign shifts to resources.
48.2.4 Demand Details
You can view demands for each resource pool. You can also move
demands to further dates based on the resource and requested ship
date.
Table 48–18 Capacity Detail Screen, Assign Shift Action
Fields
Shift Displays the capacity for each shift.
Start Time The time when the shift begins.
End Time The time when the shift ends.
Assigned Check this box to assign shifts to resources.
Table 48–19 Demand Details Screen, Resource Pool Details
Fields
Resource Pool The resource pool for which you want to view the
demand details.
Date The date chosen to view the demand details.
Planned Capacity The standard capacity defined for a resource pool.
Allocated Capacity The sum of capacities of the resources within a
resource pool.
Today’s Demand Details
Field
#Shipments The number of
shipments.
#Shipments Lines The number of
shipment lines.
Total Hours The total effort
required in hours.
Total Days The total effort
required in days.
![](asset-260.png)
564 User Guide
Planning Resources
Figure 48–2 Resource Availability
48.2.4.1 Demand Search Panel
You can search for demand based on your required constraints.
Table 48–20 Resource Availability, Hours vs Days
Fields
Hours The availability of a resource in hours.
Days The availability of a resource on various days.
Table 48–21 Demand Search Screen
Fields
Document Type Select the appropriate document type.
Valid values include: Sales Order and Transfer Order.
Node The node associated with the resource pool.
Enterprise Select the enterprise to which you want to move
demands from the drop-down list.
Buyer Enter the organization of the buyer.
Ship Mode Select the mode of shipment from the drop-down list.
$Value The cost of the shipment in dollars.
![](asset-261.png)
Planning Resources
Resource Planning Screens 565
Service The service used to ship the shipment.
Pack and Hold Only Check this box to search for demands considering only
pack and hold shipments.
Requested Delivery
Date Enter the requested delivery date for which you want
search the demands.
To Enter the requested delivery date on which you want
to end the search for demand.
Status Select the from status of the task for demand search
from the drop-down list.
To Select the to status of the task for performing a
demand search from the drop-down list.
Held Shipments With
Hold Type Check this box to view demands for shipments that
are held with hold type.
Order Type The type of the order.
You can customize this field, if applicable.
Only Planned
Shipments Choose this option to search for demands considering
only planned shipments.
Only Unplanned
Shipments Choose this option to search for demands considering
only unplanned shipments.
All Shipments Choose this option to search for demands considering
all shipments.
Table 48–22 Demand Search Screen, Demand Break-up by Requested
Ship Date
Fields
Measure The different measures across requested ship dates.
Total The total demand across requested ship dates.
Backlog The demand that was not fulfilled on the previous date
and is carried over.
High Date The date that is not determined for the demand.
Table 48–21 Demand Search Screen
Fields
![](asset-262.png)
566 User Guide
Planning Resources
48.2.4.2 Move
This screen enables you to move the shipments on a chosen date.
48.2.5 Planning Summary
This screen aids in confirming your plan after viewing the edits that are
made to the resources.
Days of the week The demand across each day of the week.
This icon takes you to the Move screen. You can push
demands to appropriate date.
Table 48–23 Move Shipments
Fields
For Shipments with
Requested Ship Date This displays the date chosen to move the demands.
Move Choose the appropriate task you want to move.
amounting to... Enter the number of hours or shipments that is to be
moved to a chosen date.
To Date Enter the date to which you want to move the
shipments.
Table 48–22 Demand Search Screen, Demand Break-up by Requested
Ship Date
Fields
Field
Pick Tasks Choose this option to move
pick tasks on the selected
date.
Ship Tasks Choose this option to move
ship tasks on the selected
date.
All Tasks Choose this option to move
all tasks on the selected
date.
![](asset-263.png)
Planning Resources
Resource Planning Screens 567
Table 48–24 Planning Summary Screen
Action
Confirm Plan This action enables you to confirm a plan.
Field
Show Only Overridden
Resources Check this box if you want to see the resources that
are overridden.
Note: The overridden fields are highlighted.
Resource Pool The resource pool that
is overridden.
Shift The shift that is
overridden.
Resource The resource that is
overridden.
Total Working Hours The total working
hours that are
overridden.
![](asset-264.png)
568 User Guide
Planning Resources
![](asset-265.png)
Sterling WMS Prints 569
A
Sterling WMS Prints
This appendix describes the various documents (labels or reports) that
are printed daily in a warehouse as and when requested or when initiated
by the occurrence of specific events. For more information about prints,
see the Sterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.
The Sterling WMS provides the following prints:
QPacking Slip
QUCC-128 Container Shipping Label
QTask List
QBill Of Lading
QFedEx Carrier Label
QReprint Carrier Label
QCount Sheet
QWave Release
QHazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels
![](asset-266.png)
570 User Guide
Packing Slip
A.1 Packing Slip
A Packing Slip displays packed shipment lines that are ready to be
shipped. On packing the last carton, the system automatically prints the
packing slip.
On selecting the "PrintPackList" service, you can print the packing slip
from Outbound Shipment Console.
The default packing slip that the Sterling WMS print displays here:
Troubleshooting Tip:
Problem
QWhen you configure Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
to print on Loftware in TCP/IP sockets - WAIT mode,
the f o llowin g error messa g e displ a y s :
An unexpected error has occurred on the LPS: The
maximum allowable clients have been exceeded!
Rejecting login!
QWhen you configure Selling and Fulfillment Foundation
to print on Loftware in TCP/IP sockets - NOWAIT mode,
the screen from which you requested for a print hangs.
Cause
Loftware Client Licenses have exceeded.
Resolution
Restart the Loftware Print Server ensuring that the
Loftware Print Server client licenses are not exceeded.
Note that every instance of Selling and Fulfillment
Foundation communicating with the Loftware Print Server
consumes one Loftware Client License.
![](asset-267.png)
Packing Slip
Sterling WMS Prints 571
The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the Packing Slip custom
label format for an Enterprise, Seller Organization, and Buyer
Organization. For more information about print preferences, see the
section Defining Participant Print Preferences in the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-268.png)
572 User Guide
Packing Slip
Table A–1 Packing Slip
Fields
SHIP FROM The ship from address.
Date The ship by date.
SHIPPER # The barcode associated with the shipment
number is printed.
Mark For The mark for address associated with the
shipment.
SHIP TO The address to which the shipment is to be
shipped to.
BILL TO The address to which the shipment is to be billed
to.
CARRIER The carrier used to ship the containers.
FREIGHT TERMS The freight terms used for the shipment. Valid
values include TPB-Third Party Billing,
COL-Collect and PRE-Prepaid.
Special Instructions Special instructions associated with the SHIP
type is printed, if any.
Picking Instructions Picking instructions specify the cart location and
batch number for a shipment that is not
containerized. The shipment is directly loaded
onto a cart.
Cart Location The location assigned to a
shipment in the cart.
Batch No The batch number to which
the shipment belongs.
![](asset-269.png)
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
Sterling WMS Prints 573
A.2 UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
The UCC-128 Container Shipping Label provides visibility into the
container contents and enables to track the container status.
The UCC-128 Container Shipping Label is printed during:
QPacking
QWave Release
On selecting the "PrintShippingLabel" service, you can request for a
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label print from:
QOutbound Shipment Console
QOutbound Container Console
Using Sterling WMS you can print container labels for a single and
multiple SKU containers.
The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the UCC-128 Container
Shipping custom label format for a Buyer Organization. For more
information about print preferences, see the section Defining Participant
Print Preferences in the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.
Table A–2 Packing Slip, SHIPPING INFORMATION
Fields
Line The item’s line number.
Cust PO# The customer’s purchase order number.
Product No The item ID.
Cust Item No The customer’s item ID.
Description The item’s description.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Qty Ord The ordered quantity.
Qty Ship The shipped quantity.
Qty B/O The backordered quantity.
![](asset-26a.png)
574 User Guide
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
A.2.1 Container Label Single SKU
The default UCC-128 Container Label format for a single SKU container is
displayed below:
![](asset-26b.png)
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
Sterling WMS Prints 575
Table A–3 Container Label Single SKU
Fields
FROM The ship from address.
TO The ship to address.
SHIP TO POST The carrier routing bar code.
CARRIER The carrier used to ship the container.
SHIPMENT # The shipment number to which the container
belongs.
TRACKING The tracking number assigned to the container to
track the container status and location of the
container.
Note: The tracking number is used for Parcel
Shipments.
BATCH The batch number to which the container
belongs.
Slot No The slot in which the container is placed.
PO The purchase order number to which the
shipment belongs.
DEPT The department code associated with the
shipment, if any.
ITEM The item ID.
CUST SKU The customer’s ID for the item.
QTY The item quantity contained in the container.
FOR The FOR - Barcode associated with any sorting
done at or for the destination address. Typically,
this has the store number when the ship-to
address is a merge point for the customer.
![](asset-26c.png)
576 User Guide
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
A.2.2 Container Label Multi SKU
The default Container Label format for multiple SKU containers is
displayed below:
MARK FOR This is in human readable format indicating the
sort performed for or at the destination address.
Typically, store number, or name of the person,
or department is printed.
SSCC The Serial Shipping Container Code (SSCC) bar
code used to track the container and its
contents.
The SSCC is a 20 digit code comprising of the
sellers EAN/UCC number and a sequence
number. It is a mandatory field for UCC/EAN
compliance.
Note: Depending on the carrier used, the TRACKING, PRO
and TRAILER field values are printed on the shipping label.
Table A–3 Container Label Single SKU
Fields
![](asset-26d.png)
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
Sterling WMS Prints 577
Table A–4 Container Label Multi SKU
Fields
FROM The ship from address.
TO The ship to address.
SHIP TO POST The carrier routing bar code.
CARRIER The carrier used to ship the container.
![](asset-26e.png)
578 User Guide
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label
SHIPMENT # The shipment number to which the container
belongs.
BATCH The batch number to which the container belong.
Slot No The slot in which the container is placed.
PO The purchase order number to which the
shipment belongs to.
DEPT The department code associated with the
shipment, if any.
ITEM The item ID.
CUST SKU The customer’s ID for the item.
QTY The item quantity contained in the container.
FOR The FOR - Barcode associated with any sorting
done at or for the destination address. Typically,
this has the store number when the ship-to
address is a merge point for the customer.
MARK FOR This is in human readable format indicating the
sort performed for or at the destination address.
Typically, store number, or name of the person,
or department is printed.
SSCC The Serial Shipping Container Code (SSCC) bar
code used to track the container and its
contents.
The SSCC is a 20 digit code comprising of the
sellers EAN/UCC number and a sequence
number. It is a mandatory field for UCC/EAN
compliance.
Note: Depending on the carrier used, the TRACKING, PRO
and TRAILER field values get printed in the shipping label.
Table A–4 Container Label Multi SKU
Fields
![](asset-26f.png)
Task List
Sterling WMS Prints 579
A.3 Task List
The Task List provides a list of tasks that the user needs to complete in
one trip. The Sterling WMS can be configured to automatically print the
Task List during putaway, replenishment and batch pick. You can print
the Task List from the Batch Console.
The Sterling WMS has two types of task list formats pre-packaged:
QItem Pick Task List (Simple)
QCart Manifest Task List (Requires Sorting of Inventory During Pick)
The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the Task List custom label
format for an Equipment Type. For more information about print
preferences, see the section Defining Print Format Preferences in the
Sterling Warehouse Management System: Configuration Guide.
A.3.1 Item Pick Task List (Simple)
The default Item Pick Task List label format is displayed below:
![](asset-270.png)
580 User Guide
Task List
Table A–5 Item Pick Task List
Fields
WHSE The warehouse where tasks were performed.
BATCH # The batch number associated with the task.
Wave # The wave number associated with the task.
The wave number gets printed if the batch is
associated with a wave.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the task.
The shipment number gets printed if the batch
belongs to a single shipment.
The bar
code of
item pick
task sheet
Batch
Number
![](asset-271.png)
Task List
Sterling WMS Prints 581
A.3.2 Cart Manifest Task List (Requires Sorting of
Inventory During Pick)
The Cart Manifest Task List is printed if the equipment type associated
with the batch contains multiple locations.
The default Cart Manifest Task List label format is displayed below:
Request # The move request number.
The request number gets printed if the batch is
associated with a move request.
Pallet ID The pallet LPN from which the item is picked.
From Location/ From
LPN The location or LPN from where the item is
picked.
Item/Serial No The item’s item ID or serial number.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
Item Description The item’s description.
Qty The total item quantity to be picked.
To Location The location where the items should be
deposited.
Tag Details The item’s tag details, such as lot number, batch
number, and revision number.
Picked By The user who performed the tasks.
Checked By The user who inspected the items.
Confirmed By The user who confirmed the tasks.
Table A–5 Item Pick Task List
Fields
![](asset-272.png)
582 User Guide
Task List
Important: If the cart locations are less than or equal to
eight slots, configure two slots for each location.
Otherwise, configure one slot per location.
Table A–6 Cart Manifest Task List
Fields
WHSE The warehouse where tasks were performed.
BATCH # The batch number associated with the cart
manifest batch sheet.
The bar
code of
cart
manifest
task list
The slots
in each cart
![](asset-273.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 583
A.4 Bill Of Lading
The Bill Of Lading (BOL) provides inventory processing information
through supply chain to a shipper, carrier and customer.
The Sterling WMS allows the configuration of the BOL custom label
format for a carrier, shipper and consignee. By default, the system prints
3 copies of BOL labels every time you print the label. If the copy is
meant for the carrier, Carrier Copy is printed on the label. Similarly, for
shipper, Shipper Copy is printed, and for a consignee, Consignee Copy is
printed.
For more information about print preferences, see the Defining
Participant Print Preferences section in the chapter Configuring System
Administration in the Sterling Warehouse Management System:
Configuration Guide.
Wave # The wave number associated with the cart
manifest batch.
Shipment # The shipment number associated with the cart
manifest batch.
The shipment number gets printed if the batch
belongs to a single shipment.
Cart Location The slot in which the item should be placed.
Carton Size The size of the carton in the current slot.
Location The pick location from where the items have to
be picked.
Item The item’s description.
UOM The item’s unit of measure.
QTY The total item quantity to be picked.
Picked By The user who performed the tasks.
Checked By The user who inspected the items.
Confirmed By The user who confirmed the tasks.
Table A–6 Cart Manifest Task List
Fields
![](asset-274.png)
584 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
Using the Sterling WMS you can print:
QVICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment and/or Hazmat Bill Of Lading
QVICS Bill Of Lading for Load and/or Hazmat Bill Of Lading
The VICS Standard Bill Of Lading document can be found at:
www.vics.org/standards/bol/vics_bol_2004.doc
A.4.1 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment
On selecting the "PrintShipmentBOL" service, you can print the VICS BOL
for Shipment from the Outbound Shipment Console.
For example, the default carrier copy of VICS BOL for Shipment label
format is as follows:
![](asset-275.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 585
Table A–7 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields
Name The company that is shipping the product.
Address The shipper’s street address.
City/State/ZIP The shipper’s city, state, and zip code.
The BOL and SCAC/Pro
Bar Code number
Indicates that this copy
is maintained by the
carrier.
![](asset-276.png)
586 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
SID# The shipment ID number applied by the shipper
to this shipment.
FOB Indicates the FOB freight term used for the
shipment.
Bill of Lading
Number The bill of lading number created by the shipper
to identify the shipment.
Table A–8 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields
Location # The location number assigned to the consignee’s
ship to address.
Name The company where the product has to be
shipped to.
Address The company’s address.
City/State/ZIP The company’s city, state, and zip code.
CID# The consignee ID number applied by the
consignee to this shipment.
FOB Indicates the FOB freight term used for the
shipment.
CARRIER NAME The carrier picking up the shipment.
Trailer number The shipment’s trailer number.
The trailer number is used if the truckload carrier
hauls the shipment.
Seal numbers The shipment’s seal number.
The seal number is used if the shipment is full
truckloaded from the origin to destination.
Table A–7 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields
![](asset-277.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 587
SCAC The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC)
assigned to identify the carrier.
Pro number The Pro number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.
The pro number is used if a LTL carrier hauls the
shipment.
Table A–9 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, THIRD PARTY FREIGHT
CHARGES BILL TO
Fields
Name The third party to whom the charges are billed
to, if applicable.
Address The third party’s address.
City/State/ZIP The third party’s city, state, and zip code.
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS Special instructions associated with the carrier.
For example, appointment number, date and
delivery instructions.
Note: Only four underlying BOL numbers are
printed.
Freight Charge
Terms Indicates which third party is invoiced and is
responsible for payment of the freight invoice.
Prepaid The prepaid charges for the freight paid by the
shipper from origin to the consignee's dock.
Collect The charges collected for the freight from the
consignee from origin to the consignee's dock.
3rd Party The freight charges paid by the third party from
origin to the consignee's dock.
Master Bill of Lading Indicates if BOL is attached.
Table A–8 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields
![](asset-278.png)
588 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
Table A–10 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CUSTOMER ORDER
INFORMATION
Fields
CUSTOMER ORDER
NUMBER The number generated by the customer to
identify the order.
CUST# PKGS The number of individual packages or cartons on
the shipment that has quantity associated with
the customer order.
WEIGHT The weight associated with the CUST# PKGS.
PALLET Indicates if the product is palletized for the
customer order.
ADDITIONAL
SHIPPER INFO Any additional information, if any, associated
with the customer order.
GRAND TOTAL The grand total and weight across all customer
orders.
![](asset-279.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 589
Table A–11 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields
HANDLING UNIT
QTY The quantity associated with the type of
package being handled. This refers to the
pallet or carton being shipped.
TYPE The type of handling unit. For example, pallets
or cartons.
![](asset-27a.png)
590 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
A.4.2 VICS Bill Of Lading for Load
On selecting the "PrintLoadBOL" service, you can print the VICS BOL for
Load from the Outbound Shipment Console.
Table A–11 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields
PACKAGE
QTY The number of packages in the handling unit.
This refers to number of cartons in a pallet
(handling unit) or number of units in a carton
(handling unit).
TYPE The unit type associated with the package. For
example, cartons in a pallet or units (EACH) in
a carton.
WEIGHT The weight associated with the package
quantity.
H.M (X) Indicates if there is any hazardous material
(HM) in the package.
LTL ONLY
NMFC # The National Motor Freight Classification
(NMFC) number associated with the
commodity classification.
CLASS The freight class associated with the
commodity classification.
COD Amount The amount to be collected when shipment is
delivered, referred to as COD - Collect (Cash)
on Delivery.
Fee Terms The fee terms associated with the shipment.
For example, collect or prepaid.
Customer check
acceptable Indicates if checks are accepted for collect or
COD shipments.
![](asset-27b.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 591
For example, the default carrier copy of VICS BOL for Shipment label
format is as follows:
Table A–12 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields
Name The company that is shipping the product.
Address The shipper’s street address.
The BOL and SCAC/Pro
Bar Code number
Indicates that this copy
is maintained by the
carrier.
![](asset-27c.png)
592 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
City/State/ZIP The shipper’s city, state, and zip code.
SID# The shipment ID number applied by the shipper
to this load.
FOB Indicates the FOB freight term used for the
shipment.
Bill of Lading
Number The bill of lading number created by the shipper
to identify the load.
Table A–13 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields
Location # The location number assigned to the consignee’s
ship to address.
Name The company where the product has to be
shipped to.
Address The company’s address.
City/State/ZIP The company’s city, state, and zip code.
CID# The consignee ID number applied by the
consignee to this load.
FOB Indicates the FOB freight term used for the load.
CARRIER NAME The carrier picking up the load.
Trailer number The load’s trailer number.
The trailer number is used if the truckload carrier
hauls the load.
Seal numbers The load’s seal number.
The seal number is used if the load is full
truckloaded from the origin to destination.
Table A–12 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP FROM
Fields
![](asset-27d.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 593
SCAC The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC)
assigned to identify the carrier.
Pro number The Pro number assigned by the carrier to track
the shipment.
The pro number is used if an LTL carrier hauls
the load.
Table A–14 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, THIRD PARTY FREIGHT
CHARGES BILL TO
Fields
Name The third party to whom the charges are billed
to, if applicable.
Address The third party’s address.
City/State/ZIP The third party’s city, state, and zip code.
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS Special instructions associated with the carrier.
For example, appointment number, date and
delivery instructions.
Note: Only four underlying BOL numbers are
printed.
Freight Charge
Terms Indicates which third party is invoiced and is
responsible for payment of the freight invoice.
Prepaid The prepaid charges for the freight paid by the
shipper from origin to the consignee's dock.
Collect The charges collected for the freight from the
consignee from origin to the consignee's dock.
3rd Party The freight charges paid by the third party from
origin to the consignee's dock.
Master Bill of Lading Indicates if BOL is attached.
Table A–13 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, SHIP TO
Fields
![](asset-27e.png)
594 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
Table A–15 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CUSTOMER ORDER
INFORMATION
Fields
CUSTOMER ORDER
NUMBER The number generated by the customer to
identify the order.
CUST# PKGS The number of individual packages or cartons on
the shipment that has quantity associated with
the customer order.
WEIGHT The weight associated with the CUST# PKGS.
PALLET Indicates if the product is palletized for the
customer order.
ADDITIONAL
SHIPPER INFO Any additional information, if any, associated
with the customer order.
GRAND TOTAL The grand total and weight across all customer
orders.
![](asset-27f.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 595
Table A–16 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields
HANDLING UNIT
QTY The quantity associated with the type of
package being handled. This refers to the
pallet or carton being shipped.
TYPE The type of handling unit. For example, pallets
or cartons.
![](asset-280.png)
596 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
A.4.3 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
On selecting the "PrintShipmentBOL" service, you can print the VICS BOL
for Shipment from the Outbound Shipment Console.
Table A–16 VICS Bill Of Lading for Shipment, CARRIER INFORMATION
Fields
PACKAGE
QTY The number of packages in the handling unit.
This refers to number of cartons in a pallet
(handling unit) or number of units in a carton
(handling unit).
TYPE The unit type associated with the package. For
example, cartons in a pallet or units (EACH) in
a carton.
WEIGHT The weight associated with the package
quantity.
H.M (X) Indicates if there is any hazardous material
(HM) in the package.
LTL ONLY
NMFC # The National Motor Freight Classification
(NMFC) number associated with the
commodity classification.
CLASS The freight class associated with the
commodity classification.
COD Amount The amount to be collected when shipment is
delivered, referred to as COD - Collect (Cash)
on Delivery.
Fee Terms The fee terms associated with the shipment.
For example, collect or prepaid.
Customer check
acceptable Indicates if checks are accepted for collect or
COD shipments.
![](asset-281.png)
Bill Of Lading
Sterling WMS Prints 597
In addition to printing the Shipment or Load BOL, the Hazmat Bill of
Lading is always printed when shipping hazardous items. The Hazmat
BOL provides information about the hazardous materials being shipped.
The default Hazmat BOL label format is shown below:
Table A–17 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
Fields
Carrier The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC)
assigned to identify the carrier that is used to
ship the hazardous material.
Trailer The trailer number associated with the carrier.
Shipped The date on which the shipment was shipped.
BOL No The bill of lading number created by the shipper
to identify the shipment or load.
![](asset-282.png)
598 User Guide
Bill Of Lading
PRO No The PRO number assigned by the carrier to track
the load.
The PRO number is used if an LTL carrier hauls
the load.
From The address the shipment or load is shipped
from.
Ship To The address the shipment or load is shipped to.
Pcs The total number of containers that contains the
hazardous material.
Pkg Indicates the carton type.
HM Indicates that the material packaged into the
container is a hazardous material (HM).
Description A brief description of the hazardous material
information, such as the proper shipping name,
hazard class, identification number, packing
group, and label code.
Qty and UnitVol The item’s unit of measure.
Class The item’s hazardous material class.
Weight The total weight of the containers that contain
the hazardous material.
Total Pieces The total number of containers.
Total Weight The total weight of all containers.
For Emergency Contact
The shipper’s contact details for you to contact in case of any
emergency.
Shipper Signature The shipper’s signature.
Date The date on which the shipper signed the
document.
Table A–17 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
Fields
![](asset-283.png)
LTL Manifest Label
Sterling WMS Prints 599
A.5 LTL Manifest Label
On selecting the "PrintLTLManifest" service, you can print the manifest
label for LTLs from the Manifest Console.
The default LTL Manifest label format is shown below:
Driver Signature The driver’s signature.
Date The date on which the driver signed the
document.
Note: If a single carrier provides both LTL and Parcel
services, create two different organizations to separately
handle LTL and Parcel services.
Table A–17 Hazmat Bill Of Lading
Fields
![](asset-284.png)
600 User Guide
LTL Manifest Label
Table A–18 LTL Manifest
Fields
Manifest # The manifest number associated with the LTL.
Carrier The carrier (such as UPS, and FedEx) picking up
the LTL.
Manifest Date The date on which the manifest was created.
Trailer # The trailer number associated with the LTL
manifest.
Shipping Warehouse The address from which the LTL manifest is
shipped to.
BOL # The BOL number associated with the load.
![](asset-285.png)
LTL Manifest Label
Sterling WMS Prints 601
A.5.1 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials
In addition to printing the LTL Manifest label, when a manifest has
hazardous items, a shipper’s certification is also required where the
shipper provides information about all the hazardous materials being
shipped.
When you print the LTL Manifest label, the Sterling WMS also provides
the ability to print the Shipper’s Certification if the manifest contains
hazardous materials. The default Shipper's Certification For Hazardous
Materials label format is shown below:
PRO # The PRO number associated with the load.
Customer The customer name to whom the package is
shipped to.
Address The customer’s address where the package is to
be shipped.
Total Weight The total weight of all packages.
# of Cartons The total number of cartons shipped to the
customer.
# of Pallets The total number of pallets shipped to the
customer.
TOTAL The total weight of the packages, cartons and
pallets associated with LTL manifest.
Table A–18 LTL Manifest
Fields
![](asset-286.png)
602 User Guide
LTL Manifest Label
Table A–19 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials
Fields
EMERGENCY CONTACT PHONE NUMBER
The shipper’s contact details for you to contact in case of any
emergency.
FROM The address the manifest is shipped from.
DESCRIPTION OF
MATERIAL The proper shipping name of the hazardous
material.
HAZARD CLASS The item’s hazard class.
PACKING GROUP Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous
item within its hazard class or division, and the
type of packaging required for the item. The
valid values are: Packing Group I - high danger,
Packing Group II - medium danger, Packing
Group III - Low danger.
![](asset-287.png)
FedEx Carrier Label
Sterling WMS Prints 603
A.6 FedEx Carrier Label
The FedEx Carrier Label is a container label shipped by the FedEx carrier.
The FedEx Carrier Label is printed when the container is manifested for
FedEx carrier.
For International FedEx shipments, the FedEx server automatically prints
international shipment specific labels and commercial invoice.
The Sterling WMS automatically prints the FedEx Carrier Label after
adding a container to the manifest.
Using the Sterling WMS, you can print:
I.D. NO The four-digit number that identifies hazardous
items (such as explosives and poisonous
materials) of commercial importance.
This numbering scheme is widely used in
international commerce. For instance, to label
the contents of the shipping containers.
DOT LABEL CODE Indicates the label code of the hazardous item.
WT. /VOL The item’s unit of measure.
PRO # The PRO number associated with the load.
RECEIVER’S NAME
DESTINATION -
CITY
The receiver’s name, address, and city where the
package is shipped.
STATE The state to where the package is shipped.
Shipper’s Signature The shipper’s signature.
Date The date on which the shipper signed the
document.
Important: To print FedEx Carrier Label, ensure to set
the Eltron printer as the default printer.
Table A–19 Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous Materials
Fields
![](asset-288.png)
604 User Guide
FedEx Carrier Label
QFedEx Shipping Label
QFedEx Return Shipping Label
A.6.1 FedEx Shipping Label
The FedEx Shipping Label format may be different for different services.
For more information about defining label formats, see the Selling and
Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration Guide.
The FedEx Shipping Label format for FedEx Express is shown below:
![](asset-289.png)
FedEx Carrier Label
Sterling WMS Prints 605
Table A–20 FedEx Shipping Label
Field
SHIP DATE The date on which the container should be
shipped.
ACTUAL WGT The actual weight of the container.
TO The ship to address.
Shipper’s
Address
The date on which
the container
has to be delivered
The ship to
country’s
zip code,
The FedEx
revenue bar code
Delivery
Address
bar code
The tracking
number bar code
The recipient’s
phone number
state, and
country
![](asset-28a.png)
606 User Guide
FedEx Carrier Label
A.6.2 FedEx Return Shipping Label
The FedEx Return Shipping Label format may be different for different
services. For more information about defining label formats, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Application Platform Configuration
Guide.
The following is the default FedEx Return Shipping Label format for
FedEx Ground:
REF The container’s shipment reference number.
TRK# The tracking number assigned to the container to
track the container’s status and location.
Table A–20 FedEx Shipping Label
Field
![](asset-28b.png)
FedEx Carrier Label
Sterling WMS Prints 607
Shipper’s
Address
Tracking
Delivery
Address
Delivery
Address
bar code
Number
![](asset-28c.png)
608 User Guide
Count Sheet
A.7 Reprint Carrier Label
On selecting the Reprint Carrier Label service for FedEx and UPS carriers
you can reprint a carrier label from the Container List and Container
Details screens.
A.8 Count Sheet
A count sheet displays all locations and items that are to be included for
the cycle count. On selecting the "PrintTaskList" service, you can print
the Count Sheet from the Batch Console for batches associated with the
"Count" activity group.
Table A–21 FedEx Return Shipping Label (FedEx Ground)
Field
From The address from where the shipment is shipped.
Delivery Address The address to where the shipment needs to be
shipped.
RETURN MGR The tracking number assigned to the container to
track the status and location of the container.
![](asset-28d.png)
Count Sheet
Sterling WMS Prints 609
![](asset-28e.png)
610 User Guide
Wave Release
A.9 Wave Release
During the Wave Release process, the Sterling WMS prints the following
documents:
QBatch sheets (Task List) for each batch in the wave. For more
information about batch sheets, see Section A.3, "Task List".
QUCC-128 Container Shipping labels for each container in the batch.
For more information about container shipping labels, see
Section A.2, "UCC-128 Container Shipping Label".
QPacking Slip for each shipment in the wave. Initially, the packing slip
prints to a file and later sent to the printer after packing all
containers. For more information packing slip, see Section A.1,
"Packing Slip".
On selecting the "PrintWave" service, you can print the Wave Release
document from the Wave Console.
By customizing prints, you can print additional documents as a part of
Wave Release. For more information about customizing prints, see the
Selling and Fulfillment Foundation: Integration Guide.
Table A–22 Count Sheet
Fields
Batch # The batch number associated with the cycle
count.
WHSE The warehouse where the count tasks were
performed.
Counted By The user who performed the count.
Location The location where the items were counted.
Item The items that were counted.
Product Class The item’s product class.
Count Qty Enter the item quantity counted at the location.
Checked By The user who inspected the items.
Confirmed By The user who confirmed the task.
![](asset-28f.png)
Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels
Sterling WMS Prints 611
A.10 Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels
The Hazmat SKU labels are applied on hazardous items.
On selecting the "PrintHazmatSKULabel" service, you can print the
Hazmat SKU label. For more information about printing the SKU labels,
see Section 4.14, "Printing Stock Keeping Unit Labels".
The default Hazmat SKU label format is shown below:
Table A–23 Hazmat SKU Labels
Fields
DOT SHIPPING
NAME The proper shipping name.
ITEM The item identifier.
HAZARD CLASS The item’s hazard class.
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER The four-digit number that identifies the
hazardous items (such as explosives and
poisonous materials) of commercial importance.
This is widely used in international commerce.
For example, the contents packaged in the
shipping containers.
![](asset-290.png)
612 User Guide
Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels
PACKING GROUP Indicates the degree of danger of a hazardous
item within its hazard class or division and the
type of packaging required for the item. The
valid values are: Packing Group I - high danger,
Packing Group II - medium danger, Packing
Group III - Low danger.
DOT LABEL CODE Indicates the label code of the hazardous item.
Note: Hazmat SKU labels are printed on 2" X 4" sheet.
Table A–23 Hazmat SKU Labels
Fields
![](asset-291.png)
Understanding the Execution Console Framework 613
B
Understanding the Execution Console
Framework
The Execution Console Framework in the Sterling WMS supports the
execution of high-speed data entry oriented transactions. The framework
presents execution specific functionality through web-based consoles.
The transactions are designed to be performed using only the keyboard
and a wedge scanner.
You can capture data on to the screen by typing it using a keyboard and
pressing the Tab key, or by scanning the barcode using a wedge scanner.
The features of Execution Console Framework include:
QTab Ordering
QAutomatic Pop-Ups for Additional Data Capture
QHot Keys
QField Level Validations
QPopulating Fields
QBarcode Handling Capabilities
Note: You CANNOT extend the Execution Console
Framework screens.
![](asset-292.png)
614 User Guide
Populating Fields
B.1 Tab Ordering
When scanning data the related values are populated in the current field
and the cursor is redirected to the next appropriate field for scanning.
The next appropriate field to be scanned is determined by the system
based on the process you are following.
B.2 Automatic Pop-Ups for Additional Data
Capture Certain data values are dynamically requested by the system based on
item properties. These values include the serial number for serial-tracked
items or for items that require outbound tracking by serial number. Tag
controlled items in inventory also require tag values to be specified.
B.3 Hot Keys
Hot keys are keyboard shortcuts to help you work more efficiently. For
example, the hotkey sequence for Save is Alt+A and for Reset it is
Alt-R.
B.4 Field Level Validations
Data is validated at an individual field level against the form level.
Information based fields like notes are not validated. Errors are reported
during scanning or manual entry, after pressing the Tab key.
B.5 Populating Fields
Scanning a barcode or identifier populates related fields in the console.
For example, shipment and container attributes (including item and
carrier, if applicable) are automatically populated when you scan a
shipment or container in the pack station. Another common example is
the item description being automatically populated when any barcode
identifying the item is scanned.
The web-based consoles supported by the Execution Framework include:
QReceive Purchase Order
QReceive Return Order
![](asset-293.png)
Barcode Handling Capabilities
Understanding the Execution Console Framework 615
QVAS Station
QPack Station
QManifest Station
B.6 Barcode Handling Capabilities
Field level validation for Mobile Terminal use includes the ability to
translate barcode information and transfer it to the appropriate data
field. Fields are tied into Bar Code Types that are used to validate against
the appropriate sources. For example, a location field validates against
the Location ID and a unique barcode. An item field can have the Item
ID, UPC Code, LPN, or UPC Case Code scanned.
For more information about bar code types, see the Sterling Warehouse
Management System: Configuration Guide.
![](asset-294.png)
616 User Guide
Barcode Handling Capabilities
![](asset-295.png)
617
Index
A
Accept Variance action. See also Managing
Count Requests, 227
Accept Wave action,432
Activity Code field, 200
Activity Date field, 502
activity demand, 387
Activity field, 472
Activity Instructions, 354
Actual Weight field, 475, 481
Add To Manifest action. See also Adding
Containers To a Manifest.
Additional Item Details action, 329, 341
addresses, 376
Adjust Cost action, 306
Adjust Location Inventory, 303
Adjust Receipt action,179
Adjusting Inventory,36
Existing Product,36
New Product,36
adjusting the quantity, 532
Adjustment Cost Details, 307
Adjustment Type field,491
Aisle field, 512
Alert ID field, 262
alerts
creating,399
shipments, 384
All Shipments field, 565
All Tasks field,566
Allocated Capacity field, 561, 563
Allocated Demand field, 295
Allow Overage action, 428
Allow Receipt of Unexpected Items on
Shipment field, 195
Appointment Type field, 166, 421
appointments
planning, 349
assign a task to a user, 519
Assign Shift field, 562
Assigned field,563
Assigned To User ID field,513
At Address field, 464
At Node field, 464
At Shipment Destination field, 464
At Shipment Origin field, 464
Audit Information,495
Audit Type field, 486, 492
audits, 381
Automatically populating field values, 614
B
Backlog field, 565
barcode translation,615
batch search
screen,523
Batch # field, 513, 529
Bill Of Lading
definition, 583
Break LPN, 300
Break LPN action, 279
Buyer field, 564
![](asset-296.png)
618 User Guide
C
Cancel
Count Request,32
cancel a task
screen, 521
Cancel action, 225
Cancel wave
screen, 432
Capacity Organization field, 556, 557
Capturing item’s expiration date, 202
Capturing item’s serial number, 200
Capturing item’s tag number, 202
Carrier Service Code field, 463
Carrier Sort Lane field, 371
Carrier/Service field, 481
Cart Manifest Task List
definition, 581
Case Content Verification Not Required
field, 387
Case Type field, 433
Catalog Organization field, 319
Change Inventory Attributes action, 278
Changing Inventory Attributes,37
Across Locations,38
charges,377
Checked By field, 583
CID# field, 586
Close Case action, 197
Close Pallet action, 197
Close Prereceipt action, 178
COD Amount field,590
Collect field, 587
Comment field, 426
Complete Batch,530
Complete quantity field, 434
Completed Tasks field, 500
Completed Work Orders field, 436
Component Items, 354
Computed Weight field,480
Confirm Batch., 529
Confirmed By field, 583
Confirming Activities Performed for the Work
Order,44
Consider Pending Task field,558
container
viewing details,82
Container barcode type, 472
container routing, 482
Container SCM field, 474
containers, 379
packing, 392, 396
recording weight,83
unpacking, 163
COO (Country Of Origin), 184
Copy Capacity field, 556
Count, 221
putting an item category on count,31
putting an item classification on count,32
putting an item on count,31
record count results, 533
Count Accuracy field, 227
Count Iteration field, 228, 240
Count Quantity field,230
Count Request, 215
count request
searching,221
Count Request for Location Range,218
Count Request Search By Location
Range, 224
Count Requests
managing,32
count result
searching,237
Count Sheet, 569
Count sheet
definition, 608
Count Task
Assign Count Tasks to a User,33
Cancel Count Task,33
Complete,34
Put a Count Task on Hold,34
Put Count Tasks on Hold,33
putting a count task on hold,33
Release a Count Task Put on Hold,34
Release Count Tasks Put on Hold,33
releasing a count task put on hold,33
reporting completion,34
Reprioritize Count Tasks,33
View Count Task Details, 33, 34
![](asset-297.png)
619
Count Tasks
managing,33
country of origin. See COO
Create, 443, 463
Create Count Request,215
creating,232
Create Count Request action, 228
Create Count Request action. See also
Managing Count,279
Create Count Request button., 217
Create Load,463
Create Move Request, 35, 209
Create move request, 209
Create Move Requests action. See also
Managing Inventory,279
Create New field, 555
create outbound shipments, 427
Create Wave button,443
Create Work Order, 325
Credited Time field, 539
Current Resource Pool field, 562
Currently Chosen Appointment Slot field, 349
Cust Item No field, 573
Customer check acceptable field, 590
CUST# PKGS field, 588
D
Date field, 563
dates, 383
Date/Time field, 426
Days of the Week field, 560
Days of the week field, 566
Dedicated Location field, 284
Dedications action, 284
Delay Window field, 349
Delete action, 330, 471
Delete field,555
delivery dates, 361
demand details
viewing,93
Demand field, 560, 561
Demand Location Id field, 268
Demand Quantity field, 268
Demand Satisfied field,268
Dependency Hold field, 518
display task summary details
screen,516
display tasks to be completed within a specific
time frame
screen,498
Disposition Qty field, 207
Do not verify Case Content field, 195
Do not verify Pallet Content field, 195
Dock Appointment Scheduling
managing docks, 167, 423
searching for an appointment, 163, 419
taking a new appointment, 165, 421
viewing dock schedule details, 164, 420
dock appointments
additional constraints
adding,90
canceling,90
constraints
removing,91
modifying,89
scheduling,88
searching,88
dock schedule
details
viewing,88
Document Type field, 193, 564
E
Effective End Date field, 557
Effective Start Date field,557
Effort (Hrs) field,500
End Time Stamp field,354
enter the criteria for the search
screen,497
entering the modification reasons, 26, 324
Enterprise, 303, 309, 310, 317
Enterprise field, 497, 564
environment variable
INSTALL_DIR,xli
INSTALL_DIR_OLD, xlii
Estimate End Time field, 167, 423
Estimated Cases field, 433
Estimated End Time field, 501
![](asset-298.png)
620 User Guide
Estimated Start Time field,501
Exception Hold field, 518
Excess Capacity field, 561
Excess field, 561
Execution Console Framework,613
hot keys, 614
Execution Status field,371
F
FedEx Carrier label
definition, 603
FIFO # field,305
Fill Code field, 285
Finish No Later Than field, 513, 530
FOB field, 586
For Activity Code field, 251
FOR field, 575
For Shipments with Requested Ship Date
field, 566
Freeze Move In field, 284, 286
Freeze Move Out field, 284, 286
Freeze On Variance field,285
Freight Charge Terms field, 587
FRIEGHT TERMS field,572
From Activity Code field, 267
From Activity Group field,267
From Location/ From LPN field, 581
G
Global Trade Item Number. See GTIN
GTIN (Global Trade Item Number), 288
H
HANDLING UNIT fields, 589
Has Exceptions field, 252
Has Hazardous Item(s) field,111
Has Shortage field, 371
Hazard Class field, 602
HAZMAT BOL
definition, 597
Hazmat SKU Labels
definition, 611
Hazmat Stock Keeping Unit Labels, 569
Held Shipments With Hold Type field, 565
High Date, 565
H.M (X) field, 590
Hold Reason Code field, 518
Hold Reason task search field, 507
Hold Reason Text field, 518
Hold Transaction field, 348, 426
Hold Type field, 347
Hold Type marker,426
Holds
viewing, 424
holds
adding, 347
I
I.D. No field,603
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER field, 40, 611
Ignore Run Quantity field, 326
In Progress quantity field, 434
In Staging Location field, 284
inbound shipments
creating, 193
Infinite Capacity field,285
Inspect action, 180
Inspect Return Receipt, 205
INSTALL_DIR,xli
INSTALL_DIR_OLD, xlii
Instructions, 471
Inv Upd Activity field,344
Inventory Age (days) field, 275
Inventory Audit Trail,30
Inventory Status field, 305, 531
Inventory View action, 178
Is Infinite Demand field, 200, 267
Is Outbound Container field, 296
Item Classification task list field, 510
Item Classification task search field, 504
Item ID field, 319
Item Pick Task List
definition, 579
![](asset-299.png)
621
L
Last But One Variance Quantity field, 231
Last Variance Quantity field, 231
Latest summary Task field,238
load
creating,85
holds
adding,86
shipments
adding,87
loads, 378
Location Inventory
searching, 271
Location Inventory Audit
searching, 485
Location Size Code field, 285
Location SKU Dedications, 286
Logged In field, 502
logical kits, 390
See Also kit components
Lot Key Reference field,291
LTL manifest document
definition, 599
M
Manage Dock Group field, 164, 420
Managing Count Requests,32
managing count tasks,33
Manifest
carrier service summary, 459
closing manifests, 461
opening manifests, 460
printing manifest, 460
remove packed containers screen. See also
removing containers from a
manifest, 473
manifest
closing,83
containers
adding,74
removing,82
searching, 455
manifest status field,455
Manifest # field, 470, 474, 541
mark a batch as completed
screen,526
mark a task as completed
screen,513
MARK FOR field, 576
Mark For field, 572
Master Bill of Lading field,587
Master Catalog ID field, 319
Max Records,487
Measure field, 560, 565
Modified On field, 519
Most Recent Task field,502
Move field,566
Move Request, 251
alerts,262
move request
searching,251
Move Request Line
Activity Demand,266
Multiple SKU containers label
definition, 576
N
Name field, 499
Net Variance Quantity field, 228
Net Variance Value field, 228
New Disposition field,207
New Status field, 519
NMFC #, 596
NMFC # field,590
No. of Source Aisles Visited field, 539
No. of Source Location Visited field, 540
No. of Target Aisles Visited field, 540
No. of Target Location Visited field, 540
Node field, 497, 502, 557, 558, 564
Node Level Inventory, 293
Node Level Inventory action, 278
nodes,399
Number of Days To Display field, 163, 419
O
Old Status field, 519
![](asset-29a.png)
622 User Guide
On Hand Quantity field, 283
Only Logged In Users user search field, 520
Only Planned Shipments field, 565
Only Unassigned Tasks task search field, 503
Only Unplanned Shipments field, 565
Open Manifest action, 457
Open Tasks field, 500, 501
Order Available On System field,387
Order Type field, 565
organizations,400
Out Staging Location field,284
outbound shipments
creating,50
holds
adding,52
modifying,51
Outer Most Case ID field, 296
Over Ship Quantity field, 374
Overage Allowed field, 387
overages,195
Override Shifts field, 562
Override Shipment Entry field, 195
P
Pack And Hold flag, 371
Pack and Hold Only field, 565
Pack Container action, 392
Packed Quantity field, 371, 472
packing
adding items,68
removing inner packs,71
removing items,70
system-suggested containers, 57, 62
unknown contents,61
user-defined containers,58
packing adding inner packs,71
Packing Group field, 602
Packing Slip, 569
definition, 570
Pallet ID field, 226
Parent Task ID field,517
Partially Manifested Loads field, 458
Partially Manifested Shipments field, 458
Past Due field, 500
PC (Product Class),189
Pend In Quantity field, 281
Pend Out Quantity field,281
Pending Work Orders field, 436
Performing VAS activities, 351
Pick Tasks field, 566
Picked By field, 583
Pipeline ID field, 226
Planned Capacity field, 561, 563
plans
selecting, 401
POD # field, 464
Pool Name field, 561
Predecessor Task task list field, 510
Prepaid field,587
Primary Reference task list field, 510
Prime Line # field, 541
printing,396
printing SKU labels,39
Priority task list field,510
Pro number field, 587
Product Class field, 319
product class. See PC
Product No field, 573
productivity, 535
searching,537
Productivity Type field,538
Promised Demand field, 295
Pull Resources field, 561
put an item classification on count,32
put an item on count,31
putting a task on hold
screen,521
Q
Qty and UnitVol field,598
Qty Completed field, 353
Qty Per Kit field, 343
Qty Remaining field, 353
Qty To Process field, 353
Quantity After Adjustment field,308
Quantity field, 472, 515, 527, 531
Queue field, 263
queues, 137
![](asset-29b.png)
623
R
Reason Code field, 519, 532
Reason Text field, 519, 532
Receipt, 305
receipt
searching, 173
Receipt Adjustment
entering receipt adjustment criteria, 321
validating receipt adjustment criteria, 25,
322
Receive action, 178
Receive Details console, 197
Receive Inventory
build cases or pallets,17
expected containers,17
paper-based
adjusting a receipt,25
build cases or pallets,22
expected containers,21
receiving excess,23
receive loose items,18
receiving excess,18
Receiving Dock field,179
Record Count,533
Reference, 496
Release action, 257, 432
Release From ESP Hold action, 370
Release Wave
screen, 431
Released Quantity field,261
releases
adding, 403
Remove From Manifest action, 473
Removing shipments from wave, 367
Reprint Carrier Label, 569, 608
reprioritize a task
screen, 521
Request Type field, 221
Requested Delivery Date field, 565
Requested Quantity field, 260
Requesting User ID, 217
Reset action, 351
resource demands
searching,94
shipments
moving,94
Resource field, 562
Resource Pool Description field, 556, 557
Resource Pool field, 560, 563
resource pools
assigning shifts,93
capacity details
viewing,92
resources
moving,93
standard capacity
defining,92
Routing Error Code field, 372
S
SAM (Standard Allowable Minutes),539
Satisfied Quantity field, 268
Save action, 351, 469
SCAC (Standard Carrier Alpha Code),587
Scan field,352
Scan Identifier field, 470
Scheduled End Time field, 501
Scheduled Start Time field, 501
Search History task search field, 503
Segment field, 230
Segment Type field, 182, 230
serial number
capturing,81
serial shipping container code. See SSCC
Service field, 565
Service Item Group field, 326, 336, 352
Service Item ID field, 326, 336
Shift field, 563
Ship By Date,306
Ship By Date field, 230
Ship Mode field,564
Ship Tasks field, 566
SHIP TO POST field, 575
Shipment, 496
Shipment Audits, 132
shipment audits, 389
shipment dates, 361
Shipment Sort Lane field, 371
![](asset-29c.png)
624 User Guide
shipments, 193, 368
cancelling,396
creating,427
deleting, 367
modifying,375
outbound, 359
searching, 359
splitting, 397
splitting lines,399
supervisory overrides, 428
Shipper’s Certification For Hazardous
Materials, 601
shipper’s certification for shipping hazardous
materials, 601
Short Description field, 319
Shortage field, 561
Show Demand and Capacity Data in field,558
Show Hierarchy task search field, 503
Show Only Overridden Resources field,567
Show Only task search field, 503, 504, 505
SID# field, 586, 592
Slot No field, 578
Sort Sequence field,512
Source Case Id, 516, 531
Source Location task search field, 503
Source Pallet Id, 531
Source Pallet Id field, 515
Source Zone task search field, 503
Special Service Surcharge field, 471, 475
Special Services, 481
special services, 375
SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code),576
standard allowable minutes. See SAM
Standard Capacity field,560
Standard Carrier Alpha Code. See SCAC
Standard Rate field, 500
Start Date field, 558
Start No Earlier Than field, 498, 513, 530
Start Task After task search field, 504, 507
Start Time Stamp field, 354
Status field, 426, 565
Storage Code field, 284
Sub Line # field, 541
Supervisor ID field, 556, 557
supervisory overrides, 428
Supervisory Overrides action, 193, 427
Suppress Overage Check field, 195
T
Target Location task search field,503
Target Pallet Id, 516, 532
Target Resource Pool field, 562
Target Zone task search field, 503
Task
searching,497
Task ID field,510
Task List, 569, 579
definition, 579
task list screen, 509
task search
by risk,508
task search by date
screen,507
task search by exception
screen,506
task search by inventory
screen,503
task search by reference
screen,505
task search by zone
screen,502
Task Status task list field, 510
Task Summary field,499
Task Type field, 499, 501
Tasks With All Following Holds field,507
To field,565
Today’s Demand Details field, 563
Total field,565
Total Hours field,562
TRACKING field, 575
Trailer # field, 540
U
UCC-128 container label
definition, 574
UCC-128 Container Shipping Label,569
UCC-128 container shipping label
definition, 573
![](asset-29d.png)
625
unit of measure, 143
unit of measurement. See UOM
UnReceive Quantity field, 324
UOM field, 319
UOM (Unit Of Measure), 352, 530
User ID field, 426, 502
User Name field, 502
User Time Sheet
user
searching, 549
V
Variance Type field, 232
Variance Value field, 239
VAS
work order
creating,42
VAS Station
Performing Value-Added Services
operations. See Also Confirming
Activities Performed for the Work
Order, 351
Velocity Code field, 284
VICS Bill Of Lading, 569
VICS BOL for load
definition, 590
VICS BOL for shipment
definition, 584, 596
View
Count Request Details,32
View All Lines action,257
View Audit action, 228
view batch details
screen, 525
View Contents action, 473
View Contents action. See also Viewing the
Container’s Contents.
View Details action,224
View Details field, 559
View Lines With Exceptions action,257
View Move Request action, 339
View Standard Capacity field,555
view task summaries by zone
screen, 501
View Task Summary action, 432
view task summary details
screen,511
View Tasks action, 339
view the results of a task batch search
screen,524
view the status audit trail of a task, 519
view the status of a task on hold
screen,518
view the tasks assigned to a user
screen,521
viewing a list of available users, 502
viewing an open task summary
breakdown, 501
Viewing Hold History, 347
W
Wave, 432
Wave Date field, 541
Wave Release, 569
definition, 610
Wave Summary
screen,432
Wave # field, 371
Waves
canceling,432
release, 431
searching,429
waves, 364
accepting,54
canceling,54
creating, 53, 403
releasing,54
viewing batch summary,435
Weigh action. See also Recording the
Container’s Weight
Weigh Station
converting inventory container into an
outbound container,85
recording container’s weight,480
WHSE field, 580
Work Order
searching, 244, 333
Work Order Cancellation, 348
![](asset-29e.png)
626 User Guide
Z
Zone field, 501
# Batches field, 500
# Logged In / Available Users field, 500
# of count results field, 227
# of Days field, 558
# Of Items In Variance field, 228
# Of Locations In Variance field, 228
# Of Tasks At Risk Of Delay field, 501
# Of Tasks Originating Here field,501
# Of Tasks Terminating Here field,501
# Of Users Logged In Performing This Task
field, 501
# of variances field, 227
# Shipments in Wave # 1 field, 435
# Tasks At Risk Of Delay field, 500
$ Value field, 564